THE STENOGRAPHER'S AND CORRESPONDENT'S HANDBOOK A REFERENCE WORK ON STENOGRAPHIC AND TYPEWRITING METHODS, BUSINESS CORRE- SPONDENCE, DICTION, MODERN OFFICE PRACTICE, POSTAL INFORMATION, AND ALLIED SUBJECTS BY . > INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE SCHOOLS 1st Edition, llth Thousand, 2d Impression SCRANTON, PA. INTERNATIONAL TEXTBOOK COMPANY COPYRIGHT, 1910, BY INTERNATIONAL TEXTBOOK COMPANY ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL, LONDON ALL RIGHTS RESERVED PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES 2117C PREFACE The time spent in preparing for a stenographic career is usually so short that the stenographer, if ambitious to advance, should strive continually to increase his store of useful knowledge, giving special attention to those subjects that relate directly to his work. This Handbook gives much information of value to stenographers, and should spur the reader to undertake compre- hensive courses of study on various business subjects. The demand for the expert correspondent is constantly increasing, and as the ambitious stenographer has an unusual opportunity to qualify himself as a correspondent, a large sec- tion is devoted to modern business letter writing. The publishers acknowledge, with their thanks, the permission of The Phonographic Magazine, the Business Educator, and the Selling Magazine to reprint some extracts from the writings of S. Roland Hall, under whose supervision this handbook is prepared. INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE SCHOOLS January 1, 1910 SCR ANTON, PA. 255083 INDEX Abbreviations, 221. Additions and enclosures in foreign mail, 278. Address on letter, how ar- ranged, 210-211. on letter sheet, 204. Addressing of envelopes, 236. Advertising terms, 33. Affidavit, 352. All-finger system of type- writing, 198. Alphabetical list of ar- ticles in domestic mails, 254. Apostrophe, Use of, 98. Application, Letters of, How to write, 8. Architectural terms, 36. Argument in letter wri- ting, 162. Arithmetic, 400. Assignments, 352. Automobile terms, 41. Backing, 234. Balance, how secured, 204. Bank discount, 407. draft, 387. loans, 398. statement, Form for, 336. Banking, Hints on, 393. terms,- 77. Bargain offer, Value of, 173. Beginners, Advice to, 1. Beginning of letter, How to make interesting, 163. Ben Franklin method of improving in compo- sition, 141. Bill of fare, Form for, 338. of sale, 365. Billing, Form for type- written, 295. Bills of exchange, 358. Bond, 355. Bookkeeping, Value of knowledge of, 14. Book typewriter and type- writing, 292-293. Brokerage terms, 77. Building terms, 36. Business correspondence, 141. phonograph system, 330. terms, 43. C Cables, 245. Calendar for 200 years. 241. Canadian mails, 272. Canal Zone stamps, 286. Capitalization, 99. Carbon copying, 289. Card systems, 310. Cards, Typewriting on, 201. Carpentry terms, 36. Certificate of deposit, 396. Certified check, 387-396. Charges for shorthand and typewriting work, 332. Chattel mortgage, 356. Checks and drafts, 386. How to draw, 394. Indorsements on, 394. C. I. F., Quoting, 190. Civil service examinations and positions, 376- 385. vi INDEX Clauses, modifying, Excess of, in letters, 146. Clearness, How to attain, 144. Closing phrases of letters, 156. Coins, Value of foreign, 421. Collecting letter, How to write a, 183. Collection of negotiable paper, 397. Colon, Use of, 94. Comma, Use of, 88. Commercial paper, Forms for, 356. papers in foreign mail, 276. terms, 43. Complaint, How to settle a, 179. Composition, Correct and faulty, 101. How to improve in, 138. Compound interest, 403. interest tables, 404-405. Compounding of words, 216. Confidence, Value of, in letter writing, 167. Contract and agreement, 358. Conversational style in let- ter writing, 150. Cooking terms of foreign extraction, 87. Copying machine, 297. Methods of, 289. Correct and faulty diction, 101. Correspondence, Business, 141. Correspondent, How to become a, 13. Correspondents, Miscella- neous suggestions to, 191. Court-reporter appoint- ments, 367. reporting, 366. Courtesy in correspond- ence, 157. Cuban mail, 272. Culinary terms, 87. Customs duties on parcels- post packages, 283. regulations, Importance of regarding, 191. D Dash, Use of, 96. Date, Method of writing, 210. Department-store type- written bills, 295. Dictated matter, Editing of, 27. Use of word, on form letters, 172. Dictating in speed prac- tice, Methods of, 22. Dictation, Business-office, 30. Diction, Correct and faulty (arranged alphabetic- ally), 101. Direct-command idea in letter writing, 168. Discount, 407. Distances and time by postal route, 287. Division of words, 215. Domestic mail, 249. mail, Classified list of, 254. Draft on bank, 387. Drafts on slow debtors, 186. Drop letters, 285. Duplicating and triplica- ting, 292. work, 347. Duty on parcels-post pack- ages, 283. E Editing of dictated matter, 27. Electrical terms, 46. Employment bureaus, 5. contract, 359. How to find, 5. Enclosures in foreign mail, 278. INDEX English, Correct and faulty, 101. Engraving terms, 3. Envelopes, Addressing of, 236. Esquire, Use of, 153. Exchange, 396. Bills of, 358. Exclamation point, Use of, 96. Experience, How stenog- rapher can get, 2. Express money orders, 387. Expressage, 247. Extravagance in letter writing, 151. Faulty diction, 101. File for follow-up corre- spondence, 305. Filing, 297. by Shannon method, 307. by vertical method, 297. in flat files, 309. Files, Organization and care of, 325. Financial terms, 77. Fingering of typewriter keyboard, 199. Fire-insurance terms, 51. Firm, Addressing, instead of individual, 160. First-class mail, 249. Flat files, 309. Folders, Filing, 298. Folding, 232. Follow-up card file, 317. -up correspondence, File for, 305. -up systems of letters, 171-172-173. Foreign coins, Value of, 421. correspondence, 188. languages, Value of, 189. postage rates, 273. words and phrases com- monly used, 80. Forgery, 399. Form and style in type- writing, 203. letters, Use of, 171. paragraphs, Use of, 191. Forms for letters, Exam- ples of good, 202-209. for typewritten docu- ments, 336-346. Forwarding of mail, Rules about, 265. Fourth-class mail, 253. Franklin method of im- proving in composi- tion, 141. G ;raphical indexing, Government printed en- velopes, 286. Grammar, Alphabetical list of errors in, 101. Guide cards, 311. H Hackneyed style in letter writing, 149. Honorable, Use of, 153. Hyphen, Use of, 97. Identification of persons presenting checks, 398. Incorporation articles, Forms for, 342. Indention, Question of, 212. Indexing files, Methods of, 299. Individuality in letter writing, 148. Indorsements on checks, 394. Inquiring letter, 159. Inquiry, How to reply to an, 176. Insurance terms, 51-61-63. Interest, Method of com- puting, 400. INDEX Interrogation point, Use of, 95. Investment terms, 77. Joint-and -several note, 357. Judgment notes, 357. K Keyboard, diagram show- ing fingering, 199. Ladies, Use of word in salutation, 155. Landlord's notice to leave, 360. Languages, foreign, Value of, 189. Law forms, 352. paper backing, 236. papers, Forms for type- writing, 344-345. Lease, Form for, 361. Legal cap, how folded, 233. papers, Forms for, 344- 345. phrases 52. terms (English), 58. terms of foreign extrac- tion, 83. Length of letters, Question of, 143. Letter, collecting, How to write, 183. forms, Examples of good, 202-209. of credit, 391. sales or soliciting, How to write, 183. Letters, business, General requirements of, 141. by telegraph, 246. Foreign, 188. General suggestions to correspondents, 194. How to fold, 232. How to refer, 193. in foreign mail, 274. Letters, of application, How to write, 8. of application, Models of, 11-12. Ordering or inquiring, 159. Question of length of, 143. Life-insurance terms, 61. List showing classification of various kinds of domestic mail, 254. Lists of names, Postmaster not allowed to fur- nish, 285. Logic in letter writing, 162. Loose-leaf records, 320. M Madam, Use of, 153. Mail-distributing depart- ment, Value of, 331. domestic, 249. First-class, 249. Foreign, 271. Fourth-class, 253. matter, Wrapping of, 268. Rule about return of, 266. Rules about forwarding, 265. Second-class, 250. Third-class, 251. Mailing, 241. lists, 170. Manuscript for publica- tion, Copying of, 333. Marginal effect, How to secure proper, 206. Marine -insurance terms, 63. Measures of capacity, 414. of extension, 411. of volume, 416. of weight, 412. Mechanical terms, 64. Merchandise, samples of, in foreign mail, 276. Messrs., Use of, 153. Mexico, Mail for, 272. INDEX ix Mimeograph work, 347. Ministers, How to address, 153. Modern office methods, 288. Modifying clauses, Excess of, in letters, 146. Money, Methods of sending and carrying, 386. orders, 387. tables of value, 418. Multigraph, 351. N Name and address on letter, 210-211 Method of indexing, 301. Names, lists of, Post- masters not allowed to furnish, 285. Neatness, Importance of, in letter-writing, 142. Negative method of reason- ing, 168. Numbering machine, 327. Numerical method of filing and indexing, 303. O Ocean lines of steamships, 248. Office for stenographic and typewriting work, 332. methods, Modern, 288. Operating, Methods of, typewriter, 198. Ordering letters, 159. Overdrawing bank ac- count, 398. Pages, second and third, of letters, Method of treating, 204. Panama, Mail for, 272. Paragraphs, form, Use of, 191. Parcels post, 280. Parenthesis, marks of, Use of, 97. Partial payments, 409. Partnership agreement, 361. Period, Use of, 95. Philippine stamps, 286. Phonograph in letter writing, 330. method of transcribing, 369. Speed practice with, 23. Phrasing, Methods of, 24. Position, How to find a, 5. Positions, Methods of ap- plying for, 7. Post cards, 262. Postal cards, 261. distances, 287. information, 249. matters, Miscellaneous information on, 283. money order, 388. Postage due, Rules about, 267. for foreign mail, 273. Prepayment of, 264. Power of attorney, 362. Practice, Kind of, for beginners, 1. Practicing for speed, Meth- ods of, 18. Printed matter, how regu- lated in foreign mails, 275. Printers, Marks for, on manuscript, 334. Printing terms, 33. Promissory note, 357. Promotion, How stenog- rapher may win, 13. Promptness, Importance of, in letter writing, 142. Prohibited articles in U. S. mails, 272. Property list on cards, 319. Protest, 397. of promissory note, 363. Proxy, 364. Public stenographic office,. Conducting a, 332. Publishers' postage rate on periodicals, 250. INDEX Publishing terms, 33. Punctuation, 88. Quotation marks, Use of, 97. Railroad officials, titles and abbreviations, 73. terms, 68. Ratings on correspondents, 183. Real -estate records on cards, 319. -estate terms, 74. Reasoning, Examples of, in letter writing, 166. Recommendations, 6. References in applying for position, 9. Referring letters, 193. Registered foreign mail, 280. mail, 257. Report of meeting, Form for, 337. Reporting, Early attempts at, 26. of court testimony, 366. Return of mail, Rules for, 266. Revising of dictated mat- ter, 27. Salary, Question of, in applying, 9. Sales and soliciting letters, 169. Salesman as collector, 184. Salutations, Choice of, 152. for distinguished per- sons, 154. .Samples in foreign mail, 276. Second-class mail, 250. Semicolon, Use of, 92. Shannon filing, 307. Shorthand speed, How to acquire, 17. Shorthand systems, 17. Simplicity in letter com- position, 147. Single-spaced letters, 209. Soliciting letters, 169. Spacing and miscellaneous points, 230. out of letter, 205. Special delivery mail, 260. Specifications, Forms for, 340-341. title page for document, 339. Speed, How to acquire, 17. practice with phono- graph, 23. Stamped envelope, Enclo- sing, in an inquiring letter, 160. Stamps, Deciding between 1-cent or 2-cent, 171. Stationery, Kind of, to have, 141. Steamship lines, Principal, 248. Stenographers, Common mistakes of, 4. General advice to, 1. Stenographic experience, how acquired, 2. office, Conducting a, 332. work, Centralization of, 330. Stock certificate, 356. quotations, Form for, 346. supplies, Record of, 327. terms, 77. Straight-canvass letter, 178. Style in typewriting, 203. Miscellaneous points of, 211. Subject method of index- ing, 300. Subscription-card list, 318. Symbols in checking records, 326. Synonyms, Importance of knowledge of, 139. Systems of shorthand, 17. INDEX Tab cards, 314. Tables, 411. Tabulating typewriters, 200. Technical terms, 32. Telegrams, 245. Telegraph letters, 246. Telephone system, Inter- departmental, 330. Telephoning, 247. Tenants' notice to leave, 360. Terms, Lists of technical, 32. Testimonials in letters, 175. Testimony, examples of notes, 371-372. Forms for transcript of, 373-375. Third-class mail, 251. Tickler systems, 306-322. Time difference between New York and other parts of world, 417. Tone of letters, 148. Touch typewriting, 198. Transcribing of court and public work, 369. Transferring filed matter, 359. Travelers' checks, 392. Triplicating, Method of, 292. Two-hundred year calen- dar, 241. Type cleaning, 197. Typewriter, Diagram of standard, keyboard, 199. Typewriting, 197. by touch, 198. Forms for, 336-346. General suggestions on, 201. machines, Care of, 197. on cards, 201. Tabulating, 200. U Unmailable matter, 264. Useful tables, 411. U. S. postal cards, 261. Verbatim reporting, Early attempts at, 26. Vertical filing, 297. Vocabulary, How to im- prove the, 138. TV Wall Street terms, 77. Weights, Measures of, 412. Wills, 365. Wireless messages, 245. Women, Opportunities for, as stenographers, 15. Words, Division of, 215. Wrapping of mail matter, Written orders better than oral orders, 192. The Stenographer's and Corre- spondent's Handbook STENOGRAPHY ADVICE TO BEGINNERS PREPARATION FOR THE WORK Final Practice Work. It is better for the young or inexperienced stenographer to spend an extra month in preparation than to take a position too soon. Get your father, mother, brother, sister, or any one, to dictate to you ; ana, when possible, transcribe your notes on a typewriter. This transcribing practice is important, for many who can read their notes offhand fairly well cannot read them rapidly when typewriting. If circumstances compel you to take a position before you are competent to do high-grade work, do not neglect to give yourself the needed additional training. Books on English, punctuation, letter writing, etc. are too easily obtainable for the stenographer to have an excuse for being deficient. Above all, be proficient in typewriting before undertaking work in a busy office. Most employers will overlook some lack of shorthand speed if the typewriting is rapid and fault- less. An employment bureau that places thousands of stenographers in positions every year reports that four-fifths of the applicants fail to attain a satisfactory rating on the typewriting tests. Business men care little about shorthand systems; they usually judge of the ability of a stenographer 2 ADVICE TO BEGINNERS by the speed oi the typswitmg and che neatness and accuracy of the transcript. The value of shorthand speed is often over-emphasized. There are employers who want very rapid stenographers, but the stenographer of moderate speed 90 to 100 words a minute can get along well with four employers out of five, and those four employers want, first of all, the stenog- rapher who can turn out neat, correct, well-arranged letters that will be creditable to the man whose name appears at the bottom. Just before taking a position, have some business acquaint- ance dictate several dozen real letters to you; transcribe them and ask him tp criticize your work. You cannot practice too much in transcribing letters from shorthand notes. How to Get Experience. Beginners often neglect opportu- nities to gain experience that would do much toward fitting them for* salaried positions. A little soliciting among acquaintances and others will usually secure both type- writing and shorthand work that can be done in odd hours. Ministers, lawyers, doctors, architects, engineers, literary people, and others have work that may be secured. Such work may not bring large returns sometimes it may be done free of charge but the varied experience will prove to be very helpful, particularly if those for whom the work is done are urged to be critical. There is something about real work that makes it yield better experience than any kind of practice exercise. Beginners in small towns who expect to go eventually to cities should follow this plan and get some experience before leaving for the larger field. Competition in large centers is much stronger than it is in small places, and one entering the large field needs all the experience that can be acquired. Therefore, look around for the piecework that can be had in the local field. See whether one of the lawyers in your town would like to have an hour or more of your time every day. The apparent lack of work is often accounted for by the fact that no one has tried to develop it. Stenographers in mere villages have, by soliciting work, earned enough to pay the rent of a typewriter, or to pay ADVICE TO BEGINNERS 3 for a typewriter bought on the instalment plan or with borrowed money, and at the same time have gained experi- ence that proved to be of great assistance. Importance of Increasing Ability. Become familiar with common quotations and with the phrases from foreign languages that are frequently used. Many stenographers are bewildered when a dictator uses such Anglicized phrases as vice versa, bona fide, etc. Every good dictionary con- tains a glossary of foreign words and phrases commonly used in English. A good dictionary, a book of synonyms, and a volume of familiar and classical quotations form a valuable part of a stenographer's equipment. Unless the transcriber of dictation has a proper conception of the language used by educated people, he will not be able to reproduce it with fidelity. The education of the ideal stenographer is never complete. By reading the best litera- ture, he can make the language of good writers his own. Through the best newspapers and magazines, he can be conversant with the topics of the day. That stenographer who decides that he has no time for good reading does not realize the injustice he is doing himself. He cannot know too much about the English language or be too well informed on general subjects. The beginner anxious about employment may feel assured that, no matter how great the number of stenographers, there is now, and probably always will be, employment for the good stenographer at a salary commensurate with his ability. While it is true that the poor stenographer will always have more or less difficulty in securing employment, no attention need be paid to statements about the stenographic field being overcrowded. The field is not crowded, and it is not likely that it will ever be crowded, with good stenographers; nor is it likely that any machine will ever make the trained stenographer less necessary than he is today, for machines have no brairs. In the natural order of things, preparation must come first. Do not be worried about a position. Be concerned about your preparation. Your opportunity will come when you are ready for it; of this, there is no doubt whatever. 4 ADVICE TO BEGINNERS Common Mistakes of Stenographers. The chief difficulty in obtaining employment arises from the fact that four-fifths of the stenographers are not prepared to do good work. They think they are, but this thinking merely makes matters worse. The typical stenographer and this term includes a great many with a year or two of so-called experience is able to take down in heavy, scrawly notes most of what is dictated and to transcribe about nine-tenths of it accurately; but he goes wrong on the other tenth, and, having little foundation in the way of English education, inserts words that make no sense. This typical stenographer has a passion for abbreviating in the transcribing, but no idea of how to balance the typewriting on the sheet. The writing will begin too close to the printing on the letterhead or too far away; it will run too close to the side of the sheet and too close to the bottom. He does not understand that the blank margin should constitute a neat frame for the typewriting, nor that typewriting is only printing with one size of type and is, therefore, subject to many of the principles of form and style that govern good printing. The first line of a new paragraph will be left at the bottom of the sheet, and the final short line of a paragraph will be carried over to a new sheet. The typewriting will be single spaced without the needed extra space between paragraphs. Punctuation marks will be distributed without reason, whenever there is a pause in the transcribing; and a single hyphen instead of two hyphens will be used to represent a dash. Words will be left misspelled when there is a big dictionary right at the elbow. Words will be capitalized that should not be capitalized; words that should be compounded will be left unconnected; and as for dividing words properly at the ends of lines, few stenographers seem to know that there is a proper way of doing this. The typical stenographer will leave a syllable of a single letter at the end of a line or carry over to a new line two letters that do not constitute a syllable. In addition to containing a variety of errors of capitalization, punctua- tion, and style, the work of this typical stenographer will often be spoiled by finger marks and slovenly erasures. Yet such a stenographer will feel that he is very unfortunate in HOW TO FIND A POSITION 5 getting and holding employment, that it is a hard world, when some careful, scholarly business man will not take him into his office and work the raw material into finished product. It seemingly does not occur to such stenographers that business men, as a rule, do not care to make schoolrooms of their offices, that their time is far too valuable to be wasted in correcting and explaining simple things to incompetents. The stenographer who will master the information con- tained in this Handbook will have a great deal in his favor, but even the mastery of all that is taught here is only a good start in the right direction. HOW TO FIND A POSITION Choice of Field. Whether or not a stenographer should leave his home town to go to the large city is a question to which no general answer can be given. It depends on the stenographer and his town. Undoubtedly there are many towns too small to afford the proper permanent field for the first-class stenographer. To such a stenographer the large city offers a tempting opportunity. The Large City. Living expenses are much greater in the large city, but if a young man lives sensibly in the large city he can meet the greater expense and still save more than he could in the small town. But, of course, it would not do for all stenographers to go to the large cities. The large city is a field for the expert rather than for the mediocre worker. Towns and Small Cities. The typewriting machine has made its way gradually from large cities into the business offices of small towns and villages. Where not many years ago the typewriter was a curiosity, there are now dozens of business men owning machines, and this has, of course, greatly broadened the stenographer's field. There are a great many good opportunities in small towns, and such opportunities are sure to increase. Methods of Applying for Positions. Assuming that the stenographer has the right kind of ability, supplemented by the proper amount of experience, how shall he proceed to market his ability? 6 HOW TO FIND A POSITION If he is in a small town he is not likely to accomplish much by long-range applications to employers in large cities, unless they are familiar with his ability. If, for example, he is in Ohio, it is not reasonable to expect a Chicago employer to select him when the employer can interview dozens of Chicago applicants and give each a trial. Of course, if the applicant from a small Ohio town has some special qualification or experience that appeals to the employer, and if he is willing to go to Chicago on trial, he may win favor. The best way, however, to get a position in a city is to save enough money to pay expenses for a month or so, pack your trunk, and go to the city you have selected. Before leaving your home town, arrange with some of those for whom you have worked to give you letters of recommendation and to respond to letters of inquiry. Recommendation. A letter of recommendation should certify to more than that you are a deserving person; it should cover the kind of work you have done, how well you did it, and the quality of your service generally. One frank, concise letter, giving such details, is worth half a dozen of the usual style of recommendation. Boarding Places. The young stranger in a large city can- not be too careful about his boarding place. He should try to get into some good private home, or where he will asso- ciate with cultured people. He should avoid the boarding houses with the "sporty" crowds, for such association is more than likely to harm him. Employment Bureaus. The various typewriting companies conduct employment bureaus of the most trustworthy char- acter, and they usually make no charge for assisting operators of their machines to get positions. As early as possible, the stenographer should register in the offices of the companies whose machines he operates. The Young Men's Christian Association and the Young Women's Christian Association are often able to render valuable assistance, the latter, as its title indicates, aiding only young women. Sometimes there are other employment bureaus worth considering, but the stenographer should be on his guard against those who ask more than a nominal fee before actually bringing him and HOW TO FIND A POSITION 7 the position together. Many employment bureaus are fraudulent in their methods. Calls and Letters. The next thing for the stenographer to do is to call on any business men that he may know and tell them he is looking for a position; they may know or may learn of openings. Then he should watch the "Help Wanted" columns of the daily newspapers closely, and answer all of the advertisements for stenographers of his qualifications. In addition to answering these advertisements, he should write unsolicited letters of application to employers, such as railroad companies, insurance companies, etc., that is, if he wishes employment with such companies. Of course many of these letters will be fruitless, but the applicant should not be discouraged because there are no results from the first dozen. He should be prepared to write hundreds of letters, if necessary, and he should write each as carefully as if it were the only one he expected to write and as if the opportunity of a lifetime depended on the excellence of the letter. Whenever there is opportunity to make personal applica- tion, the stenographer should go without delay, but as letter writing is usually the stenographer's principal work, a great many employers prefer to see a specimen of the applicant's letter writing before inviting him to come for an interview. Advertisements often contain such sentences as "Apply by letter only," or only an initial or box address is given, so that no one may call until the advertiser invites him to do so. While there are some business men that are careless of the .appearance of their letters, the business world is growing more particular. Today the best business offices realize the value of faultless correspondence, and the stenographer unable to produce it is not wanted. Therefore it is of the utmost importance that the stenographer's letter of applica- tion reflect thorough knowledge of the art of business letter writing from both the literary and the typographical points of view. Salary. The beginner should not haggle about salary, but should take the nrst position he can get that affords a fair salary and the opportunity to get good experience. He can 8 LETTERS OF APPLICATION use that position as a stepping stone to something better. First positions sometimes do not pay more than $5 or $6 a week. The high-grade experienced stenographer, on the other hand, rarely loses anything by setting a fair price on his service. If he has been earning $15 or $18 a week and is worth it, he should let it be known even if he does eventually find it expedient to take a new position at a lower salary. One difficulty about the salary question is that a great many stenographers not worth more than $6 or $8 a week imagine themselves to be worth $15 to $25. Undoubtedly, it is sometimes a good plan to offer to work for a while without salary in order that a proper basis of compensation may be determined; but the advice so often given to leave salary entirely out of the discussion is not to be taken as an invariable rule. The applicant's low valua- tion of his service is likely to be accepted. Employers look- ing for a $20-a-week stenographer will not often employ one that seems eager to take the place at $8. HOW TO WRITE A LETTER OF APPLICATION There is a great difference between replying to an adver- tisement and answering it. So many positions are filled through advertising, and advertisements are often so care- fully worded, that it is important to know how to write a good letter of application. To be able to write a clear, courteous > convincing letter requires a good English founda- tion and some special study of the art of letter writing. Try to keep stock phrases out of your letters of applica- tion, for in many of the best positions the stenographer, sooner or later, becomes a correspondent. Try to write much as you would talk to the employer. Next, try, in a concise, orderly way, to describe your qualifications. If you are replying to an advertisement, the wording of the advertisement will usually give some idea of what the employer expects; strive to show that you have the qualities he is looking for. Most letters of application are weak in that they merely let the employer know that the writer of the letter would like to have employment. The successful applicant is he LETTERS OF APPLICATION 9 who, in a faultless letter draws a convincing pen picture of himself. Analysis of Ability. Give yourself a critical examination. What is there about you, your ability, education, experience, temperament, etc., that should appeal favorably to an employer? Give this information. Answer all the questions of the advertisement as definitely as you can. Tell about the kind of work you have done. Mention the machines that you can use well. If any one has ever said anything favor- able about your work, you may quote that expression modestly. You should not, of course, write in a boasting or conceited spirit, but remember that you are selling your ability, and a good salesman cannot afford to be backward or neglectful in setting forth the attractive features of the commodity he is selling; be modest and conservative, but confident and convincing. If duties are specified in which you are inexperienced, be frank enough to admit it, but show the advertiser that you have confidence in your ability to "make good" if a chance is given. Employers specify experience only because it usually means superior ability; if you have the ability, do not let the experience bugbear frighten you. References. Do not merely write that you can give good references; give them. If possible, refer to former employ- ers; at any rate, give the names and addresses of some that can give a good word for you. If you have a good letter of recommendation, send a copy: you may thus get ahead of some other applicant that merely wrote that he could furnish such letters. The fact that you have filled several responsible positions successfully bespeaks good experience, but the mention of many changes is not likely to make a favorable impression. Salary and Hours. Do not make leading points of salary or hours. These are subjects to be approached tactfully. Show first that you are the one for the place. It is well enough to tell what you have been receiving or what you are worth, but let your letter show that you are more con- cerned about the right position than about the salary or the hours. The stenographer already in a position can, of course, 10 LETTERS OF APPLICATION afford to be more independent about salary, but it is better in any case to leave this matter open for discussion in the interview; the employer is likely to throw in the waste basket the letter from an applicant who shows that his first concern is about salary and hours. Of course, if the adver- tiser has asked that applicants state what salary they expect, the question should be answered. Additional Points. Do not make your letter too long. Leave out immaterial details. At the same time, have your letter complete; an incomplete letter is as weak as one that is tiresomely long. While you should not leave any important information to be given in the interview, try to get an appointment. Offer to go any reasonable distance. The letter should be typewritten, and it should be a fine example of good typewriting. Have the type faces clean. Nothing is better than white paper of good quality. Sign your name plainly with black ink, and be sure to give your address. If the position is one in which much pen work is required, submit a specimen of your penmanship on a sepa- rate sheet or in a postscript. Business men do not admire fancy penmanship. It is unnecessary to enclose a stamp for reply unless some information is asked for. Mail your applications as promptly as possible. It is a good idea to take them to the newspaper office or at least to the post office, instead of dropping them in a letter box at a street corner, which may cause a delay of hours. Early letters are likely to make strong impres- sions. Examples of Letters. The accompanying examples of letters of application should not be taken as models to be copied, but they are suggestive. In every case the quali- fications described must, of course, be those possessed by the individual applicant. No. 1 is an example of a reply to an advertisement. No. 2 is an example of an unsolicited letter. Note that No. 1, being a reply to an advertisement and being addressed to an interested employer, is longer than the other example. LETTERS OF APPLICATION 11 EXAMPLE NO. 1 88 N. Sixtieth Street, Chicago, May 30, 1910. Manufacturer, Care of EVENING NEWS. Dear Sir: I feel that I could fill very creditably the position you have advertised. I am twenty-one years old, and have just come to Chicago from Ridgewood, Ohio, because I want to be in a larger field. I was with the Ridgewood Lumber and Building Company two years as a stenographer. I am enclosing you a copy of a letter from that company regarding my service, and I refer you to them for any further information you may wish. I did all of their stenographic and typewriting work, handling such work as bills, specifications, etc. in addition to the usual correspondence. During the last year of my service I wrote much of the routine correspondence on my own initiative. This letter is a fair sample of my type- writing. I am thorough in English, can take dictation accurately as rapidly as most men dic- tate, and can use the Remington and Underwood machines. I feel that I can, with all proper modesty, claim to be a high-grade stenographer in every sense of the word. I have no habits that would handicap me. My salary with the Ridgewood Company was $50 a month. I am not so much concerned about salary as I am about a place where there is opportunity for hard, aggressive, loyal work and where such work will be appreciated. I am perfectly willing to come in and work for a week without any obligation on your part to retain me unless my service is entirely satisfactory. May I call for a talk? Respectfully yours, 12 LETTERS OF APPLICATION EXAMPLE NO. 2 810 Madison Avenue, Scranton, Pa., June 10, 1910. Frank H. Brown, Esq., Connell Building, Scranton. Dear Sir: Can you give employment to a bright, pains- taking stenographer, who is strong in English and in the character of her typewriting work and who wishes to get into a law office? I refer to myself. I am already employed, but am in work for which I do not feel suited. For a year I have been studying to familiarize myself with law terms and law work generally, and I believe that I can do unusually good work in a law office. I refer, by permission, to Judge Landis, of this city, for whom I have done some special work. I am sending you a specimen of my typewriting. I am twenty-two years old, and am a high-school graduate. Can you do anything for me or tell me of any law office where there is likely to be an opening? I send an addressed envelope, and I thank you in advance for your attention. Respectfully yours, The Follow-Up. If you have the advertiser's permanent address, it is sometimes well to send a second letter in case the first brings no response. Positions are not always filled quickly, and the second letter may impress the employer with your conviction of your fitness for the place. Most business men admire the hustler. When you have secured an interview, remember that your personal appearance and your conversation must be such that the favorable impression will continue. The battle is only half won when you are asked to call. If you are given a position and are to report later, it is businesslike to write an acknowledgment and show that you are determined to succeed in the new work. HOW TO WIN PROMOTION 13 HOW TO WIN PROMOTION Shorthand as a Stepping-Stone. An important point in considering any position is the opportunity that the business offers, not only for an increased salary as stenographer but for advancement to a better position than that of stenogra- pher. Some stenographers expect to make themselves verbatim reporters and to follow reporting work as a livelihood. Young women are sometimes ineligible to the higher posi- tions in a business, and often do not aspire to them. With these two exceptions, however, a position as stenographer should be regarded merely as a stepping-stone to something better. Generally speaking, a young man does himself an injustice if he takes a position with the idea of remaining in it 8 or 10 years as a stenographer. That the stenographer has a great opportunity is shown by the fact that thousands of successful business men, some being very prominent, started as stenographers. The stenographer's work is at the heart of the business. He is, or should be, the employer's right-hand man the confiden- tial secretary. Into his ears, day after day, go the secrets and the correspondence of the business. In most positions he has by far the best opportunity of all clerical employes to learn the business. If the stenographer does not use this great opportunity, to familiarize himself with prices, the policies, and methods of the firm, and to advance himself to a trusted, high-salaried position he has only himself to blame. Opportunity to Become a Correspondent. If the stenogra- pher, at the time he obtains a position that affords oppor- tunity for advancement, has not made himself a skilled correspondent, he should do so without further delay; for when he is able to answer a great many letters with a word of direction, or without any direction, he will in many offices be made private secretary or manager of office work, and another stenographer will be employed as assistant. In such a position he should do all he can to improve the office system. Manufacturers of modern office equipment are always pleased to send their catalogs. The stenographer at 14 HOW TO WIN PROMOTION this stage of his career cannot afford to neglect reading the best business magazines and books. Many of these can be obtained from libraries. If the stenographer has not already acquired a fair knowledge of business law, he should begin to acquire it. Value of Bookkeeping Knowledge. Many stenographers find it advisable to make themselves bookkeepers, for in small offices there is not enough of the bookkeeping work to justify the employment of some one for that alone, and if the stenographer is able to do the work he not only is more likely to hold the position but is able to command a higher salary. Advertising. Some knowledge of advertising is becoming more and more a valuable asset for office men, the stenogra- pher included. Courteous Manner. Almost coequal with an ambitious, hustling spirit is a courteous manner. What a pleasure it is to do business with an office where the young man in charge is a gracious, clean, manly fellow. True courtesy costs less and brings greater dividends than any other quality that could be named. Its force is indescribable. Unfortunately, in thousands of offices stenographers are indifferent in their treatment of people. They do not make the visitor feel comfortable. They talk curtly over the telephone, as if it were not their business to give information. They often fail to get the names and addresses of people who call. And they think that there is no opportunity for the stenog- rapher. Civil-Service Positions. In the judgment of many, the business field offers the greatest opportunity to the ideal stenographer that has been described. Nevertheless it is true that many stenographers, temporarily at least, do well to enter government service. There are thousands of bright young men earning from $30 to $60 a month in the smaller towns and cities, who, with a reasonable amount of careful preparation, can qualify themselves for government positions that pay from $600 to $1,200 a year at the outset and that offer advancement as well as other privileges. It is rather hard to understand why the government of the United States HOW TO WIN PROMOTION 15 has for 8 or 10 years had so much difficulty in getting young men to take the stenographic examination, for the facts show that any young man who passes a creditable examina- tion is sure to get an appointment within a short time. Since these positions pay good salaries, many stenographers hold them for a few years while preparing for one of the professions or for other work. It is entirely possible for the government stenographer to advance to a salary of $2,000 or more a year; some in the service have advanced still higher. Owing to the larger number of women who take the Civil- Service examinations, the chance is not so good for women. Besides, there are many positions for which the young man is preferred. Nevertheless, there are good opportunities for bright women who attain high averages in their examinations. Opportunities for Women. In the business world there is likewise a larger number of women applicants, and the salary rate is not so good as that paid to young men. Notwith- standing this, the ambitious, alert woman not only has a good field open to her as a stenographer but she may aspire to higher positions in spite of the handicap that her sex is supposed to impose. The advertising manager of one of the largest advertising companies in the United States is a woman who by constant, painstaking effort worked her way up from the position of stenographer. Other similar instances could be mentioned. Additional Points. Always be at work on time. The importance of this cannot be overestimated. Working a little beyond office hours, when there is need for your service, and doing a few things that you were not paid or told to do is nearly always bread cast upon the waters. Where there is spare time, do not use it in any unbusinesslike way but endeavor to improve your ability and your knowledge of the business. Live up to whatever obligations you are under as to length of service. Under ordinary circumstances, until you have remained as long as you agreed, you have no right .to. look for another position. If you conclude to give up the posi- tion at the end of the. agreed time, give ample notice. Put 16 HOW TO WIN PROMOTION forth your best efforts to the last hour of your service. Make it a rule always to leave a good record behind and to carry the good will of your employers with you when you change positions. It is a great mistake to leave a position with ill feeling between you and your employer if it is within your power to have it otherwise. In applying for other positions, a misunderstanding with a previous employer will nearly always score against you. If you must drink intoxicants, or smoke, or swear, or chew gum, at least wait until you are out of the office. When friends persist in taking up time for which you are paid, you should feel free to tell them that you cannot talk longer with them. Be neat in personal appearance not showy. Keep your desk well arranged; close it properly when, leaving for the day. Do not leave important letters and papers lying around. Be careful and saving of office supplies. Do not use expensive letterheads when a scrap of cheap paper will answer the purpose. In many large offices it is the practice to save envelopes that have been used and to use them again in interdepartment correspondence. Notify the purchaser for the office when the supply of any kind of printed matter is getting low. Do not wait until the last has been used. Keep informed on postal rules. It is as great a mistake to waste postage as to put on too little. Pay for all the stamps you use on your personal letters. Do not expect to find a twenty-dollar-a-week position when you are a ten-dollar stenographer. As a rule stenogra- phers are paid about what they are worth. Rest assured that most stenographers receiving salaries of $20, $25, or $30 a week earn their money if not in actual shorthand and typewriting work, then in the responsibilities they assume. Your employer has to think about a number of things besides increases in your salary. The most forcible way of calling the matter to his attention is by conscientiously striving to do better work. "The man who does no more than he is paid for will never be paid for any more than he does." One way of working is to measure your effort by SHORTHAND SPEED 17 what some one else does; another way is to do more and better work than your fellows. Do not argue too much with your employer. Even if he is wrong, it may often be policy to let him have his way and find out afterward that he was mistaken. Learn to do things without asking useless questions; but always have the courage to ask promptly for information without which you cannot proceed intelligently in doing your work. A frank confession of ignorance is less danger- ous than blind groping in the dark. When in the private office, or at your employer's desk, do not see or hear anything not intended for you. Do not open a letter belonging to another unless you have permission to open it. More liberty may be taken with telegrams than with letters, for telegrams often require prompt action. Never sign a letter for another, unless requested to do so. You have no right to reveal to new employers the business secrets or personal affairs of past employers. Do not talk too much in the office about outside affairs, and talk not at all outside the office about office matters. You have no right to give out information that is the property of your employer. "The stenographer should make it a rule never to speak of office affairs outside of the office. By not talking shop, he will be sure not to overstep the bounds of prudence as to how much he may safely say. Say nothing." THE ACQUIRING OF SHORTHAND SPEED Shorthand Systems. In order to acquire high speed in shorthand writing, it is necessary for the stenographer to write a good system. There are systems with which a speed of from 75 to 100 words a minute can be acquired in a short time, but which afford no further possibilities. As improved textbooks enable the student to master a standard system just as quickly and easily as he could one that has not been thoroughly tried and as he will by this plan acquire the means by which he can work up speed for verbatim report- ing, if he so desires, there seems to be no good reason for 18 SHORTHAND SPEED selecting a system that has not stood the test of years and that is not used by a good number of expert stenographers. Authors of new shorthand systems are rarely modest in their claims. Each new system that is published is advertised as the speediest, the most legible, and the easiest to learn. Some go so far as to claim that their systems can be mastered in a few weeks. Some of these systems exist only a few years. The great proportion of expert stenographers in English- speaking countries write one or another of the Pitmanic systems. The word "Pitmanic" signifies that the system is based on the phonetic system devised by Isaac Pitman, of Bath, England, in 1837-40. All Pitmanic systems are much alike in their fundamental principles. Some are so much alike that the writer of one can read the notes of another fairly well. As different authors prepared their textbooks, each carried out his own individual ideas. Thus, Pitmanic shorthand, as modified and written by Andrew J. Graham, is known as the Graham system; as modified and written by James E. Munson, is known as the Munson system; as modified and written by W. W. Osgoodby, is known as the Osgoodby system; and so on. Prominent among the Pit- manic systems are the Benn Pitman, the Isaac Pitman, the Graham, the Munson, the Osgoodby, and the Scott-Browne. Some advantages are claimed for each of these various systems, but a stenographer who has mastered any one of them, though he may not necessarily have learned the best, may feel assured that he can build up reporting speed if he will only work faithfully and intelligently. Methods of Practicing. There is no easy road, short cut, or magic method for acquiring speed and accuracy in writing shorthand. Study and intelligent practice are the only means, and the reward is only to the diligent. If the direc- tions here laid down are faithfully followed, every hour of hard work will mean some gam in speed, though it may not be apparent at the time. In order to write shorthand rapidly, it is absolutely neces- sary that one have such a familiarity with the word-building principles of a system that they can be applied instantly. Speed practice will not make up for any deficiency in this SHORTHAND SPEED 19 respect, and it will be economy of time to get a complete mastery of a system before attempting to acquire speed. Speed without legibility is worse than useless, and legibility cannot be had without a thorough knowledge of all the principles of the system. Many stenographers imagine that the secret of speed in reporting work is the omission of vowels, extensive phrasing, and contracted forms for words. The idea is erroneous. Crowding the memory with contractions for words or phrases does not bring speed. The great requisites are a thorough mastery of a good system, a good store of general knowledge, alertness of the mental faculties, and continuous intelligent practice to give manual dexterity with the pen or pencil. Even when the word -building principles have been thor- oughly mastered, it is often the case that the mind will not form outlines as fast as the hand can write them. When a stenographer is hindered by this hesitation he should train his mind by mentally forming outlines while listening to conversations. A shorthand dictionary may be used for getting outlines for troublesome words, but the habit of relying on the dictionary should not be formed. This habit may easily do more harm than good. After the word-building principles have been thoroughly learned, each writer must use his own judgment as to outline, as it is the judgment that must be relied on in the hurry of reporting. Of course, errors will be made and poor forms chosen, but these may afterwards be compared with those in the dictionary, or better judg- ment may afterwards be used when leisurely reviewing the notes. The writing of familiar matter trains the hand, while work on new matter develops the mental powers. The following is a good plan for practice: 1. Select good exercises of several hundred words (choos- ing, at the outset, many exercises written in good shorthand of the system used), and copy the matter a number of times, first carefully and then more rapidly. 2. Write the same matter from dictation a number of times as rapidly as it can be taken. If it is impossible to 20 SHORTHAND SPEED get dictation, memorize some of the exercises and write them many times fifty or one hundred or even a greater number of times. Dictation, however, is important for ear training. 3. Write from dictation matter on which there has been no previous practice. Editorials and printed sermons are good for this purpose. 4. Read the notes of dictated matter taken on a previous day, so that the memory will not give too much aid. 5. Write from dictation lists of new and difficult words. Proper Method of Holding Pen or Pencil. Be careful to acquire a proper hand position. The hand should rest easily on the paper, supported by the tips of the third and fourth fingers or by the fourth finger alone. The wrist should not touch the paper. The arm should rest on the fleshy portion between the elbow and the wrist. If the pen is held so that the holder is in front of, or directly against the knuckle of the forefinger, a wider and more speedy sweep of the fingers will be possible than if the holder is held lower and nearer the thumb: Hold the pen or pencil lightly in the fingers. It is a most common fault of stenographers to grip the writing instrument tightly. The muscular movement is valuable in any kind of writing; but owing to the various directions in which shorthand char- acters are written, the fingers play the most important part; especially is this true where the notebook must be placed on the knee or held in the hand. The top of the holder should point out from the right shoulder more than in writing long- hand. Nimbleness and deftness should be cultivated rather than dashing movements and flourishes; the showy hand is not necessarily the speedy hand. Above all, strive for a very light touch; heavy writing retards speed. If at a table, rest the weight of the body on the left arm, using the fingers of the left hand to hold the paper flat. Throw as little weight as possible on the right hand' leave that free for writing. A good position is sitting close to the table with both elbows on it. Let there be a gliding movement of the hand rather than a rest-and-jerk style. The arm should not be lifted every time the hand is. Do not lift the pen too high, but make SHORTHAND SPEED 21 quick transitions from one outline to another. These little intervals count for a great deal. As the writing grows faster, try to get the outlines closer together; the faster short- hand is written, the wider the spaces between outlines are likely to become. Guard against this. Keep the hand hard at work within its scope. Do not waste time by making dashing flourishes with the hand. If a pencil is used, do not moisten the lead. The Value of Repetition. It is better to copy one exercise a hundred times than to copy one hundred exercises one time each. But try occasionally on new matter to vary your practice. Often when you feel wearied with an exercise you are deriving the most benefit from it. If you cannot write familiar matter at a fair speed, you can be sure that you have not acquired sufficient manual and mental dexterity to take new matter rapidly. Do not sacrifice a neat compact style of shorthand notes in order to gain speed. A most common fault of young stenographers is a large, heavy style of shorthand. Small characters are better than large ones. Not only is less time required in their execution, but the hand is enabled to get down more outlines before moving along the line; that is, more characters may be written within the scope of the fingers. Go over the exercises until you can write them rapidly and still make legible notes. When the hand is once thoroughly accustomed to writing good notes, they can be written just as easily as poor ones. As a check on loose writing, occasionally slowly and carefully write some exercises in as symmetrical shorthand as possible. Keep constantly in mind that no less important than speed is the ability to read every note you write as readily as if it were in longhand. Every stenographer, when first beginning the practice of shorthand, finds some difficulty in reading his notes. There is no occasion for discouragement, however, as the easy reading of notes comes only from training. Learn to write correctly, and in a short time unvocalized or abbreviated shorthand will prove just as easy to read as outlines containing all the vowels and consonants. The reading of their notes is irksome to most stenog- raphers, but in no other way can skill in note reading be 22 SHORTHAND SPEED attained. The eye should be trained to take in at a glance a line or more of notes at a time. In this way, the mind will take in the sense of the context, which is necessary to rapid note reading. Make it a rule, in practice work, to read at least every fifth copy of each exercise. Proper Method of Dictating. Dictation should be given in long sentences, instead in sections of a few words each; that is, instead of having an exercise dictated as " How many readers of this newspaper can honestly say that the word tomorrow has not interfered with their lives?" have it read: "How many readers of this newspaper can honestly say that the word tomorrow has not interfered with their lives?" The memory will soon become accustomed to these long "takes" and will be trained to hold a number of words at a time without confusion. This training is very necessary, for often in reporting a rapid speaker a stenog- rapher must for minutes be behind him and be able to catch up at the first pause. A stenographer who is thus able to hold sentences can report a much more rapid speaker than one that becomes confused the instant he is a few words behind. Besides, one who can report a number of words behind a speaker is more likely to understand his remarks. Your first dictation practice should be just rapid enough to keep you busy from the beginning to the end of the exercise. Another sentence should be given just before the 'last outline of the previous one has been written. Until you have practiced considerably from dictation, you should not be rushed. Many make a mistake on this point, unwisely forcing themselves into a scrawly , illegible style of shorthand ; such practice, while giving apparent speed, simply causes a bad stenographic style that may take years to correct. The best rate of speed is the highest at which good, legible notes can be made. It should always be kept in mind that short- hand notes that cannot be read are worse than useless. But while this is true, it should be remembered that it is a poor plan to have the reader pause when he gives a new or hard word. The stenographer should accustom himself to getting the word down somehow, even if the outline is a long, awkward one. SHORTHAND SPEED 23 Dividing Long Words. Learn to "divide and conquer" the long and hard words ; that is, when a long word is encoun- tered, instead of waiting to think out the briefest outline for it, write the word phonetically just as the sounds fall on the ear no matter if the outline is long and awkward. A better one may be found afterwards. Get it down somehow and go on. For instance, if the word "supersensitiveness" were used by a speaker, it would be difficult to think instantly of the best outline for the entire word, but it would be easy to resolve the word into syllables super-sen-si-tive- ness and write it that way. It would be much better to follow this plan than to hesitate to think of the textbook outline. Without puzzling over vowel position (if you write a Pitmanic system), write the outline on the line, stroke by stroke for each syllable. It is imperative that training of this kind be had, as new and hard words will always be met. Do not be afraid to make occasional long outlines; the shortest outline may not always be the quickest to make or the easiest to read. Speed Practice With the Phonograph. While well-graded dictation practice is very helpful even during the study of the elementary principles of shorthand, it is possible to acquired a speed of from 75 to 100 words a minute by the repeated copying of shorthand and longhand exercises. There are records of cases when even greater speed has been acquired by this copying practice. However, dictation prac- tice is advisable. If the student is not attending a dictation class or cannot arrange with another student to exchange dictation service, or cannot get any one to read to him, he will find a phonograph and a well-graded set of speed-prac- tice records of great service. Dictation from the phonograph is very satisfactory, because the machine never tires and will dictate whenever the stenographer wants to practice, day or night. With a speed-practice outfit, he does not have to leave home, has no engagements to keep, and does not have to stop practicing because others get tired. Relatives and friends, even when willing to read, are usually too much inclined to "ease up" when the stenog- 24 SHORTHAND SPEED rapher hesitates or drops a little behind, and this is poor training. The phonograph, on the other hand, keeps right on and forces the writer to do his best. If the stenographer joins a class at some night school, he usually is held back by the slow ones, or outstripped and discouraged by those having had more experience and practice. But with a speed-practice outfit, he is the whole class ; his phonograph will dictate at home, whenever he wants, clearly and at just the right speed. See Fig. 1. Phrasing. Practical, judicious phrasing is essential to expert shorthand work, but the mere stringing together of words is not phrasing. Unless phrases are perfectly legible when "cold" and contribute to the speed of writing, the outlines had better be separated. Words should not be joined simply for the sake of joining them; neither should phrasing principles be applied until they are thoroughly understood. Adjectives and nouns, when of uncommon occurrence, should not be joined. Many adjectives and nouns are prop- erly phrased when they form a combination that occurs frequently; for instance, the expression "a great deal" is properly written as a phrase, yet "a great audience," though joined as easily, should not be phrased, because it is not a combination that occurs frequently. The mind would hesi- tate in making the joining, there being no mental image of the combined outlines of "a great audience," and time would be lost rather than gained by 'trying to write the words together. It must be borne in mind that eve y time a word or combination of words is written in a manner different from that in which the person is accustomed to write it, there is hesitation. Unless a phrase is met frequently, the outline for it will not be memorized and is therefore useless for practical purposes. Phrase writing should be done naturally, simply, and on well-established principles. It is not worth while to load the memory with a long list of "lightning phrases" combina- tions that probably will not be met once a year in real work ; such phrases as "many of our competitors," " have awakened to," etc. are entirely useless. It is not advisable to spend SHORTHAND SPEED 25 26 SHORTHAND SPEED much time in learning long lists of abbreviations and con- tractions, a large percentage of which are used only in special lines of work. The better plan is to learn brief signs for only the most commonly recurring words and phrases; then, when you have decided to engage in some special branch of work you will find it an easy matter to get outlines for the words and phrases peculiar to that profession or business, or for the stereotyped expressions to which your employer, like all mankind, will be addicted. A great many of the phrases shown in the works of shorthand authors are impracticable in real work. Law reporters do more phrasing than any other class of stenographers, due to the fact that law language abounds in combinations of words used frequently, and the phrasing soon becomes familiar from constant repetition. Good judgment must be exercised in omitting from phrases con- necting words like "of," "from," "of the," "to," etc. A sermon reporter would understand a phrase like "Spirit of God" written without the "of," while it might prove trouble- some to the law reporter, to whom "bill of particulars" would be perfectly legible without the "of." Attempts at Verbatim Reporting. The average speed at which speeches are delivered has been variously stated at from 120 to 150 words a minute. Some men, however, do not speak 100 words a minute, while others reach or exceed 175 words a minute. More than 300 words a minute may be spoken intelligibly, but no stenographer can report at such a rate for any great length of time. Speed sufficient for all real reporting may be acquired by persistent, intelligent practice. A stenographer with a bona-fide speed of 150 to 160 words a minute and a spurting speed of 25 or 30 words more will be able to report almost any speaker accurately. The rate of speaking is often deceptive. Words spoken in a moderate tone of voice are usually delivered at a rapid rate, while when the speaker shouts and gesticulates, the words are not spoken so rapidly. It will be valuable training for a stenographer to take advantage of every opportunity for taking notes from some careful, deliberate speaker, such as a minister or lecturer. EDITING DICTATED MATTER 27 The position should be directly in front of, and as close to, the speaker as possible; it is discouraging to try to report when at some distance from the speaker, and the best reporters do not attempt it. As ability increases, more rapid speakers may be tried. A stenographer, in his early attempts at verbatim report- ing, may become nervous and confused and unable to keep up with the speaker, but this should not discourage him. Instead, every effort should be made for alertness and prompt action of the hand. Every movement should mean the writing of an outline. Occasional spurts on the part of the speaker may be very trying, but valuable experience will be gained. One expecting to make a specialty of sermon reporting should become familiar with Biblical names and should practice on printed sermons. THE EDITING OF DICTATED MATTER Just how much liberty should be taken by the stenographer in editing and improving the dictation that he has received is a question that must be decided by the circumstances of each case. The ability and wishes of the dictator must be considered. Some whose choice of language is good, whose construction is orderly and clear, and who specify all desired punctuation, resent the slightest change on the part of the stenographer. In such cases, the stenographer should transcribe letters word for word as they were dictated. Few men, however, are able to dictate perfect letters offhand. They usually expect a stenographer to correct their errors, to clarify ambiguous statements and to make the finished letter as presentable as possible. It is undoubtedly the stenographer's office to see that the letter is grammatically perfect; and if the meaning of a sentence will be clearer by slightly changing or transposing some parts of it, usually the stenographer should do that also. Most dictators have their favorite words and expressions, and do not want them changed. 28 EDITING DICTATED MATTER Punctuation. Many do not indicate the desired punctua- tion nor instruct stenographers when to begin new para- graphs. In transcribing dictation of this kind, the stenog- rapher should punctuate the letter so that it will be properly balanced as to long and short sentences. Short sentences add much to clearness and directness, and a long, awkward sentence of several lines may often be advantageously divided by semicolons into separate elements, or by periods into several sentences. A new paragraph should be started when the subject changes or when a new treatment of the subject is introduced. Very long paragraphs are unsightly. Undesirable Repetition. It is a common fault of dictators to repeat unnecessarily and to use words of similar sounds close to each other. A sentence like " the last mail mailed you" can be changed advantageously to "the last mail sent (or forwarded) you." If, after a letter has been typewritten, the dictator makes changes, do not insist that you transcribed it exactly as he dictated. Probably you did; but that is no good* reason why a letter may not be improved and rewritten. Tact in Revising. These suggestions have particular reference to the hasty dictation of the busy office. It is obvious that careful composition needs little or no correc- tion at the hands of the stenographer or typewriter operator. It is true, nevertheless, that all sensible people appreciate the offices of a good stenographer and his suggestions when they are made in a tactful spirit and not with an air of superior intelligence or literary ability. The stenographer should, of course, be sure of his ground before attempting any revision. Until he is proficient in composition, punctua- tion, etc., he is in no position to render aid to others and should forbear attempting. Positions have been lost as the result of injudicious, incompetent revision of dictated matter. In working for a new employer, it is well to ask whether dictation shall be transcribed verbatim et literatim, or changes made that seem advisable. There is one thing that the stenographer should always remember, and that is that it is his duty to do the work the way his employer wants it done and to do it cheerfully. EDITING DICTATED MATTER 29 Example of Editing. Following is an example of how a loosely dictated letter should ordinarily be treated by a stenographer of superior ability. First, the matter as dictated: Mr. George Bartlett, Hotel Rennert, Baltimore, Md., Dear Mr. Bartlett I couldn't hardly wait for the stenographer to fet in I wanted to get off a letter to you so bad this morning, happened in the office early this morning and happened to open your letter first thing containing the orders. Your work is certainly great in Baltimore and I congratulate you on it. If you keep up this pace very long it will not be long before that salary check will be up to two hundred per month. Now as regards whether you should go on to Washington or Norfolk next I would say that this is a matter that had best be decided by yourself alone rather than by you and I and I leave it entirely with you and will approve whatever you do in the matter. I will be glad to send on the expense check referred to to Washington or Norfolk as the case may be as soon as I get your next address. There has only been two letters come in here for you since you left and I send these to you herewith. Assuring you again of our appreciation of your good work I am truly yours This is about the way the letter should be written by the stenographer: New York, N. Y. , April 3, 1908. Mr. George Bartlett, Hotel Rennert, Baltimore, Md. Dear Mr. Bartlett: I wanted to get off a letter to you so much this morning that I could hardly wait for the stenographer to get in. I happened to get in the office early, and opened first your letter containing the orders. Your work in Baltimore is certainly great, and I congratulate you on it. If you keep up this pace, it will not be long before that salary check will be up to two hundred a month. Now, regarding whether you should go on to Washington, or to Norfolk next, let me say that this is a matter that had better be decided by you alone, rather than by you and me; I leave it entirely to you, and will approve whatever you do . 30 BUSINESS-OFFICE DICTATION I shall be glad to send on the expe: se check to Washington, or to Norfolk, as the case may be, as soon as I get your next address. Only two letters have come here for you since you left, and I send these to you here- with. Assuring you again of our appreciation of your good work, I am Truly yours. Compare the letter with the dictation. Some of the changes were made on the assumption that the one that dictated the letter knew he was a careless writer and would not object to emendation by the stenographer. It will be observed that a few of the conversational expressions, such as "get in," etc., were allowed to stand. Words of greater preciseness could have been substituted, but it is well to remember that the strength of a letter depends largely on an easy, conversational style; and it is safer to leave the dictation a little loose than to rob the letter of its natural tone. BUSINESS-OFFICE DICTATION HINTS ON THE TAKING OF NOTES Having Notebook Ready. Always have your notebook arranged by means of a rubber band or a folded leaf so that you can turn instantly to the blank page next in order. Nothing is more vexatious to some employers than to have to wait for the stenographer to find a place in his book or until a pencil has been sharpened. Date. Before taking dictation, put the date at the top of the page in your notebook. This will enable you to find the notes of letters about which questions may arise. Addresses. Usually, it is well to write in longhand the names and addresses of the persons to whom the dictation is addressed; but if it is the dictator's practice to hand over, when through dictating, letters from which you may get the addresses you need, do not make him wait while you write addresses. In such cases, you should merely write on your BUSINESS-OFFICE DICTATION 31 notebook page Smith & Co., Jones, as the case may be, and go on. If, however, you cannot afterwards secure the names and addresses of the persons to whom the letters are to be addressed, be sure to have the dictator give both to you spelled correctly. It is annoying to a man who spells his name as Reid to receive a letter with the name written as Read or Reade. Some dictators follow the plan of putting a number on each letter; in such case, all the stenographer needs before going ahead with the dictation is the number. Interrupting. While taking dictation, do not fidget; and do not tap your pencil on the chair during pauses. Dictating requires mental effort, and some men are nervous. Concen- trate your attention on what is being dictated, and you will usually understand it. But if you do not hear clearly, be sure to ask. If the dictator quotes figures that you know are wrong, or if he makes an obvious error, call his attention to it; but do not make suggestions for too slight a reason or interrupt too frequently. Some dictators prefer to have the stenographer wait until they have finished a letter before asking about corrections or words that were not understood. Practice taking dictation with the notebook on the knee. Write first on only one side of the leaves of the notebook. When the book has been filled on one side of the leaves, it may be turned and notes written on the other side. This suggestion has particular application to books that open at the end. When, after an interruption, the dictator resumes, always read aloud the last sentence you have written. This enables him to catch the connection. When the dictation is over, take to your desk at once all letters, enclosures, etc. that you will need. General Points. Do not sulk or show signs of weariness when the dictation is long. You are paid to work, and a cheerful, hustling spirit in times when tasks are long and heavy is a strong factor in the salary-increasing matter. If there is time, it is a good plan to read the notes of an important dictation before beginning to transcribe. In ordinary letter work, stenographers usually make any necessary changes as they come to them. 32 TECHNICAL TERMS After transcribing a letter, draw a straight line down through your notes, or show in some other way that the notes have been transcribed; it is well to do this as you finish each page. Should you see fit to change the language of the dictator slightly, it is rarely necessary to change the shorthand notes accordingly. Your notes of letters are office property. Do not take them away. When a notebook has been filled, write on the cover the date of beginning and the date of ending, and file it. Ordinarily, notebooks that have been on file for a year may be thrown away. Do not become lax in your shorthand merely because you are familiar with the correspondence of the office: take full and correct notes of everything dictated to you. Even if you are certain of holding a position indefinitely, it is well occasionally to take some dictation from others outside of the office. It is easy to fall back in shorthand speed and accuracy by confining yourself to the dictation of only one person. TECHNICAL TERMS In beginning work in a new position, the stenographer is usually confused and delayed by the strange terms that enter into the dictation. Even when he is skilful enough in his shorthand to get down correct outlines for all new terms, he is often in doubt as to whether he is transcribing correctly. This Handbook does not afford space for comprehensive lists of terms used in the principal lines of business. For example, a complete list of law terms, with definitions, fills a volume of good size. A few short lists of commonly used technical terms are given in the following pages. If the stenographer secures a position in a railroad office and has only limited time for preparing himself, he will find it very helpful to review the list of railroad terms given here and to write the terms in shorthand. Until the time arrives when he is familiar with most railroad terms, he will find it helpful to refer tc the list when in doubt as to a term used. The study of these lists should be only preliminary preparation. TECHNICAL TERMS 33 As soon as the stenographer gets a foothold in a business he should consult catalogs, handbooks, letter books, and direc- tories constantly in order to become thoroughly familiar with the terms and the names of correspondents that will be met in dictation. There are now in existence a number of trade dictionaries, such as those covering dry-goods terms, electrical terms, etc., that are invaluable to stenographers. ADVERTISING, PRINTING, PUBLISHING, AND ENGRAVING TERMS advertising agency advertising agent agent's commission agate line antique finish assembling author's corrections author's royalty B backing up bad copy Ben Day tint bleed body matter body type boiler plate bold-faced type book paper border bound in boards broadside caps and small caps Caslon type casting off centered Cheltenham type circulation city editor classified columns clean proof coated paper collate color form color printing column wide column rule composing stick composing room combination line and half tone compositor condensed type contour type copyright cover page cover stock crayon drawing cut cut-in cut rate D dead matter deckle edged 34 ADVERTISING, PRINTING, PUBLISHING, delete half tone De Vinne type hanging indention dirty proof headline display high lights distributing double leaded dotted rule imprint dummy dupe indent indention E insertion insert edition de luxe inset electro electrotype inverted pyramid Italic em embossing en J justify enameled book etching every other day (e. o. d.) K keep in keep standing F kill first proof L first following and alongside laid paper reading last forms flat rate leaded matter flush line cut folio linen finish follow copy linotype foreign advertising lithography foundry proof live copy four-color plates lockup full position lower case (1. c.) G M galley machine composition gathering make ready gothic make-up H managing editor hack work manuscript (MS. MSS.) half leather manuscript reader AND ENGRAVING TERMS matrix (mat.) plate finish measure plain rule metal base point system modern face poster monotype Post Old Style mortise pressman presswork N process printing natural finish press proof news agent proof reader news stock news-stand sales Q next to reading matter quire nickeltype R nonpareil rag stock rate card reading notice offset ream octuple press reprint old style retouching out of register revise outline type roman oval half tone rotary press overrun rule work P running title page proof S parallel rule saddle stitched patent block scale patent insides scoop patent outsides script pebbling semiweekly pen-and-ink work semimonthly pencil sketch serial right perforating shallow cut photoengraving side heads pi side stitching pica signature pick-up single column plates slip sheeting 35 36 ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING TERMS solid matter standing card standing matter stereotypes stet stickful stipple stock room subheads supercalendared syndicate matter tail-piece text page three-color plates till forbid (t.f.) title page tint block tooling tooled background ARCHITECTURAL A abaciscus abacus abutment acanthus accolade acoustics adytum alcove amphitheater angle bead angle brace annulet antechamber apophyge apodyterium top of column next to read- ing triple column type high U upper and lower case (up. & I.e.) V vignette cut W wash drawing wire stitched woodcut wood-pulp paper work and turn wove paper wrong font (w. f .) Z zinc etching AND BUILDING TERMS applique apse apsidal araeostyle architrave arris ashlar astragal atrium B bagnio baldachin baluster balustrade bandlet baptistery ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING TERMS 37 cinque cento cinquefoil clapboard clear story coffer dam cleat cogging collar beam Coliseum colonnade conduit coping corbel Corinthian cornice corona corridor countersink cowl creche crevasse crocket crypt cubiculum culvertail cupola curtail step cushion rafter cyrna cymatium dado dais dentil diastyle dome Doric dormer 38 ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING TERMS dormitory dovetail dowel dripstone easing echinus embrasure encarpus entablature entasis escutcheon Etruscan extrados F facade fascia feather edge fillet fish-plate flashings fretwork frieze furring G gable gargoyle girder glyph griffe grille ground plan grout guilloche gudgeon gusset gypsum gyration H hammer beam hand rail hip knob hip roof hypethral hypogeum hyposcenium impost intercolumniation intertie intrados Ionic J jamb jetty joggle K kingpost kiosk L labels lattice lean to lesche lintel lobby loggia louver lunette M mansard marquetry matched mausoleum metallic lathing ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING TERMS 39 metope mezzanine mitering modillion module molding moment monopteron monotriglyph Moresque mortise mosaic mullion muntin mural mutule nave newel niche nogging nor ma ogee oriel ovolo P pagoda palanquin Pantheon pantile parapet pargeting parquetry partition studs party wall patera pedestal pediment pelasgic pendent pendentive peri drome peristyle perpend perron perspective pilaster pillar pinnacle piscina pise planchers plinth podium pommel portal portcullis porte cochere portico portiere postern propylaeum propylon proscenium prostyle puncheon purlin putlog pycnostyle quarry queen post quoin 40 ARCHITECTURAL AND BUILDING TERMS R rabbet ramp rampant refectory reglet Renaissance reredos reveals rez-de-chaussee ridge pole rood beam rosette rotunda rubble ruelle sanctum Saracenic sarking scamillus scantling scapus scotia screed scutcheon segmental shearing sheathing shore shoring sill skirting board skylight soffit span spandrel splay spout staircase stanchel stanchions stile stirrup stress strip pilaster stringer strut stucco studding stylobate sudatory surbase T talus templet tenon terra cotta tesselar tessellated tie-beams timber built tongued and grooved torsel torus tracery transept transom treefoil treenail treillage triforum triglyph trimmer arch truss turret AUTOMOBILE TERMS 41 tusk tympanum U underpinning V vallum veneer veranda verge voussoir W wainscot wall straps weathering weather strips weepers winders AUTOMOBILE TERMS accelerator pedal acetylene generator lamp, tank aluminum bodies, castings, solder ammeter angle-steel frame annunciator antifreezing solution antiskids bevel-gear transmission bevel pinion bibb cock binding post brake drum brake lever brake shoe brazing compound calcium carbide cam-shaft carbureter spray nozzle case hardening centrifugal pump change-speed gears channel-steel frame chassis (pronounced, shah- see) chauffeur (pronounced, sho- fur) check-valve clutch drum commutator shaft compensating carbureter compression relief valves contact breaker countershafts cork inserts cotter pins crosshead cylinder head differential gears disk distributor shaft double side-chain drive double half elliptic drag link driving pinion 42 AUTOMOBILE TERMS driving shaft dynamo -electric generator E electrodes electrolyte equalizing mechanism exhaust M magneto-electric generator magneto-shaft gear make-and-break ignition system mufflers muffler gasket N non-vibrator coil float feed four-cycle engine full elliptic odometers G P piston rings garage gasoline tank pipe couplings planetary gear H plunger spring half elliptic poppet half-time shaft poppet valve high-tension magneto preignition honeycomb radiator pressed-steel frame hub-cap drive primary circuit progressive-gear trans- I mission idler-gear stud propeller shafts igniter springs induction coil inlet- valve cam quarter elliptic insulation R reversing yoke shaft J reversing gear jump-spark ignition S L secondary circuit landaulet sector and shaft lay shaft selective-gear system limousine bodies sliding gear low-tension magneto spark coil lubricators spark gap BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL TERMS 4a speedometers trunk piston spray-nozzle gasket truss-rod assembly sprocket drums tubular-steel frame spur gear two-cycle engine spur -gear shaft U steering pivots universal joints sun and planet gear v surcharge vaporize T vibrator, or trembler tail light throttling control thrust bearing voltmeter vulcanize vulcanizing solution toggle clevis W tonneau wipe -or touch -spark ignition touring body worm and segment gear tread worm-gear trembler coil wristpins BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL TERMS A assets abstract assignment acceptance at sight accommodation bill attachment account current auditor account sales B accountancy balance sheet accrued acquittance adjustment ad valorem bankruptcy bill of lading bill of sale bona fide after sight agenda allocation breakage allonge budget bursar anent antedate C appraise cancel arrears canvasser 44 BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL TERMS capital stock exchequer caucus excise certified executory chattel clearance F cocket facsimile commission factor commodity fidelity concurrence fiscal year consideration fixtures consignee flat rate consignor forced sales consummated free port copartnership G countermand credentials credit desirability garnish garnishee garnishment D good will days of grace gross weight declaration guaranty del credere demand note I demurrage impost disbursement in trust discount discrepancy dishonored drawback due bill inclusive indemnity indorsee indorsement in blank in favor of dunnage dun infringe inland bill of exchange insolvency E instalment embargo instant (inst.) embarrass intact embezzle integrity en route in transitu entrepot inventory estimate invoice BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL TERMS 45 involved per annum itinerary petty cash . postdate J jobber joint note joint payees power of attorney preemption price current primage L prime exchange leakage procuration liabilities pro forma lien promissory liquidation pro rata list price prorate live paper prospectus long price protest M proximo (prox.) manifest marque, letter of proxy pursuant maturity maximum quarantine minimum quote moneys moral risk R mulcts rebate reconsign N registrar negotiation reimburse net earnings remittance net proceeds renewal non- negotiable requisition notary resources revenue overdrawn risk overstock roster P S partial payment schedule past-due note semiannual payee seriatim 46 ELECTRICAL TERMS set-off tranship shipper tret shrinkage trustee sight draft U silent partner ultimo (ult.) spot sale usance standing subagent V sundries vendor supra protest acceptance via vise T vised tare voidable tariff voucher tentative tonnage W trade discount way bill transaction wharfage transmit without recoi ELECTRICAL TERMS A arcing absolute unit of current armature windings accumulator arrester adapter automatic make and break alternating current ammeter amperage back turns of armature ampere balanced load ampere-conductor bar armature ampere-hour bichromate ampere-turn bipolar amplification blow-out amplifier boosters angle of lead braided wire annunciator breaking down of insulation anode breaking in aperiodic galvanometer break-down switch arc dynamo break ELECTRICAL TERMS 47 bridging brushes bucking building up of dynamos burn-out bus -bar bushing butt joint C caloric calories candle foot candlepower capacity cataphoresis cathode central-station lighting change-over switch characteristic curve circuit-breaker circular mil closed circuit clearance clockwise motion closed-coil winding coefficient coherer collector rings commercial efficiency commutation commutator composite-field dynamo condenser conductivity conduit consonance contacts continuous current controller converters cores corrosive coulomb counter electromotive force cross-bonding cross -over switch cross-talk cut-out cyanide of potassium cycle D deflection delta connections demagnetization demagnetize depolarization dielectric direct current direct-reading galvanometer distributing points double -pole double -throw switch drop annunciator drop of potential duplex dynamo dynamic dyne ebonite eddy currents efficiency electrician electrochemical electrode electrodynamic 48 ELECTRICAL TERMS electrogalvanize high-tension system electromagnet holophane electromotive force horsepower electrolytic hot-wire ammeter electrolysis hydroelectric electrolyze hydrometer electro poion hysteresis electrostatic I electrotherapeutics equalizer impedance incandescence erg incandescent exciter indicator card F inductance factor of safety inductive faradic installation feeder connections insulation fender integrating meter field intermediate distributing filament frame five-wire system interrupter flaming-arc lamp iron fluoroscopic screen iron-clad rheostat flux Foucault currents J frequency fuse block joule junction box G K galvanic kilowatt galvanometer Geissler tubes kinetic kinetoscope generator L gram lag gramaphone laminated ground circuit lamp hour guy rod lead H leakage harmonics lightning arrester henry live wire ELECTRICAL TERMS 49 load factor outlet box lux overload M P magnetic parallel- series circuit magnetic flux paramagnetic magnetic lines of force periodicity magnetic saturation phase magnetism photometer magneto pitch mains platinum megohm polarity micanite polarization microhm polyphase microfarad positive (pos.) pole milliampere potential moisture grounds power factor molecule Prony brake monocyclic system pull-off motor-generator set multicircuit arc dynamo multiple-series circuit multiple-unit system quadruplex quarter phase multi polar multi voltage radial truck radio active N radiograph negative (neg.) reactance neutral (neu.) receiver non -arcing rectifier non-conductor reentrant O relays off-position reluctance ohm repulsion ohmmeter residual Ohm's law resistance okonite retardation opalescent rheostat open circuit Roentgen radiograph oscillator rosette 50 ELECTRICAL TERMS rotary converter telephone rotor tension Ruhmkorff coil terminal voltage s thermoelectric sal ammoniac thermopile thermostat segment selector three-phase system selenium three-way switch self-induction semaphore separate excitation series-multiple circuit short circuit shunt coil simplex torque transformer translucent transmission transmitter transposition two-phase circuit single-phase system U single-phase motors undirectional sinusoidal currents unipolar socket V solenoid vacuum sounder vector diagram sparking vernier spark gap vitrified specific conductance volatilize splice voltage static voltaic stator voltmeter step-down transformer vulcabeston step-up transformer vulcanized fiber storage battery W switchboard watt synchronism watt-hour efficiency synchronize wattmeter synchronous motors Wheatstone bridge T wiring tap wires wounds teaser X telegraph X-ray FIRE-INSURANCE TERMS FIRE-INSURANCE TERMS inflammable 51 adjacent building insurability alienation iron-safe clause appraisement L appraisers arson lightning clause average clause M averaged premium mansard additional B mechanics' privilege base rates moral hazard blanket form builder's risk C N night privileges canceled short rate common-carrier liability open stock communications other insurance permitted concealment (o. i. p.) conflagration P contributory negligence parapet walls D partial loss defective construction perpetual policy diminishing clause physical hazard discount losses preferred risk distribution-average clause prohibited risks E proof of loss eremacausis pro rata cancelation exposure charges Q extra hazardous F quinquennial valuation fire-stopped R fire underwriters resident against law fire-walls rate for revocation floating policies risks not under fire-depart- H ment protection hazardous articles and trade S I shifting risk incendiary single occupancy 52 LEGAL PHRASES sole- tenancy risk space clause spontaneous combustion sprinkler clause stand pipes storage of volatile oils subrogation clause U unearned premium unoccupied privilege LEGAL A abatement of suit abstract of title accessory after the fact accessory before the fact accessory contract accommodation acceptor accommodation indorser accord and satisfaction accumulative evidence accumulative judgment acknowledgment of deed acquittal of criminals action at law adverse possession affidavit of defense aiding and abetting antenuptial agreement arrest of judgment articles of copartnership assault and battery assault with intent assessment of damages assignment of dower assignment of error assignment of mortgage unprotected structural iron- work use and occupancy V vacancy privilege valued policies W waiver of liability watchman-and-clock clause working- material clause PHRASES attestation clause attesting witness attorney of record B bailable action bail bond bailments and carriers bench warrant bill of complaint bill of costs bill of exceptions bill of exchange bill of indictment bill of interpleader bill of particulars bill of sale bond of indemnity breach of the peace brief and findings brief of title burden of proof butts and bounds case certified case stated LEGAL PHRASES 53 cause of action challenging a juror chancery practice charitable trusts charter party chattel mortgage choses in action choses in possession circumstantial evidence citation of authorities civil action civil law civil pleadings civil practice code of procedure code practice code of civil procedure collateral facts collateral issue collateral security common bail common carrier common counts common law compounding a felony conclusions of law conclusive evidence concurrent jurisdiction of equity confession of judgment confidential communications conflict of laws consent and order consequential damages constitutional limitations constructive notice contempt of court contingent legacy contraband of war contract of hire corporeal hereditaments counteraffidavit court of appeals costs in equity court martial criminal action criminal conversation criminal evidence criminal law criminal pleading criminal practice criminal procedure D decree in equity delivery of deed dilatory plea discontinuance and dismissal discretionary trusts documentary evidence domestic relations easement of access ecclesiastical law eleemosynary corporations elementary law elements of equity eminent domain enjoin and restrain equitable assets equitable remedies equity of redemption equity jurisprudence equity pleading estate in common estate in fee simple estate of joint tenancy estate in remainder 54 LEGAL PHRASES estate in severalty impeachment of waste estate at will implied contract estoppel certificate implied promise executory contract indemnity bond executory devise indenture executory estate indictment executory trust indirect evidence exemplary damages in re expert evidence insolvent debtor F insolvency laws failure of consideration interlocutory decree failure of issue international law failure of record false pretense j felonious intent joinder of actions feoffment to use joinder of defendants finding of facts joinder in demurrer forcible entry joinder of issue forcible trespass joinder of offenses foreclosure proceeding joint action foreign attachment joint contract fraud and deceit joint executor fraud, malice, and intent judgment creditor fraudulent conveyance judgment debtor G judgment note goods and chattels goods, wares, and merchan- judicial notice judicial procedure jury panel grandjury justifying bail grand larceny L guardian ad litem guardian and ward landlord and tenant lay corporations H leading cases habeas corpus letter of marque and reprisal hearsay evidence letters of administration I letters patent impairment of contract letters rogatory impanel a jury letters testamentary LEGAL PHRASES 55 libel and slander life annuity limitation of actions limitation of estates limited divorce liquidated damages local action Magna Charta malfeasance in office malice aforethought malice prepense malicious mischief malicious prosecution maritime contract maritime law maritime tort market overt market value martial law master in chancery matter at issue measure of damages mechanic's lien medical jurisprudence merger of rights mesne process mesne profits misdemeanor misjoinder of actions misjoinder of parties mixed larceny moot court moot point motion for non-suit mortgage deed municipal corporation municipal law natural presumptions negotiable instruments net profits net earnings nisi prius next of kin nominal damages non-assumpsit non est inventus non-feasance in office non-joinder of parties non-resident plaintiff non-suit notarial certificate notary public note of protest notes of issue notice of appeal notice of appearance notice of dishonor notice of execution notice of motion notice of trial notice to quit nuncupative will O objection overruled objection sustained orginal jurisdiction oyer and terminer P paper book parol contracts parol demurrer parol evidence parol lease party wall 56 LEGAL PHRASES pecuniary legacy promissory note penal code public policy peremptory challenge punitive damages peremptory defence putative marriage peremptory exception peremptory mandamus peremptory plea quasi contract perpetual injunction quasi corporations personal chattels quit-claim deed personal covenant quo-warranto writ personal estate R personal property real action petit jury real contract petit larceny (petty larceny) real property plaintiff in error plea in abatement rebutting evidence redirect examination plea in avoidance recross examination plea in bar referee's deed point reserved poor debtor laws registrar in bankruptcy release of dower poor debtor's oath remanding a cause power of attorney removal of causes preliminary injunction preliminary proof presumptive evidence presumption of fact rescinding contract rescission of contracts residuary devisee residuary legatee presumption of law resulting trust primary evidence retroactive law primary obligation return day private carrier reversionary interest private corporation revised statutes privileged communication riparian rights privity of contract Roman law privity of estate rule of law privity of possession rule of practice probate of will proceedings in equity 8 proceedings in rem salvage charges prohibition, writ of satisfaction piece LEGAL PHRASES 57 scandalous matter search warrant secondary conveyance secondary evidence security for costs ship's manifest slander and libel sound and disposing mind special demurrer special plea in bar special pleading special proceedings special verdict specific offenses specific performance state insolvent laws statute of fraud statute of limitations statutory crimes stay of execution stay of proceedings stoppage in transitu striking a jury subornation of perjury subpoena subscribing witness summary convictions summary proceedings summons and complaint supplemental bill supplementary proceedings taxation of costs tax levy tax lien tax sale tax search title deed to wit transitory actions trial by jury trial of the cause true bill trustee's deed trustee process U unliquidated damages unilateral contract V vendor's lien vendue sale vested and contingent voluntary bankruptcy voluntary conveyance voluntary manslaughter W warrant of arrest warrant of attorney warranty deed weight of evidence witness stand writ of certiorari writ of detinue writ of ejectment writ of error writ of execution writ of formedon writ of inquiry writ of mainprise writ of mandamus writ of replevin 58 LEGAL TERMS LEGAL TERMS A bankruptcy abettor abeyance abjure abrogation abstract barratry barrister battery beneficiary bequeath accessory C accomplice capias acquittal caveat ademption cede adjournment champerty adjudication circuit court administrator citation administratrix clientele adverse codicil affidavit cognovit affirm collusion aforesaid commitment alleged committitur allocutor common carrier ally compromise amnesty connivance ancillary coparcener animus corespondent annulment corroboration appellant costs in equity appellate counter claim appellee counter plea apportionment covenant arraign coverture assumpsit cumulative attainder cross-bill attestation custody attornment D averment decree B defeasance bailment defendant LEGAL TERMS 59 demurrer forfeiture deponent forgery deposition G detention dictum garnishee disaffirmance gist guilt disclaimer discretionary H dissolution hereinafter distrain hereinbefore divestiture hereunto docket homicide documentary hypothesis domicile I donee immaterial dower dowry dowress impeachment impleaded inchoate duress incompetent indefeasible elegit indemnity enfeoff indictment entail indivisum equity innuendo escheat inquisition escrow interlocution evidence interpleader executrix intervener extinguishment intestate extortion irrevocable extradition J F jurat facias jurisdiction facsimile jurisprudence feasance L felony laches fiat larceny fiduciary legatee 60 levy litigation lunacy M malfeasance maligner mandamus mandatory mandate manifesto misdemeanor misfeasance misjoinder mitigate mittimus moiety mulcted muniments N nominal non-feasance non-joinder non-suit novation nullify nuncupative O ordinance ouster outlawed P penalty pending penitentiary perpetration pettifogger piracy plaintiff LEGAL TERMS pleadings plenipotentiary postea precipe preemption prerogative primogeniture privies probate prohibition, writ of prosecution purview R ratification rebuttal recognizance recoupment recrimination redemption redress referee rejoinder relevancy remand remittitur replevin replication reprieve reprisal rescind rescissioner. respondent retainer reversion revoke S scilicet (ss.) scrivener sequestration severalty statutory stipulation suborn subpoena subrogation sufferance supersedeas surplusage surrebutter surrejoinder suzerainty talesman testamentary testator testatrix LIFE-INSURANCE TERMS tort feasor triable tripartite trover U ultimatum uncontro verted untenable usufruct 61 venire venue versus vested in W waiver writ LIFE-INSURANCE TERMS C actual cash value actuarial actuary adjustment accumulation advancing age allowance alternation annual dividend annuities annuity certain assessment assignee assurance assured B beneficiary blue note casualty child's endowment commutation columns condition contingency continuous instalment contribution annual dividend conterminous cost of insurance cumulative current death losses D decrease death claims deferred annuities deferred dividend deferred temporary annuity 62 LIFE-INSURANCE TERMS discount liability dissolution lien notes distribution life ordinary E limited payment life limited tontine economic endowment ordinary equitable cash value expiration loading logarithms longevity low death rate expire expectation of life M expected mortality matured endowment F maturity five-year dividend mortality, standard of free tontine mortuary forfeiture mortuary dividend formula mutual fraudulent representation N funds net risk G net value grace interest non-forfeiture gross premium non -hazard guaranteed cash value non-participating I incontestable ordinary life increase yearly P indemnity industrial instalment annuity instalment option intermediate paid-up policy participating post tontine premium return present value issuance prior death issues probability J pure endowment joint life R L rating lapse rebate level-premium companies renewable term MARINE-INSURANCE TERMS 63 reinsurance reserved combined experi- ence 4% reversion reversionary bonus reversionary dividend revived risk self-insurance semi tontine seven-year equalization single life single premium standard straight life surplus surrender temporary annuities term extension terminal net values terminating options term paid-up tontine investment V valuations W whole life MARINE-INSURANCE TERMS abandonment additional premium advances on freight arrival out assured average general and par- ticular B barratry bottomry bond C cancelation captain's draft cargo charter party closed declaration coinsurers collision contributory value country damage D deviation E English conditions expiration of risk exposure extension of risk flotsam 6 general average bond H hull I insurers invoice cost 64 J jetsam jettison L leakage Lloyd's Register M moral hazard MECHANICAL TERMS profits on charter provisional declaration R railroad risk recoverable reinsurance reinsurers return premium on deck open application open policies overdue overinsured P part closing partial loss perils of the sea port risk salvage seaworthiness stranded stress of weather supercargo U under deck underwriters V voyage policy A abscissa absorber acceleration accumulator adhesion adiabatic alloy aluminum amalgam ammonia analyzer angularity annealing anthracite apex MECHANICAL TERMS apparatus asbestos auger automatic B Babbitt back gear backlash Baume bearings bevel gear billet bituminous blast pipe blower MECHANICAL TERMS 65 boring bar corrosion brazing corrugated breeching counterbore bronze countershaft burnisher crane crank-shaft C crosshead calipers crown bar calking crown sheet cam crucible cape chisel crystallize carbon dioxide cupola carbonic acid cutter bar carbonize cyanide carburize cylinder case hardening D casting centigrade centrifugal centripetal chamfer diagonal diaphragm dead center deflector deformation chill chucking lathe chute board denatured die sinking differential clamp clearance dividers dolly clevis draftsman clutch coefficient cohesion cold chisel draw-plate drill press drop-forged duplex compression dynamics concentric concrete condenser eccentric cone pulley ejector connecting-rod elasticity converter elongation coordinates equilateral MECHANICAL TERMS equilibrium H escapement hanger exhaust harvester expansion hasp extraction headstock horsepower (H. P.) hydraulic face plate hydrometer Fahrenheit hydrostatic ferrule hyperbola filing hypotenuse flexure fluted I flux igniter forging impact friction indicator friction clutch inertia fulcrum ingot funnel injector fuse inspirator fusible plug intake fusion interlocking interurban G isothermal gage-cock (or gauge-cock) J gaggers galvanize gasket jig journal gear-wheel L generator laboratory gooseneck ladle gouge lagscrew governor lateral graphite lathe graphitic lead screw gravity lever gridiron leverage gudgeon longitudinal gyroscope lubrication MECHANICAL TERMS 67 lubricant lug M magnesia mandrel manganese mechanism mesh metallurgy micrometer milling machine miter gear momentum N nippers O open hearth ordinate output P packing parabola parallel pawl periphery petrol phosphorus pickle pig iron pillow-block pincers pinion piston planer pliers plumb-bob pneumatic portable producer profiling propeller propulsion pulley pyrometer R rasp ratchet reaction reamer reciprocal rectangle rectifier reducer reflectoscope refrigeration regenerative regulator reverberatory reversible reversing gear revolve rivet rocker-arm rock-shaft rotation S safety valve salinometer saponify scrap scrubber separator shafting shank shaper 68 RAILROAD TERMS sheave templet shim tensile strength shrinkage tension shuttle throttle silicon toggle joint slag traction sledge trajectory skimmer transmission slide valve transverse slotter trip shaft socket trunnion soldering iron tuyere specific gravity (sp. gr.) tweezers spelter v spindle spline spoke shave vacuum valve gear vaporization spruce vaporizer spur gearing valve rod stationary velocity stress stufnngbox vibration superheated vise swage block W swivel warding file weld T winch tangential windlass tailstock worm -hob tamping wrench temper wrought RAILROAD TERMS A air-hose gasket abutment air line accommodation train air signal adjustment of claim alinement and grade air brake, graduated release angle bar air coupling angle cock RAILROAD TERMS audible signals concession automatic block conductor's valve automatic signals connecting points auxiliary reservoir consignment consignee baggagemaster ballast consigned construction department belt line L _j.l- controlling grade counterbalance bertn betterments couplers, automatic crated bill of lading (B. L.) crosshead billed in error cross -ties billing clerk culverts block-signal system curve resistance blockade custom-house inspection box car . . brakeman brake shoe brassing cylinder cocks cylinder heads breakage D bridge pits broad gauge buffet car bullnose bumpers danger signal day coaches deck-lattice bridge deadhead (D. H ) debris C deflection caboose demurrage carded derailment carload (C. L.) descending grade cargo destination car-mile diaphragm sheet carrier's risk (C. R.) differential lines cattle guards disability claim agent discriminate combination cars dispatcher commutation disposition of goods compartment cars distributing valve competing lines diversion 70 RAILROAD TERMS dockage fast mail double first-class (D. 1) fish-plates double header fixed signals draft plate flagging drawbar flag stops drawbridge flange drawbar pull flat car draw -head flat wheel draw -link flying switch drawing-room car folder drip pipes foot-board driving wheels form number driving-wheel center free on board (F. O. B.) dry pipe freightage dumped frog E G eastbound traffic general solicitor eccentric rods girder rails eccentric blades gondola cars eccentric straps grade crossing electric locks grading electropneumatic grubbing embankment guard-rail embargo H embedded hand car engine truck headlight enrouted hopper-bottom cars equalize hot box equalizer household goods (H. H.) equipment I excess baggage excursion rates injector i__j expense bill (E. B.) extension extension front end miana interlocking switch interchangeable eyebars inspirator in transit F invoiced valuation facing-point lock itinerary RAILROAD TERMS 71 J journal-box observation car junction box oscillation outside line K overcharge (O. C.) knocked down (K. D.) overhead crossing L owner's risk (O. R.) less than carload (L. C. L.) P lighterage packing limitation palace cars limited express parlor cars limited tariff rates parabola girder local traffic part carload lot lubrication participating carriers lubricator paymaster perishable freight M petticoat pipe main line pilot maintenance piston rod manifest plate -girder deck master mechanic pony trucks mileage pooling minimum weight (min wt.) prepaid (P. P.) merchandise primage misloaded car proportionate rates missent Pullman car mixed trains mogul R motive power railway mail service motor axle bearing rebate refund N reconsign net weight redeemable no overcharges (no/oc) refrigerator car no undercharges (no/uc) released (rel.) notation reload notify shippers reship not otherwise specified (N. reissuing 0. S.) reverse lever 72 RAILROAD TERMS right of way standard time roadbed standpipe roadmaster state rates rolling stock state line round-trip tickets stock car routes stop-over running board strapped, sealed, and carded running time (S. S. & C.) stringer S stub switch sand box superheated schedule supers true ture scalper switchback seaboard switch gate sealed and carded switch lights section boss switch stand section hand semaphore T set up (S. U.) tamping shims tariff shipper's load and count tee rails (T rails) (S. L. & C.) telescope shipper's load and tally tender (S. L. & T.) termini short haul terminus shortage on shipment terminal shipyard terminal points side ride third rail side rods three times first class (3t.l.) side tracked throttle side swipe through bill sidings through-car service signal lights through passenger traffic sleepers tide water smash up tie-plate smoke box time freight spring buffer time card split-point switch time table spur time manifest station TITLES OF RAILROAD OFFICIALS 73 tissue copy tonnage ton-mile torpedo tracer trackage track bolts train dispatcher trailing switch train-mile train order traverse transit transcontinental transportable transportation transshipment transmission transmission bar treads trestle truck bolster trunk line truss turnouts turntable two times first class (2 t. 1.) U unclaimed up grade V valuation, invoiced vertical draw-head vestibule train via all rail visible signal W water plug water tank water gauge washout way bill (W. B.) weigher's certificate welded joints west bound wharfage wheel cover wheel guard whistling post wrecking crew Y yardmaster Z zigzag TITLES OF RAILROAD OFFICIALS Asst. G. P. & T. A. Assist- G. B. A. General ant General Passenger and Ticket Agent Asst. P. T. M. Assistant Passenger Traffic Manager Com'l Agt. C ommercial Agent D. F. A. Division Freight Agent Agent G. E. F. A. General Eastern Freight Agent Gen. Supt. General Super- intendent G. E. P. A. General Eastern Passenger Agent 74 REAL-ESTATE TERMS G. F. A. General Freight Agent G. F. & P. A. General Freight & Passenger Agent G. M., Gen. Mgr. General Manager G. P. A., Gen. Pas. Agt. General Passenger Agent G. P. & T. A. General Pas- senger and Ticket Agent G. T. A., Gen. Tk. Agt. General Ticket Agent L. S. A. Live Stock Agent Mng. Dir. Managing Direc- tor N. E. F. A. New England Freight Agent P. T. M., Pas. Traf. Mgr. Passenger Traffic Manager S. F. A. Soliciting Freight Agent T. F. A. Traveling Freight Agent T. M., Traf. Mgr. Traffic Manager T. P. A. Traveling Pas- senger Agent T. S. F. A. Traveling Solic- iting Freight Agent REAL-ESTATE TERMS abandonment abstract of title abutters accretion accounting proceedings acknowledgment adjournment adjustment adverse possession affidavit of title alienation appearance appurtenances assess assigns forever assignment of mortgage attornment auctioneer's fee bargain and sale deed beam right beneficiary bill of sale blanket search blanket mortgage bondsman building line building loan agreement cancelation clause center line of the block chattel, real closing of title collateral inheritance tax commissioner of deeds confirmatory deed REAL-ESTATE TERMS 75 consideration encumbered consanguinity enhanced value contiguous equity of redemption contingent estate entail conveyance escheat coparcenary estoppel certificate corporal property eviction corporation acknowledg- executor's deed ment F corporation deed fee simple corporation mortgage fee tail court of records fence variations county clerk's certificate feoffment to uses couchant fief covenant first mortgage curtilage foreclosure D freehold decedent frontage declaration of trust full covenant and warranty deeds of trust deed default G defeasance grant delinquent tenants grantee delivery of deed ground rent demesne guarantor demise guarantee detached H devise habendum devisee heirs and assigns disseizin hereditaments dower estate I duress dummy bondsman inalienable incumbrance E indefeasible estate of inherit- easement ance ejectment indemnity emblements indenture encroachment instalment, semiannual 76 REAL-ESTATE TERMS J permanent loan joint tenancy perpetuity jointure personal property appurte- judgment case nant to possession L lateral support power of attorney power of appointment leasehold legal representatives lessee power of sale power of substitution lessor premises priority letters of administration prior lien levant privilege of prepayment liber proof by subscribing witness life tenant lineal descendants liquidated damages prothonotary purchase money lis pendens M quit-claim deed mandatory injunction R mechanic's lien messuage realty metes and bounds receiver's deed mortgagee receivership mortgagor recording tax mortmain recording fees record lines N record title nominal consideration reddendum register's office O objections to title release of part of mortgaged premises obligee remise obligor renewal owelty of partition rescission P residuary legatee partition suit restriction against nuisance party wall reversionary interest payable monthly in advance riparian rights REAL-ESTATE TERMS 77 s tenure satisfaction piece search of title testator title by accretion seizin title company's report situate stipulation trespass trustee under the will subtenant U subject to any state of facts under tenant which an accurate survey usufruct would show V successors surrogate valuation v vendee y vendor T violation tenant at will W tenancy at sufferance waiver tenancy in severalty tenement-house department warranty tenendum Y tender yielding and paying WALL STREET, BANKING, AND BROKERAGE TERMS A assessable "A" bond assimilated abatement at call abrasion at even absorbed average balances accrued dividend averaging accrued interest actionary B advice back spread agio backwardation agiotage banco allotment bargain hunter amortization of premium barren money arbitrager bear market arbitration of exchanges betterment assented bid and asked 78 WALL-STREET, BANKING, bill of exchange curb market bobtail pool currency bonus book value D bourse dabbling broken lot day of maturity budget debenture bucket shop decline bulge defalcation bull default bullion deferred buyer one deficit buyer two depositaries buyer's option depreciation discretionary C dishonored call loan dormant carrying charges drawee certificate of deposit certification E charter earnest money chattel mortgage ex-coupon clearing ex-dividend (x div.) clearing house exchanges ex-interest closed out extension (ext.) collateral comptroller F concession fiduciary consols fiscal agents contango fixed debt contingent flat continuing agreement flotation convertible bonds flurry "corner" for the long account corporate bonds futures counter signature cover, to G coupon bonds "giver up" cumulative granger roai AND BROKERAGE TERMS H overloaded hedge "own paper" hypothecation P I par value indemnify pass book incorporation pass dividend interest earnings paying teller interim certificate pegged penalty J premium joint stock preferred (pref.) K privilege kiting puts and calls pyramiding L "lame duck" Q quotation legals letter of credit (L./C.) R levy rallies limited order remitter limited partnership reacts long on redeemable bonds remargining M manipulation rehypothecate repudiation margin mixed collateral mixed loan respondentia rigged rights monetary s N scrip nipper (Np.) set of exchanges shaking down option, buyer's shaking out option, seller's seigniorage overcapitalization settling day overcertification shearing lambs overdraft shorts overhead sinking fund 79 80 COMMONLY USED FOREIGN solvency traveler's checks specie trustee account split splitting commission U spreads "us checks" straddled usance stringency stock jobbing V stop order voting trust subsidy surety W surplus waiver "sweetening" a loan wash sales watering T "when issued" tailer or trailer wide opening tertiary wide price tickerosis wiped out time bargain withdrawn COMMONLY USED FOREIGN WORDS AND PHRASES A alma mater alumni amende honorable animus anno Domini ante bellum apropos au fait au revoir GENERAL TERMS B beau monde bete noire billet doux blase bona fide bon jour bon mot bon soir bon ton WORDS AND PHRASES 81 bon ami emeritus bon voyage en arriere encore C en deshabille cabine de luxe en masse carte blanche en rapport casus belli en route charge d'affaires en suite chef-d'oeuvre ennui chiaroscuro ensemble cornme il faut entre nous concierge entree confrere esprit de corps connoisseur et cetera coup d'etat ex cathedra costume de rigueur ex officio D extempore data (singular, datum) debris exeunt expose de trop F debut facsimile decollete facile princeps demoiselle faux pas denouement fete dernier ressort finale deshabille finis desideratum fleur-de-lis detour devoir G dilettante garcon dos-a-dos genre douceur gratis dramatis persona? H E habitat e pluribus unum habitue eclat hauteur elite honorarium embonpoint hors de combat 82 COMMONLY USED FOREIGN I N ibidem naivete ignis fatuus n< impedimenta nee (feminine) impromptu noblesse oblige in statu quo nom de plume inamorata nonchalance incognito nota bene (N. B.) ingenue nous verrons in medias res insouciance instanter omnes inter alia on dit interim onus ipse dixit outre L P lese-majeste" par excellence litterateur passe locum tenens passim M penchant Magna Charta magnus opus mal de mer per annum per capita per diem Mardi Gras per se persona non grata marque petit masseur post meridiem masseuse post mortem maximum melange melee menage post prandial poste restante prima donna pro forma meum et tuum pro rata minimum modiste modus operandi pro tempore prote'ge' mon cher Q ma chere (feminine) quantum libet multum in parvo quasi WORDS AND PHRASES 83 qui vive quota R recherche* regime rendezvous requiescat in pace resume retrousse" role ruse de guerre S sanctum sanctorum sang-froid sans souci savoire faire scripsit secundum artem selon les regies semper idem siecle sine die sine qua non sobriquet sotto voce stet sub rosa T terra firma tete-a-tete to turn tou jours pret tout ensemble U ubi supra ultimatum ultra V vade mecum . verbatim et literatim via vice versa vis-a-vis viva voce LEGAL TERMS a fortiori a mensa et thoro a posteriori a priori a vinculo matrimonii ab initio absente reo actio in personam actio in rem ad finem ad infmitum ad interim ad rem alias alibi amicus curias assumpsit autre droit autrefois acquit B banco bona gestura 84 COMMONLY USED FOREIGN bona gratia E bonus jedux e converse brevia judicialia ejusdem generis Q elegit ex alium capias ex contractu causa mortis ex curia causa proxima ex delicto caveat ex parte caveat emptor ex post facto certiorari cestui que trust ex rel, cestui que vie F compos mentis felo-de-se contra bonos mores fieri facias coram non judice flagrante delicto corpus delicti functus officio crimen falsi cul de sac G curia advisari vult gestio D gratis dictum damnum absque injuria gravamen de bene esse H de bonis non habeas corpus de facto habendum de gratia de jure I de lunatico inquirendo idem sonans de novo in actu de son tort in conspectu fori dedimus potestatem in curia del credere in custodia legis delectus personae in esse detinet in extenso devisavit vel non in extremis dictum (plural, dicta) in flagrante delicto dies non in foro conscientia donatio mortis causa in future duces tecum in invitum WORDS AND PHRASES 85 in loco loco parentis in pan delicto locus delicti in perpetuum locus in quo in personam locus penitentiae in posse in propria persona M in re mala fides in rem mala prohibita in situ malum in se in terrorem mania a potu in toto manu forti in transitu modus vivendi infra dignitatem mortis causa injuria absque damno inops consilii N inter nos ne exeat inter se ne plus ultra inter vivos nihil debet interesse termini nil dicit ipso facto nolens volens ipso jure nolle prosequi J non compos mentis jure gentium jure humano jus accrescendi jus civile jus disponendi jus gentium non constat non est inventus non prosequi tur (non. pros.) non sequitur (non. seq.) nudum pactum nulla bona nunc pro tune L laches lapsus calami obiter dictum lapsus linguae onus probandi lex fori lex cloi contractus P lex pendens pari materia lex scripta pari passu lex talionis pari ratione lex terras parol 86 COMMONLY USED FOREIGN particeps criminis S pendente lite sans recours per contra sauve qui peut per curiam scienter per stirpes scire facias petitio principii se defendento posse comitatus stare decisis post diem statu quo post litem motam suggestio falsi prima facie sui generis pro bono publico sui juris pro confesso suppressio veri pro tanto probatum est T proces verbal tarde venit tempus continuum Q tenendum quantum meruit tort quantum sufficit turpis causa quantum valebat quaere U quare impedit uberrima fides qui tarn ultra vires quid pro quo una animo quo animo ut infra quo jure ut supra quo tarn uti possidetis quo warranto V R venire facias rectus in curia venue res angusta domi versus res gestae vi et armis res inter alios vinculum matrimonii res judicata voir dire res public ae vox populi respondeat superior vulnus immedicabile WORDS AND PHRASES 87 CULINARY TERMS A H a la carte hachis a la mode haricot a 1'etuvee hors d'oeuvre au gratin huitres assiette volante L B legumes beignets liaison boeuf, bifteck lyonnaise bouchees bouillon M brochette maitre-d' hotel marinade C cafe noir casserole matelote mayonnaise chartreuse O consomme oeufs pochs compote p coquilles pate" de foie gras cuisine persillade D poissons d'agneau pommes de terre dejeuner potages dinde pot-pourri E puree entrees Q entremets quenelles F fromage R fricandeau ragout rissoles G roux gateau gaufres T gibier table d'hote gratin tourte 88 P UNCTUA TION PUNCTUATION The sole object of punctuation is to make the meaning of language clear. It is much more important to keep this in mind than it is to memorize rules. Rarely will two persons punctuate in exactly the same way. " If a man has an epigrammatic style, he will use more periods than other points. If he thinks in crisp sen- tences, he will punctuate largely with semicolons. If his sentences are long and involved, he will use many commas; if ambiguous, parentheses." So it may be said that we punctuate as we think. In sentences, the comma is used to mark the very slight breaks of connection; the semicolon marks the more decided breaks; the colon marks the still greater breaks; and the period indicates a full stop. The Comma. The comma (,) is properly used not for the purpose of showing w r here pauses are to be made in reading but to present to the eye the proper grammatical con- struction of a sentence, so that a reader cannot fail to per- ceive the intended meaning. The comma is the most impor- tant punctuation point for the letter writer; it is easy to misuse it, and its omission is not so noticeable as the omission of other points; and either misuse or omission is likely to change the entire meaning of language. It is said that some years ago the insertion of a superfluous comma by a clerk, in making the final copy of a tariff bill, caused a loss of many thousands of dollars to the United States. As a general rule, insert a comma after each slight break of connection in the construction of a clause or a sentence. The comma should be used in the following cases: 1. Where there is a distinct division of a sentence where the language branches off, as it were, to introduce an antithesis or a clause in opposition to one preceding. He bought a ticket, but he did not buy anything else. The man should attend to his work, and not depend on others to do it. Education is a conquest, not a bequest. He was dressed well, and he an air of prosperity. PUNCTUATION 89 In the sentence, He bought a ticket and several other things, no comma is required because the thought flows uninter- ruptedly from the beginning to the end. Whenever the thought passes smoothly over to the second clause without break of the idea, no comma is required before the connecting word. It will be observed that in all four of the foregoing examples the final portion cut off by the comma is a sub- ordinate clause, one that could be removed entirely and still leave a complete statement. When in doubt whether or not a clause is merely explanatory and should be cut off by commas, see if it could be lifted out and leave the sen- tence complete as to sense. If it cannot be, the clause is restrictive and should not be cut off. 2. The comma should be used after explanatory or intro- ductory words or clauses when used as they are in the follow- ing examples: However, we did not accept his offer. In reply to your kind letter, I wish to explain why I wrote to you. This being decided, he went his way. If you want to go, a way will be provided. Sometimes the connection between an introductory word or clause and what follows is so close that, in the hurry of writing, required commas are omitted. The comma should be used in such sentences as the following: Finally, let me say that I do not recommend this action. In a case like this, refer the question to the home office. In sentences such as Now, I want to tell you, You see, it is my -plan, the commas are used properly, for now and you see are used as expletives. Do not, however, conclude that these same words and clauses must in every instance be pointed off by a comma or by commas, for a slight transposition of elements may make the connection so close that separation by commas would be incorrect. In the foregoing sentences, Finally and In a case like this have been transposed from their logical positions to the beginning of the sentences, which necessi- 90 PUNCTUATION tated the cutting off. No comma is required in these sentences. Let me say finally that I do not recommend this action. Refer the question to the home office in a case like this. Many letter writers become so accustomed to placing a comma after however, yet, well, etc. in certain constructions that they fall into error and place commas immediately after these words when they are used in constructions like How- ever much we wanted to come, etc. 3. Usually the comma is required before and after appositive and contrasted elements, parenthetical expres- sions, and interpolated clauses. Milton, a great poet, wrote Paradise Lost. Wheat, not corn, is what we wish to buy. This, it seems to me, is a fair offer. Your letter, which was written on the 4th, was not mailed until the 6th. Marcus Aurelius' admonition, "Let no thing be done at haphazard," is a wise one. In a sentence like We asked him to stay, but knowing that he had many engagements, he declined, it is not necessary to place a comma after but because knowing that we had many engagements is an indispensable introduction to the following matter; it is not a true parenthetical expression. In the sentence, We asked him to stay, but he, with that considera- tion that always characterized him, declined, the thought after he is more independent of the rest of the sentence and is properly set off by commas on both sides. In the sentence, The great president Washington lived at Mount Vernon, the connection is too direct and close for a comma to be required after president. Usage is not uniform in the treatment of such words as too, indeed, also, perhaps, etc. when introduced in a slightly parenthetical manner. Some writers place commas on each side of these words; others do not set them off at all. The letter writer need not bind himself to any hard-and-fast rule, but should feel free to use commas whenever the connection is distinctly broken. 4. The comma is used to indicate omitted words, which are usually connectives. PUNCTUATION 91 He bought a hat; I, a coat. This well-printed, interesting, effective circular. In such a phrase as a modern business man, where mpdern qualifies both business and man and no and is omitted, no comma is required to denote an omission. Neither is a comma required in the poor old fellow. But commas should be used in sentences like these: He was an honest, hearty, well-meaning man. So honest, so particular, so faithful to his duty. 5. Where more than two words or phrases are enumerated and the final pair is connected by and, a comma is required after each enumerated word or phrase except the last and, perhaps, the next to the last. The list included cashiers, clerks, bookkeepers, and stenographers . If the comma were omitted after bookkeepers in the fore- going sentence, the language could be construed as listing only three classes of persons, the last-named being stenog- raphers as well as bookkeepers. Now note another example: His letter was full of blots, slovenly erasures and in- terlineations. The foregoing sentence with its present punctuation indicates that both the erasures and the interlineations were slovenly; and if this is what was meant, no other comma is required, though the sentence would be improved by the omission of the single comma that it contains and the substitution of and in its place. If, however, the writer of the sentence did not mean to imply that the interlineations were slovenly, he should have placed a comma immediately before and, which would have confined the descriptive effect of slovenly to erasures. Although most grammarians give the rule that a comma should always precede and between the last pair of enumerated words, many discriminating writers will not use the comma before and in such constructions as the foregoing unless it is necessary to clearness; these writers would not place a comma after women in the sentence, Men, women and children were there. In the sentence, Men, women and children, all were there, a comma is required after children. 92 PUNCTUATION Where the enumerated words are in pairs and each pair is connected by and, commas should be placed only after the pairs. In the audience were men and women, boys and girls, and infants in the arms of their nurses. Commas are necessary in the following and in all like constructions: I think, my dear sir, that you will agree with us. " In my opinion," said Mr. Brown, "it is not expedient to do it." Suppose we telegraph him, John? When a subject is unusually long, it is sometimes desirable to place a comma after it. That the prices quoted in the catalog we mailed you on the 8th instant are lower than most quotations on the same line of goods, may have escaped your attention. This use of the comma is chiefly in sentences that have several very long subjects. If such a sentence will be clear without the comma, do not use the point. Unimportant commas are sometimes omitted where many commas would be required by strict application of rules. For instance, if too should be interposed somewhere in a sentence near other important commas, the points ordinarily used before and after too might be omitted. In general, if there is no break in the flow of thought, no comma should be used unless clearness demands it. The following are examples of sentences in which a comma is necessary to clearness: Whatever is, is right. I should say that in cases like this, reference should be made to the home office. It is possible to construct a sentence of many lines requir- ing no commas or other punctuation marks except a period at the close. Misconstructions are less likely to occur where too few commas are used than where there are too many. The Semicolon. If a sentence consists of two or more members, each constituting a distinct proposition and yet having dependence on one another, and the conjunction is PUNCTUATION 93 omitted or a greater separation than that afforded by the comma is desired, a semicolon ( ; ) should be used. Wisdom is the principal thing; therefore get wisdom; and with all thy getting, get understanding. Touch not; taste not; handle not. You ask if we will accept. Yes; but this is the last time we shall accept such terms. Sentences similar to the second example are often pointed off by commas when the connection is close and unusual emphasis is not desired. If a sentence consists of groups and some of these groups contain items that must be separated by commas, the groups should be separated by semicolons. Some essentials of good letters are correct construc- tion, spelling, and punctuation; brevity most of the time; and promptness, neatness, clearness, completeness, and courtesy always. He has on his list of customers the F. L. Jones Com- pany, 120 Eighth Street, St. Louis; Smith & Brown, 80 Devonshire Street, Boston; and several other well-known buyers. Note that in the second of the foregoing examples the semicolon is used preceding and, for the break in connection there corresponds to that between St. Louis and Smith & Brown. The semicolon should usually precede such words as namely, to wit, etc. when they are used to introduce an example or a list of simple items. Example: He sold these things; namely, a chair, a table, and a sofa. The semicolon may be used after a complete sentence followed by a clause denoting eontrast or making an inference or an explanation, when such following matter is introduced by a conjunction. It is useless to appeal to him again; for we have done all that can be done. It is to be regretted that so useful a point as the semicolon should be used so sparingly as it is by letter writers. Often, clauses that writers use as separate sentences have a close 94 PUNCTUATION connection with following or preceding matter and should be cut off by a semicolon rather than by a period. The semicolon is also a better point than the comma in many constructions, and is of especial service to writers that have a tendency to construct long sentences. The Colon. Use the colon (:) in the following cases: when introducing a paragraph consisting of more than one complete sentence; after a word or a clause introducing formally a course of reasoning, a series of propositions, or an enumeration of particulars; before a quotation intro- duced formally; and after salutations such as Dear Sir, Gentlemen, etc. at the beginnings of letters. "Formally" is used here for the want of a better word to express the decided absence of a connecting word between an introduc- tion and that which it introduces. The speaker said: We are here, my friends, to pay a tribute to the men that founded this institution. You erred in the following instances: through care- lessness you allowed the mistake to pass unnoticed; when the customer called attention to it, you sent a caustic reply; you failed to apologize when you dis- covered your error. Let us observe what Lord Chesterfield said: "Des- patch is the soul of business." The point- of punctuation that should come between the introductory word or words and what follows depends much on the closeness of connection. In the third of the fore- going examples, the colon is properly used because the break of connection between said and Despatch is a decided one; yet it would be in accordance with the practice of the best punctuators to write There is much truth in the proverb, The longest way round is the shortest way home. And, as stated in a preceding paragraph of this chapter, the semicolon is usually the proper point to use before to wit, for example, namely, etc. in enumerations. The letter writer should cultivate an appreciation of the closeness of connection between elements, and punctuate by reason rather than by rule. A good way of cultivating this appreciation is to read the magazines and books of the best publishing houses, observing critically the method of punctuation. PUNCTUATION 95 Colons should separate the members of a sentence if one or more of those members must be divided by semicolons. Be of good cheer: it is I; be not afraid. A colon is sometimes properly used between two clauses in apposition to each other and not connected by a con- junction. It is an indispensable point in pointing off lan- guage of a deliberate, profound, or learned nature, where deductions are lengthy and have dependence on one another. In a sentence like In the following paragraph we give our reasons for the action, a period should be used at the end, instead of a colon, for the statement is complete. The Period. A period ( . ) should be placed at the end of every completed sentence* that does not require an interro- gation point or an exclamation point; and it should be placed after every abbreviated word unless omitted letters are indicated by an apostrophe, in which case the shortened form is regarded as a contraction and needs no period after it except where it is the last word in a sentence. Doesn't and rec'd are examples of contractions. Where an abbre- viated word ends a sentence, the period placed after it serves also for the usual closing period. The Interrogation Point. All direct questions should have the interrogation point (?) immediately at the close. What are your best terms? When intended questions are in a declarative form, as they sometimes are, the interrogation point is all the more necessary. You will come Tuesday, then? In the sentence, Will you come, and will you be here Tues- day? although two questions are asked, the first has a depend- ence on the last and the one interrogation point at the close is sufficient. If several independent queries are propounded in one sentence, the interrogation point is required after each query. Does he seek money? or favor? or great responsibility? *Some grammarians classify as complete sentences occasional matter cut off by colons* or other points. 96 PUNCTUATION Sentences such as He wanted to know what was the matter do not require an interrogation point. Neither is the interrogation point needed after exclamatory expressions such as O Death, where is thy sting! The interrogation point is used to indicate uncertainty and to show satire. In 1880 (?) he seems to have left New York for the South. This honest (?) man will never do business with us again. The Exclamation Point. This point (!) must on many typewriter keyboards be formed by holding the space bar down and striking first the period and then the apostrophe. It is used sparingly in letter writing to indicate exclamation or emphasis. The Dash. The dash (--) is used to indicate a sudden break or turn in the thought, and is often placed before words or expressions repeated by way of explanation or for the sake of emphasis. The ordinary typewriter keyboard has no dash. Usage favors two hyphens, one struck imme- diately after the other, as the best substitute. Some teachers of typewriting advocate the use of three hyphens: one hyphen certainly does not answer the purpose, but it is astonishing to see how many stenographers try to make the single hyphen fill the place of the dash. This information I wish I had more to send you may prove of some service. Our future is secure ^secure not only as to the field but also against competition. The dash is used to represent pauses made in speaking, and sometimes to denote the elipses of such words as namely, that is, etc. A long dash is used to denote the omission of letters from a name or a word when it is not desirable to write in full. Er er can you do will you do that? There are only two ways of doing business the right way and the wrong way. Mr. B should be watched in this transac- tion. "D you," he said. PUNCTUATION 97 In writing quotations, the dash is sometimes used to set off the name of the author. ''To be great is to be misunderstood. ' --Emerson Stenographers, as a rule, use the dash too freely; and many without a logical reason for so doing use a comma before the dash, place dashes after colons, etc. The use that printers sometimes make of the dash in display work, and that which the typewriter operator makes of it in forming borders, etc., has no proper place in the body-matter punctu- ation of letters. If a letter or other document requires side heads, it is permissible to follow the style of printers and place a period and then a dash after each side head. The Hyphen. The hyphen (-) is used to separate some compound words, and to divide words at the ends of lines. Marks of Parenthesis. The curves, or marks of paren- theses, ( ) , are used to enclose expressions that have no close connection with the words of the sentences into which they are inserted. In our catalog (see page 18, last paragraph), you will find described the article that you desire to buy. The matter within the curves is called a parenthesis and is usually a reference or an explanation: such reference or explanation must be punctuated within the marks just as if standing alone, with the exception that no final period need be used in an example like the foregoing reference to page and paragraph. Another use of these curves is to enclose figures, signs, headings, etc. Note how the punctuation points explained in this chapter have been enclosed at the beginning of the paragraphs explaining their use. Typewriter keyboards have no brackets [ ]. These are used chiefly in matter that is to be printed, to enclose the comments of editors and copy readers and incidental nota- tions such as the fact that there was laughter or applause in a speech, etc. The curves ( ) may be used in place of the brackets. Quotation Marks. Use quotation marks (" ") to indicate that language is brought in from other sources. If a quota- 98 P UNC T UA TION tion is a familiar one and is introduced loosely, as We all agree that knowledge is power, it is hardly necessary to place knowledge is power within quotation marks. To use quota- tion marks for every proverb is a reflection on the intelli- gence of the reader. It is a common fault of untrained writers to use quotation marks too freely. Stenographers frequently quote such words as ad when there is no occasion for quoting. Using a capital for the first letter of the word or the principal words is better form in writing the names of well-known books, and underlining or using all capitals is better form for the titles of magazines and newspapers, etc., than the use of quotation marks. He sent the boy a copy of Pilgrim's Progress. Have you seen HARPER'S MAGAZINE for April? Where there is a quotation within a quotation, use the single point ( ' ) at the beginning and at the end of the inner quotation. He answered: "I can testify to the fact that he said 'This is in full payment' when he received the money." If, in a sentence like the foregoing, there was still another quotation within that one enclosed by the single marks, it should be set off with the usual double quotation marks. Where there is a quotation within a question or an inter- polation within a quotation, care must be exercised to place the marks properly. Note the different positions of the quotation marks in the following sentences: Has there been any answer to our telegram, "When will you be in Chicago?" Did you hear him say "We will accept"? Quotation marks may be used to distinguish slang or ungrammatical expressions that might otherwise be taken as the writer's own choice of language. Example: He wrote us to "cut it out." The Apostrophe. The apostrophe ( ' ) is used to indicate the possessive case, and also to denote the omission of one or more letters from a word or from words. Usually, nouns in the singular number, whether proper names or not, and all nouns in the plural number ending in any other letter CAPITALIZATION 99 but s, form the possessive by the addition of the apostrophe and the letter 5. Many able and careful writers, to avoid the disagreeable hissing sounds that this general rule would enforce, now write certain possessives without s, as for conscience' sake, in Jesus' name, etc. The possessive pronouns ours, hers, theirs, yours and its do not require the apostrophe. One's does require it; but one- self is usually written as here shown. The apostrophe is used arbitrarily in forming the plurals of such terms as those in the sentence, Dot your i's and cross your t's. Occasional Marks. Although the character is not on most typewriter keyboards, stenographers should under- stand that H indicates that a new paragraph should be started with the first word immediately following the mark. CAPITALIZATION Use a capital letter for the first word in every sentence and for the first word of an introduction to a paragraph, note, letter, or other written or printed matter, whether it is a complete sentence or not; sometimes for the first word after an introductory term that is followed by a colon; for all proper names, and for all adjectives derived from proper names unless usage has ordained that they should not be capitalized, as it has in india ink, oriental rugs, and a few other cases; for common nouns when personified, as O Liberty, what crimes are committed in thy name! The Pine said to the Oak; for all names applied to the Deity, including the pronouns Thee, Thou, Thy, He, Whom and His when used to specify God; for the pronoun 7 and the interjection 0; usually for roman numerals; for the first word of a quoted sentence introduced after a colon;* for the beginning of each line of poetry; for names of months and days of the week, and names of all countries, states, cities, towns, villages, and post offices; for the first letter in each of the principal *A mere phrase from a quotation should not be capitalized unless it begins the sentence in which it is quoted. 100 CAPITALIZATION words in the names of holidays, historic days, and historic events, as Fourth of July, Black Friday; for the first letter in each of the principal words in the names of newspapers, magazines, and books; for names of religious denominations and political parties; for East, West, North, and South when used to particularize undefined geographical sections. Heaven should be capitalized only when it is used as refer- ring to the abode of God, not when reference is made to the sky. The names of the seasons should not be capitalized unless they are personified. Company, bank, association, park, institute, building, bureau, department, judge, president, secretary, ocean, river, bay, canal, island, railroad, street, avenue, and a great many other words of this class may be capitalized when referring to a particular bank, etc., as: The Institute's offices. The prisoner was sent back to the Island. The President passed through the city this morning. The Atlantic Ocean is stormy. Capitals may also be used when such words as the fore- going are printed or written as a part of a title, as Scranton Savings Bank, President EUot, the War Department, etc.; but capitals should not be used where reference is made to companies, banks, etc. in common. Some printing offices draw distinctions so fine that they will capitalize the word mayor when reference is made to the one holding that posi- tion but will not capitalize the word when it is used as apply- ing to deceased mayors or ex-mayors. The Ten Commandments, the Lord's Prayer, the Declara- tion of Independence, and other notable terms should be capitalized. So should distinctive names of localities, such as East Side, Back Bay, etc. Use capitals for article and section when followed by a numeral, as See Article VII, Section 3; also for names of bills, acts, or laws, when referred to as the Suffrage Bill, the Revenue Act. These are by no means all the instances of proper capitaliza- tion, but they should be sufficient as guides. It is permissible and desirable to use capitals freely in display headings and in tabulated work where prominence is desired. In such CORRECT AND FAULTY -DICTION , 101 cases, the usual rules of capitalization "are disregarded" i'or ' the sake of display effect. It has become the custom in business correspondence to capitalize such words as statement, bill, invoice, and the common names of commodities such as Cluett Collars, Heinz Baked Beans, etc. This is done for the sole purpose of giving prominence. While not permissible according to the rules of capitalization, custom has sanctioned such use of capital letters. It is a good rule, though, to use the small letter unless it is certain that the capital is required. The overuse of capitals is a common fault of the novice. In beginning work in a new place, it is well to inquire what words are preferred in capitals. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION A or an should never be so used as to relate or seem to relate to two or more things. A debtor and creditor should arbitrate. (Better, a debtor and his creditors should arbitrate.) Do not use a or an after such words as sort, kind, and species. This is a kind of cotton goods (not kind of a). Ability, Capacity. Physical or mental power, especially the power to plan and execute, is ability. Capacity is power to receive. He has a great capacity (say faculty) for mimicry and story telling. He has a great capacity for dates, scientific names, and mathematics. He has the ability to do what he says he can do. Above. The word above should not be used as a noun, nor should it be used as an adjective unless the noun that above modifies is actually above. Writers often make a reference like the above statement, when the statement referred to appears on another page. If the above (say foregoing) statement is correct, you are in the wrong. Should the above meet your approval, I should be pleased to hear from you. 102, t , $OR f REGJ AND FAULTY DICTION ' in every such 'case it is better to use one of the following: The foregoing opinion, paragraph, or proposition, the statement made or given above; the preceding sug- gestion; the principle stated above. Accept, Except. The words accept and except are fre- quently confounded. The former term means to take willingly when offered; as, to accept a favor, or an office. Except, as a verb, means to leave out or exclude. He is forbidden to except (say accept) presents. The word except means also to object, and in this sense it is followed by to; as, Do you except to my statement? Do you take excep- tion to my decision? Adjectives for Adverbs. One of the most common gram- matical mistakes is the use of adjectives for adverbs. This paint will last good (say, well). I am real glad (say really glad). We can much easier form the conception of a fierce combat (much more easily form). Agreeable to your request, I send (say Agreeably to your request). While a great many adverbs are easily recognized by the ly ending, it is well to remember that fast, slow, quick, etc., are adverbs as well as adjectives. Therefore, each of the following sentences are correct: Write quick. Write quickly. Adjectives or Adverbs. Whether to use an adjective or an adverb with verbs like those in the following sentences can usually be decided by a moment's thought: The package arrived j gofely 1 a ^ ^ s destination. He stood I f~j-J^iy } against all opposition. In the first sentence, the reference is to the condition of the package after the act of arrival it is safe. The phrase at its destination modifies the active function of the verb arrived. Similarly, firm is the correct modifier in the second CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 103 sentence, just as safe is in the first. The verb stood denotes a state rather than an action. In the following sentences either of the italicized words may be used, but the meanings will not be the same: The general faced the battery ,_, , , ( sweet and quiet in its cradle. The babe sleeps \ yiveet i y and quiet i y in its cradle> In these sentences, if the attitude of the general and the repose of the babe are referred to, the adjectives should be used. If, however, it is the writer's wish to describe the manner of the general's facing and the manner of the babe's sleeping, the adverbs should be used. The adjective is ordinarily used in such sentences. The common expression feel badly is ungrammatical when reference is made to health. I sold the farm cheap is right if the intended meaning is that the price was low. If the intended meaning is that there was little expense in connection with the selling, cheaply should be used. Ain't. There is no such word in the English language as ain't. Use isn't or are not. All Right. Alright is frequently written for all right. There is no such word as alright. Allow, Said. Do not use allow for said. He allowed (say said) that his work was good. Allude, Mention. Allude means to treat lightly, merely to hint at; mention is a stronger term and means specific naming. The speaker alluded to the remissness of certain officials, though he mentioned no names. Ante, Anti. Ante means before; anti, against. Anticipate, Expect, Suppose. Do not use anticipate for expect, and do not use expect for suppose. Expect refers only to the future; suppose, to the past, present, and future. I anticipate (say expect) that he will come. I expect (say suppose) you have received the check. We anticipate having a pleasant time. Any, At All. Use at all for any in sentences like the fol- lowing: He could not hear any. 104 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Anxious, Desirous. Do not use anxious unless there is some anxiety. The word desirous usually expresses the meaning more nearly. Apparent Plurals That Are Singular. Many expressions are plural in form, but really singular. Bread and butter is the staff of life. All work and no play makes Jack a dull boy. The long and the short of the matter is that you are wrong. Appreciate. The exact meaning of the word appreciate is to be fully aware of the value or importance of something. I appreciate your gift, your kind words, and what you have done. English and American writers are appreciated in Russia. It is somewhat redundant to say appreciate highly, but we may value or prize highly. Appreciate has also a meaning opposite to that of depreciate. Since the war, the price of all kinds of goods has appreciated. Apt, Likely. Apt is often used where likely is the better word. He is apt (say likely} to come tomorrow. It is correct to use apt in the sense of "having a nat- ural tendency," as in, Iron is apt to rust. Articles, Repetition of. When adjectives denoting qual- ities that belong to different things are connected, the article should be repeated. A black and a white hat means two hats. When connected adjectives relate to the same thing, the article must not be repeated. A black and white hat means one hat. When the modified noun is plural, the sense is often ambiguous. The black and white stockings may mean that some of the stockings are entirely black and some entirely white; or that each stocking is partly black and partly white. As, Like, That. Write Do as I do, not Do like I do. Sub- stitute that for as in Not as I know of. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 105 As Regards, In Regard. Write in regard to or regarding, not as regards. As, Than. The use of both as and than, or so and than, in comparisons often results in awkward sentences. We have as much money, if not more, than they have. If the brown is not so pretty 05, it is at least more durable than, the blue. These sentences should be rearranged and slightly changed in wording. We have as much money as they have; perhaps, more. If the brown is not so pretty as the blue, it is at least more durable. Omit as from equally as well. As Though, As If. Although many good writers use as though, grammatical authorities favor as if in sentences like the following: He walks as though (say as if) he were lame. As Well As, And. Where as well as is used as a substi- tute for and, the verb should agree with the first subject. Lee's men, as well as Lee himself, were compelled to endure privations. Industry as well as frugality is essential to success. Audience, Spectators. An audience is an assemblage of listeners; spectators are those who look. Aught, Naught. Aught means "anything"; naught means "nothing" and is a name for the cipher 0. Aught is often erroneously used for naught. Awful. The word awful has a place in the English lan- guage, but it is greatly abused. Do not say awful funny, or awfully nice. Bad, Badly. The words bad and badly are much over- used. Severe, seriously, and poorly are often better words. That was a bad (say serious) mistake. Balance, Rest, Remainder. Richard Grant White says: "Balance in the sense of rest, remainder, residue, remnant is an abomination." Balance is correctly used to denote 106 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION the difference between the credit and debit sides of an account. With a part of his inheritance he purchased an estate; the balance (say rest, remainder) he invested in bonds. The balance (say remainder) of the time was wasted. Beside, Besides. The following sentences illustrate the correct use of beside and besides: She sat down beside him. Besides money, he owned property. Between, Among. The prepositions between and among are often confounded. The former should refer to two per- sons or things, the latter to more than two. The relations among (not between) the members of the family were at all times pleasant. There is not the slightest difference in quality between the two wagons. The copy was quickly divided among the five com- positors. Blame It On. The expression blame it on is not good usage. He blamed it on his assistant. Better, He blamed (or accused or suspected) his assistant. Both, Each, Every, All. When two persons or things are thought of as acting or being together, of acting harmoni- ously, both is better than each. But if they act separately, first one and then the other, or if they are antagonistic or inharmonious, each is to be preferred. Each day as it came brought hard work. Each of the two had his work to do, and both were skilful. Every day of my life is fully occupied, and each day brings its worry and disappointment. Both sisters were beautiful, and each had many friends. Both should be omitted from a sentence like the following They were both alike. When more than two persons or things are referred to, each is used if they are taken distributively first one and then another until all are taken. Every, like each, takes all without exception, but it is less specific and marks single CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 107 individuals less distinctly than does each. All considers the units as making up a total that is treated as a unit; it takes the units collectively, not distributively like each and every. Each person fared differently, although all were equally blamable. All men are sinners and every man must answer for his sins. All men love praise, but not every man deserves praise. Do not multiply these words, thus Each and every one of you, one and all of them, each and all of you. Say, rather, each of you, every one of you, all of you. Brevity, Conciseness. The word brevity implies shortness, but an article may be concise, that is, written without verbosity or repetition or sentences of doubtful value, and still not brief. But That, But What, That. Do not use but that or but what for that, as in the following examples: I had no doubt but what he would be on time (say no doubt that}. We have no fear but that they will win the game (say fear that they will lose the game; or fear that they will not win the game). Calculate. The word calculate is often used erroneously for expect, intend, purpose, or plan. He calculates (say expects) to get the contract. Canvas, Canvass. Canvas is a kind of cloth; to canvass means to examine, debate, solicit. Capitalizing Subordinate Elements. A subordinate ele- ment should not be cut off and capitalized as if it were a complete sentence. Incorrect: He bought a great deal of furniture. Thus enabling the store to advertise the largest stock. Correct: He bought a great deal of furniture, thus enabling the store to advertise the largest stock. Carry, Escort, Accompanied. It is better to say that a young man escorted or accompanied a young woman, and to use carry in a sentence like the following: He was lifted and carried into the hospital. 108 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Case After "Than." It is sometimes not easy to decide about the correctness of the pronoun in sentences like the following: No one could write better than he (could). We liked none better than (we liked) him. In such sentences, if the implied verb is inserted as in the foregoing sentences, the proper case for the pronoun will be apparent. Case After "To Be." Both the subject and the predicate substantive of the infinitive form of the verb to be should be in the objective case. I suppose it to be they (say to be them). Case of Pronouns After Prepositions. A pronoun used as the object of a preposition should be in the objective case. Between you and / (me), he is no more honest than he should be. If you had been with he and I (with him and me), etc. No one was in the house except he and they (him and them). Character, Reputation. Character is that combination of qualities distinguishing a person or thing; reputation is the estimation in which the person or thing is held by others. Cheap, Low-Priced. Be careful with the word cheap. If you are writing of your own goods, it is better to refer to them as low-priced. Collective Subjects Expressing Periods of Time and Sums of Money. Periods of time, even when expressed in plural form, are often treated as singular. The same is true of sums of money. With Thee, a thousand years is as one 'day. A hundred years seems a very short time. One hundred and fifty thousand dollars was in the safe. If, however, periods of time or sums of money are referred to distributively, they must be treated as plural. The last ten years of the company's existence were filled with disaster. More than one hundred dollars in silver were scattered over the floor. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 109 Conjoint Subjects. When subjects are taken conjointly, so as to have a verb in the plural, the proper connective is and and not with, together with, nor, or, as well as, or any other. This complete dictionary and the handy holder are (not is) offered for ten new subscribers. (If the con- struction were This complete dictionary, with the handy holder, etc., is would be correct.) Consider. The word consider means to meditate, to deliberate, to weigh. In a statement like, We consider that this is the best, the word consider is used where think or believe is the proper word. The following sentence illustrates the correct use of consider: All the plans for the sales campaign were considered. Credible, Creditable. The word credible means capable of being believed; creditable means deserving or worthy of credit, praiseworthy. His story was entirely credible, and we all believed it. No one would regard such an act as honorable or even creditable. Date, Engagement. The word date is a common, vulgar substitute for engagement. I have a date (say an engagement) with him. Develop. The word develop should not be used in the sense of expose. It developed (say became known) that he offered an extra discount. Directly. The word directly should not be used in the sense of "as soon as." The letter was answered as soon as (not directly) it was received. Dock, Pier. A dock is a water berth where ships lay; it is often misused for pier. The steamer came into the dock and was slowly pulled up to the pier. Don't, Doesn't. For the first and second persons, both in the singular and in the plural, don't is the correct abbre- viation; in the third person singular, doesn't should be 110 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION used I don't, you don't, he doesn't, she doesn't, it doesn't John doesn't. Smith don't (doesn't} know anything about it. It don't (doesn't) make any difference which method you employ. He don't (doesn't) write clearly or interestingly. Double Comparisons. It is correct to say that one per- son is handsomer than another or to say that he is more handsome, but more handsomer is incorrect. If more or most is used, the suffixes er or est should be omitted. Double Negatives. Two negatives in the same clause usually have the effect of destroying each other and of leaving the clause affirmative. One of the negatives may be only, hardly, but, scarcely, barely. They couldn't never (could never) learn to be prompt. The governor shouldn't have but one term (should have). I can't (can) scarcely make out what they are doing. I didn't know nothing about it (say didn't know any- thing). For my part I love him not, nor hate him not. (For my part I love him not, and hate him not.) There is nothing more admirable nor more useful. (Nothing is more admirable or more useful.) Each, Either, Both. The words each, either, and both are frequently confounded. Either properly means one of two. A man may fire either barrel of a gun and reserve the load in the other barrel; or he may fire each barrel, first one and then the other; or, finally, he may fire both barrels, the implication being that they are discharged as connected parts of a single act. Either is frequently used erroneously for each or both. There were book shelves at either end of the room. (Say both ends.) Each hat was stylish, and both were low-priced. Each horse in turn was led from the stable. I was informed that I might choose either; but it was difficult to choose, for both were beautiful. Each, Every, Either, Neither. The distributives each, every, either, and neither are always in the singular number. Each brother saw his wealth wrested from him. England expects every man to do his (not their) duty. Neither sister did well in her studies. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 111 When two genders are implied, the best usage requires the masculine pronoun. Each writer must do his (not his or her, and not their) own thinking. Every person's happiness depends in part on the respect he (not they) meets in the world. This accords with the practice of including both sexes by such terms as mankind, man, etc. Either, Any One; The Latter, The Last. When several things are spoken of, it is permissible to refer to certain of them as the first, the last, any one of them, or any of them. When only two things are concerned, the proper words are the former, the latter, either, either one, or either of them. Several men were tried during the forenoon; the first was convicted of robbery, the last, of assault, and the others were acquitted. There are many suits in this lot; you may take any one (not either) of them. Both Smith and Jones were appointed, the former as a policeman, the latter as a watchman. You may take either of the two packages, and I will take the other. Elegant, Delicious, Excellent. Elegant should not be used in the sense of delicious or excellent. Say delicious peaches, not elegant peaches. Etc. Etc., an abbreviation for et cetera, means "and the rest," and may be used properly in lists, schedules, etc., but write and so on or and so forth when the meaning is that of continuation. The bolts, nuts, screws, etc. were shipped. He declared that the price was too high, that he didn't have the money, etc. (Use and so on for etc.) Do not write etc., etc.; one etc. is enough. Never use &c. for etc., nor such an expression as and etc. Ever, Never. The adverbs ever and never are frequently confounded. We seldom or ever see an indolent man become wealthy. (We seldom or never, or seldom if ever.) The two expressions, ever so and never so, are often mis- used; ever so is nearly equivalent to very or extremely; never so is much stronger. * 112 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Never is often used where not would convey the intended meaning. He was here, but never mentioned the matter. Better, he was here, but he did not mention the matter. It is correct to say, He was never in Europe. Farther, Further. Use farther when referring to actual distance; further, when the meaning is that of a continuance. He rode farther. Please write further. Feminine, Female, Masculine, Male. Feminine and masculine should not be used instead of female and male. A noun or a pronoun is of the feminine or the masculine gender; a woman or a man is of the female or the male sex. A charming young person of the feminine gender gave us a hearty welcome. (A charming young woman gave us a hearty welcome.) Such conduct is a disgrace to the masculine sex (to the male sex). First, Firstly. First is an adverb and may therefore be used as such with secondly, thirdly, and finally without the addition of ly. Former, Latter. The construction with former and latter with backward reference is cumbrous and difficult. The successor of Jones and Brown was persuaded to follow the example of the former rather than the precept of the latter. Better, The successor of Jones and Brown was persuaded to follow the example of Jones rather than the precept of Brown. In any case, former and latter should not be used where there are more than two things referred to. Friend, Acquaintance. Unless you are sure that some one is a man's friend, refer to him as an acquaintance. Funds, Money, Pecuniary, Financial. The word funds is occasionally used where money is better. He was entirely out of funds (say money). Pecuniary is a better word than -financial unless reference is made to large monetary systems such as those of govern- ments. It was a financial (say pecuniary} obligation. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 113 Funny. The word funny is greatly overused. The sub- stitution of odd, curious, queer, ridiculous, absurd, amusing, laughable, or strange often improves the construction. It is funny (say strange) that he should refuse. Generally Usually, Commonly. The word generally is overused. Usually, commonly, and other words often express the meaning better than does generally. He generally (say usually) goes home at noon. It is an error generally (say commonly) seen in adver- tisements. . Got. The word got may be omitted from many sentences. I have got it. (Say I have it.) We have got to do it. (Say we must do it.) He got married is a vulgarism. Say, rather, He was mar- ried. The woman is married to the man, not the man to the woman; but a man is or should be introduced to a woman. Guess, Think, Believe, Suppose, Imagine. The word guess is used colloquially a great deal where think, believe, suppose, or imagine would be better. I think (not guess) he has gone. Had rather and had better are thoroughly established English idioms having the universal popular and literary sanctions of centuries. Happen, Occur, Take Place. Things happen and occur by chance, but take place by appointment or arrangement. How. The adverb how should not be used before the conjunction that, nor as a substitute for lest, that not, or that. He declared how (that) he would triumph in the end. You see how that (that) not many wise men or good men secure political office. Be careful how you offend him (that you do not or lest). If, Whether. The conjunction if is frequently emp oyed for whether, a usage that is condemned. I do not know if (say whether) he will come or not. No one can say w r ith certainty if it will rain (say whether it will rain or not). 114 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION The alternative that belongs after whether is often omitted in colloquial language; it should, however, be expressed in careful composition. This alternative can be put either before or after the first alternative. I cannot tell you whether or not the train has arrived. Or, I cannot tell you ivhether the train has arrived or not. Inaugurate, Commence, Begin. Persons that like to use long words often use inaugurate or commence where begin would be a better word. He is ready to inaugurate (say begin) an extensive mail-order campaign. Individual, Man, Person. The following sentences illus- trate the correct use of the words individual., man, and person: Wars depend on individuals as well as on nations. Each man (not individual) paid his part. All persons (not individuals) are warned against tres- passing. In, Into. Into is used with words denoting motion real or ideal; in with words denoting rest. He went into (not in) the house ; he is in the house now. We looked into the matter with great care. When in is used with verbs denoting motion, the motion must be within something regarded as enclosing the motion. The man drove a team in New York. The printers were working in the composing room. It. One of the most troublesome words in the English language is the pronoun it. The tree was blown down by the wind; it was very high. If the antecedent is wind, say: The tree was blown down by the wind, which was very high (or by the very high wind). But if tree is the antecedent of it, say: The tree, which was very high, was blown down by the wind. A medical textbook contains the following sentence: If the child does not thrive on uncooked milk, it should be boiled. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 115 In this case, the words the milk should have been used in place of *'/. A careful writer will not use it and its so often as these two words are used in the following sentence: When men are thoroughly possessed with zeal, it is difficult to estimate its force; but it is certain that its power is by no means in exact proportion to its reason- ableness. Better, When men are thoroughly possessed with zeal, there is difficulty in estimating its force; but certainly its power, etc. It, That. The pronoun it is sometimes improperly used for the more emphatic that. There is but one thing he wanted, and that (not it) was to be let alone. He wanted to borrow, and to pay when he pleased, but that (not it) was more than we could permit. It's, Its. It's, a contraction of it is, must always have the apostrophe and should not be confounded with the posses- sive its, which should not have the apostrophe. It's unfortunate, but the store has lost its prestige. Lady, Gentleman. Avoid the general use of lady or ladies in commercial matter, particularly as an adjective; use woman, wife, housekeeper, when these words can be used appropriately. Say women's shoes, housekeepers' sale, etc. Saleswoman is preferred to saleslady. The word gentleman is likewise to be used with care in commerce. In America, men's overcoats is ordinarily preferable to gentle- men's overcoats, but the possessive forms of both gentlemen and ladies may be used with discrimination in referring to exclusive goods. It is exceedingly bad form to abbrevi- ate gentleman to gent. Never use such expressions as gent's furnishing store, lady and gent, lady friend, gentle- man friend. Say madam, not lady, in addressing a woman. Learn, Teach. Do not confound learn with teach. He was taught arithmetic and he learned it. Lend, Loan. Lend is the verb; loan the noun. If you will lend me five dollars, I shall be thankful for the loan. Lie, Lay. We lie down, but we lay pens down. He had lain down to rest. He had laid the pens down. 116 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Like, Love. We like apples, but love cur brothers and sisters. Love should not be used to indicate appetite or preference. I love (say like) the delicate shades of green. Likely, Liable. Likely may be used to refer to any con- tingency regarded as probable; the best usage confines liable to contingencies of an unfavorable kind. He is likely (not liable) to come at any time. You are liable to arrest for speeding your automobile. His action makes him liable to severe criticism. Limited. The word limited is used frequently where slight, scant, or reduced would be better words. Locate, Settle. Locate is much used for settle. He settled (not located) in the West. Loose, Lose. The two words loose and lose are frequently confounded. We lose (not loose) a dollar on each sale. The knot was loose. Lots, Lot. Lots and lot should not be used in the sense of a great deal. I think lots (say a great deal) of him. Lovely. Lovely is a much overused word. CJtarming, beautiful, sweet, enjoyable, etc. are preferable when appro- priate. We had a lovely trip. (Say, rather, an enjoyable or a pleasant trip.) Majority, Most. Majority is used correctly in speaking of voting contests or of comparisons of opposing views, but should not be used in place of most. Most (not a majority) of the papers were high-priced. Most of the people came away when it was learned that a majority of the councilmen favored the bill. Many, Much. Many refers to number and much to quan- tity, but sums of money, weights, and measured quantity regarded as singular aggregates should take much rather than many as a modifier. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 117 I think there must have been as many as a hundred guests at the hotel. He was willing to pay as much as one thousand dollars for the lot. Some regiments number as many as twelve hundred men each. We may escape many of the troubles of life by not anticipating. May, Can. Say, You may do it when giving permission. Can implies ability; may, permission. Merely, Simply. Where the meaning is without including anything else or only, merely is better than simply. Simply means clearly, plainly. He went merely as a friend. It is simply an instance of the use of poor judgment. Most, About, Almost, Nearly. The words most, about, almost, and nearly are frequently misused. Most (say nearly or almost) every writer agrees with you. Nasty, Rotten. It is better not to use words like nasty and rotten if it is possible to express the meaning with other words. No, Nothing. The words no and nothing are sometimes preceded by almost, nearly, about; the result is a contradic- tion of terms. One can have no money, no resources, nothing; but it is not easy to comprehend how one can have almost no money, nearly nothing to eat. The expressions are very similar to quite some, quite a few, quite a little. "No" Used for "Not." The adverb no should not be used as a substitute for not. I do not know whether I shall go or no (not). None. The pronoun none, derived from no and one was formerly regarded as singular. It is now either singular or plural according to the meaning intended. Did you get the cherries? There were none on the tree. Have you a letter for me? There was none in your box. None of us knows (or know ) what is to happen tomor- row. 118 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION "Nor" or "Or" After "No" or "Not." Discriminate in the use of nor and or after no. If the alternatives are names of the same thing or relate closely, or should be used. I have no desire or power to do it. If the alternatives are contrasted, nor should be used. . He has no money, nor is he able to earn any. Nor may be used as a correlative after neither, nor, not, and no in introducing subsequent negatives. He will not be interviewed, nor will he notice any letter from us. "Nor" with "Neither." Be careful not to use or in place of nor with neither. Neither the buyer or (use nor) the manager was there. Nothing Like, Not Nearly. Nothing like so high should be written not nearly so high. Noun, Repeating the. If a pronoun may have any one of several possible antecedents, the antecedent intended should be repeated or the construction should be changed. We see the beautiful variety of color in the rainbow, and are led to consider the cause of it (that variety, or the variety). Several adding-machine salesmen called, and each gave a demonstration of his machine. We liked all of them. (As them may mean either the salesmen or the machines, the noun represented by them should be repeated.) Novice, Amateur. A novice is a beginner; amateur means not a professional, but an amateur may be the equal of a professional in skill. Only. The word only is sometimes an adjective, as in my only son; sometimes it is an adverb, as in only thinking, only tired. Unless the word is correctly placed in a sen- tence, ambiguity results. Take, for illustration, the fol- lowing sentence Only I bought a hat. Here, the meaning is that no one but the speaker bought a hat. I only bought a hat. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 119 In this sentence the literal meaning is that the hat was only bought was not used. I bought only a hat. The meaning in the preceding sentence is that nothing but a hat was bought. It will be seen, therefore, that a slight change of the position of only makes a wide difference in the meaning of a sentence. The rule of position of this useful but trouble- some word is: Place only next to the element it is to modify; then arrange the rest of the sentence so that no word capable of taking only as a modifier shall adjoin it on the other side. Ambiguity results from the misplacing of not only, not merely, not more, both and not. Some examples follow: Not only is the man tired but he is also hungry. (Better thus, The man is not only tired but he is hungry.) He could not more be expected to assist than to oppose. (Put not more after assist.) All men are not willing to pay their just debts. (Make not the first word of the sentence.) Onto. The word onto should not be used, but on and to may be used as separate words. Oral, Verbal. Anything expressed in words, written or spoken, is verbal. Use oral in referring to spoken direction. Ought to, Should. Ought to usually implies a duty and is somewhat stronger than should. We ought to take care of our parents, and should be respectful to all. Partially, Partly. The words partially and partly are frequently confounded. Partially means "with partiality" and partly means "not wholly." Partially is common in the sense of "not wholly," but the best usage restricts the word to the meaning "with partiality." The teacher acted partially toward her pupils. The work was only partly done when we left. Past, Last. The words past and last are frequently con- founded. He has teen away the past (say last) three days. 120 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Past is not the better word in this sentence, for the reason that all days that are gone are past. Pay, Settle. Say pay the bill unless there is some dispute, when it is correct to speak of settling. Per Day, Per Year, Via. By way of, a day, and a year are usually better than via, per diem, per annum. But if it is really necessary to use per, write per diem not per day; per annum, not per year. Either use both English words or both Latin words. There are just a few instances where per as a single word seems better than any English word. An example is afforded in per square inch. By George Smith is better than per George Smith. Permit, Allow. Permit implies authorization; allow, absence of hindrance. Person, People, Party. The use of party in the sense of person, individual, is vulgar. It is proper to say a political party, an evening party, a -fishing party, a party to a sale or to a lawsuit, but not The party with whom I was seen was my uncle. A person is an individual, a people is a com- munity. The word people is correctly used for persons collectively. Many people (say persons} are unaware of the fact that the earth is round. A great crowd of people was at Coney Island yesterday. In the first sentence the persons are not thought of as forming an assembly or a collection; in the second sentence, people is the better word. People do not like to have their faults criticized. Plenty, Plentiful. Plenty denotes an abundance, par- ticularly of comforts and necessaries ; plentiful means existing in great quantities. Cherries and other small fruits are plenty (say plenti- ful) this season. Our people have been living in peace and plenty. Poetical Words in Commercial Composition. There are many words like 'mid, ere, save, and oft that, while appro- priate in poetical composition or fiction, savor of affectation CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 121 or "fine writing" when introduced into commercial com- position. Such words should not, therefore, be used in advertisements or letters. Possessives With Verbal Nouns. The possessives your, our, his, her, my are required before the verbal noun. The objective forms you, us, etc. are commonly used erroneously in this particular construction. That did not warrant you making the trip (say your making). Practicable, Practical. Practicable means feasible, while practical means something that is not theoretical merely something governed by use or experience. A teacher may be able to give practical instruction, but his plan for securing pupils may not be practicable. Prejudiced, Prepossessed. We become prejudiced against, but prepossessed in favor of. Prepositions, Needless Use of. The preposition can be omitted with advantage from many such expressions as bridge over, deliver up, divide up, accept of, taste of, over with. Pretty, Rather. The word pretty is used colloquially where rather is the better word. It is a rather (not pretty) strong advertisement. Preventive, Preventative. Preventative is an obsolete form. Use preventive. Acid was sprinkled over the table as a preventive. Principal, Principle. Principal is often used where prin- ciple is the right word, and vice versa. The following sen- tence illustrates the correct use of the words: The principal event of the day was the strenuous defense that the principal of the school made for his principles. Privilege, Right. Privilege is sometimes used where right is the better word. It is his privilege (say right) to stop advertising if he wishes to. Pronouns; Agreement in Person, Number, and Gender. So far as possible, the pronoun must agree with its antece- 122 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION dent in person, number, and gender. In the following the correct pronouns are in parentheses- Every person in the store should know their (say his) duty. His form had not yet lost all his (say its) youthful grace. When the gender of the antecedent is uncertain, or when it includes both sexes, if a singular pronoun is required, the masculine forms he, his, or him are to be preferred to the double he or she, his or her, etc. If any employe wishes to leave, he will please give some notice of his intention. Usually, however, such sentences can be so constructed as to include both sexes more clearly. Employes wishing to leave will please give some notice of their intention. Pronouns, Misuse of, With the Verb "Be." The most common misuse of pronouns is that with the various forms of the verb be. A noun or a pronoun following the verb to be in any of its finite modes must be in the nominative case. In the following examples, the word in parentheses is the correct one. It was me (I). It was them (they). It is him (he). I thought it was her (she). It wasn't us (we). It isn't him (he). If you were me (I), you would do the same thing. Had I been him (he), I should have gone. It wasn't them (they) of whom I spoke. If I had been her (she), I should have gone. Pronoun, Place of the. The pronoun should be so placed that there can be no mistake as to its antecedent. Do not put between the pronoun and its antecedent a noun that may be mistaken for the antecedent. Jones secured me a good place in Brown' 's company by representing that he and I had been college friends. Better, Jones, by representing that he and I had been college friends, secured me a good place in Brown's company. An antique clock ticked against the wall which was beautifully decorated. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 123 Which was decorated, the clock or the wall? The follow- ing revision is clear: An antique clock, beautifully decorated, ticked against the wall. Pronouns, Precedence of. Usage has established a cer- tain precedence of pronouns. Pronouns representing the person addressed should come first. Pronouns representing persons spoken of should precede pronouns denoting the speaker and should follow pronouns denoting the person addressed. Note the order of the pronouns in the following sentences: Were you and he and 7 all in the wrong? They and we (not we and they) were at the office yes- terday. Smith and / (not 7 and Smith) will go. Propose, Purpose, Intend. Propose is often used incor- rectly for purpose. The first of the following sentences is an illustration of the correct use of propose: He proposed that we divide the expense. I propose (say intend) to prepare a large catalog. Proved, Proven. Proven is confined properly to law language. It was proved (not proven) to be the stronger. Providing, Provided. Providing is very often used incor- rectly for provided. He will come provided (not providing) he has time. Quite. The word quite means wholly, completely, but it is loosely used with the meaning "very," "considerably." Quite a few, quite some, quite a lot, quite a good many, quite a number are incorrect. Quite clear is correct. Raise, Rear. Telegraph poles are raised but children are reared. Redundant Adjectives. Inexperienced writers are prone to use too many adjectives and good writers frequently employ them with nouns in such way as to result in tautology. Mutual reciprocity in trade between the United States and France. Habitual custom of the country. Mere capital alone is not enough. 124 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION In each of these examples the first word in Italics is super- fluous. Relatives, Relations. The words relatives and relations were formerly applied to persons connected by blood or marriage. In this sense the former term is now preferable. The relations between the two men were in every respect pleasant. The relatives (not relations) of persons great or wealthy are prone to inform others of the relationship. Respectfully, Respectively. The words respectfully and respectively are often confounded. The following are exam- ples of the proper use of these words: We treat our superiors respectfully. He called on Jones, Smith, and Brown, respectively. Same, Similar. Same should be used when there is iden- tity; similar when there is mere likeness. He is the same man that called yesterday. Your plans are similar to mine (not the same as mine). Do not use same in a construction like the following: Replying to same, allow me to suggest . Better, Replying to your request, allow me to suggest . Scarcely, Hardly. Scarcely applies to quantity; hardly to degree. He had scarcely a handful. She is hardly able to walk. Sewage, Sewerage. Sewage means the waste matter car- ried off by sewers; sewerage means systematic drainage by means of sewers. No system of sewerage yet devised supplies an eco- nomical method of disposing of sewage. Shall, Will, Should, Would. Few persons use shall, will, should, and would correctly. Not many would make the errors of the man who, accidentally falling overboard, cried "I will drown; no one shall save me," but most people say, "7 will write tomorrow," when, unless a promise is required, they should say, "/ shall write tomorrow.' 1 The confusion arises from the fact that shall, will, should, and would do not have the same meaning with pronouns of CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 125 the second and third persons you, he, she, it, they that they have with the pronouns of the first person / and we. The limited space here does not permit a full treatment of the use of these four words, but the remembering of a few rules will prevent common errors. Rule 1. When the speaker wishes merely to announce future action with /or we, the proper form is I shall or we shall. If the speaker says you shall, he shall, she shall, it shall, or they shall the meaning changes from the announce- ment of the speaker's future action and expresses his determination or his intention to control or bring to pass. Rule 2. Will, when used with / or we, expresses a promise or announces willingness, determination, or intention to control. When, however, the speaker says you will, he will, she will, it will, or they will, and there are no other words in the sentence to indicate compulsion, the meaning is merely that of future action or state. Rule 3. We should say / should and we should to indi- cate mere future action but say 7 would or we would in indicating determination or willingness or expressing a promise. You would, he would, she would, it would, and they would ordinarily refer to future action or state-. Rule 4. Should expresses duty, expediency, or propriety with pronouns of all three persons, 7, we, you, he, she, it, they. Should, in this use, means ought to. I shall (future action) be obliged to leave. I will (expressing determination) learn my lesson. I know that I shall (future) succeed. If you will behave yourself I will (expressing deter- mination) go with you. I should (not would) like to meet them. We should (not would) be pleased to see you here. I should (not would) like that. He said that he should (when the original speaker had said "I shall go") go Tuesday. He said that he would (expressing willingness) go if we would. I declared that I would (expressing determination) have my way. Both he and I would (willingness) assist you if we could. You, he, and I should (duty) help them. 126 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Shall you? is correct when the meaning is, Is it your inten- tion? Will you? is correct when the .meaning is, Are you willing? Shall he be invited? is correct, for the meaning is, Is it your wish? But say Will he be there? in asking about the purpose of a third person. Say You will if the person spoken to is free to do as he pleases or in case you wish to clothe your authority with courtesy, as in, "You will go to New York and there await future orders." Shall and should are rarely used where will and would are the correct words; but will and would are commonly used incorrectly in place of shall and should. Do not close a letter with the expressions / will be pleased or I would be pleased; use shall or should, for the reference is to a future time when the writer hopes to have the pleasure of receiving the reply or whatever is referred to. Do not begin a letter with, We would say. Write, Our answer to your question is that, or Yes, we will grant the extension you ask but shall expect, or The best rate we can make on the set is, or Answering your question, we suggest that, etc. Since, Ago. Since should not refer to time long past; ago, however, may be used for any past time. "Some one called while you were away." "How long since?" or " How long ago? " " Only a few minutes since." "Only a few minutes ago." He came to this country several years ago (not since). Many years ago (not since) there was a very rich king called Croesus. Singular and Plural Verbs. Phrase and Clause Subjects. If a phrase, clause, or other expression denoting one whole is used as the subject of a finite verb, the verb must be in the singular. To advertise a policy and then refuse to live up to it is (not are) a modern and inconsistent practice. To profess regard and to act inconsistently with that profession, betray (say betrays) a base mind. Verb Between Two Nominatives. When a neuter or a passive verb stands between two nominatives it should agree with the nominative that precedes. A great cause of the low state of industry was (not were) the restraints put upon it. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 127 The clothing of the natives were (say was) the skins of wild beasts. Concord by Changing the Nominative. Agreement between a verb and its subject may be made by changing the num- ber of the subject or of the verb. If the verb cannot well be singular, make the subject plural; if the verb ought to remain singular, make the subject singular. Every one of you are earnestly urged to be present. (Is may be substituted for are, or all may be substituted for every one.) Much pains has been taken to explain the matter. (Instead of much pains, say great care.) Not less than three years were spent in attaining this result. In the last sentence, some singular noun, such as time, must be understood after less, and the plural were is there- fore wrong. The singular was should be used. Plural Verb Unsuited. The construction with and between two nominatives requiring a plural verb is awkward. There are safety and honor in this course. Better than this would be one of the following: This course is one of safety and honor. Safety as well as honor is in this course. Sit, Set. Persons and animals sit down, but inanimate objects are set down. Set should be used even with living things if the action is performed by another as in the fol- lowing sentence: She set the child on the floor. Slander, Libel. Slander is spoken; libel is written or printed slander. Some, Something, Somewhat. Do not use some or some- thing for somewhat in a sentence like the following: She is somewhat more accurate. Sometimes, Some Time. Sometimes is usually written as one word, but it may be written as two in the sentence, At some times he seems brighter. Some time is usually writ- ten as two words. 128 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Splendid Excellent. Say an excellent coffee rather than a splendid coffee. Split Infinitive. By split infinitive is meant a construc- tion in which an adverb or an adverbial phrase is placed between the sign of the infinitive and the verb. The fol- lowing are examples: To carefully examine; to better accomplish; to not for- get; to rapidly retreat. Though such forms are seen in the work of good writers, they are condemned by most grammatical authorities. The following forms are preferred: To examine carefully; to accomplish better; not to for- get; to retreat rapidly. Therefore, as a general rule, the split infinitive should be avoided. There are just a few instances in which the adverb placed immediately after to seems to make the construction smoother. An example is afforded in the following sentence; To really know the man is to believe in him. Squinting Construction. If any element of a sentence is so placed as to look both ways, that is, if it may be as readily connected in meaning with what precedes as with what follows, the construction is said to be squinting. This construction is a source of frequent ambiguity, and although the meaning intended may usually be made out, the fault is none the less serious. In speech, ambiguity from mis- placed words is usually prevented by the tones of the voice, but a writer has no such assistance. He should arrange the parts of his sentences in such manner that his meaning cannot be misunderstood. The following are some examples of the squinting con- struction: Remember always to observe the golden rule. Tell him in the morning to report at my office. Ask him, if he is in the building, to consult with the superintendent. In each of these sentences, the italicized modifiers may be understood as modifying either an element that precedes or one that follows. The remedy, of course, is to put the modifier where it belongs. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 129 In the following sentence the construction may be said to be squinting, though the modifier is at the end. This tobacco is sold direct by mail to smokers in per- fect condition. Of course the writer's meaning is that the tobacco is sold in perfect condition not to smokers that are in perfect condition. State. The word state is very formal and should not be used to the exclusion of tell; use inform, suggest, express, mention, and other words. He stated (say said) that he would come. Stationery, Stationary. Stationery refers to writing mate- rial; stationary to something that does not move. Statue, Statute. A statue is a figure in marble, bronze, or some other substance; but a statute is a legislative enact- ment. Staying, Stopping. The verbs stay and stop in some of their meanings are frequently confounded. In the sense of having a temporary abode, staying is the correct word; stopping, used in this sense, is colloquial. It is colloquial also to speak of the staying power of a swimmer, a pugilist, or a horse. While visiting the Pan-American exhibition we stayed (not stopped) at the Iroquois Hotel. Prince Henry stayed (not stopped) in the country for several weeks. The wind and staying power of the horse enabled him to win the race (say wind and endurance or stamina). Subordinate Clauses, Use of Too Many. There is no objection to a sentence that contains two or more subordinate clauses depending on the same element. If, however, a subordinate clause is followed by other clauses depending on it, the thought is likely to be led so far from the central idea that unity will be destroyed. Note the following example: This binding, though low-priced, is durable, which quality is more important than appearance, which is often temporary. Better, This binding, though low- priced, is durable. Durability is more important than appearance; appearance is often temporary. 130 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Such, So. Instead of such a hard man to deal with say so hard a man to deal with. Superlative Degree for the Comparative. When two things are compared, the comparative degree should be used; when three or more, the superlative. Cheltenham is the heavier of the two types. Post is the heaviest display letter in the shop. This is a better piece of goods. This is the best piece in the lot. Sure. We will do it sure is not good English; say We will be sure to do it, or will surely do it. Surprise, Astonish, Disappoint. Surprised is frequently used where astonished could convey the intended meaning. Our friends surprise us by coming suddenly, and astonish us with some information. We may be agreeably surprised but not agreeably disappointed. Suspect, Expect. We may suspect that some one has deceived us, but we expect that friends will call during our absence. Than. After such negative words as hardly, scarcely, barely, etc., not than, but when or some other conjunctive adverb should be employed. Neither should than follow the word different; from is the correct term. The sun had scarcely risen when (not than) the journey began. Hardly more than an hour had passed when (not than) my creel was full of the speckled beauties. We had gone barely a mile when we were overtaken by a man on horseback. That. Do not use that as an adverb. I was that (say so) tired I could scarcely stand. He must not remain away from his work that (say so) long. I do not feel able to pay that (say so) much money for the book. Their There. The possessive pronoun their is often mis- used for there. The following sentence illustrates the cor- rect use of the two words: When we arrived there, we learned their intentions. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 131 Them, Those. The pronoun them should never be used as an adjective instead of those. Though he was not known by them (say those} letters, etc. This Here, That There. We should say this man, not this here man; that sample, not that there sample. Those Kind, These Kind. A very common error is the use of those kind or these kind for that kind or this kind. Trite Expressions. There are many expressions that are used so commonly that they make language trite. It is a common fault of inexperienced writers to make use of expres- sions of this kind. The following are some examples: Method is his madness; monarch of all he surveys; long-felt want ; along these lines ; when ignorance is bliss ; your kind favors. By avoiding such overused phrases and expressions the writer will make his language more entertaining. Trustworthy, Reliable. Trustworthy is often a better word than reliable, which is somewhat overused. Try And, Try To. Try and is often used for try to. I shall try and (say try to) come. Two, Too To. Two means twice one; too has the mean- ing of also. Too is often confounded with to. The two men went to the house, too. Unique. The word unique means the only one of its kind. Therefore, do not write very unique. Up to Date, Down to Date. Up to date is greatly overused, and down to date suggests seems too obvious an effort to be "different," When possible, use modern, new, or some other word of the same class. Upon, On. Use upon when there is superposition, actual or figurative, as in the following sentences: The copy was laid upon the desk. He heaped up his adjectives, one upon another. Use on in sentences like the following: On hearing this, we wrote for Brown to come home. 132 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Verbose Expressions. The following examples show how expressions may sometimes be shortened and improved by dropping useless words or by substituting simple words. The words that may be dropped or changed are in Italics. Every now and then. Population of 10,000 people. Nobody else but he. Still continued on. Olfactory organ nose. Pecuniary liabilities debts. Lower limbs legs. Inclement weather rain or snow. In the near future soon. At the present time now. Cooperate together. Serious conflagration big fire. Very, Improper Use of. The adverb very should never be joined directly to a participle unless the participle is used as a mere adjective. Thus, it is proper to say very tired, very pleasing, very saving, but not to say very disturbed, very satisfied, very loved. Such expressions as very dis- turbed, etc. require that an adverb be interposed, of which very becomes a modifier; as, very much disturbed, very soon satisfied, very tenderly loved. Language is often really strengthened by the omission of very; it is a much overused word. When, While, Where. After the verb is in definitions, when, while, or where should not be used to introduce a noun clause. Concord, in grammar, is when one word agrees in some respect with another. Better, Concord, in grammar, is the agreement, in some respect, of one word with another. General advertising is where, etc. Better, General advertising is the kind of advertising that, etc. Who, Which, That. Many authorities insist that who, or which should not introduce restrictive clauses; that is, clauses that are mere modifiers. For such clauses, they advise the relative that. But while the practice of these grammarians is here set forth in detail, it should be remem- bered that other grammarians have held to a more general use of both who and which particularly who', therefore. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 133 this more general use should not be called erroneous. It should perhaps be explained that clauses are either restrict- ive or coordinate. A restrictive clause is one that does the work of a mere modifier. A coordinate clause is a clause of rank equal to that of a leading or principal clause. It usually adds some circumstance and may be appositive, explanatory, or a mere afterthought. Restrictive clauses: the rope that was made of Manila (Manila rope) was not so strong as the cable that was made of steel (steel cable.) The man that hesitates (hesitating man) is lost. Coordinate clauses: The officer, who is my cousin, was very attentive. His wealth, which was great, did not surpass that of his partner. Ice, which is frozen water, forms at 32 Fahrenheit. In the first sentence the clause in Italic is a mere adjective modifier of rope; similarly, the italicized clause in the second sentence is an adjective modifier of man. Clauses so used are restrictive, and as a general rule they should begin with the relative that. To this rule, however, there are some exceptions. 1. When the antecedent has a demonstrative modifier, the restrictive clause should begin with who or which. This man who asks for an interview is a foreigner. Those potatoes which were dug yesterday are for sale. That train which just swept by is the Empire State Express. Yonder mountain which you see in the distance is Pike's Peak. In such sentences the antecedent is sufficiently definite. 2. When a relative clause is separated from its ante- cedent by intervening elements, it should begin with who or which. The debt of lasting gratitude which I owe you for many favors can never be repaid. A gentleman of the old school who was acquainted with Henry Clay resides in that house. The house of seven gables which you built by the sea- shore can be seen from this point. Such sentences are often ambiguous on acconnt of the distance of the relative from its antecedent. 134 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 3. When a noun not the antecedent is likely to be mis- taken for the antecedent, use who or which. That girl petting the dog, who looks so happy, is my niece. The tree loaded with fruit, which shades the house, is a pear tree. It is the demand of the buyer which regulates the supply of a commodity. These sentences are faulty in arrangement. Better thus: That girl who is petting the dog and who looks so happy is my niece. The tree that shades the house and is loaded with fruit is a pear tree. The supply of a commodity is regulated by the buyer's demand. 4. Use only who or which clauses after proper nouns. Caesar, who was both an orator and statesman, was also a great military leader. Have you read the story of Socrates, whom the Athenians poisoned with hemlock? He praised the city of Boston, which many persons believe to be the Athens of America. 5. To avoid a succession of words beginning with th, use who or which in preference to that. I do not enjoy those things which (not that} must be obtained by unfair dealing (better still, things that must, etc.). Those who (not that) are never sure of anything. We are not at liberty to reveal that which (not that that) was done. (Better, what was done.) Have you read that book which (not that) lies on the table? (Better, the book that, etc.) The relative that should, in the following cases, be pre- ferred to who, whom, or which, unless a preposition is required before the relative. 1. After a superlative when the relative clause is restric- tive. Saturday is the earliest date that (not which) will suit. 2. After the adjective same with a restrictive clause. Here are the same goods that we offered yesterday. 3. After vyho used as an antecedent. Who that saw him failed to be charmed? CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 135 4. After two or more antecedents that denote both persons and things. He spoke of the men and the sights that he had seen. 5. After an antecedent unmodified except by a restrictive clause. Thoughts that breathe and words that burn. 6. After an antecedent introduced by it. It was information that he wanted, not argument. It was not / that he was seeking. 7. After only and all. He was the only writer that reached the required stand- ard. Avoid all expressions that are used commonly by other advertisers. 8. After a negative. There has never yet been a writer that could build a strong advertisement when he had no other material but smooth sentences. He wrote on no subject that he had not studied. Nothing that he saw pleased him. None that deserved praise failed to receive it. 9. Analogous to the negatives are such terms as scarce, scarcely, merely, hardly, few, rare, seldom, etc. Scarcely a day passed that did not bring orders. It was merely a passing remark that he uttered, but it suggested the chief selling point of the campaign. There was hardly an applicant that could speak cor- rectly. Few that tried were successful. Rare was the day that saw her unemployed. Seldom did news reach us that was true. Who, Whom. The two pronouns who and whom are fre- quently confounded, especially in interrogative sentences. In the following sentences the correct pronoun is in paren- theses: Whom (who) did you think he was? Who (whom) did you think him to be? Who (whom) did the convention nominate? You couid never guess whom (who) it was. 136 CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION Whole, Less, More, Most. The adjective whole should not be used as a plural in the sense of all, nor less in the sense of fewer. More and most also are often ambiguous. The solicitor gave the copy-writer the whole (say all the) particulars. There are no less (say fewer) than twenty diphthongs in the English language. Greater experience and more severe criticism are what he sadly needs to perfect his style. Here it is uncertain whether the meaning is more criticism that is severe, or criticism of more severity. Temperance, more than (better, rather than) medicine, is the proper means of curing many diseases. In speaking of aggregates of time, weight, distance, value. etc., if they may be regarded as singular, whole and less are preferable to all and fewer. The following are correct: He disappeared not less than ten years ago. She weighs less than one hundred pounds. He went the whole (or entire) hundred miles on foot. The whole (or entire) twenty-four hours had been wasted. You Are, You're, Your. You re is a contraction for you. are and may be properly used in the colloquial style of language; but you're should not be confounded with the possessive pronoun your. He said, " You're going out without your hat." You Was. It is never correct to say You was. Say You were. ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS Memoranda and phenomena are plural forms. There- fore, write The 'memorandum was destroyed, if only one mem- orandum is referred to. Forward, backward homeward, afterward, downward, toward, upward, etc., ordinarily do not require a final s. Lengthwise, sidewise, etc. are better forms than length- Ways, sideways, etc. CORRECT AND FAULTY DICTION 137 Last month and this month are better than ult. and inst. Do not use such abbreviations as Xmas for Christmas; resp'y for respectfully; yours, etc. for yours truly. Instead of writing, Replying to your letter, please return the dress, write, Replying to your letter, we ask that you return the dress; or, better still, omit the overused style of intro- duction and begin with, Return the dress, or Please return the dress. Such worn-out expressions as beg to acknowledge, trusting to receive further favors, etc., should not be used. Say a pair of new gloves, not a new pair of gloves; a woman's artistic shoe, not an artistic woman's shoe; men's stylish suits, not stylish men's suits; a full-page magazine advertisement, not a magazine full-page advertisement. CORRECT AND INCORRECT EXPRESSIONS INCORRECT Be that as it will. He will not go without you agree. Whatever are you writing? I wish I was rich. I am through. It is a tasty cover. (Appeti- zing foods are tasty.) It is no use to write. He isn't hardly old enough. He cannot be found any place. We have no other alternative. I don't think we shall go. We did not think it was him. This will do nicely. I hadn't ought to have writ- ten. He sustained injury. It has broke down. We have drove there. CORRECT Be that as it may. He will not go unless you agree. What are you writing? I wish I were rich. I have finished my work. It is a tasteful cover. It is of no use to write. He is hardly old enough. He cannot be found any- where. We have no alternative. I think we shall not go. We did not think it was he. This will do very well. I should not have written. He was injured. It has broken down. We have driven there. 138 BROADENING THE VOCABULARY The tank has bursted (or busted). We use to subscribe. It is a long ways off. Buy it off of us. Quit that noise. I am afraid that I cannot come. However did you do it. I have every confidence in him. It transpired yesterday. He resided in Chicago. They don't have any saloons in Danville. Does the title page say plows ? My sister and myself were there. It is no good. He* would of come. He was in no shape to leave. I read where prices are in- creasing. I'll back up that statement. I beg to say. The tank has burst. We used to subscribe. It is a long way (or distance). Buy it from (or of) us. Stop (or cease) that noise. I fear that I cannot come. How did you do it ? I have implicit confidence in him. It happened yesterday. He lived in Chicago. There are no saloons in Dan- ville. Is the word plows on the title page? My sister and I were there. It is worthless. He would have come. He was in no condition to leave. I read that prices are in- creasing. I'll support that statement. I beg leave to say. BROADENING THE VOCABULARY AND IMPROVING IN COMPOSITION It is related of Mark Twain that once, on being asked where he had been after an absence of several hours, he replied, "I've been hunting for a word, and I found it, too." Perhaps the business writer's need for an appropriate word is not often such that he would be justified in spend- ing several hours to find it, but it is certain that every per- BROADENING THE VOCABULARY 139 son who has much writing to do must make a constant effort to increase his vocabulary if he expects to get the best results from his work and to have the pleasure in it that he should have. Increasing the vocabulary is not the mere crowding of more words into the memory. Along with the increase in the number of words must come a corresponding develop- ment of one's knowledge of the proper use of those words and a greater appreciation of word differences. Most people suffer from poverty of language. "Elegant," "splendid," "clever," "awful," "horrid," are used to sig- nify they really do not express approval or disapproval of everything. Such persons are unmindful of the fact that there lies within their easy reach a wealth of words, a reserve never depleted. The English language, on account of its composite origin, is rich in synonyms. Few realize that there are fifteen synonyms for beautiful, twenty-one for beginning, fifteen for benevolence, twenty for friendly and thirty-seven for pure. Yet, scarcely any two of the synonyms for a given word have the identical significance. Almost every one of the thirty-seven synonyms for pure conveys a slightly different impression to the mind and is a more fitting descriptive word for some one noun than it is for any other. Take any masterpiece of literature and try to substitute synonyms for the words used by the author. You will then see how much of its charm depends on its exactitude of expression. One of the first steps in acquiring a good vocabulary is to become more careful with spoken language. A person that has no more pride in his conversation than to pronounce again, giving to the last syllable the pronunciation that we give gain, that accents exquisite on the second syllable and inquiry on the first is not likely to make much progress with his written language. Speak deliberately and strive to use words that exactly express your meaning. Instead of hold- ing to funny as an adjective to describe any and every thing out of the ordinary, use amusing, humorous, ridiculous, strange, curious, queer, odd, etc., when occasion makes them fitting. 140 BROADENING THE VOCABULARY Two college students, having become impressed and dis- satisfied with the limited range of their vocabularies, resolved that thereafter they would not use the same word ki referring to two things that were in any way different. At the time of graduation both were noted for their fluency and their discriminating choice of words. We may acknowledge or reply without answering; an appeal may bring a response or a refusal; a retort carries the sense of wit or severity. We speak of a calm- sea, a placid lake, a serene sky, a still night, a quiet day. Note how each adjective goes with the noun better than any other. One is constrained to an action, but restrained from it. A work may be ended when it is far from being completed or finished. Censure carries the idea of fault but not of a criminal act, while accuse strongly implies criminality. Doubt is merely lack of conviction, but credulity suggests that an improbable statement has been made. Suspense conveys the idea of anxiety, but uncertainty does not. A person cannot use a good book of synonyms diligently without discovering many errors and inaccuracies in his diction or without appreciating a thousand new beauties of his language. Do not make a task of the study of such a book. Make it a daily companion, studying it in any spare moments that you may have and referring to it whenever you are in doubt as to the proper use of a word. Force your- self to become critical of your language. Good reading is the important thing. From childhood, we learn to use words by first hearing or seeing them used by others. The value of a good knowledge of grammar is not to be undervalued, but to learn to use words well, you must study the best usage. For the business writer, the most helpful reading will be found in the editorials and reviews of the best newspapers, the essay ical articles of the leading magazines, and in selec- tions from standard authors. Fiction is not recommended strongly unless the student will reread several times, for on the first reading of a story too much attention is invariably paid to the narrative and too little to the language. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 141 The Ben Franklin method of improving in composition will prove helpful. This method is to select some para- graphs of well-written language, to read for the ideas only and then, without referring to the language of the author, to write the same ideas in your own language. Comparison with the original will enable you to see wherein your language or construction is poor. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Stationery. No business man should write his business letters on letter sheets without the printed heading at the top. In the mind of the average person, unprinted letter sheets indicate that the business of the letter writer does not amount to much; in mail-order work, the use of plain letter sheets would be disastrous. The paper should be of good quality, preferably unruled, and be tastefully printed. Perhaps a letterhead for some concerns may properly be elaborate, but for most lines of business it should not be so. Simple, neat printing is the order of the day for letterheads. Engraved and embossed stationery is expensive, but it is profitable to use it in some lines of business. White paper is always good for business stationery. Some of the tints are as good as white and have the advantage of being a little distinctive, but dark shades of paper should not be selected. It is questionable whether a radical variation from the regular form and style of business letterheads and envelopes is helpful. A slight change that does not savor of freakiness or eccentricity and yet shows originality and taste is safe; but unless it is certain that the additional attention attracted would be of the favorable kind, it is well to order the regular size and style, improving the quality of the paper if distinc- tion is the aim. The address of the writer should be printed in the upper left corner of the front of every business envelope or on the back in the middle of the flap, where some with the idea 142 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE of being original prefer it. As all postmasters cannot be depended on to return letters at the end of a stated period, when they prove undeliverable, most firms print merely their names and addresses on their envelopes, and do not fix a time at the end of which letters are to be returned. In using addressed return envelopes a good business practice it is well to have them a trifle smaller than the envelopes in which they are to be enclosed ; this will obviate folding. Promptness. Be prompt in replying. Customers are sure to be vexed when their letters remain unanswered, and they form good impressions of firms that reply by return mail. Succcessful business houses are noted for their promptness and courtesy in replying to every communication that merits an answer or an acknowledgment. Hundreds of orders are secured simply because one correspondent was a day earlier than another in replying. If a request must be considered at length before an answer can be given, the inquirer should at least be informed that his letter was received and is hav- ing attention. To delay for a week, or even for a few days, serves to create the impression of unreadiness or inability to do business. Neatness. No business man can afford to send out letters that are dirty or that contain blots, slovenly erasures, or interlineations. Whether typewritten or pen written, a letter should be neat and clean. One that cannot make his work conform to these simple requirements should direct his efforts to some field other than that of letter writing. As the letter writer is judged by the letters that are sent out over his signature, too much care cannot be exercised in having them scrupulously neat. Legibility. As most business letters are typewritten now- adays, the plea for legibility applies mainly to signatures and addresses. Illegibly written proper names are a source of vexation to correspondents and clerks everywhere. When writing to strangers, be sure that your signature and address are written plainly. Do not obscure such important informa- tion just for the sake of showing how you can twirl a pen. If a letter is to be written with a pen, use only black or blue- BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 143 black ink. In business, the typewritten letter has, except in rare instances, many advantages over the pen-written one. Correct Spelling. A good rule for spelling is: Be careful, and consult the dictionary whenever there is the slightest doubt. Business men deplore the scarcity of good spellers. With dictionaries cheap and accessible, there is no excuse for these "little foxes that spoil the vine." If the stenographer reads as much as he should, and is a careful observer, he will learn to recognize correct spelling by the "looks" of words, and the judgment of the eye is usually more accurate than the memory. In fact, when a dictionary is not available, a good way to determine the correctness of spelling is to write the word and see whether or not the form appears to be right. The studying, in pairs, of words of like sounds but of differ- ent meaning and spelling is hardly a good one, for often the mind is thereby confused over words that were before clear in their distinctions. Length of Letters. There can be no fixed answer to the question. How long should a letter be? It is possible to tabulate various kinds of letters and to suggest that certain of them should be short, others long, and still others of moderate length; but varying conditions would make such a tabulation of little value. With some special classes of letters, it is safer to give too much information than to risk not giving enough; and in writing to persons that do not receive much mail, it is not a serious fault if a letter should be a paragraph or two longer than is absolutely necessary. Some have the idea that when the point of brevity has been covered the important thing in business correspondence has been mentioned. They for- get to explain that while a man may not be inclined to read more than a sentence about new scouring soap, he will read pages of pertinent information about an automobile that he is thinking about buying or about an investment that he is thinking of making, or that a woman will read 500 words about a .new suit. One page is certainly enough for a great many letters often one paragraph is enough, but there are single-spaced letters that cover four pages and are 144 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE not too long. Lincoln was once asked how long a man's legs should be. He replied that they should be long enough to reach from his body to the ground. Somewhat the same principle applies to letters. They should be long enough to accomplish the object. However, letters written to persons that receive much mail should be concise. The demand for " to-the-point " messages is more insistent in this busy age than it was generations ago. Unless the subject of a long letter is of much interest, the average business man will merely skim it. Clearness and completeness should never be sacrificed for brevity, but be reasonably brief. The story of the creation of the world is related in about 600 words, and the result of a battle was well expressed in the message, "We have met the enemy, and they are ours." It is possible sometimes to give all essential information in one sentence. For example: "The two cuts mentioned in your letter of the 1st will be sent by prepaid express on receipt of your check for $3." As the one to whom this letter was written knew what cuts were referred to, there was no need for a longer letter. A professional letter writer says that of more than a thousand special letters prepared by him for customers, only 30 have required two sheets. Letters to business firms should always be more concise than those to retail customers, to whom extended courtesy and detail are necessary as a means of promoting sales; and, as a xule, longer letters should be written to women than to men. CLEARNESS Letter writing is something like story writing; in both, the writer should begin at the point at which the message can be started most interestingly, making the necessary state- ments in their logical order, leaving out details that are immaterial, and conclude with a climax. It is almost a daily occurrence to find a letter that does not express the thoughts of the writer clearly. This is usually due to haste; often to lack of proper training. Inquirers frequently fail to tell definitely what they want, BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 145 or fail to give sufficient information to make their requests clear. Mail-order correspondents have to handle thousands of letters asking for particulars about stoves, guns, books, etc. without knowing which of a hundred articles the writer had in mind. Sometimes experienced correspondents fail to be clear in answering letters by failing to read the inquiry carefully just before beginning to reply. When an inquirer asks questions or makes some proposal in his letter, he certainly has a right to expect an answer. You cannot have the meaning of a letter too plain, nor can you be too careful about the construction. If you talk with some one, a misunderstanding may be corrected imme- diately; but a wrong impression gained from a letter may not be easily effaced. Methods of Attaining Clearness. Do not begin your letter until you have decided what you wish to write. Then so construct it that you not only make your meaning clear but leave it impossible for the reader of your letter to mis- understand. Beyond any necessary acknowledgement of the receipt of a letter or request, there is not often ' much need for an introduction. Let the real message be started at once. Treat the subjects or the items of the letter in their logical order: this is very important. If your correspondent has ordered something that you cannot ship, tell him first that you cannot ship; then explain, if necessary, why you cannot do so. In answering an inquiry about a house that is for sale, the various branches of the subject should be taken up one at a time. With a few words about the value of the property, the writer could begin with a description of the location, then proceed to details such as size of lot and dwelling, num- ber of outbuildings, condition etc., and end the letter with the terms of sale and an invitation to call and see the property. Give each subject full treatment at the proper place and do not make the mistake of later going over the ground again. Repetition sometimes emphasizes. Unless it is clear, how- ever, that repetition is for emphasis, it tends to confusion. 146 BUS IX ESS CORRESPONDENCE Letters should not be condensed at the expense of clear- ness, but immaterial details and matters that will suggest themselves to the reader should be omitted. Paragraph and Sentence Construction. Paragraph when the subject changes or when a new treatment of the subject is introduced. Letters require more paragraphing than general literary matter. It is often necessary to paragraph for the same reason that printers use display type, that is, to catch the eye. Typewriter print is not so readable as magazine and newspaper styles, and paragraphing as an aid to readable- ness is even more necessary when a letter is written single spaced. If the tendency is to use long and involved sentences, strive to use some short sentences. As a general rule, it is not well to use more than two or three consecutive commas in punctuating a series of clauses or expressions. Note the following example: We regret that we do not have the goods in stock, but we will order them at once, and we are sure we can get them to you not later than the 15th, if that will be soon enough. The construction is improved by substituting a semicolon for the second comma and by omitting the and that follows thus: We regret that we haven't the goods in stock, but we will order them at once; we are sure we can get them to you not later than the 15th, if that will be soon enough. In running a string of clauses together, there is danger that both writer and reader may lose the sense before reach- ing a stopping place. By dividing long sentences, the reader catches and records mentally the first part of the idea, and his mind is then free to grasp what follows. All dictators should dictate punctuation as well as language. Then the stenographer will not have to guess where commas, semi- colons, periods, quotation marks, etc. are to be used. Excess of Modifying Clauses. Guard against many modifying clauses. An excess is sure to confuse the reader. Note this example: BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 147 Regarding the advertising book, probably the only plan we would entertain would be to arrange for the publishing, you to pay all costs, and in consideration of the advantages of having the work put out under our imprint and with a view to sharing in the profits of the sales afterward. A little judicious separating by periods or semicolons would have prevented this awkwardness. Observe the following revision of the language and the punctuation: Probably the only plan we would consider for the pub- lishing of the book on advertising would require you to pay all costs. You could afford to pay costs, we think, in view of the advantage of having the work put out under our imprint and considering that you would share in the profits of the sales. Valuable as short sentences are, too many, may be used. If there are many of them and they follow in close succession, the letter will have an undesirable brusqueness or curtness. There is need for both long and short sentences. Simplicity. Do not use foreign words and phrases when common English words will do as well or better. In writing to well-educated persons, it is permissible to use any expres- sion that will be understood; but in general correspondence, be sure to use only those words and phrases that are in common usage in our own language. Some will understand what you mean if you use the "golden mead" as a simile; with others more familiar similes must be used. It is worthy of note that some of the finest similes are based on the incidents and parables of the Bible, a book familiar to more persons than any other. In choosing our words, we must take account of the sta- tion of life of our correspondent. This does not mean that we are to show by our tone that we are descending from a plane of superior knowledge but that you should meet your correspondent on ground that is familiar to him. "Be simple, be unaffected, be honest in your speaking and writing. Never use a long word where a short one will do. Call a spade a spade, not a well-known oblong instrument of manual husbandry; let home be home, not a residence, a place a place, not a locality; and so of the rest. Where a 148 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE short word will do, you always lose by using a long one: you lose in clearness; you lose in honest expression of your meaning; and, in the estimation of all qualified to judge, you lose in reputation for ability. The only true way to shine, even in this false world, is to be modest and unassuming. Falsehood may be a very thick crust, but in course of time truth will find a place to break through. Elegance of lan- guage may not be in the power of all of us, but simplicity and straightforwardness are. Write much as you would speak; speak as you think. Be what you say; and, within the rules of prudence, say what you are." Always read letters carefully before signing them. In the case of an important letter, it is sometimes well to let a third person read what you have written, in order that you may be sure that it makes the impression you intended it should make. TONE AND INDIVIDUALITY If the correspondent would think of letter writing as a substitute for the personal interview, he should have less difficulty in deciding about the proper tone. If you were to interview the governor of your state or the president of the United States, how would you talk? Respectfully. When you meet an old classmate how do you greet him? Heartily. Here, then, is a broad principle: the tone of letters should be determined by the position of the person we address, by our degree of acquaintance with him, and by the nature of the communication. A set style of letter writing is no more practicable than a set style of manner. The successful salesman adapts his manner to the character or the disposition of the person he approaches; and in letter writing there should be like regard for the " characteristics. Do not follow forms or copy the style of some one else-; imagine yourself in the presence of the per- son, and deliver your message in your own way, using the language that is most natural to you. Hackneyed and Conventional Forms. One of the early things that the stenographic student learns is that in busi- BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 149 ness correspondence there are a great many expressions that occur again and again in the same form, for which expressions he is expected to memorize phrase signs. It is hardly strange, therefore, that as the stenographer develops into a corre- spondent he should follow in his composition the forms of expression that are so familiar. The result is that a bright youngster 10 years old will write a much more natural letter than will the typical graduate of a business course. The youngster knows no conventional forms; he has something to say and though his vocabulary is a scant one, he goes straight to the mark. The chief fault of the ordinary letter is its formality and hackneyed style of expression. Letter writing is usually learned by imitation that is, by following the forms and expressions used by others and the common product is a mass of conventional phrases. The old books on letter writing taught that the correct way to begin a letter was " Yours of the 15th instant received and noted, and in reply would say," etc., a style that is devoid of individuality and one that no good business man would follow in his spoken communications. There are many correspondents that, whether the letter is of a business or of a social nature, always begin with the same cold, mechanical " Yours of the instant is at hand." Such correspondents think that "business is business" and that the best way to dispose of a business letter is in a few, stiff, lifeless sentences to let the writer know that his com- munication was received and that the goods were shipped "2/8/09." An uneducated man once paid a professional correspondent a high compliment when, on referring to a letter he had received from the correspondent, he said: "He told me exactly what I wanted to know and he told it to me just as if we had been talking together." There is entirely too much of what has been appropriately called "commercial jargon" in modern business correspond- ence. Examine a file of letters and note the monotonous frequency of such ungraceful phrases as "beg to advise," "in regard to same," etc. 150 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE The Natural Tone. There should be a personality to a letter that will distinguish it from a mere page of sentences and paragraphs. It should be a living message. It is customary to begin with Dear Sir or Gentlemen, or some other such conventional phrase. In this respect, and in the polite closing, letters are more formal than conversa- tions. It is a fact, however, that a few correspondents are omitting the formal Dear Sir and the time-honored Yours truly, a leading mail-order house being a follower of the new practice. This style, however, may be too radical for immediate general adoption. There is danger, on the other hand, that some in follow- ing the new style of letter writing now so much urged will adopt a style that is too familiar. The so-called "snappy" letter, besprinkled with dashes and overparagraphed, that shows in every sentence the intended cleverness of the writer, is ardly more effective than the letter full of stereo- typed phrases. Between the two extremes there is a style of business composition that is as natural and courteous as the writer's conversation, and if the letter is a sales letter it is as con- vincing as the talk of a skilful salesman, without at the same time being "smart." Formal terms and expressions, though eliminated to a great extent from modern business correspondence, should be retained in addressing officials and prominent persons. "I have the honor to remain, with profound respect, your obedient servant," would be regarded as an affectation or an antiquated expression in the ordinary business intercourse of the United States, but it has its proper place in a certain class of communications. Indeed, while extreme formality is not desirable in business letters, correspondents may learn much from a study of the delicately phrased, dignified, courteous letters of the writers of 25 and 50 years ago. The Conversational Style. Feel free to employ contrac- tions such as "doesn't," "shouldn't," "I'll," etc., to give a smooth, conversational style to your diction. The col- loquial style is more natural and more effective. If you cannot begin your letters in an original way, at least change BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 151 the old time-worn phrases a little. Instead of "Yours of the 5th received and noted," you might write, "Your request of the oth has been carefully considered," or "We wish we could consistently do what you have asked in your letter of yesterday," etc. anything to get away from the stiff- ness of nine-tenths of letters. Overuse of Favorite Words. Use hereby, therefrom, thereto, therein, etc. as sparingly as possible, and do not use trusting, esteemed, valued, etc. to excess. Refer to a book of synonyms and find substitutes for overused words. Watch yourself to see that you do not repeat noticeably pet expressions such as "you know," "of course," "however," "as far as that is concerned," etc. Overuse of I and We. Avoid beginning too many para- graphs with We or /; usually some other part of the sen- tence can be brought around to begin the paragraph and the monotony of repeating We or / avoided. Extravagant Expressions. Few admire a gushy person, and a gushy letter is just as unagreeable. If "most mag- nificent" is changed to "magnificent," the expression will usually be strengthened. The word very is commonly over- used. Avoid the general use of superlatives: advertising men, who measure the strength of words by cash returns, find that "better" is often a more effective word than "best." A simple, grateful expression for a favor done is much more to be desired than a string of sentences or paragraphs that show insincerity and labored effort. Franklin Hobbs, a professional letter writer says: "Straight talk, ballasted with interesting facts and common sense, written with a view to reaching the heart and the purse, will win just as surely as sarcasm, flippancy, and the extravagant use of words will lose." "You can catch more flies with molasses than you can with vinegar" is an old adage that contains good sense. But do not go to the other extreme and be so smooth and complimentary that you will be suspected of insincerity or fail to make any impression. The tone of the following paragraphs is typical of that of many letters sent out by managers of salesmen. 152 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Well, March was a great month, wasn't it? I cannot begin to tell you how gratified I am to be able to let you know that the total sales were the greatest of any month in the history of the company, notwith- standing the fact that December is usually our banner month. It is something to be proud of. Neither can I express my feelings toward you loyal, hustling men that made such a glorious record possible. Here's a hand- shake and my heartiest thanks to each and all of you. Don't write letters. Go and see your man. Fifteen minutes face to face is worth fifteen dozen letters about in- surance. Don't mind striking high. It's easier to come down to five than it is to go up from five to ten; just like .sliding down hill it is easier to come down than it is to draw the sled up. It makes a man feel good to think that you regard him as a prospect for a $10,000 policy. Devote some attention to matters in which your corre- spondent is interested. Mention events; send clippings: your though tfulness will be appreciated. Choice of Salutation. Unless you are acquainted with your correspondent or have had previous correspondence with him, it is hardly proper to address him as Dear Mr. Brown or My dear Mr. Brown. Use Dear Sir or My dear Sir. Gentlemen is the customary salutation where firms or several persons are addressed, but Dear Sirs is permissible. In the United States, correspondents use the plain Mr. and Dear Sir, My dear Sir, and Dear Mr. almost exclu- sively when letters relate to business. In official letters, it is always safe to use Sir. Addressing Judges. In official communications, judges of the higher courts, members of the cabinet, etc. are ad- dressed in this formal style: To the Honorable, the Secre- tary of State, the form being varied to conform to the position of the person addressed. Addressing President and Governors. The president of the United States may be addressed officially in this style: To his Excellency, the President of the United States, or To his Excellency, William H. Taft, President of the United States. This form, with the necessary change, may be used also in addressing governors of states. A less formal address would be BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 153 To the President, Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C. Mr. President: The first three lines of the foregoing form may be placed at the close of the letter, if preferred, starting the letter with the salutation. The salutations My dear Mr. President and Dear Mr. President are often used by those who know the president. Messrs. It is good form to write Messrs. Clarke Brothers if it is desired to be more than ordinarily courteous. In Great Britain, the Yawman & Erbe Mfg. Co. would be addressed as Messrs. Yawman & Erbe Mfg. Co. In France, Messieurs is usually spelled out in the -address. Addressing Ministers. Ministers may be addressed for- mally as Reverend; doctors of divinity as Reverend Doctor; salutation for both, Reverend Sir. Use of Honorable. The word Honorable is used rather loosely, being bestowed on almost every one that holds or that has held an important public office. High federal officers, United States Senators, and judges of the higher courts should be addressed as Honorable. Members of the United States House of Representatives, members of state legislatures, and mayors are also, and perhaps properly, accorded the title. Use of Esquire. Civil officers below the ranks compli- mented with Honorable may, in the absence of official titles, be addressed as Esquire. The word Esquire is also used to some extent in addressing lawyers and persons of superior social standing. It is not, however, used nearly so much now as it was in years past. Use of Madam. The strict definition of Madam is "my lady . ' ' Through usage , the salutation Dear Madam is usually understood as implying that the woman addressed is mar- ried, but it is used properly for the want of a more appro- priate salutation in addressing unmarried women, whether old or young. The list on the following page will be found convenient for reference in writing letters to distinguished persons, 154 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE PROPER FORMS TO USE IN ADDRESSING DISTIN- GUISHED PERSONS Address Salutation Ambassador or To His Excellency Sir, Dear Sir, or Foreign Minister Your Excellency Archbishop The Most Rev., or Your Grace, or Sir To His Grace Baronet) To Sir , Bart. Your Lordship, or Baron J * ' 'To the Hon. Baron Sir Bishop (Methodist To the Right Rev- Reverend Sir, Dear excepted) erend Sir, or Most Rev- erend Bishop Cofone? } Captain or Colonel Sir, or Dear Sir Cardinal To His Eminence, Your Eminence Cardinal Clergymen Reverend Dear Sir, or Rev- erend Sir Congressman Honorable Dear Sir, or Sir Count To Count , or Dear Sir, or My To the Right Lord Hon., the Count C^own Prince HbjgSjw} Yourj Highness Highness Duke To His Grace, the Your Grace Duke of Duke (Royal) To His Royal High- Your Royal High- ness, the Duke ness of Earl To the Right Hon- Your Lordship orable, the Earl of Governor To His Excellency Your Excellency, (by courtesy), or or Sir Hon. Judge The Honorable Sir, Dear Sir (In Court: Your Honor) King His ("Imperial," Your Majesty, or only if of an Em- May it. please pire) Majesty Your Majesty Knight Sir , Kt. Sir Mayor Honorable Mayor Sir, Dear Sir of Marquis To the Most Hon- Your Lordship orable, the Mar- quis of BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 155 Pope His Holiness Your Holiness President To the President Sir, Dear Sir, or of the United Mr. President States, Execu- tive Mansion, Washington, (or) His Excellency the President of Prince or Princess To His (Her) Royal Sir, (Madam) or Highness, Prince Your Royal (cess) Highness Queen To Her Most Ex- Madam, or Your cellent (or Gra- Majesty cious)Majesty Vice-President. . . . The Honorable, the Sir, or Dear Sir Vice- President of the United States, or The Hon. Vice-Presi- dent of Viscount To the Right Hon., Your Lordship the Viscount Miscellaneous Points. In addressing a firm composed of women, this style may be followed: Mmes. Brown and Savoy, 18 Fifth Avenue, New York. Ladies: Ladies is suggested not because of its agreeatbleness, but because there seems no other form that could be used for the salutation except the French Mesdames or this form, Dear Mmes. Brown and Savoy. Obviously, Gentlemen is out of the question. If both of the women are unmarried, Misses should be substituted for Mmes., but Mmes. may be used if one of the firm is married and the other is not. If you are acquainted with your feminine correspondent or have had previous dealings with her, the salutation may be Dear Miss Smith or Dear Mrs. Jones. Women in signing their names should usually prefix Miss or Mrs., as the case may be, placing the title within paren- theses; thus, (Miss) Lucy Brown. To omit the parentheses would be very poor taste. When a woman writes to those who know her, it is better form for her to omit the Miss or Mrs. altogether. 156 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE If some one who you have reason to believe is a woman fails to write Miss or Mrs. in signing her name, and it is impossible from the handwriting or otherwise to be sure that she is a woman, instead of writing "Dear Sir or Madam," a letter may be begun in this way: L. R. Brown, Ravenswood, Montana. We are in receipt of your letter, etc. In addressing announcements, invitations, etc. such forms as Sir and Madam, Professor and Mrs., and Rev Dr. and Mrs., may be used. In addressing a board of commissioners, or other such body, it is proper to address the president or chairman. Monsieur (abbreviated to M.) is the French equivalent of the English Mister. Herr is the German equivalent of Mister; Signore (abbreviated to Sig.) is the Italian form; Senor (abbreviated to Sr.) is the Spanish form. In address- ing letters to residents of France, Germany, and Italy, it is a good plan to use these forms even if the letter is written in English. The plural form for Monsieur is Messieurs, the plural for Herr is Herren; for Signore, Signori; for Senor, Senores. Mademoiselle is the French form for Miss; the singular abbreviation is Mile.; plural form, Miles. Closing Phrases. Yours truly, cordially yours, faithfully yours, sincerely yours, respectfully yours, yours ever, and many other similar expressions are in common use. A choice depends on personal preference, the nature of the communi- cation, and the degree of acquaintance. The closing phrase should be in harmony with the salutation; that is. if the salu- tation is Sir, an appropriate closing phrase would be Respect- fully yours. Closing phrases of British correspondents are usually more formal and respectful than those of Americans. Respectfully submitted, or All of which is respectfully sub- mitted are properly used at the close of a report made to an employer, and in petitions. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 157 COURTESY Value of Courtesy. Courtesy has made fortunes. A well- known bank president says: "If I could command the speech of twenty nations, I should preach politeness to them all." Nothing is more valuable as a business asset to a young man or a young woman. Never write a sarcastic, ill-spirited letter. It is so easy to do, and at times so hard not to do. But one may be firm, when necessary, without resorting to satire or sarcasm, which does not in one case out of a hundred do any good. How to Treat an Irritating Letter. When some one writes a letter that hurts, wait awhile before answering. If you must write a cutting letter, do so; read it, show it to your next friend and let him enjoy it. Then tear it up and write as you should. A saucy letter has no proper place in busi- ness. If your correspondent wants to be contrary and abusive, let him have it all to himself. If you pay him back in his own coin and get the better of the argument, he may never forgive you for doing so; and you will in time regret that you descended to his level. Ignore abuse and satire; treat people considerately, and you will be at peace with the world and with yourself. The rule of one successful business man is to delay his reply to a harsh letter until he has slept one night after receiving it. By that time, hasty impulses are gone and he can write as he should. Look for Pleasantness. If you look for discourtesy and unpleasantness from your correspondents, you are certain to find something that may be construed that way. Make it a point to be pleasant and courteous and you will be agreeably surprised to see how it exacts the same treatment from most other people. Even if it occasionally does not,, it will make you immune, as it were, against the effects of discourtesy from others. Making Brief Letters Courteous. It has been asserted by some advocates of brevity that the courteous letter requires too much time and space. This is not necessarily true. A single courteous expression is often all that is needed. 158 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Read the following two letters and see what pleasant impressions may be created by brief paragraphs: Dear Mr. Hall: I have just had chance to look over your little book, ' 'How to Get a Position and How to Keep It, 11 and at the same time that I thank you for sending it to me I want to commend its sound common sense. You have certainly put a lot into a little volume, and it should help a large number of young fellows. May it do so! Sincerely yours. Dear Sir: Replying to yours of November 26, we can only say that there is nothing that you may do for us at the present time in the way of designing. Regretting that we cannot make you a more favorable answer, we are Truly yours, JOSEPH DIXON CRUCIBLE COMPANY Courtesy With Dignity. When extreme actions must be taken, it is still possible to have the tone of a letter dignified. Note the following paragraph: We insist that the matter covered by our letter of June 3 be attended to at once. If there is any further delay, we shall, much to our regret, feel compelled to place the claim in the hands of our attorney. The following is a paragraph from the letter of a trained correspondent in reply to an insulting letter: We do not take offence at what you have written, for we do not believe that it reflects your real opinion of us. We are inclined to think that the letter was written while you were irritated over something else. The correspondent then went on to explain, in a courteous way, the subject under discussion, and having given a frank, fair position from his point of view, expressed the belief that the writer of the caustic letter would see that an apology BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 159 was due, both as a matter of justice to himself and the firm he had tried to insult. The apology came by the next mail. Of course it is necessary to use the "big stick" in extreme cases, but the correspondent will do well to remember that in most cases "a soft answer turneth away wrath." ORDERING AND INQUIRING LETTERS Following Directions. In ordering from a catalog, when the manufacturer or dealer gives directions for ordering, follow those directions. If he requests you to order by number, do so. Use his order blank, if he has sent one. You may reasonably expect to get better attention by com- plying strictly with the directions that he gives, for he has probably established a system for taking care of orders that come in regular form. Be Specific. Do not write letters to accompany orders unless they are necessary. When you do write, state plainly and briefly what you desire. Give full details, so that there may be no misunderstanding, but give them only once. Specify number, size, style, price, etc. so as to make it as easy as possible for your order to be filled correctly. If you make the order a part of your letter, let each item occupy a separate line, placing a semicolon after each until the last is reached, which should be followed by a period. In very long enumerations, such as those on order sheets, it is not necessary to place punctuation marks after the items. Useless Questions. Do not ask useless questions. Corre- spondents regard with disfavor the person that asks many questions. Sometimes the questions asked are absurd; often they call for expressions of opinion that neither the correspondent nor any one else is qualified to give. Such letters usually serve only to give some one trouble, for which there is no recompense. Sending Money. Always send money the way the manu- facturer, advertiser, or dealer wishes it sent. If he men- tions that local checks will not be received, you are inviting annoyance and delay by sending a local check. When 160 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE ordering for the first time, give references if you expect credit to be granted. If it is your intention to discount all bills, say so. Name and Address. Read orders carefully. Give full shipping directions, and do not forget, above all things, to have in the letter your full name and address written so plainly that any one may read it. No matter if you have ordered many times, give your full address each time, and write your name the way you usually write it: that is, do not order one time as Charles R. Prosser and another time as C. Rufus Prosser. In dealing with large concerns, it is not safe to presume that your name and address will be recognized or remembered. Correspondents are put to a great deal of trouble by persons that assume that their names and addresses are necessarily known. Direct Letter to Firm. Changes are frequent among employes. The man that attended to one of your orders may leave the firm before you order again. For this reason, it is best generally to address all orders to the firm rather than to some particular individual connected wfth it; if you address the envelope to a salesman and he has left the employ of the company, the post-office authorities are usually obliged to forward the letter to him. It is a good plan to send each order as if no other order had been sent, reminding the firm of any discounts or other concessions to which you may be entitled, and bringing up any matters that should be observed in filling your order. When an Answer is Required. Usually when you make an inquiry, it is asking for some one's time and attention. Therefore, the inquiry should be definite and as concise as possible. Of course, if you are a purchaser, or have some other equal claim, you may take more liberty with the time of people than would otherwise be proper; but even if you are a regular customer, it is only right that you should be considerate in your requirements. "When it is a favor for some one to give you information, always enclose an addressed and stamped envelope, or at least a stamp for reply. It will not only make a reply more probable, but it will show that you are conscious that others BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 161 may be asking for information and that it is not right to require a person to contribute time and postage to something in which he perhaps has no interest, pecuniary or otherwise. A brief, courteous request, enclosing an addressed and stamped envelope, nearly always commands attention. An important thing to remember is that letters cannot always be answered promptly. The one to whom you wrote may be out of the city or he may be very busy. Your request may require consideration. Give time for atten- tion and a few days more, if possible. In making com- plaints, be as definite as you can. Give the date of the order, tell how the money was sent, etc. You should always keep copies of orders. Do not jump to the conclusion that you have been defrauded. Mistakes will happen and delays will occur. Where the wrong goods have been received by you, do not be in too great a hurry to return them. The seller may wish to have them sent somewhere else in your town or to make some other disposal of them. Give him a chance. SUGGESTED FORM FOR ORDERING LETTER Elmwood, 111.. May 14, 1910. Messrs. Oakford & Fahnestock, Peoria, Illinois. Dear Sirs: Please send promptly to me at Elmwood the following-named goods: 2 barrels of Baldwin apples; 1 bunch of choice ripe bananas; 1 barrel of granulated sugar; 2 sacks of light-brown C sugar; 1 sack of Java coffee; 2 cases of canned tomatoes. Ship by C. B. & Q. fast freight. Bill us at your lowest cash prices, as we shall pay on receipt of invoice. Yours truly, JOHNSON & JOHNSON By E. M. Johnson 162 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE FORM FOR LETTER ASKING FOR INFORMATION Scranton, Pa., November 25, 1910. Publishers, SCRIBNER'S MAGAZINE, New York, N. Y. Gentlemen: Please give us, as soon as possible, an authoritative answer to the following questions: 1. What is the present circulation of SCRIBNER'S? 2. What proportion is yearly subscriptions? 3. What is the total sale in the Canadian provinces, including both yearly subscriptions and news-stand sales? Truly yours, LOGIC IN LETTER WRITING Power of the Letter. Letters sometimes merely convey information, there being nothing at issue between the writer and the reader, In other instances, they enter the field of salesmanship and serve to present the merits of goods, serv- ice, etc. In the adjustment of differences, the collecting of accounts, the asking of favors in the converting of people to one's way of thinking about anything a letter is often as power- ful a factor as the personal call; and it will many times reach those who cannot be seen personally except at great expense and with much difficulty. When the turnstile of mere information giving has been passed, the correspondent approaches a field in letter writing that is almost boundless and in which there is need for some knowledge of logic and of practical .psychology. As invari- able directions cannot be given for the proper method of BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 163 dealing with people in person, just so inflexible rules cannot be laid down for the conducting of argumentative corre- spondence. Clear thinking must precede clear writing. It is not always possible for the correspondent to have a critical reader go over his letters to see that they are not ambiguous but plain, logical, and certain to be construed by the recipients as the correspondent intended. The correspondent can, however, look at subjects from the reader's point of view and try to frame his logic so that it will be easily grasped by the reader and appeal to his judgment. Letters Unlike Interviews. Letter writing, while a sub- stitute for the personal interview, is yet much unlike inter- viewing, for in conversation, questions are asked and answered, both persons are free to express themselves, and an uninteresting talk by one may be cut short by the other. When, therefore, the written page is substituted for the face- to-face talk, regard must be had for these differences. The effective letter must not only be as logical, interesting, and as much to the point as possible, but to command respect, it must show consideration for the probable opinions of the person addressed. Beginning and Ending. In editorial departments, stories are usually judged by the opening paragraph and the closing paragraph, and it is well known that the impressiveness of oral argument depends in a large measure on the intro- duction and the climax. In both, strength counts for more than length; and it is the same way in written argument. The Interesting Beginning. There is too much of a tend- ency among letter writers to begin in the style of the unskilful salesman that walks in and says to the busy man, " Here's something I want to sell you." Of course the sales- man wishes to make a sale, but his desire to sell goods will be understood anyhow, and its introduction as a first argu- ment is not strategic. The salesman would do better to appeal to the prospective customer's side of the question his need, perhaps. "Do you have any trouble with smutty carbon?" or "Did you ever see any carbon paper as good as this for $2 a box?" would be better openings for a sales- 164 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE man of high-grade carbon paper than an uninteresting state- ment that he wanted to sell some goods. Appeal to Self-interest. It may be safely presumed that the business man is interested most in his own affairs. The correspondent, especially at the outset, should frame his argument as much as possible in favor of the self-interest of the person addressed. " Could you use some hemlock boards if you could get them at a saving of a fourth of the usual price?" "What would a book be worth to you if it would enable you to save 50 per cent, of your present bad accounts ?" Such beginnings, containing "you" talk rather than "we" talk, are the kind that save letters from the waste basket. The language need not be slangy or smart; but it should be earnest. Compare the following opening paragraphs: Dear Madam: We are pleased to announce the arrival of our fall stock of mahogany furniture which we shall be much pleased to show to our patrons, etc. Mrs. Reynolds: Wouldn't you like to complete your mahogany dining-room set? A new stock of mahogany was unpacked just yesterday and there are some handsome dining- room chairs, sideboards, and serving tables in the lot. One of the sideboards is a beautiful Sheraton model that would go finely with the table you bought last spring. Come and see it anyhow . One of the best ways to lead to a clinching argument is to concur in some way with the other man's view, to admit freely and with broadmindedness that which may be safely admitted. By so doing, the reader is impressed and induced to follow the subsequent reasoning with confidence. Sup- pose, for example, that a young man is thinking of studying shorthand, but writes to the school that he has decided not BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 165 to take the course because he understands that the field is a crowded one. The objection can be answered effectively in this way: Yes, it is a fact that the field is crowded, but with what kind of stenographers? Practically every trade and profession worth entering is filled to overflowing with incompetents. But ask any employer and he will tell you that it is usually next to impossible to find a first- class stenographer not already employed. Examine any civil service manual issued during the last 10 years and you will see that the government has not been able to get a sufficient number of eligible young men, even when good salaries are offered. The employment department of one typewriter company had more than 30,000 calls for stenographers last year, and was not able to supply nearly as many young men as were called for, etc. By explaining in this way, the teacher is not obliged to contradict the prospective pupil, and flat contradiction is to be avoided generally. Deference to Others' Opinions. The correspondent should introduce his reasons with full deference for the convictions of the person addressed. An able salesman says he always gives his customer time to express his views and then opens his own argument with "There is a great deal of truth in that, and as you said a while ago," etc. This attitude dis- arms and disconcerts opposition. The quoting of the other man's own language is often effective. Usually, it is better to write, "I know you recognize" or, "It seems almost unnecessary to say to you," than to say, 14 You ought to know," etc. This way of making a point is a compliment to the other man's intelligence a form of flattery perhaps, but it is potent. If a good answer cannot be given to an objection, it may be best to give none. If a study is made of the style of the great debaters, it will be seen that they passed with uncon- cern the points they could not meet and proceeded tactfully to the issues that they were prepared to discuss with con- vincing argument. Reasoning, to be effective, must leave no doubt. Making an argument is something like driving a nail; with a few bold, confident strokes, drive it home, and then do not mar your work by needless further hammering. 166 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Information Better Than Argument. Prof. Brander Matthews says: "It is not really argument that is effective, but information; and any man seeking to persuade will do well to refrain fro/m controversy." These words contain a great truth. Do not rely on your opinions or your advice to sway those to whom you write. Introduce facts, and use illustrations that your reader cannot fail to comprehend. It means little to write that many prominent persons are buying a certain set of books, but when the statement is made that Theodore Roosevelt, Mark Twain, Admiral Dewey, etc. have ordered special sets, a strong point is scored. Instead of declaring that a thing is "useful in a dozen dif- ferent ways," name some of the principal uses. Give facts. Examples of Reasoning. The following is a part of a let- ter from a school of electrical engineering to a young man that wanted to become an electrical engineer but was averse to studying preliminary subjects, particularly mathematics: Just suppose, for instance, that you did omit this preliminary work and began with the electrical subjects, what would you do with a problem like this: // an armature core has a volume of 2,200 cubic inches and runs at a speed of 9,000 R. P. M. in an 8-pole field, cal- culate the watts wasted in hysteresis, assuming that the iron is of good average quality and is worked at a den- sity of 25,000 lines per square inch. Of course you would be unable to solve such a problem, and yet the ability to make all kinds of technical calculations is a daily requirement with electrical engineers. Success in such a profession is impossible without a thorough knowledge of mathematics. To try to get along with- out such knowledge would be like trying to build a roof up in the open air without any foundation or support under it. A prospective purchaser of an encyclopedia writes that he longs to own the set of books but has decided that he can- not stand the expense. The expense objection may be assailed in this way: With all due respect for your view, we assure you that you are altogether wrong in regarding the purchase of the as an expense; it would be an investment, not an expense. If an employer engages a salesman at $100 a month and he creates new patronage that yields a profit of $250 a month, is the salesman's salary an BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 167 expense? If a man with little earning ability takes a course of training in law, medicine, electrical engineer- ing, civil engineering, or some other profession or trade, and qualifies himself to earn a good salary, was the cost of his schooling an expense? The modern employing world demands the man who knows; it pays a higher price for brain than for brawn. A few dollars a month invested in useful knowledge is sure to bring back in increased earnings many times the investment. The writer then offers to reduce the amount of the monthly instalment and sums up his canvass strongly. A certain manufacturer of a high-grade piano answers somewhat in this way when claims of competitors are put forth: The statements of the may be true for all that we know, and their pianos may be worth the price they ask for them. We do not dispute it, and we never try to advance our own interests by depreciating the products of others. We make our pianos as nearly perfect as it is possible to make them, and we charge a fair price. We could manufacture a piano that we could sell for considerably less, but we should not be satisfied to sell that kind of a piano to our customers, etc. This man has demonstrated by experience that he can make sales by his amiable style of reasoning; whereas, if he attacked his customer's views and criticized unfairly the products of competitors, he would often lose orders. Most people admire fair play. It will be noticed that, while at the start he disclaims any intention to make a comparison, there is an indication in the last sentence that he argues as strongly as possible for his own products after conceding everything to which a competitor is fairly entitled. It is a safe rule not to exhibit interest in a competitor's goods or in his prices. Value of Confidence. Sincerity and confidence in your own arguments enter as much into effective reasoning in letters as they do into personal solicitation. Let your corre- spondent once suspect that you are not sincere, and failure is almost certain. Rugged sincerity and honest claims are stronger than the most polished prevarications. Remember the ostrich; he thinks he is hidden when his head is in the sand. Often when a man thinks he is deceiving others, he 168 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE is deceiving only himself; and no man is so thoroughly deceived as one that deceives himself. Do not pretend to know a great deal about, something of which you really know nothing. If you do, you will some- times betray yourself. It is often a better plan to let your correspondent feel that he knows more about something than you do, and to appeal to his judgment. Perhaps this is a subtle sort of flattery, but it is effective. Many may be led who cannot be driven The Direct Command. The "direct-command" idea is sometimes overvalued and overused. With certain classes of people, it is better not to make too apparent an effort to force a decision, but rather to bring the argument skilfully to such a point that the reader cannot fail to draw the inference. For instance, some would respond to the direct command, "Send your order at once; do it now," while with others the order would more likely come if we wrote, "These goods are selling very rapidly, and I do not believe we shall be able to fill any orders after the 30th of this month." The Negative Method. In general, avoid what is known as the "negative" manner of answering, that is, telling what you cannot or will not do. A large and successful business school receives hundreds of letters from prospec- tives asking: "Will you guarantee me a good position if I enroll with you?" The correspondent for that school does not reply: "No; we do not guarantee positions; how could you expect us to do so?" He writes: "On page 18 of the prospectus you will see an outline of the work that we do in aiding our pupils to secure profitable employment; we shall be glad to do all we can for you." This answer usually satisfies, and it is more politic than throwing the hard "no" in the face of the questioner. A publishing concern writes the following letter in answer to a request that some books be sent on approval: Dear Sir: We make it a rule not to send books in the manner you suggest, chiefly because it would necessitate opening small accounts. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 169 On receipt of $5, we shall be pleased to send you the two "books, Drawing for Printers, and Principles of Display. You can look them over, and if they are not entirely satisfactory, you may return them to us within ten days; in such case, we should refund your money, less the amount paid for charges in sending the books to you. This arrangement is equivalent to sending on approval, and it does away with the necessity of opening a ledger account. Your order will have our careful attention. The explanation is logical, and the tone creates confidence. A pleasing dignity is necessary in effective correspondence. Grant a man everything, and he will not be half so likely to accept your terms as if you met him half way and pleasantly but firmly refused to concede anything else. To offer every inducement makes it seem that the proposal has no merits to commend it. Often, to conceal eagerness and to require some concession or action on the part of the reader serves only to increase his interest and desire. SALES AND SOLICITING LETTERS The growth of advertising has created a new work that of selling by mail. Selling by mail does not differ fundamentally from selling in person. It is merely the presenting of facts and argu- ments convincingly. It is desirable that the correspondent be quick to profit by experiences, for nearly every mail-order enterprise has its peculiar problems and is profitable only after careful experimenting. One letter will often do much better than another without any apparent reason for superi- ority. Therefore, a record should be kept of the returns from each letter. When one answers an advertisement or has sent for some information, he is usually interested and will likely read all that is sent to him if it is in comprehensible form. But 170 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE if he has not inquired, the chances are that he will not be interested to any great extent. Accordingly, letters sent to persons not expecting them should, as a rule, -be briefer than those sent to persons that have manifested interest. Use of Mailing Lists. Rarely are good results secured by writing letters to people that have not shown some interest in what is offered. Lists of names and addresses are valu- able to mail-order houses only under certain conditions. A list of persons that purchase music would be valuable to a music dealer, but the names of all the taxpayers of a cer- tain county would not be of any value to him; neither would the names of all persons that inquired about a course of instruction be valuable after some months to other edu- cational institutions, for probably by the time letters could be written, these persons would have either made a selection of a school or lost all interest. Mailing lists are procured in different ways: (1) By compiling the names and addresses of customers; (2) by asking customers to interest their acquaintances and to send the names and addresses sometimes it is expedient to offer old customers a premium or a commission for such work; (3) by copying from directories, trade lists, advertise- ments, etc.; and (4) by purchasing names from companies that make a specialty of compiling mailing lists. It is important, when considering the. purchase of a mail- ing list, to inquire what previous use has been made of it, how long it has been compiled, whether the addresses have been revised recently and "dead" names cast out. In cases where a number of sales may be made to a cus- tomer, the system of the office should provide for removal of the name and address from the prospective file to a cus- tomer's file when an order has been received, for unless this is done, the customer may be annoyed by follow-up letters after he has ordered or replied fully. A mailing list to which first-class mail matter is sent can be easily kept free of dead names, for these names can be removed as letters come back marked "Undeliverable." Rarely can a circular letter be made so general that it will fit all classes. It is better to classify and prepare a BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 171 separate letter for each classification. If there are many women in a list or among a lot of inquirers, it may pay to prepare a letter containing arguments that appeal par- ticularly to women. One-Cent or Two-Cent Stamps. Whether one-cent or two-cent stamps should be used, depends on the letter and the class to which it goes. Thorough tests have shown that letters sent in response to the cheaper grade of inquiries receive practically the same attention when mailed with one-cent stamps as when mailed with two-cent stamps. But high-grade proposals and those of a very special nature should be sent as first-class matter. Where there has been no inquiry from the persons to whom the letters are ad- dressed, two-cent stamps should always be used, unless it is certain that those addressed receive so little mail that they will pay attention to everything. Follow-Up Systems. A follow-up system of letters is noth- ing more than a series of letters with or without accompany- ing printed matter. For instance, if a mail-order or gen- eral magazine advertisement is answered, a reply will probably be received immediately. If the inquirer does not write again or does not order, he will in 10 days or 2 weeks probably receive another letter, and so on for per- haps 3 or 4 weeks. Unless he article to be sold is one that sells for a high price, the follow-up letters are not usually personal. Most of them are printed in imitation of type- writing, and the name and address of each person addressed is inserted with the typewriter. Form Letters. By having the body of the letters printed, large quantities may be sent out at regular intervals with little labor and no dictation. These imitation letters with dates, addresses, and possibly other lines, inserted with the typewriter are not so good as personally written letters, but the fact that they may be prepared and mailed cheaply is an argument in their favor. Few advertisers could afford to have all their circular letters in original typewriting. An interested person will usually find in the circular letter what he wants to know, and one not interested will not likely buy even if a personal letter is sent. 172 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Use of the Word "Dictated." Leaving the moral issue out of consideration, it is certainly not expedient in address- ing business people to print the word Dictated in the lower left corner of a letter that was not dictated. If the appear- ance of the letter itself does not convince the recipient that it is personal, placing a word in the corner will not help. Besides, when millions of facsimile typewritten letters are mailed weekly, most business people know the difference between them and original typewriting, no matter how well the matching is done; and the reader may doubt your truthfulness in other matters if your letter states on its face that it was dictated and he knows that it was not. Pen- Written Address. Never allow a letter printed in imitation of typewriting to go out with the name and address on the letter written with a pen. The name and address should match well with the body of the letter. The Preparing of Follow-Up Letters. Each letter of a good follow-up system should be like a persistent salesman. When a sale is not made the first time, a second call is made and more pressure brought to bear. If, however, a sales- man merely called, put his head in the door and said, " Here I am again," his calls would not amount to much; and if no further argument can be made, the follow-up letter is not of any service. Correspondents, in their efforts to cultivate confidence, sometimes go to extremes and urge prospective buyers to write again for information when they should try to get them to buy. When full information has been given and it is nearly always best to give this in the first letter nothing is gained by insisting that prospectives shall write to tell why they will not order, unless this information is highly important as a guide to further procedure. It is better that all efforts should be turned toward securing the order. It is not well, either, to be too insistent for a decision or to make any suggestion that the recipient of the follow-up letters lacks courtesy because he does not reply; although such methods may bring replies, they frequently offend and sometimes result in the loss of an opportunity to secure an order. There is a difference between replies and orders. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 173 Having No Follow-Up. One of the largest mail-order houses in the world uses no follow-up system. It sends to its inquirers a large catalog, and in the first letter quotes the lowest price. If the person does not buy, no further letters or catalogs are sent. This method has the advantage that the lowest price is quoted at the outset, and if the inquirer received at the same time letters from other firms that quoted prices a little higher, with the intention of quoting lower ones in subsequent letters, he is likely to decide in favor of the concern with the low price. Not all companies could afford to adopt the policy of this large mail-order house, for its low-price argument is its strongest, and it has this as the result of buying in large quantities. It is doubtful, though, that the policy of price- cutting in follow-up letters is ever wise. Usually, the first price should be maintained; the discount, special offer, etc., if any, should be a part of the first letter. But it is true that the offer to accept smaller payments and to give more time fdr the payment of the whole price is usually a winning feature of the follow-up systems. The instalment plan of payment is full of possibilities. The Bargain Offer. All the world loves a bargain. While not advocating the use of the bargain or special-price fea- tures for all enterprises, it is nevertheless true that these plans have tremendous selling force. Giving a bookcase without apparent extra charge to the purchaser of a set of books, is a sort of a refined bargain offer that has increased the sales of many publishers. Some publishers advertise "slightly rubbed" sets of books at special prices, and it is evident from the way such offers continue that it is an ingenious variation of the old bargain idea that the books are not slightly rubbed, but are from the regular stock and are sold at a price that the publisher is glad to be able to get. The offer of free examination of goods on receipt of trans- portation charges, and similar inducements, are always strong features of follow-up systems. Manufacturer's First Letter. The following is the first letter that a manufacturer of loose-leaf ledgers sends to inquirers : 174 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE We are pleased to receive your request for "Modern Methods," and a copy goes forward by today's mail. Do not fail to notify us should it fail to reach you promptly. Your attention is particularly called to the descriptive matter on pages 3 to 9, inclusive. We feel confident that among the forty stock record forms illustrated and described there you will find a number that you can use to advan- tage. You will note that they are carried in two sizes; namely, 3 in. x 6 1/4 in. and 5 in. x 8 in., the smaller size being furnished at $2 a thousand and the larger size at $2.50 a thousand, assorted as you desire. Should you need special forms to meet your individual requirements, we can furnish them to order, printed from your copy, on one side of linen-bond stock--your choice of five colors-- at $3.50 a thousand. On pages 4 to 40 you will find complete descriptions of our special introductory out- fits, ranging in price from $1 to $22. t We make these attractive offers to enable our customers to select suitable outfits that can be installed at a very small cost, and we ship any of our stock outfits with the distinct understanding that if they are not entirely sat- isfactory they may be returned to us at our expense. Under the liberal conditions we make, you incur no risk in placing an order, and we trust we may be favored with one from you at an early date. By purchasing direct from us--the manu- facturersyou eliminate all middlemen's profits and secure better service. May we send one of our special introductory outfits on approval? Please use the enclosed loose-leaf order blank. Very truly yours. This particular manufacturer has found that many inquirers deliberate some time before changing a system of accounting, and he sends several follow-up letters 10 days apart, urging that he be permitted to send an outfit on approval. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 175 A follow-up system should not bore the prospective. There should be sufficient time between letters to allow him to consider. But do not go to the other extreme and let so much time intervene that he will forget. Analysis of Problem. In writing sales and soliciting let- ters, try to put yourself in the other man's place and to dis- cover what would appeal to you. Do not imagine that other people will part with their money any quicker than you would with yours. Meet the objections that you are certain will be offered. In selling high-priced goods, the inevitable objection to the price must be met squarely and logically. It should be demonstrated that the purchase of a reliable article is an investment, not an expense that the question is not what a thing costs but what it will do or what it will save. Be careful, however, not to suggest objections or to give specific information about cheaper goods obtainable elsewhere. Suppose, for instance, that the letter is to deal with a lot of overcoats that are to be sold. Is the style good, and are the coats made unusually well? Is the cloth of superior quality, and can- it be depended on to hold its color and general appearance? Are the coats better than those usually priced at $18? Such questions as these can hardly fail to bring out all the selling points that the writer needs. Timeliness. Timeliness is, of course, of cardinal impor- tance in sending letters to old customers. A seed merchant should get out his letters some time before planting season before his patrons think of buying elsewhere. Friendly Tone. Letters to old customers should be friendly. If there are so few letters that they may be typewritten, introduce some personal features into each. A farm-produce commission merchant might ask how cer- tain crops were ; a wholesaler might inquire how some special line was selling, etc. Testimonials. Support your argument with testimonials where testimonials will help, and, if possible, use testi- monials of persons in about the same station of life that your correspondent occupies. For instance, if you are selling a new plow to farmers and some of them fear its 176 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE practicality, explain how others felt the same way, then quote their expressions about the plow after using it. Giving Complete Information. All requests for informa- tion should be answered fully. A boy wrote to a sporting- goods house, asking if a certain advertised belt was for cartridges for a 12-gauge or a 10-gauge gun. The corre- spondent of that sporting-goods house replied that the belt was for twelve cartridges. Perhaps he thought that this explanation was clear enough, but the boy construed the explanation to mean that the belt would hold only 12 cartridges, when according to the advertisement it held 25, and he did not order. Sales correspondents cannot be too careful or too con- sistent. Thousands of orders are lost because of careless- ness and insufficient information. Sometimes many ques- tions are asked but they cannot be safely ignored. The business of the sales correspondent is to sell; he can do that only by treating customers' letters with great consideration. One large and successful concern makes it a rule never to send a stock letter to a prospective customer that asks specific questions, no matter if the stock letter does answer the questions in a general way. How to Reply to An Inquiry. Mrs. A. M. Sanders, of Wytheville, Va., writes a letter to the American Refrigerator Company about a refrigerator. She says she wants one like that sold to Mrs. Williams of her town, but she does not know that she can afford to pay the price. Suppose the letter was answered in this style: Complying with your request, we send you ty this mail, under separate cover, one of our catalogs, in which you will find descriptions of all the refrigerators we manufacture. Our goods are all high-grade, and we should be pleased to receive your order, knowing you would be satis- fied. Trusting that you will write us for any further information needed, we are. Yours truly. Now, this woman may not be able to find in the catalog all the needed information. Even if she could, the order is BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 177 more likely to be secured if a letter something like the following were written: We are pleased to know that you need a refrigerator, and we send you by this mail, in another envelope, a catalog giving descriptions and illustrations of all our refrigerators. Mrs. Williams of your town purchased the refrigerator shown at the top of page 42 of the catalogthe Klondike No. 5. Perhaps you will be interested to learn that we sold one of those also to Mr. A. F. Wilkins, of Wytheville, and another to Mr. Thomas Calkins, postmaster of Pulaski, Va. The illustration hardly does credit to the refrigerator. It embodies every modern feature --note the eight points of superiority explained on page 42--and represents our experience of 10 years in manufacturing. It is built very strongly of thoroughly seasoned oak of the best quality, and is finished in the natural color of the wood. Note that the entire food chamber is lined with white enamel; this will never chip off. Fifty pounds of ice should last at least three days in this refrigerator. The best price we can make you on the Klon- dike No. 5 is $25. If this is more than you can pay and your family is small, you would find the Klondike No. 3, described on page 39 of the catalog, well suited to your needs. The only difference between this and the No. 5 is in size, and for a family of three or four, No. 3 is just as good. The food chamber of No. 3 is 20 inches wide, 24 inches high, and 14 inches deep. We can sell you No. 3 for $18.50. If any refrigerator you buy from us is not entirely satisfactory, we regard it as a favor to be informed, and we will send another or refund the money without quibbling. If you send cash with your order, we will prepay all freight charges. We are sending you one of our order blanks, and hope to enter you on our list of pleased customers soon. Truly yours , . AMERICAN REFRIGERATOR COMPANY, By E. L. C. 178 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Appealing to the Instincts. In selling rifles to boys, appeal to the instinct of ownership to the satisfaction of having a fine rifle that will last a lifetime ; if a mother inquires about children's apparel, appeal to the maternal instinct of mothers to provide comfortable clothing for their children; and so on. Good quality and reasonable prices are always splendid subjects for argument. Example of 'Straight Canvass" Letter. The following is an example of an effective sales letter written to one that has not inquired: What would you pay for a selling plan that would enable you^to increase your sales 50 per cent, this year? What would you give to learn the schemes used by others in your line that have brought the users fortunes? What would you give to be able to increase your earning capacity, and add prestige to your position? Now, I can help you on all of the above. What I want to do is to send you, twelve times a year, a magazine that is devoted entirely to correspondence salesmanship a magazine "chock full" of money-making, order-producing ideas for every man engaged in business, and which is devoted entirely to letters that land orders. And THE CORRESPONDENT costs only one dollar for a yearwith your money back if you do not think it the best value you ever received, and I'll leave the decision entirely to you. Now, just stop and think. Here is a maga- zine that will give you the newest there is in letter wri tingthat gives you the actual life and blood of many successful businesses, the actual letters that have brought in business and that will give you the follow-up systems and schemes of some of the most successful adver- tisers. One hundred dollars would be cheap for one order-bringing idea, scheme, plan, or suggestion that would enable you to add one good customer to your list, but here I offer you for only one dollar more ideas in the course of a year than BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 179 you could ordinarily buy for thousands of dollars. Read the enclosed circular, sign and tear off coupon and return to me at once, in enclosed envelope, with dollar bill attached. Yours for more, easier, and better business. Editor* Making It Easy to Order. Anything, such as an order blank or a coin holder, that makes it easier for the order to be sent should be adopted. A publishing house sends a first-class soliciting letter in behalf of a business book, the closing paragraph of which is, "Just pin a two-dollar bill to this letter and mail it in the enclosed envelope at our risk." It is an appeal to the reader not to put the letter aside. Many fail to send orders through the mails because of the trouble in registering a letter or securing a money order, but by this proposal the publishing house assumed the risk of loss in the mails and removed the obstacle. Another strong letter has this closing sentence: "I have both telephones: Call me up right now and I'll send my representative." It is important to use some such admonition, so that the reader will be impelled to act. HOW TO SETTLE A COMPLAINT The correspondent that has charge of complaints ought to possessor acquire a courteous disposition. This correspond- ent has, also, particular need for good judgment; for if he is not judicious, he may easily make a serious mistake against his firm or against a customer. Many persons that would not take advantage of an individual will be unjust in dealing with a large company. Consequently, the correspondent that has complaints to settle, while putting himself in the position of the com- plainant and seeing that he gets all he is entitled to, must also see that justice is rendered the firm and that no dangerous precedents are established. Immediate Attention. On learning of a complaint, answer at once, whether you can explain satisfactorily or not, and express sincerely your regret that anything has gone wrong. 180 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Assure the complainant that you are obliged to him for reporting his grievance and that he will receive as quickly as possible everything he is entitled to. Promise a further report as soon as an investigation can be made. This will show that your intentions are right, and at the same time what you have promised does not bind you to do anything unreasonable. Make an investigation at once. Prohiptness is of the greatest importance in settling complaints. Many a serious complaint has been smoothed over by proper spirit on the part of a correspondent and quick action in adjusting the difficulty. Sometimes, in complaints about delayed goods, it is policy to order a duplicate shipment and to have the other recalled or returned by the customer, at your expense, when it reaches him. Acknowledgment of Errors. If you make an error, acknowledge it frankly. Do not confess half heartedly or try to dodge. A wholesaler once lost a valuable cus- tomer just because when he was forced to make up a shortage in a shipment he wrote an ungracious letter saying that he would do so, but that his clerk was sure the goods had been included in the first shipment, that the goods were missing from stock, etc. The customer was a man of unquestioned standing and in this particular instance had the benefit of the doubt. The wholesaler should have yielded gracefully. His action was a more short-sighted policy than a refusal to make up the shortage would have been. If a defective article is returned, apologize and be sure that a good one is sent immediately, charges prepaid. When a complaint is that a bill is wrong or that there is a shortage, everything should be checked back, no matter how good a system may have been followed originally. Justice to Employes. If a complaint entangles a salesman or other employe, treat that person as considerately as you do the customer unless previous offenses have made it neces- sary to deal with him otherwise. Report the facts and let him explain. Don't decide against him until you have heard his side of the story. Loyalty to employes is as important as justice to customers. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 181 Let the complaint man stand in the position of the head of the business and weigh the facts on both sides, making an impartial decision one that is just to the complainant and just to the firm. Courtesy. Courtesy should prevail, no matter what the decision may be. Even if a complainant is rather unreason- able and protests frequently, he must be treated consid,er- ately and tactfully. The complaint correspondent is a business diplomat; his office is to keep the relations between, the firm and its patrons as amicable as possible, while at the same time seeing that all differences are adjusted on a business basis. Often a slight concession may with advantage be m.ade to a person that has suffered inconvenience by reason of delay or mistakes. Example of Adjustment. As an example of the settlement of a complaint, observe, first, a letter written by a young man to the office of a firm regarding a watch that he had earned by assisting one of the firm's salesmen. The salesman, though a valuable man, had been seriously at fault in delaying so long in delivering the watch and in showing a disposition not to keep his word. The young man had complained once, and the salesman had been apprised of the complaint. He immediately explained, and the young man was assured from, headquarters that everything would no doubt be made right, although it was a private arrangement between him and the salesman and one with which the company had nothing to do. But the watch was not delivered, as promised, and this was the next letter the young man wrote: I have made up my mind that the whole busi- ness is a cheat. I earned that watch, and you know it. Mr. Leonard promised that I should have it sixty days ago. He has not only cheated me but lied as well. When you first wrote, I thought you were going to do the square thing and see that I was treated right, but now I believe that you are all swindlers. You can keep the watch, and I hope I shall never hear from you again. But you can rest assured that I shall tell people how you have treated me. This thing won't do you any good. You will wish many times that you had been honest with me. 182 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE It would be easy to reply to a letter of this kind and to tell the young man that he was unwarranted in writing such a discourteous letter. But he had a real grievance; and this, in substance, was the reply sent to him: You have good reason for feeling as you do about us, and it is certainly humiliating to have to acknowledge that there has been unneces- sary delay in this matter. Yet if you will give us just a few days more, we shall convince you that we are not trying to defraud you. Please have confidence in our intention to treat you right, and bear with us a little longer. We would not deprive you of the watch for many times its cost. We dislike to trouble you further, but if you do not receive the watch by Monday night next, please notify the writer, using the addressed stamped envelope that we enclose. We trust our dealings in the future will be so satisfactory that we shall succeed in remov- ing the poor impression you must at present have of our methods. With best wishes, believe us. Faithfully yours. Observe that this reply did not place the blame on the salesman. This would not have improved the situation, and it was best to apologize generally. It was the complaint man's first intention to write the salesman to deliver the watch at once, but on further thought, and on consultation with the general manager, the salesman was asked by a tele- gram to send the watch by special delivery to the home office, whence it was remailed immediately to the young man. In a few days there came a grateful letter from him, acknowledging receipt of the watch, apologizing for the views he had expressed, and promising that he would do all he could in the future for the interests of the firm. BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 183 HOW TO COLLECT MONEY BY LETTER In this day of ready transference of money through banks and other avenues, by far the greater proportion of business transactions are conducted on the confidence of the seller in the buyer. The extension of credit is a necessity in most selling enterprises, and properly so. Debt, however, is a subject to be handled delicately; often the humble tradesman figuring how he can meet all bills that are due, becomes offended at a harsh or hasty demand for money, and turns his patronage elsewhere. Retain the Good Will. The correspondent who has charge of the work of collecting dilatory and delinquent accounts has a highly important work. He has need for as much tact and judgment as the correspondent who adjusts complaints; for there is a time to be severe and a time not to be severe. Because extreme measures are sometimes necessary, credit men and collecting departments often make the mistake of using too little tact. On the other hand, it is, of course, necessary to collect money promptly, in order to conduct a business properly. Those who sell have their own obliga- tions to meet. Accounts cannot and should not be allowed to run indefinitely without system. "Short credit makes long friendships," says the credit man of a great Pitts burg concern. The collecting work must be under the manage- ment of a man who, while using tact and retaining the good will of customers, still keeps up the collections. There must be some exceptions to all rules. Few, if any, firms could force all customers to live up to an iron-clad rule regarding the time of payment, and retain them. In some lines of trade and in some localities, it is the custom to dis- count nearly all bills. In other places, tradesmen in excel- lent standing are accustomed to pay bills only at the end of 30, 60, or 90 days. Therefore, a firm desiring to have all bills paid in 30 days must, if it does business all over the country, be tactful and allow its rule to stretch at times. Ratings. An important requisite to intelligent collecting correspondence is a good understanding of the condition and responsibility of customers. The commercial agencies afford 184 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE ratings, but these ratings important as they are when no other information is available form only a part of the information that a collection department should have. A firm on the verge of failure may sometimes have a good rating, and a new concern to which credit may be safely extended, even beyond usual limits, may not be rated as being safe or be rated at all. Information of a general and personal nature and private reports from salesmen are of great service. A salesman who calls often at a place of business is in a posi- tion, from observation, to make a safe estimate. One large successful firm, selling direct to grocers all over the United States, allows its salesmen to extend credit almost entirely on their own responsibility; to safeguard against worthless accounts, it requires the salesmen to pay 10 per cent, of the amount when one of his accounts is lost. The plan works well. Some mail-order concerns require new customers to secure the signatures of several neighbors or business acquaintances to a certificate on the order blank to the effect that the one ordering is trustworthy, able to secure an equal amount of credit at the local store, etc. Other concerns send goods on approval to only those using a business letterhead; but advisable as this might be in some instances, its usefulness as a plan is obviously limited. Having Salesmen Collect. While the services of a salesman are exceedingly valuable in collecting, because he can act understandingly, It is doubtful that it is good policy to have salesmen collect regularly if it is possible to arrange collec- tions in any other way. Collecting and selling do not go well together; the service that a salesman renders in collecting will usually be offset by a loss in selling. It is better that the salesman should not, except in extreme cases, be a part of the active collecting system. He should contribute to intelligent action by keeping the firm informed. There should be close cooperation between the sales force and the credit depart- ment. Example. Let it be supposed that Jones & Co., of Elmira, N. Y., retail grocers, owe Brown & Co. $200. Brown & Co. require all accounts to be paid in 30 days, and the account is BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 185 already a day or so overdue. It is obvious that previous dealings, if there have been any, govern action in any given case. It is the 1st of the month, and it is found that Jones usually pays his bills on the 10th; so it is business policy to wait until the 10th has passed. The 10th comes and goes without hearing anything from Jones. If this were the first time Jones had let his account run overtime, Brown & Co. would probably inquire of the salesman or send a "statement rendered." But it seems that Jones has only a fair standing and that he has several times been slow in paying. The balance now due is larger than usual. It seems important to secure payment, and yet Brown & Co. do not want to endanger the trade of Jones & Co. A letter something like this would do: GENTLEMEN: We are sending statement to date, and we trust you can let us have this amount at once. We dislike to inconvenience our customers, but we have bills of our own to meet, and for this reason it is sometimes necessary to press our friends for payment earlier than we otherwise would. It will be a favor to us if you will give this statement immediate attention. How does the Pepperoid sell? Some of the trade are finding it a first-class seller, not only on account of its good quality but because of the large amount of adver- tising being done by tLe manufacturers. We ordered a good stock of Pepperoid in anticipation of duplicate orders. If you would like to have another gross, let us know and we will ship on the day ordered. With best wishes, we are Faithfully yours, If a letter of this kind brings no response, and there still seems no reason for alarm, it would be well, after giving a reasonable length of time for attention to the first letter, to send a second something like this: GENTLEMEN: As you know, your account has run for some time over our usual limit. We have to collect money to run our own business, and we hope you can give the account attention without further delay. 186 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE By the way: we have not received an order of any kind from you for a month or more. We trust nothing about the last shipment was unsatisfactory or that any- thing has happened to cause you to place your orders elsewhere. If ever there is any fault in our service, remember that we deem it a favor to be advised. With the expectation of hearing from you at once, we are Faithfully yours, Drafts to Be Used With Caution. If a letter like the second brings no response, a firm is certainly justified in drawing on a customer. If the customer refuses to pay, or there seems danger of losing the account by failure, it is then time to act quickly, and perhaps, to send a personal representative. Business men in small towns often object seriously to drafts. Therefore, drafting is a method to be used with caution. It is difficult to lay down rules, because what would hold good for one business and one class of debtors would not hold good for another, because, also, proper action must be deter- mined largely by the circumstances of each case. Unless there is imminent danger of failure, every effort should be made to ascertain the cause of delay or refusal of payment before proceeding to extreme measures. Some tradesmen are notoriously slow in paying, and are not sensitive to hints. With such persons, firm and formal requests, drafts, and threats to sue may be used earlier than with others. In all cases, the correspondence should be courteous. Legal Steps. One prominent New York firm sends out with each of its monthly statements a brief letter that requests the customer to inform the house at once in the event that there should be any error. If payment is not received within a reasonable time, a correspondent writes suggesting that there has been undoubtedly some good reason for the delay, and urging if the delay has been caused by anything for which the house is responsible, that the customer will be kind enough to write immediately. A third letter is a little more insistent, though courteous; and the fourth takes up the matter from an ethical point of view, BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 187 appeals to the customer's sense of fairness, his pride, etc. If none of these has the desired effect, an attorney in the employ of the company takes the case. It is worthy of note that a letter over the signature of an attorney is often all that is necessary with obstinate and indifferent debtors. Flattery is a subtle weapon in collecting accounts, as it is in other dealings. One very successful correspondent has a plan of writing a personal letter to a delinquent, saying that his firm has decided to draw on all delinquents in a few days, that he takes the liberty to write to Mr. Blank, believing that he prefers not to be drawn on, and suggesting that if a check is received by the 23d the drafts will not be executed. It is sometimes a good plan to make a debtor a proposal something like this: "If you will send $100 by the 10th you may wait until the 20th to forward the balance"; but make no promise of this kind that you are not prepared to live up to, for after granting an extension of time you cannot well enforce earlier payment. Showing Interest in Customers. Many firms hold to the policy of writing letters the day after accounts are due and making formal request for prompt payment. Some do not like to plead the need of money as an argument for payment, and perhaps it is not always a good plan; occasion- ally, any excuse for pressing payment weakens the demand; but in most lines of business it is better to incorporate some manifestation of interest that will take away from the dunning letter all the disagreeable effects, while retaining all the usefulness of its mission. A resourceful correspondent can always find a logical and pleasant way of pressing collections. Suggestive Paragraphs. The following are some para- graphs selected from letters used in the collection depart- ments of a wholesale concern and a publishing house selling on the instalment plan: I shall esteem it a personal favor if you will write to me fully and frankly by return mail. I trust you will not compel me to refer the matter to a local attorney for attention. Let me hear from you. If we do not hear from you within 10 days, your con- tract will, in the regular order of things, pass over to our attorney, and I am really eager to avoid that. 188 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE Please write to me at once, using the enclosed envelope, so that your letter will come to my personal attention. With kind regards, I am, As soon as your account is placed in good standing by at least one regular payment, I will send you any one of three books described in the enclosed folder that you may select. When sending your payment, be sure to tell me which one of the books you want. According to our rule, we shall have to draw on you next Thursday for the amount of your account due on the 10th. Can you send us your check before Thursday? We hope so. Discounts. The granting of a regular cash discount on short-time settlements nearly always brings good results; but the granting of a special discount to a slow debtor may work as much injury to future business as it does immediate good, unless transactions will thereby be concluded for all time, in which case it is often very effective, as are also premium offers. FOREIGN CORRESPONDENCE The correspondent of today must understand how to answer foreign inquiries. To proceed with the idea that negotiations may be conducted with foreign buyers in the usual American style, is to run the risk of losing many orders orders that, handled understandingly, might lead to trade amounting to thousands of dollars. A writer in The World's Work emphasizes an important truth in the following paragraph: "Terms cash Yours truly," do very well in a land where enterprise is synonymous with "hustle" and brevity the soul of business despatch. There is, how- ever, only one such land. In all others, the slap-dash brusqueness of the American business letter is like a strange language. In a word, the style of our ordinary correspondence is too provincial for world commerce. In place of "Yours truly," the Englishman writes, " With sincere esteem, I remain your respectful and obedient servant"; the Frenchman says, "Veuillez agre*er, Mes- sieurs, nos tres sinceres salutations" "Kindly accept, gentlemen, our very sincere greetings"; the _ Spanish- American merchant concludes his letter with "Con sentimientos de consideracion distinguida somos de BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE 180 Ud. attos. y S. S.," which means, "With sentiments of distinguished consideration, we remain your attentive and sure servants." In all this there is no false note of insincerity, and the manager of any foreign depart- ment that ignores these little phrases expressive of an old-fashioned courtesy, so universal as to be conven- tional in every other country than our own, is likely to convey the impression that he is unacquainted with the style of expression common among gentlemen. Value of Knowledge of Foreign Languages. American manufacturers and jobbers receive so many inquiries written in foreign languages that a real demand has been created for persons able to conduct correspondence in one or more languages besides English. French, German, and Spanish are the three languages of which knowledge is most often needed, but Italian, Portuguese, Russian, Swedish, Dutch, Japanese, Chinese, and other languages claim attention from North Americans. An enqrmous amount of comm'er- cial correspondence is carried on in German, and French is almost a universal language. Spanish just now is s'ome- what in the lead among foreign languages in business use in the United States, the freedom of Cuba, the acquisition of the Philippines, the steady investment of capital in Mexico, the operations in the Canal Zone, and the trade possibilities North Americans have seen in the great, rich territory of South America having given it an impetus. Any correspondent or stenographer with some spare time for study can devote himself profitably to the mastery of one or more of these languages. The business expansion of the United States in coming years will likely be largely in foreign markets, and the ability to converse and write correctly in foreign languages will then be even more than now a business asset one that will not only insure a high salary, but be a stepping-stone to a position of higher respon- sibility. Of the three languages first mentioned, Spanish is the easiest to learn; and on account of the similarity between its elemental sounds and those of the English lan- guage, Spanish dictation may be taken readily when the stenographer understands Spanish in any of the shorthand systems in general use in the United States. 190 BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE For correspondence purposes, it is vastly better to know one language thoroughly than to have a smattering of several, for to fall into error in either letters or circulars is to endanger the esteem of foreign correspondents. It is highly desirable to answer in French, inquiries that come in French, and to answer in Spanish, inquiries that come in Spanish, but many American business houses do not* seem to appreciate the fact. They apparently think that inquirers can as readily get translations of letters writ- ten in English as they, in the United States, can secure translations of letters written in foreign languages, but this may not be the case; and if a prospective buyer in Germany sends inquiries to several American concerns, and one answers in German and the others answer in English, it is easy to surmise with which one the buyer will do business, if other things are equal. It is not good judgment to handle inquiries indifferently because they may not come under seal and written on bond paper. Inquiries that have led tb extensive patronage have come to American manufacturers on post cards, scraps of paper, etc. Here, again, it is important to remember tha* the foreign buyer should not be "sized up " by American standards. Promptness is as cardinal a feature 6f successful foreign correspondence as courtesy, and since much time must inter- vene between letters, a reply to an inquiry ought always to be complete. Descriptions should be full.. Prices should be quoted in both American money and the money of the inquirer's country. Quoting C. I. F. Two most important items in answers to foreign inquiries are the quoting of prices that include trans- portation and marine insurance, and a statement of the length of time required for delivery. Transportation com- panies will gladly furnish the necessary information for the first item, thus enabling the correspondent to quote figures that include delivery to the buyer's port; if the buyer is in an inland town, and delivery charges cannot be ascertained for the entire distance, figures should be quoted that include delivery to the buyer's nearest seaport. SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS 191 Too much care cannot be exercised in addressing and in seeing that all mail to foreign correspondents is fully pre- paid, for if it is not fully prepaid an amount equal to double the deficiency will be collected on delivery; and* the effect of such negligence may be easily imagined. Customs Regulations. A leading business magazine recently published the correspondence that passed between a furniture manufacturer of the United States and a Mexican buyer, who had to pay a fine of $800 imposed by the crstom authorities of Mexico, solely because of the manufacturer's exasperating indifference and failure to comply strictly with the regulations of Mexico regarding imported goods, to which regulations his attention had been expressly called. Many similar instances could be cited. Custom regulations should invariably be observed very carefully before sending anything to a foreign country by mail, the parcels -post system, or otherwise. It is far-seeing policy to be more than usually courteous, considerate, and attentive to foreign buyers. Such service, and the granting of incidental favors, when possible, is usually bread cast upon good waters. SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS Form Paragraphs. Where the same explanations are of frequent occurrence, time will be saved and accuracy increased by the use of form paragraphs. That is, when the correspondent finds that he has to dictate practically the same paragraph in many letters, he should improve it as much as he can and then place it on a list, giving it a serial number. He should keep a copy of this list on his desk and require each stenographer to have a copy. It is well to give appropriate headings, as well as numbers to the paragraphs. The headings will prove useful at times when the correspondent is very busy and cannot recall the number of the paragraph he wishes written. While this method is not to be recommended for very important and particular correspondence, it will be found that in a short time the 192 SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS list of paragraphs will be so complete that all ordinary letters may be answered by its use. In offices where there are hundreds of letters to be answered daily, time cannot always be spared to dictate each separately, and there is no good reason why it should be done when so many of them cover the same ground. By the use of well-written paragraphs, better letters will be produced than if each were dictated. Various forms of beginning and ending may be placed on the paragraph list, so that with hundreds of letters it will be necessary only for the correspondent to read them care- fully and to write on the letters or on an attached slip the numbers of the paragraphs he wishes used in answering. In this way he will be able to handle several times as much mail as he could by any other plan; and stenographers will be able to do more work. Of course care must be taken not to use the same para- graphs again in continued correspondence with one person. This can be avoided by having the file copies of letters and all the other correspondence fastened together. The form -paragraph plan will be found almost a necessity to correspondents having charge of a great deal of work where it is necessary to entrust many letters to assistants. Where a great many letters of the same kind have to be written, such as letters of acknowledgment, letters enclosing payments, etc., it is often advisable to have letters printed in the style of the typewritten letter. Written Orders. Orders from one department to another should be written. This plan not only enables the writer to make his order or his explanation clear, but it puts the information before the recipient in a definite form, so that there will be less chance of misunderstanding or overlooking. When general orders, such as those to agents or salesmen are sent out, it is a good plan to enclose a typewritten receipt slip with each copy. The receiver of the letter should sign this slip and return it to the office as an acknowledgment. In this way, an executive office may be sure that all persons SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS 193 for whom a price list or a general order was intended have received it. Where all to whom a letter or an order is addressed are in one building, a communication may be addressed generally by writing all the names in a list at the beginning. A copy should be made for each person and an extra one for the messenger. As the copies are delivered, each person should be required to put his initials opposite his name on the extra copy, which serves as a receipt for the files. This method has the advantage that if it is a letter of criticism, each person receiving it will see that it went to others as well as to him- self. He will have less hesitation in consulting the other addressees as to the proper action. Since the addressees are likely to discuss the letter together, there is less likelihood that any one person will misunderstand any part of it. Referring Letters. It is sometimes a good plan to keep original letters, referring copies of them to third persons when necessary. This does not, of course, refer to letters that belong properly to other departments but to letters that must first receive attention from one person before being sent elsewhere. It is well to acknowledge the receipt of a letter, and advise that it has been referred to some one else when such a disposition has been made of it. Sometimes an inquiry may be referred to the branch office by simply quoting the inquiry in a letter to the branch office. When a letter is referred to some one else, your acknowl- edgment of its receipt should not be of a nature to make the person who sent it feel that his letter has been turned over to some one else as a matter of convenience for you, but that the transfer has been made in order that he may receive better service. In referring an inquiry to a field representative, be sure to send him a copy of what was written to the inquirer, if any- thing was written. Nothing is a greater hindrance to a sales- man than to be in the dark as to what was written in a reply; and a full copy of the letter is better than a mere memo- randum. Furthermore, this consideration of the salesman is likely to stimulate his cooperation. 194 SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS Subject Headings. Particularly in long business letters between branch and home offices, it is advisable to write explanatory headings at the beginning of each general sub- ject introduced. Without such headings, it is difficult to refer back to any point in the many pages of solid writing on file. Critical Reading of Letters. -Both correspondents and stenographers should make a practice of reading all letters critically. If mistakes cannot be corrected neatly, it is better to have a clean copy made. Miscellaneous. The use of letterheads and envelopes of different color for different branch offices or for different departments is sometimes helpful to time-saving manage- ment. If the main office files by subjects, it is well for corre- spondents in branch offices to write a separate letter for each subject treated. It facilitates prompt attention if, in addressing letters to large concerns, the title of the department for which it is intended, such as "Credit Department" or "Advertising Department," etc., is placed near the beginning of the letter. Where a letter requests that a certain department be addressed in replying, it is well to comply. It is often a good plan to put the title of the department also on the outside of the envelope, as, for instance, in addressing the editorial department of a newspaper; for .not all concerns have a central department for the opening and distribution of mail, and with such a notation on the envelope, the letter will likely be carried straight to its destination. It is a good general rule to address letters to the firm when they relate to the business of the firm. If you desire personal attention by some one, let the name of that person appear on the letter, not on the envelope. Letters addressed to firms will be referred to the proper persons, and it is well to remember that many concerns request that the firm, and not individuals, be addressed. Where a received letter is very important, it is well to keep the original envelope. Sometimes letters are not mailed for several days after they are dated, and in the case SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS 195 of a delayed order or shipment, the envelope bearing the original postmark may throw light on a dispute or a mystery. The envelope is often a valuable bit of evidence in a suit. Envelopes may be split at the sides, so as to take up no more room in the files than a letter sheet. Mail circular letters to busy people so that they will not be received on Monday. Initialing a letter or writing an individual signature under the typewritten firm signature gives an individuality that would otherwise be lacking. If it is impracticable to sign all letters personally, use a rubber stamp rather than end out uninitialed typewritten signatures. A better method is to train aft assistant to write the full signature or at least an initial signature under the typewritten one. Printers in nearly all of the large cities can furnish good imitations of typewritten letters and a ribbon with which the names and addresses may be inserted in the same color and shade of ink. There are some slight differences in types, and if the inserting of the names is to be done on the Reming- ton typewriter, be sure that the printer uses the Remington style of pica type in setting up the letter, and not the Smith Premier, the Underwood pica, or some other style. Postal cards may be used freely and with economy for certain kinds of acknowledgments and notices. Gas com- panies, tax offices, etc. use them in sending out simple state- ments of accounts; but postal cards cannot be used legally for aggressive dunning,, It is worthy of note that the use of a post-office box as an address often excites suspicion, especially in the mail-order business. A street address is better. Do not send Canadian correspondents United States post- age stamps to use in replying. Canadian stamps are required for letters mailed in Canada. United States stamps are required for letters mailed in the United States and will take such letters into Canada. A social letter, even between business men, should be pen written. A typewritten letter of condolence or one of con- gratulation about a personal event, such as a marriage, would show very poor taste. 196 SUGGESTIONS TO CORRESPONDENTS When dictating to the stenographer, speak so that he may hear distinctly. Spell out, without waiting to be asked, any unusual words especially proper names. Unless you are a poor punctuator and the stenographer is a good punctuator, it is best to dictate all desired punctua- tion. If you are in doubt as to whether or not a statement is clear, ask the stenographer how he understands it. Instruct new stenographers to ask about doubtful places in their notes rather than to risk spoiling long, important letters. Dictate as early in the day as possible so as to give sten- ographers time to do their work properly. In this way you will get better service and cultivate better working dis- positions. You can get the most from your helpers by giv- ing them the consideration and the compensation they deserve. Show your assistants that you have confidence in their ability. Nothing shows smallness so plainly as an unwillingness to trust assistants. It will be a guide for your stenographers if you will prepare some model forms showing the arrangement that your prefer for your letters. It is also a good plan to prepare a "style sheet," such as is used in printing offices, covering various points that you wish observed. By adding to this from time to time, it will become an index to the style of the office and be of great assistance, especially to new employes. In large concerns there is much need for diplomacy among the workers. Several hundred employes will include men ,of every temperament, hasty men and deliberate men, nar- row-minded and liberal men. Unless you are sure you can help the other man and ought to help him, you are serving yourself and doing him a good turn by leaving his work entirely alone. If you press a suggestion and it develops poorly, the blame will come back to you. When something comes to you for action that belongs elsewhere, pafss it along to the proper person. Let the respon- sibility go where it belongs. If it is the other man's work, he has the right to handle it or direct how it shall be handled. TYPEWRITING 197 It should be an object to make the work of others pleasant, but your first duty is to transact business properly, to make money for the company. You do your employers injustice if you long permit incompetence, idling, or improper methods. Be vigilant to correct everything of the kind. Be careful in writing about competitors or the respon- sibility of others. Remember that a letter may constitute a valid contract. Therefore, be guarded in making promises. TYPEWRITING GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Care of the Machine. Gpod typewriting cannot be done with a poor machine or a dirty one. Have a cover to put over the typewriter when it is not in use; nothing injures it more than to leave it where dust can settle on the bear- ings. Lay a newspaper over it if there is nothing better at hand. Do not let the machine rust or squeak through lack of oiling, but do not go to the other extreme, as some operators do, and oil too frequently or too heavily. The small bear- ings should be oiled very lightly about once a month by dipping a straw or splinter in oil and touching them. Clean- ing is more important than oiling. A piece of chamois is excellent for rubbing off dirt and surplus oil and keeping the rods bright. A long-handled brush is very handy for getting the dirt out of nooks and bearings hard to reach in any other Way. There's no excuse for dirty type faces. Brush them every morning and as often thereafter as may be necessary for clean, clear-cut work. When the ribbon is new, the neces- sity for frequent brushing is more imperative. When the alinement of the type becomes poor, have the machine repaired at once. Nothing, except careless work, makes a worse appearance than a sheet written on a type- writer out of alinement. 198 T Y PEWRI TING METHOD OF OPERATING Typewriting is an art, though a neglected and a much- abused one. Time is saved in the end by adopting a scientific system of fingering the keyboard and mastering it before trying to write letters. Just as a person with no knowledge of music can "pick out a tune" on a piano with the use of one or two of the fingers of each hand, so can a beginner make apparent progress in typewriting with the use of his first and second fingers only, but in both music and type- writing, persistent practice of a correct system of fingering is much more likely to bring ease and speed. The all-finger system of fingering is now generally con- ceded to be the best. Out of it has grown touch typewriting, about which so much is said nowadays, and which means typewriting without looking at the keys. The ability to do high-grade work without giving any attention whatever to the keyboard of the machine is an accomplishment possessed by few, but by adopting the all- finger system and practicing it persistently while keeping your eyes away from the keyboard, your fingers will soon become trained to perform their respective duties instinc- tively almost automatically. They will learn to find the keys by position, by touch, and with your eyes free nearly all of the time, you will be able to do much faster work. Work of the Various Fingers. The diagram of Fig. 1 shows a division of the single keyboard and an assignment of duty to the fingers that has been adopted very generally by teachers of typewriting. Many single keyboards have an extra row of keys at the right. These extra keys are used only occasionally and should be operated by the right fourth finger. Practice will make the third and fourth fingers capable of almost as much service as the two stronger ones. f If the machine is of the shift-key type, use the left fourth finger (which some know better by the name "little finger " N for the shift key. When the fourth finger is holding down the shift key, do not bring the right hand over into the ter- ritory of the left hand; in such case, let the third left finger do the work usually done by the fourth, and let the second TYPEWRITING 199 finger do the usual work of the third finger, in addition to its own. This may seem awkward at first, but it will soon become easy. In making a period at the end of a sentence where another sentence is to follow, hold the shift key down until the two spaces have been made; then no second depres- sion of the shift key will be necessary for the capital letter of the new sentence. These directions for the use of the left fourth finger for the shift key are given on the assump- tion that the left shift key will be used almost exclusively which plan most operators have found to be best. Unless the right-hand shift key is what is known as a "lock shift," it is of little use. Hold each finger strictly within its proper range of work. Always use the right thumb for striking the space bar. Left Hand fingers fourth Third Second^ Pint FIG. 1 Additional Hints. A common fault of typewriter operators is that of pounding the keys. From the appearance of the platens of most typewriting machines it would seem that a great proportion of typewriter operators were blacksmiths before learning typewriting. There is no need for much force. The hands should be kept as close to the keyboard as possible, and the fingers should be lifted no higher than is necessary in order to reach for the keys. Keep the wrists up and the hands "brooding," as it were, over the keys. The proper movement from one key to another is well sug- gested by the word "glide." Cultivate a light, even touch. 200 TYPEWRITING The keys for the punctuation marks should be struck even more lightly than others, for these small type faces cut through the paper if much force is used. When the reverse side of paper of ordinary thickness shows type impressions clearly, it is an indication that too much force has been used. Do not use both hands to return the carriage to the end of a line. A thorough command of the keyboard is best attained by keeping the hands as much as possible in their proper positions, down close to the keys. During pauses, it is well to let the right fourth finger rest lightly on the letter P or the semicolon and the left fourth finger on the letter A. John Do* Pottejr N. 75 f 325 ysa 1000 Broadway, New York PolicyOtted Dec. 15, 1890 December 7, 1859 j 31 f 1,000. Matthew Arnold, If. D. |31.80 wife, Jane Doe, Annual Matthew Marshall 7/16/98 L. 20 D. P. Kg** Richard Roe o vJ^ FIG. 1 By maintaining the proper hand position and persisting in looking away from the keyboard while writing, any operator can soon become skilful enough in touch typewriting to do most of his work while keeping his eyes on copy or notes. This skill, a light touch, and a steady pace in the fingering, are the secrets of speedy, neat typewriting. Usefulness of Tabulating Typewriter. In every large office there should be at least one special tabulating machine with a wide carriage for the handling of statements, reports, etc. These documents can be made in smaller space, more neatly, and more legibly, and can be duplicated more accurately - TYPEWRITING 201 and quickly than is possible by the older handwriting process. TYPEWRITING ON CARDS Much card work is now done on typewriting machines. Special devices for holding cards make it comparatively easy to insert the cards and to write close to the edges. G945 Alaska. Description and travel. H383 Henderson, A, P. Rainbow's End, Alaska. Chic. 1898. 12. O FIG. 2 The result is a more legible record than the pen-written one. Such institutions as libraries use the typewriter freely in making records. A black record ribbon is preferable for card work. Figs. 1 and 2 show examples of typewritten cards. GENERAL SUGGESTIONS Typewriting should not be on both sides of the paper in business-letter work. In writing wills and contracts, the typewriting may be on both sides as a means of preventing additions. Black record ribbons are best where permanency is desired. Purple copying and blue copying ribbons are popular for business correspondence. In general work, it is a good plan to keep half of a record ribbon and half of a copying 202 TYPEWRITING ribbon on the machine fastened together. Ribbons are now made that are half record and half copying. There is also a ribbon made with the width in three sections, a copy- November 28, 1904. Mr. Clifford J. Tanner, Cortland, N. Y. My dear Sir: Your letter to the editor of THE INDEPENDENT has been handed to me for reply. We cheerfully consent to your republishing the article by Amos R. Wells, provided you give THE INDEPENDENT due credit Perhaps you do not know that several para- graphs of the original article were omitted from the clipping you sent us. We shall be glad to have you call at this office and refer to our files if you are desirous of republishing the ar- ticle in its entirety. We have no copy of that issue that we could send to you. Assuring you that we shall be glad to be of service, I am Very truly yours, Office Editor FIG. 1. EXAMPLE OF GOOD BALANCE ON 6"X9" SHEET ing section for letter work, a record section for record work, and a red section for accounting work where it is helpful both to appearance and understanding to have credits in TYPEWRITING 203 red; but this tricolor ribbon cannot be used on all type- writers. A dim ribbon will do better if it is turned over. Striking the letter X over errors mars the appearance of typewriting work and is excusable, if anywhere, only where many carbon copies are made on thin paper. You may strike e, p, to, or d over o or c; h over n; y over v; t over i; but never resort to expedients of this kind except when making a large number of carbon copies. Never strike one figure over another even when making carbon copies. A period may be changed to a comma, a semicolon, or a colon by drawing the carriage back and striking the desired point oh top of the period. On the older styles of shift-key machines, the numerator of a fraction may be lifted slightly above the usual line of writing by depressing the shift key a very little and holding it firmly while the figure is struck. Make your erasures neatly. It is possible to make erasures so that they are hardly noticeable. In copying important papers, lines of figures, etc., it is well to use a line marker to avoid the possibility of omitting or transposing a line. A ruler will do; slip it down as you copy each line. CORRECT FORM AND STYLE Like printers, different business men hold different views about what is best in form and style. Not even in such matters as spelling and the division of words do all agree, some looking to the Standard Dictionary as an authority, others following the Century, still others holding to the forms of Webster, and so on. The sensible stenographer will be quick to ascertain these preferences and to conform graciously to them. Paper. Paper of almost any small size may be used on the typewriter, but the most convenient sheet for letters is that which is 8^ or 9 in. wide by 11 or Hi in. long. With elite-type machines machines fitted with type a little smaller than the usual style notes and short letters may be 204 TYPEWRITING written very neatly on sheets 5J or 6 in. wide by 8^ or 9 in. long. See Fig. 1. Never use for a letter a sheet that has been cut, torn, or soiled. Address. Every letter should show the full address of the writer unless it is certain that the person to whom the letter is sent has the address. When possible, a sheet with a printed heading should be used for the first page of a business letter. If only plain paper is available, the address of the writer may be neatly typewritten on the right, just ahead of the date, if no street address is necessary, as Heathsville, Va. , March 20, 1910. If there is a street address, the better arrangement is 1120 Ash Street, Scranton, Pa., March 20, 1910. Second and Third Pages. Sheets without printed head- ings should be used for the second and subsequent pages and it will not inconvenience us to wait until the 10th for the Colonial Linen. In the meantime, ship ue: a reaas, 80-1%., Extra Quality, Cream Enamel Cover; 1 ream, 120- It. , Antique Finish, Cadet-Blue xjax Cover; 1 ream, 80-lb., Crash Finish, Coffee Palestine Cover. We need these cover papers just a* soon as you can possibly 'lew of the fact that we are giving you -~- \^^~ FIG. 2 of letters, and the initials of the person addressed and the page number should be written on each sheet after the first, about 1 in. from the top edge. See Fig. 2. Three single spaces should then be made before beginning the first full line of writing. Stenographers often err in placing the two or three lines of a second sheet at too great a dis- tance from the top edge. The blank space at the top should not be greater than 1 in. at the most. Balance. The secret of good effect in a typewritten letter lies in the balancing of matter on the sheet. A small amount of typewriting written single spaced and crowded toward TYPEWRITING 205 the top of a sheet is inartistic. See Fig. 3. This form and the form reproduced in Fig. 4 show the poor effects when no regard is had for balance. There should be ample margins International Textbook Company Scranton, Pa., Apr. 2, 1907. ihueetts Ave. , Washington, D. C. Dear Sir: This letter is not representative of those sent out from the offices of the International Textbook Company but ia written on thle letter-head with little or no regard for balance, merely to demonstrate to you the unaymmetrical appearance of large proportion of business The date line should have been placed a little farther to the right and not so close to the printed titl . Vo time was saved by abbrevlatina "April"; the appearance would hav been better had the word been written out. Most letter writers are gul ty of such reasonless ab- breviation. More space should have been lef between the dt line and the firat line of the address. An address as ong as this one should have been arranged in three lines instead of t o. The first lines of paragraphs a e indented too deeply. The greateet faults of thla le ter, however, are the crowding of the mat- ter toward the top, the extend ng of It so close to the side- edges of the sheet and the omission of a ep ce between the lines of the address, be- tween the salutation and the f rat line of the body matter and between the paragraphs of the body mat er. The letter IB top heavy and has a packed appearance; it doean't ook readable. The writer should not have atarted so cloae to the top of the sheet, and there should have been wider side margins. Remember these points, and see to it that your letter a do not resemble this fprni. Don't think that this is an exaggerated example. The mails abound with such letters. Cordially yours, FIG. 3. CROWDED AND UNBALANCED at the sides, and the last line of writing should not be nearer the lower edge of the sheet than | in. See Fig. 5, which is a reduced icproduction of a good model form. If a letter 206 TYPEWRITING is written with wide side margins, the blank margin at the bottom should be correspondingly deep; in other words, the blank space should constitute a kind of frame for the International Textbook Co Soranton. Pa.. April 10. 1910 Mr. Ambitious Person 2202 Massachusetts Avenus . Washington. D. C. Dear Sir-- This form la a great improvement -over the forn shown on the other page, and so far as Indention of first lino of paragraphs forn has faults, acd I ao wondering whether your eye and your sense matter above it. and the space between the date line and the first line of the address Is a little deeper than It should be You can about the top portion of this letter Therefore, remenber that while top of th sheet. It should be close enough to appear connected Bote , too. that the typewriting extends too close to the imple that t the right should not be "skimpy. " Cordially yours. FIG. 4. Too MUCH SPACE AT TOP typewriting. The wide side-margin effect is especially helpful to short letters. In using the standard-width type- writer paper, if the left marginal stop is set at 5 of the scale TYPEWRITING 207 and the writing is not continued beyond 70, the margin will be good: this refers to the scale 72 spaces long; some machines have longer scales. Fig. 6 shows other good forms. International Textbook Company Scnuton, Pa. , February 22, 1907. Mr. Clifford J. Tanner. Cortland, V. I. My deer Sir: Toor inquiry of February 18 has just reachod at. I take pleasure in giv- ing ay ideas of what constitutes good for. in a typewritten letter. or it determined to eone eztent by personal preference; and. of course, it i* every oar.'e right to have hi* letters written the way he prefers them. Most of us agree that it is important to balance the typewriting on the beet, and that a cpaee of one line should be left blank between paragraphs when a letter is written single-spaced. There appears to be no great difference in the letter* forua used by careful writers except in the arrangenent of the addreas and in the extent of indention Of the first lines of paragraphs. The form I prefer for the address is the one shown abOTei bat letters often require extended addresses that cannot be arranged well in two lines. Many prefer to have first lines of paragraph* indented ten spaces; but as typewriting Is only a form of printing, there eeems to we to be no good reason, beyond personal preference, for greater indention than five spaces. My answer to your question. What are the general essentials of a good busi- ness letter? is that they are correct construction, spelling and punctuation; and courtesy always. Cordially yoor.. FIG. 5. WELL-BALANCED LETTER The right-hand margin of typewritten matter cannot conveniently be made even, but it should not be too uneven. 208 TYPEWRITING 01 1|0 2lO 3[0 4|0 5|0 6|0 7|0 I I I Illtl I I II I II II I I I I I II I M I I I ll I I II I I II I I I I I I II I I I I I I I II II I I I I I I I II I I I I I Philadelphia, Pa., April 10, 1904. O'Connor and Company, New York, H. Y. Gentlemen: Please quote us your best price on ten thousand (10,000) en- graved letter heads like enclosed sample* We will furnish the plate for the engraving. The quality and weight of the paper must be as good as that ot ample; we prefer the identical stock if it is possible to procure it. Awaiting your estimate, we are Very truly yours a Enclosure." Brooklyn, H. Y.. September 17, 1904. We. John Willianison, Boston, Jiass. Dear Mr. Williamson: Your favor of the 3d is Just at hand. The owner of the lot at 166 East Second Street asks $2,100 for his property $1,000 cash and the balance on mortgage. If this figure Is anything to your liking please come over for a talk. I think tRe lot is clearly worth the price asked. The section is building up very rapidly and none but the best class of dwellings are be> Ing erected. Give the matter consideration and let me hear from you. Sincerely yours, FIG. 6 TYPEWRITING 209 Paragraphing. Correct paragraphing is a great aid to good appearance as well as to proper understanding. From a grammatical point of view, a new paragraph should not be started until the subject changes or a new treatment of the subject is introduced; but if practicable, have a full page consist of not less than three paragraphs. Spacing. Single spacing seems to be more popular for circular letters than for regular business correspondence. BULLETIN 18 June 85, 1907. Messrs. J. I. Jor H. E. Compton, John 0. Lavers, E. A. Sanderson: W know that some heads of departments have, on their own judgment, followed this plan, but as several serious mistakes have teen made lately as. the result of misunderstanding of oral orders, we have decided to make the rule a general one. When Important directioni they should be confirmed at 01 carbon copy should be made for the files Please direct your stenographers to use half -sheets of the scrap envelopes. As there are several Browns, Jones and Smiths In our employ, envelopes should Invariably show the initlala of the person addressed. We shall leave It to you to decide whicn directions and com- munications from your department nay be properly classed aa im- portant. THE EVANS-MAYERS COMPANY By L. E. Blakemore, Secretary FIG. 7 Double spacing is generally preferred when the letter can be written double spaced on one sheet. When double spacing would require two sheets for the letter, some prefer that it be written single spaced and placed on one sheet. By glancing over his notes and estimating the length of a letter, the stenographer will be able to arrange it better. A second sheet with only one line or two lines on it does not look well, 210 TYPEWRITING and if a letter seems likely to run out that way, it is better to have wider side margins and force three or four lines over to the second sheet. The space of one full line should always be left blank between paragraphs of single-spaced matter. See Fig. 7. It is a good arrangement to have items single spaced in a double-spaced letter, that is, such items as those of goods ordered. See Fig. 2. Date. Be sure to date the letter. Do not abbreviate the month when dating. Never write a form like 5/10/09 for a date if there is room and time to write the date in full. Not every one can tell at a glance what month the fifth month is. Besides, the method in Great Britain is to write the number of the day before the number of the month; therefore there might be occasions when 5/10/09 would not be clear. There seems hardly any excuse for such abbreviations as these in letters. After writing the date, if you are using a full letter sheet, make four single spaces (two pulls of the line lever when set for double spacing) before writing the name and address; sometimes printed letterheads require the operator to space down still farther before writing the name and address. Name and Address. When possible, write the name and address on the letter sheet in two lines, with one full space between the lines. If the street and number is included and the firm name is rather long, three lines will be necessary and Street or Avenue in the second line of the address may be spelled out to make the lines balance. The office files usually contain the street address of all regular correspondents, and in such cases the address oa the letter sheet may be written as Mr. James L. Mayo, Worcester, Mass. If, however, the addressee is not a regular correspondent, be sure to put his street and number in the address so that it will be on record in the office. The following form is a good style to follow where the addressee has a title: Mr. Robert C. Sommers, President, FIRST NATIONAL BANK. Pinehurst, North Carolina. TYPEWRITING 211 If a title is short, it may follow the name on the first line. In business letters, the address of the person to whom the letter is written should be placed at the beginning of the letter. In official letters, social letters, and letters of a social-business nature, the address may be written either at the beginning or at the end* of the letter a little below the signature, thus: Respectfully yours, C. Third Assistant Postmaster-General. To Mr. Oscar Loderick , Plymouth, Pa. Both Mr. and Esq. should not be used in addressing; if one is used, omit the other. But either Mr. or Esq. may be used properly when senior or junior (abbreviated Sr. and Jr.} is added to names. And it is permissible to write Mr. Thomas Brown, President. Each part of the address on the letter sheet except the last should be followed by a comma, but no comma should ever come between the number of a street and the name of it. Some writers prefer to follow the last item, which is usually the name of the state, with a semicolon, using a period and a semicolon if an abbreviation is used. Others use no mark. The general practice is to use the period, as shown in the examples on page 208. Miscellaneous Points. Follow Dear Sir and Gentlemen, when used as salutations, by a colon only; the hyphen formerly placed after the colon is now usually omitted. In Great Britain, it is the practice to place a comma after the salutation. Start the salutation at the extreme left of the scale used. In writing Dear Sir as a salutation, capitalize both words; in writing My dear Sir, do not capitalize the middle word; "dear" in My dear Mr. Smith should not be capitalized. Capitalize only the first word of closing phrases such as Yours respectfully, Sincerely yours, etc. 212 TYPEWRITING The practice of some writers in beginning a letter as Replying to yours of the lOth, and placing a period after 10th, is not justified. The words constitute a clause, not a sentence; a comma, a semicolon, or a colon could be used correctly, but not a period. There is a tendency at the present time to eliminate paragraphing and to begin all lines flush with the left margin, thus: Mr. S. Roland Hall, 816 Taylor Avenue, Scranton, Pa. Dear Sir: Answering your question about, etc.. There is little to say in favor of this style. It is radical and is used only by those who long for "something different." The elimination of the paragraph throws the upper part of the letter out of balance. Opinion is divided on the question of whether it is better form to indent paragraphs five spaces or to indent them ten spaces. While there seems no good reason for greater indention than five spaces, the stenographer must be guided by the preference of the one for whom he writes. See Fig. 5. If a new paragraph must be started near the end of a sheet, there should be at least two lines written before the matter is carried over. The last line of a paragraph should not be carried over to another sheet. The . effect at the top in Fig. 2 would have been inartistic had only the short line now shown as the second line been brought over. Do not begin a paragraph or a sentence with figures. In letters treating of mechanical matters it is sometimes neces- sary to use figures extensively, and in law work both figures and words are often employed to insure accuracy; but, as a general rule, amounts less than one hundred are better in words than in figures. This ruling would not, of course, apply in tabulating and account work. There are exceptions to nearly all rules, and in such an expression as from fifty to one hundred and fifty feet, if one amount is TYPEWRITING 213 expressed in figures, the other should be also; and where a number is referred to as a number or figure, it should not be written out. It would be the best form, for instance, to write He had room 80. Indefinite sums, such as fifty or sixty dollars, should be expressed in words. Ten cents is a better form than lOc. unless the work is in the nature of tabulating or there are many quotations of prices. It is not a good plan to write $0.50 in the body matter of a letter; fifty cents is less likely to be misread. It is well to remember that o'clock is not written with a capital 0. In writing dimensions and specifications, such forms as 8 X 10, 8-foot, 10-point, etc. are recommended. In Great Britain, the spelling of many words is different from American forms: Check is usually written as cheque; favor, endeavor, and other such words are written with a u before the r, as favour, etc. Do not use figures in the body matter of telegrams. Write the amounts or numbers out in words. In addressing envelopes, use forms like 212 Second Street, Southeast, and the number of the house will not be confounded with the name of the street. On typewriters with Universal keyboards, use the small 1 (not capital I) for the figure 1, and the capital for the cipher unless the machine has a cipher. Do not quote the names of steamers and yachts unless it is necessary to do so in order to avoid confounding them with similar names of cities, states, etc. Names of books not well known should be quoted, but not the names of such books as the Bible, Pilgrim's Progress, Robinson Crusoe, etc. unless clearness requires the quotation marks. As typewriting machines ordinarily have no Italic letters, in writing the titles of magazines and newspapers, either use capitals for the first letter of each of the principal words (always the first and the last) and underscore the entire name, or write the entire title in capitals. Examples: The Garden Magazine. THE NEW YORK TIMES. Do not auote such names. Where The is a part of the title and 214 T YPEWRI TL\G an exact citation is made, capitalize The; but in body matter the may ordinarily be written with the small t, as According to the Times. When a newspaper does not include the name of the city in its title and it is desired to write the name of the city in connection with the title of the paper use all capitals for only the title name; the Evening Star of Wash- ington would thus be referred to as the Washington EVENING STAR. Do not use the sign (%) for per cent, in one place and write per cent, out in another. Be consistent. If you capitalize a given word in one place, do so everywhere in the letter unless the word changes its significance. In closing with such an expression as / beg to remain Yours truly, no comma should be placed after remain. If, however, the expression is / beg to remain, with best wishes, Yours truly, the phrase with best wishes should be cut off by commas. Do not write Yours &c. or abbreviate any closing phrase. Always leave plenty of room for the signature to the letter. Personal signatures should not be typewritten unless the communication is an impersonal bulletin or circular; but a firm name may be typewritten and the pen signature or the initials of the dictator written through or under the type- written name. The best style for the typewritten company signature is the all-capital form. See Fig. 7. Write Enclosure in the lower left corner of a letter when there is something to be enclosed, and heed this reminder before sealing the envelope. If there are two enclosures, the reminder may be written as Two Enclosures. Such reminders may be made specific by writing forms like Enclose price list, etc. It is customary in most offices to make a notation in the upper left corner or lower left corner of the sheet, showing by whom, and often to whom, the letter was dictated. Dictated by 5. R. H., LMD CEH and many other forms are used. These notations are of most service in offices where there are many correspondents and many stenog- raphers and where it is often necessary to determine who dictated and who transcribed a given letter. DIVISION OF WORDS 215 THE DIVISION OF WORDS A simple rule in general use in printing offices permits the division of words on any syllable that will be the most con- venient for the proper spacing of the line, except that it is not considered good practice to leave a syllable of only one letter at the end of a line or to carry over to the next line a last syllable of two letters, as ly or ed. The effect is especially objectionable when a paragraph ends with a syllable of two letters in the last line. In some printing offices it is not permissible to divide a word on the first syllable of two letters, as re-member, except in narrow measure work i. e., composition in which the lines are narrow. By following this practice in typewriting, a stenographer will not be liable to criticism. Words in which the first syllable is composed of one letter, as in a-bide, a-gain, a-part, a-ble, o~ver, etc., should not be divided, neither should words of only four letters, as also, dual, etc., or words consisting of one syllable, no matter how long. Therefore, it is not permissible to divide such words as wrought, through, chance, and even in the plural forms like chances it seems better to keep the entire word on one line than to divide as chan-ces. Words like charged, drowned, pronounced as a single syllable, should not be divided. A large amount expressed in figures may be divided on any group of three figures, but the comma between the groups on which the division is made should not be carried over to the next line with the group it precedes. When the first part of the amount is expressed by but one or two figures, it should not be separated from the following group of three figures, neither should the decimal part of an amount, as .50, be separated from a whole-number part. Such abbreviations as A. M., P. M., etc. should never be separated by placing the first letter of the abbreviation at the end of a line and the second letter at the beginning of the next line. It is sometimes necessary to separate two abbreviated honorary titles, as D. D., LL. D., following a person's name, but it is well to avoid this separation when it can be done conveniently. 216 COMPOUNDING OF WORDS Authorities differ as to the proper syllabication of a great many words, and it frequently happens that the division of a word as given by one dictionary is not sanctioned by another. For instance, one dictionary gives the divisions of the words baking and dancing as ba-king and dan-cing, while others give the divisions of the same words as bak-ing and danc-ing. A stenographer cannot be expected to be familiar with all authorities, therefore, he should follow the usage of the dictionary he prefers, unless directed otherwise by his employer. In dividing words such as knowledge, children, etc. it is well to consult the dictionary so as to be sure of the syllabica- tion. For example, many stenographers, doubtless because of writing the word know frequently, divide knowledge as know-ledge, whereas the correct division, according to the accepted pronunciation, is knowl-edge. THE COMPOUNDING OF WORDS Of the many questions concerning the correct use of English, there is no question more perplexing than that having reference to the compounding of words. Two or more words may be so closely associated in their meaning or use as to require their union also in form. This may be done by writing them together as a single word, called a solid compound, as keyboard, underrate, overcoat; or hyphens may be used, and a hyphened or hyphenated compound made, as in laughter-loving, easy -mannered, twenty -five , etc. Obvi- ously, there are only three ways in which two words may be written; separately, with a hyphen between them, and as one solid word; as post man, post-man, postman. It is not always easy to decide whether a term should be written as two words, as a hyphened compound, or as a solid compound. The closeness of association between words used together in speech or writing is of every degree, and does not remain constant. Moreover, when general usage has sanctioned the writing of a term as a hyphened or as a solid compound, it COMPOUNDING OF WORDS 217 does not follow that all similar terms will be compounded in the same way. For instance, one dictionary gives corn-meal as a hyphenated word and oatmeal as a solid word. Usage changes with time and varies with locality, and cannot be controlled by fixed rules, however desirable that may be. Up to within recent years, today and tomorrow were seldom or never written as solid words, while now it is a well estab- lished custom so to write them. The changes however, are not always from the hyphenated to the solid form. Terms like one-half, two-thirds, twenty -five, etc. were, until recently, almost invariably written with the hyphen, but lately there is a tendency to write such expressions as two words, and the practice may in time become general. The English spoken and written in Great Britain is in many respects different from the English of her colonies and from that of the United States; and in the United States, there are in the various sections noteworthy differences in the language of even cultured people. What is considered good usage on the Atlantic Slope is not always so regarded on the Pacific Slope; and the language and preferences of educated people in the North differs much from that of the same class in the South. There are so many exceptions to the rules that gram- marians and lexicographers have formulated, and the rule makers have themselves been so inconsistent in their own compounding, that their rules are of little value. One of the latest and best dictionaries gives these two rules; 1. All words should be separate when used in regular grammatical relation and construction, unless they are jointly applied in some arbitrary way. 2. Abnormal association of words generally indicates unification in sense, and hence compounding in form. The difficulty in applying these rales is that not all people will agree as to what is "regular grammatical relation and construction," and both "arbitrary way" and "abnormal association" leave more than is desirable to the judgment of individuals, if uniformity is to be promoted. Considering the differences in opinion as to good usage that will be found by consulting different dictionaries and 218 COMPOUNDING OF WORDS by looking into the practice of various publishing houses, and considering also the changes that come about in even that which is at any given time regarded as good usage, it is best not to depend on any fixed rule. The better plan is to be discriminating and to look into the question of usage and to inquire as to whether there is need for compounding in order to have words show at a glance the proper relation to each other. Printers are aided in solving the vexatious questions of compounding by the fact that large printing concerns and publishing houses have a "style card" that regulates, to some extent at least, the compounding of words in copy set up in their composing rooms. These style cards usually have lists of words that are to be written as compounds, and a certain dictionary is regarded as an authority as to other words. The stenographer ordinarily has no such "office style" as a guide. Some employers will indicate their preferences, or direct the stenographer to follow the style of some dictionary, but in most offices the stenographer is expected to use his own judgment as to the punctuating and compounding of dictated matter. The following matter is not laid down as a. set of rules but as explanations and examples of practice in many offices that may stimulate discrimination and research in cases of doubt. When Fulton brought forward his great invention, the words steam and boat began to be spoken and written much together, but they were were at first regarded and pro- nounced as two words. By and by, the very fact of their frequent association led some one to write them with a hyphen, and the accent fell strongly on the first element. Later, the hyphen was dropped, no one knowing when or by whom, and steam-boat became steamboat. This, in general, is the history of the compounding of words. Where two words written separately may possibly have- two different meanings, it is advisable to 'either change the construction or to compound the words, provided of course that compounding will remove the possible ambiguity, as it will oityen do. COMPOUNDING OF WORDS 219 Thus, the words blue coat are used to describe a coat" that is blue, but bluecoat is used as a name for a blue-uniformed man. If we write, "In the rear of the house there was a brick yard," the words may be construed to refer to a yard paved with brick, or to a place where brick is made; but written as brickyard, the meaning is clear as referring to a yard where brick is made. We may properly write an imposing stone if we are describing the Kohinoor diamond or Cleopatra's needle, but a printer's stone table is not imposing in the usual sense of that adjective and it is more exact to refer to the table as an imposing-stone . Observe an expression with two adjectives, light brown hair. Construing the language literally, is it the hair that is light or is it the color of the hair? If we want to express unmistakably the idea that the color is light brown, we should not leave the adjectives as . independent qualifiers of hair, but should write the expression as light-brown hair, thus confining the descriptive . effect of light entirely to brown. A hyphen is not required in His spinal column was broken; but in a spinal-column disease, the hyphen is properly used. The expression three dollar payments is ambiguous; but three-dollar payments and three dollar -payments are perfectly clear. The practice set forth in the following paragraphs is com- mon to a number of prominent publishing houses and print- ing offices and though it is not offered as a standard style card, it will serve as a guide when the stenographer has no reason for preferring different practice. With the exception of such forms as well-known fact, ill- mannered man, let an adverb and an adjective or a participle when used before another word or used separately remain as two words. Examples: strongly made box, highly colored painting. Even well known when used as in a sentence such as He was well known may be used without the hyphen. Hyphen such combinations as two-wheeled, one-sided when used as compound adjectives, also such combinations of verbs and adverbs or prepositions as blow-down, hold-up , stand-off. 220 COMPOUNDING OF WORDS Points of the compass are usually written as one word, as northeast; but when one of the words is repeated, as in north-northeast, the hyphen is used. Expressions in which half, quarter, eighth, etc. appear are usually conjoined by a hyphen, as half-tone, one-half, one-quarter, five -eighths, etc., though quartermaster, headquarters, and a very few other common combinations are written as single words. One-half, two-thirds, and the like may be written without the hyphen where the separate halves or third are thought of as in One half of the farm had all the buildings on it; the other half contained the timber but in such expressions as two- thirds of the distance (the distance here being thought of as an unbroken length), a one-half interest, three sixty -ninths , etc., the hyphen should be used. The use of the hyphen in writing Eighty-second street and in twenty-five, thirty - seven and similar combinations is at present generally commended. Score, penny, pence, fold, etc. are ordinarily consolidated, as threescore, fourpence, twofold; but the words that would make long combinations, such as a hundred fold, are writ- ten separately. First-rate, high-grade, second-class, etc. require the hyphen when used as in A bolt of high-grade silk, but the hyphen is not required in This silk is of high grade. Man and woman when affixed to other words ordinarily require no hyphen, as Frenchman, needlewoman, etc., but long combinations, such as American woman, are separated. Civic and military titles are conjoined with a hyphen, as vice-president, major-general. Homelike, businesslike and other compounds ending with like are usually made one word unless similar consonants thereby meet, when the hyphen should be used, as in shell-like. The common compounds beginning with mid are written with the hyphen. Where the prefixes pre, re, co, etc. are joined to words beginning with the vowel with which the prefix ends, the combinations are now printed in many offices as preexist, reenter, coworker, etc. But re-creation should be written with a hyphen to distinguish it from the very differ- ent word recreation. ABBREVIATIONS 221 The prefixes, over, under, after, out, cross and counter are usually consolidated, as overestimate, underbid, afterthought, outdo, etc. Sometimes, however, when these prefixes come before nouns or adjectives of two syllables or make unusual combinations, the hyphen is required, as in over-jealous, cross -section, etc. Words like self-respect require the hyphen, but selfhood, selfsome, and selfish do not. Myself, itself, herself, etc. are invariably written as solids, though many writers prefer one's self to the solid form oneself. The use of hyphenated words to excess should be avoided, for, as an able writer says, "Hyphens string words together as if they were sausages." When separate words will convey clearly the required meaning, do not connect them with hyphens. Attorney at law is perfectly clear without hyphens, and so are such phrases as an ever to be remembered day. Of course, until usage seems to demand it, the stenographer should not undertake to separate and use as two words such combinations as rainfall, railroad, broadcloth, brownstone, etc., which have long been used as single words. ' ABBREVIATIONS Titles may be abbreviated when used with the full name of the person, as Gen. U. S. Grant, Prof. Walter Dill Scott, etc. Spell the title in full when it is used with the surname alone, as General Wheeler, Professor Eliot. The plural form for the abbreviation of Mr. is Messrs., which is an abbreviation of the French word Messieurs. Do not write the abbreviation Mess. The plural form for the abbreviation of Mrs. is Mmes., which is the abbreviation for Mesdames. Miss is not an abbreviation and needs no period. Do not abbreviate instant, ultimo, received, president, secretary, treasurer, or any other such words, in the body of a letter. In civil-service examinations a point is scored against a person for each such abbreviation unless the 222 ABBREVIA TIONS exercise is one of which he is required to make an exact copy. Nd and rd after figures have been superseded by d; 2d, 3d, 6th, 1st require no periods after them unless they end sen- tences. Use th or d only when the month or a word standing for it (such as instant or proximo) follows; let the style be August 18, 1909, Your letter of March 21, On the 10th day of May, Yours of the 3d ultimo, etc. In Great Britain, the pre- vailing style in writing dates is to place figures expressing the day of the month ahead of the name of the month, as 22d February, 1906. Do not advertise yourself as a bungler by writing the character " for th, or the character % for "care of." The first character is a quotation mark and is also used in type- writing as a ditto mark; the second character is a sign for per cent. The characters have no other meanings. Xmas for Christmas, ad for advertisement, and all such abbreviations are inexcusable in letters. Do not abbreviate New York when referring to the city of that name. Usually, when company is abbreviated in a firm name, such as Smith & Co., the & sign should be used; it is better form to write and in full when company is written in full; but if a firm prints or signs its name as Smith & Company, follow the form used. In tabulating and other classes of typewriting where space must be economized, much liberty is allowed in abbreviating. Punctuation marks may be omitted from the ends of dis- play lines except where they are essential to clearness. Where a few items are listed within a letter, it is usual to place punctuation marks at the ends, but lists of names or amounts in columns do not require punctuation. There is good authority for omitting the period after Roman numerals when they occur in body matter; but it is the practice to place periods after both Roman and Arabic numerals when they are used as a part of side headings or to number para- graphs, parts of paragraphs, etc., unless they are enclosed within parentheses. However, in some of the King James editions of the Bible, periods are not used after the figures placed before verses and do not seem to be needed. ABBREVIATIONS 223 The following list of abbreviations will be found useful for reference, but, as already suggested, abbreviation should generally be avoided except where limitations of space make it desirable. A. Acre @. At or to Al or A No. 1. First-class A. B. Bachelor of Arts acct. or a/c. Account acct. cur. Account current acct. sales. Account of sales A. D. Anno Domini (in the year of our Lord) ad. or adv. Advertisement Adjt. Adjutant ad lib. At pleasure admr* Administrator admx. Administratrix A. F. A. M. Ancient Free and Accepted Masons agt. Agent Ala . Alabama Alb. Tr Alberta Territory A. M. Master of Arts, Be- fore noon, In the year of the world amt. Amount Anon . Anonymous ans. Answer A. R. A. Associate of the Royal Academy Ariz . Arizona Ark. Arkansas Art. Article Ass'n. Association Assin. Tr. Assiniboia Ter- ritory Asst. Assistant Atty.-Gen. Attorney- G e n- eral Aug. August Ave. Avenue Av. Average B. A. British America, Bachelor of Arts bal. Balance b. b. Bill book bbl. Barrel, barrels B. C. Before Christ, British Polumbia B. C. L. Bachelor of Civil Law B. D. Bachelor of Divinity b. f. Bold face B. I. British India bk. Bank, book B. L. Bachelor of Laws b/1. Bill of lading bl. Barrel bot. Bought B r o . , Bros . B r o t h e r . brothers bu. Bushel B. V. Blessed Virgin, fare- well B. W. I British West Indies bxs. Boxes t. Cents Cal. California Cap. Capital Capt. Captain 224 ABBREVIATIONS C. B. Cash book C. C. Circuit court, chan- cery cases, county com- missioner, county court C. E. Civil engineer cent. A hundred c. f . i. Cost, freight, and in- surance C. H. Court house, custom house chap. Chapter C. J. Chief Justice elk. Clerk C. M. Common meter cm . Centimeter Co. Company, county C. O. D. Cash (or collect) on delivery Col. Colonel Colo. Colorado cr. Credit Conn, or Ct. Connecticut Cor. Sec . Corresponding Secretary C. P. Court of Probate, common pleas Cr. Credit, creditor, chro- mium C. S. Court of Session?, Clerk to the Signet, Keeper of the Seal, Civil Service Ct. Connecticut, count, court ct. Cent (money) cts. Cents cwt. A hundredweight d. or dol. Dollar D. B. Day book Dan. Danish, Daniel D. C. District of Columbia, from the beginning d. c. Double column D. C. L. Doctor of Civil or Canon Law D. D. Doctor of Divinity D. D. S. Doctor of Dental Surgery D. E. Double entry Dec. December deft. Defendant deg. Degree Del. Delaware del. Delegate Dem. Democrat, demo- cratic Dep. or Dept. Deputy, de- ponent dep. Deposit dft. Draft D. G. By the grace of God diam. Diameter disc . Discount dist. District Dist. Atty. District Attor- ney div. Dividend, division, di- vide, divided, divisor D. M. Doctor of Music D. M. D. Doctor Dental Medicine do. The same dols. Dollars doz. Dozen D. P. Doctor of Philosophy Dpt. Deponent, depart- ment Dr. Debtor, doctor dr. Dram ABBREVIATIONS 225 D. V. (Deo volente). God willing E. Earl, east ea. Each Ed. Editor, edition E. E. and M. P. Envoy Ex- traordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary e. g. (Exempli gratia). For example E. I. East Indies, or East India E. N. E. East-northeast eod. Every other day Esq. Esquire et al. (et alii). And else- where, and others etc. Et cetera et seq. (et sequentia). And the following Ex . Example et ux. (et uxor). And wife ex. Express F. Fahrenheit, France, French, Friday Fahr. Fahrenheit F. A. S. Fellow of the Society of Arts, Fellow of the Antiquarian Society Feb. February fir. Firkin Fla. Florida fo. or fol. Folio f. o. b. Free on board Fr. France, Francis, French, Friday F. R. C. S. Fellow of the Royal College of Sur- geons F. R. G. S. Fellow of the Royal Geographical So- ciety F. R. S. Fellow of the Royal Society F. R. S. E. Fellow of the Royal Society, Edin- burgh F. R. S. L. Fellow of the Royal Society of Litera- ture, Fellow of the Royal Society, London F. S. A. Fellow of the Society of Arts ft. Foot, feet, fort fth. Fathom fur. Furlong Ga. Georgia gal. Gallon, gallons G. A. R. Grand Army of the Republic G. B. Great Britain G. B. & I. Great Britain and Ireland Geo. George G. M. Grand Master Gov. Governor G. P. O. General Post Office gr. Great, gross, grain, gram G. T. Good Templars, grand tiler hab. corp. (Habeas corpus). You may have the body hdkf. Handkerchief H. E. Hydraulic engineer hhd. Hogshead 226 ABBREVIATIONS B. M. S. His (or Her) Majesty's steamer, ship, or service Hon . Honorable H. P. or hp. Horsepower H. R. H. His (or Her) Royal Highness ib. or ibid, (ibidem). In the same place id. (idem). The same Inc. Incorporated Incog. Incognito, un- known i. e. (id est). That is I. H. S. (Jesus, Hominum Sal vator) . J e s u s the Saviour of Men I. N. R. I. [lesus (Jesus) Nazarenus, Rex ludae- orum (Judaeorum)]. Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews 111. Illinois imp. Imperial, imperfect in. Inch, inches Ind. Indiana, India, In- dian, index Ind. T. Indian Territory in loc. In its place ins. Insurance Inst. Instant, in the present month, institute, institu- tion int. Interest In trans. In the passage inv. Invoice la. Iowa I. O. G. T. Independent Order of Good Templars I. O. O. F. Independent Order of Odd Fellows I. O. U. I owe you It. or Ital. Italian, Italic J. Judge, or Justice j/a. Joint account Jan. January Jas. James J. C. Jesus Christ, justice clerk, Julius Caesar JJ. Justices, Judges Jno. John Jos. Joseph J. P. Justice of the Peace J. Prob. Judge of Probate Jr. or jr. Junior K. Knight, king, kilogram Kans. Kansas Ky. Kentucky K. G. Knight of the Garter Ib. (libra). A pound in weight; Ibs. pounds A pound sterling La. Louisiana Lat. or L. Latin lat. Latitude L. C. Lower Canada 1/c. Letter of credit 1. c. Lower case, a printer's term for letters that are not capitals; in the place before cited; left center; letter of credit lea. League 1. or led. Ledger L. I. Long Island, light infantry lib. Book Lib. Library, librarian ABBREVIATIONS 227 Lieut, or Lt. Lieutenant LL. B. Bachelor of Laws LL. D. Doctor of Laws loc. cit. In the place cited Ion. or long. Longitude Ltd. Limited L. S. Place of the Seal s. d. Pounds, shillings, pence M. Monday, marquis, mon- sieur, morning, thousand, meridian, noon M. or m. Masculine, meter, moon, month, months, minute, minutes, mill, mills, mile, miles, a thou- sand M. A. Military Academy, Master of Arts Man . M ani toba Mme. Madam Maj. Major Mar. March Mass. Massachusetts M. B. Bachelor of Medicine M. C. Member of Congress, Master of Ceremonies, Master Commandant M. D. Doctor of Medicine Md . Maryland Mdse. Merchandise M. D. S. Master of Dental Surgery M. E. Methodist Episcopal, Military or Mechanical Engineer, Most Excellent Me. Maine med. Medical, medicine Mem. or Memo. Memoran- dum, remember Messrs. Gentlemen, sirs Mfg. or Mfng. Manufactur- ing M. G. Major-General Mgr. Manager Mich . Michigan min. Minute, mining Minn. Minnesota Miss. Mississippi Mile. Mademoiselle Mmes. Mesdames Mo. Missouri mo. Month Mon . Monday Mont. Montana M. P. Member of Parlia- ment, member of police Mr. Master, or mister Mrs. Mistress, or missis MS. Manuscript MSS. Manuscripts Mt. Mount, mountain N. North Nat. or Nat'l. National nat. Natural N. B. (nota bene). Note well, take notice; also, New Brunswick N. C. North Carolina N. E. Northeast Neb. Nebraska Nev. Nevada N. F. Newfoundland N. H. New Hampshire Ni. Pri. Nisi prius N. J. New Jersey N. Mex. New Mexico 228 ABBREVIATIONS No. Number nol. pros. (Nolle prosequi). Unwilling to prosecute non con. Not content, dis- senting non pros. He does not prosecute non seq. (non sequitur). It does not follow Nos. Numbers Nov. November N. P. Notary Public n. p. Net proceeds N. S. Nova Scotia, New Style (since 1752) N. Y. New York. To be used only for state N. W. Northwest N. W. T. Northwest Terri- tory Obt. Obedient %. Per cent. obj. Objective, objection obt. Obedient Oct. October O. F. Odd Fellow Okla. Oklahoma O. K. All correct Ont. Ontario O.S. Old Style (before 1752) oz. Ounce or ounces %. Per or care of Pa. Pennsylvania par. or t|. Paragraph P. B. Bachelor of Philos- ophy pd. Paid P. D. Doctor of Philos- ophy. P. E. Protestant Episcopal, presiding elder P. E. I. Prince Edward Island per an. By the year per cent, or per ct. By the hundred Ph. D. Doctor of Philoso- phy P. I. Philippine Islands pk. Peck pkgs. Packages plff. Plaintiff P. M. Postmaster, after- noon P. M. G. Postmaster-Gen- eral P. O. Post Office P. O. D. Pay on delivery P. O. O. Post-Office Order pop. Population pp. Pages pref. Preface, prefix prem. Premium Pres. President Presb. Presbyterian Prof. Professor propr. Proprietor pro tern, (pro tempore). For the time being prox. Next, next month P. S. or PS. Postscript ps. Pieces pt. Pint, part, payment pub. Public, publisher pwt. Pennyweight qr. Quarter (28 pounds), farthing, quire qt. Quart ABBREVIATIONS 229 Que. Quebec Q. or ques. Question R. C. Roman Catholic Rec. or R. Recipe Rec'd. Received Rec. Sec. Recording Secre- tary Rep. Representative Rev. Reverend rev. Revise R. I. Rhode Island Rom. Cath. Roman Cath- olic R. R. Railroad Rtd. Returned Ry. Railway R. S. V. P. Answer, if you please Rt. Hon. Right Honorable Rt. Rev. Right Reverend S. South, sign, saint, sul- phur, Sunday, scribe, shil- ling Sat. Saturday S. C. South Carolina s. c. Small capitals, single column sci. fa. Make known scil. or sc. To wit, namely s. e. Single entry Sec. or Sec'y. Secretary sec. Second, section Sept. September seq. The following, the next sh. Shilling sq. Square, the following sq. ft. Square feet Sr. Senior S. S. Sunday School, Saint Simplicius (the mark on the collar of the Chief Jus- tice of England) ss. Steamship ; scilicet, namely S. S. E. South-southeast St. or stet. Let it stand St. Saint, statute, street, strait Sun. Sunday Supt. Superintendent tcs. Tierces T. or Ter. Territory Term . Tennessee Tex. Texas Thurs. Thursday Treas. Treasurer typo. Typographer U. K. United Kingdom ult. (ultimo). Last, or of the last month Univ. University, Univer- salist U. P. United Presbyterian U. S. United States; (ut supra), as above U. S. A. United States of America, United States Army U. S. M. United States Mail U. S. M. A. United States Military Academy U. S. N. United StatesNavy Va. Virginia V. G. Vicar General, Vice Grand via. By way of 230 SPACING AND MISCELLANEOUS Vice-Pres. or V. P. Vice- President vid. (vide). See viz. Namely, to wit Vol. Volume vs. (versus). Against; in opposition Vt. Vermont W. West, Welsh, Wednes- day, warden Wash. Washington wb. Waybill Wed. Wednesday W. f . Wrong font in print- ing W. I. West India, West Indies wk. Week Wise, or Wis. Wisconsin Wm. William W. M. Worshipful Master wt. Weight W. Va. West Virginia Wyo. Wyoming y. or yr. Year y. or yd. Yard Yuc. Yucatan z. Zero, zone SPACING AND MISCELLANEOUS POINTS Leave two spaces after periods when they are placed at the end of sentences, but leave only one space after a period that follows an abbreviation. One space should be left after a semicolon, and ordinarily only one space after a colon; but in case a capital letter follows the colon, two spaces should intervene between the colon and the capital letter. One space should always be left after a comma except where it is used to point off amounts expressed in figures, such as 23,678. The comma should not be used in 1906, 1882, etc. when such figures are used to express dates: a comma is not really needed in any combination of only four figures unless there are a number of such combinations arranged in columns ; in body matter, the form $2500 is good. Do not put spaces before punctuation marks. In using the parentheses, or curves, ( ) , let no space come between the characters and the letters enclosed. Example: (Use them this way) . The period, when used as a decimal point, does not require a space after it. It is usual to make a space after the period in such abbreviations as D. D. , etc., but where lower-case letters (printer's term for letters that are not capitals) are SPACING AND MISCELLANEOUS 231 used, the space may be omitted, as in e . g . , i.e., etc. In writing amounts of dollars without cents, omit the decimal point. The decimal point belongs with cents, not with dollars. And it is unnecessary to write two ciphers in place of cents after amounts of even dollars in the body of a letter unless it is desired to make an amount look larger. In contracts, checks, etc. the point and the ciphers are added as a means of preventing fraud. In writing mixed numbers, such, for example, as 3 3-4, 8 15-16, etc., leave one space after writing the whole number. In writing a column of amounts of dollars, put one $ mark at the top of the column before the first item; no more are needed in the main column until the total is reached, where another should be placed before the first figure. Do not leave a space between the $ mark and the first figure. Quotations extending over one line and all telegrams quoted should be written single-spaced and set out promi- nently by leaving a full blank space before and after the $ ingle spaced matter. The form 1896-97 is clearer than 1896-7 . Etc. is better than&c. Do not write etc., etc.; one etc. is sufficient. Except in scientific articles, write the plurals of such anglicized words as index and formula as indexes, formulas, etc. Enquire and enquiry are used in England, tut inquire and inquiry are the preferred forms in the United States. Cannot is written as two words by some good writers, but the solid form is more generally used except in such unusual constructions as He can not only understand the language but can converse in it; and it is well to remember that in such constructions no comma is needed before but. Let a while be two words when while is a noun. When postscripts are necessary, write them single spaced and let them extend only half way across the sheet. When necessary to abbreviate Postscript, P. S. may be written without a space between the letters. Postscript is now written regularly as a single word and there seems to be no reason for the separation of the two letters used for the abbreviation. This principle applies also to railroad and 232 FOLDING, BACKING other words of like class. Sign postscripts with initials only. It is not always necessary to write P. S. when adding a few words at the bottom of a letter; the reader will know that it is a postscript without being told so specifically. FOLDING, BACKING, ADDRESSING, AND MAILING To fold the standard typewriter letter sheet for an ordi- nary business envelope, lay the letter before you with the lower edge of the sheet next to your body. Bring the lower edge up to the top (see Fig. 1), and fold the sheet in the middle; then bring the doubled end around, and fold the doubled sheet into three parts about equal, judging by THE F. S. SMITH CO. FIG. 1 the eye. When folded, the letter should be about one-third the width of an unfolded sheet and about one-half the length. (See Fig. 2.) Letters to be enclosed in a long or official envelope, an envelope about 9 in. X 4 in. , should be folded differently : Lay the paper straight before you with the lower edge of the sheet next to your body. Bring the lower edge two-thirds the ADDRESSING, MAILING 233 way up the sheet and make a fold. Then bring the folded edge up to the top of the sheet. The sheet is thus divided into three equal sections, just two folds being made. (See Fig. 3.) The width of the folded letter here remains the same as that of the unfolded sheet. Note heads, which are from 5 to 6 in. wide and from 8 to 9 in. long, are folded from the bottom to top after the manner illustrated in Fig. 3 either once or twice, according to whether the envelope is nearly square or is oblong; such sheets would be folded twice for the regular business en velope measuring 3| in. X 6 in. Writings on legal-cap paper are not folded like letters. Lay the document before you with the lower edge next to State Auditor's Qtfice FIG. 2 FIG. 3 your body, as if you were reading it. Bring the lower edge up to within about half an inch from the top, folding the paper approximately in the middle; then bring the folded edge up to the top. A document folded in this manner will unfold easily when picked up by the top edge and will need no turning about in order to get the reading matter before the eye. See Fig. 4. Figs. 4 and 5 show good forms of backing for documents and the fold on which the backing should be placed. With a little care for balance and centering, matter for backing can be arranged artistically. Figs. 6 and 7 are specimen backings for law papers. 234 FOLDING, BACKING a Report of Commissioners on PINEY POINT LIGHTHOUSE Filed April 15, 1903 ^ FIG. 4 ADDRESSING MAILING 235 THE WESTINGHOUSE AND WILLIAMS COMPANY New York and Chicago FIG. 5 236 FOLDING, BACKING Use a bone folder for folding letters and documents, in brder to avoid soiling the sheet by the fingers. James M. Booth To Cyrus K, Lorrimer Piled June 20, 1904. FIG. 6 Good form requires a typewritten address on an envelope for a typewritten letter. An envelope should conform in size and in quality and color of paper with the sheet it is COMMONWEALTH OP MASS. Municipal of the City < Court )f Boston Walter D. Bevis vs. : Tort Zachariah Neale : Defendant ' s Answer FIG. 7 to enclose. A letter written on a note-head sheet should not be placed in an official envelope. ADDRESSING, MAILING 237 There is imperative need for accuracy in addressing envelopes, and the address should not be written without regard for form or balance. The lines of an address on an envelope should be double or triple spaced. Write a three-line address on an envelope with triple spacing and note the improved appearance over double spacing. The first line of the address on an envelope should be written just a little below the middle of the envelope, not above, and each succeeding line should, as a rule, commence ten spaces to the right of the preceding line. While the Sty* ti* mttg >tar WASHINGTON. D. C. NEW YORK OFFICE TRIBUNE BUILDING James M. Booth, Esq. Heathsville Essex County "\.Virginia FIG. 8 three-line, triple-spaced address presents the best appear- ance, four lines may be used with good effect. In any case, the arrangement should be such that a diagonal line drawn from the beginning of the first line to the beginning of the last, see Fig. 8, would be flush with all lines. The envelope should bear a street address unless it is certain that the person or company addressed is well known to the post-office employes. The name of the county, the post-office box, or the name of a person in whose care a letter is sent may be written in the lower left corner of the envelope. (Sec Fig. 8.) 238 FOLDING, BACKING On pen-addressed envelopes, the name of the state should invariably be on the last line by itself, in order that the eyes of the mail distributors may catch it without delay. But as typewritten and printed addresses are very legible and as the four- line form is not so convenient as the three-line form, the typewriter operator may, ordinarily, where there is a street address, put the name of the state on the third line with the name of the city, without imposing any hardship on the mail distributors. (See Fig. 9.) BROWN 4 JAMES LEBANON. MASS. STAMP Mr. Samuel 0. Connors, 132 Adams Avenue, Delia, Iowa. FIG. 9 When the name of a person or company is rather long and the name of the town or city is short, the typewriter operator may follow a practice of printers and space out the name of the city to give a more symmetrical appearance to the address. (See Fig. 10.) When no street address is necessary, it is best to adhere to the three-line form for the address. The appearance is better than the two-line address. (See Fig. 11.) Many writers now omit the time-honored punctuation marks at the ends of lines on envelope addresses, unless periods are required by abbreviations. Punctuation marks may be dispensed with, and the practice of some of the best ADDRESSING, MAILING 239 printing houses is to omit them on envelope addresses and on displayed lines of other work unless patrons require them. (Compare Figs. 8, 10, and 11 with Fig. 9.) Do not omit the name of the state, no matter how large the city is. There are now three post offices in the United States bearing the name of Chicago; there are 11 Bostons, 26 Washingtons, 21 Richmonds, and one or more duplicates of hundreds of post-office names; the post-office employes should not be required to guess which one a writer had in mind. Mr. Arthur M. Williams 256 McKinley Street Canton Ohio FIG. 10 In addressing a letter to London, England, do not neglect to write the name of the country, for in case this is not given, the letter may be forwarded to London, Canada. Never abbreviate the name of a city on an envelope, and under no circumstances substitute City for the name of a city. Suppose the letter were carried in the pocket and thought- lessly mailed elsewhere than in the city in which it was addressed? "City" would be meaningless in such a case. Spell out Oregon, Texas, Maine, Iowa, Utah, Idaho, Ohio, Kansas, and Alaska; if any time is gained in abbreviating these names, it is more than offset by the better appear- 240 FOLDING, BACKING ance that the full name presents. If there is room, it is a good plan to write out all state names in full except the very long ones such as Pennsylvania, Massachusetts, etc.; but abbreviate Washington and New York when referring to the states of these names, and they will not be confounded with the names of the cities of Washington and New York, which should always be written in full. Write Registered or Special Delivery in the upper right corner of the envelope if a letter is to be sent as registered mail or by special delivery. On all envelopes for foreign Mr. Henry L. Jacobs Springfield Care of CROWELL & CO. Ohio FIG. 11 letters, write the word Foreign in the upper right corner as a reminder for the extra postage. In addressing mail to people who will be in a place only for a day or two, write the word "Transient" in a promi- nent place. Those who handle the mail will then under- stand that the addressee is not a permanent resident of the place. The words "Due to Arrive," written on an envelope may prevent a letter from being returned or forwarded else- where in case the person addressed has not yet reached the place. TWO-HUNDRED-YEAR CALENDAR 241 A note to be delivered by hand may be addressed simply Mr. John Donaldson Presented In sending a letter by a friend, acknowledge the courtesy by writing below the name on the envelope: "By the kind- ness of Mr. ." An envelope containing a letter of introduction should have the words "Introducing Mr. -" written in the lower left-hand corner. The best procedure in letter writing is to direct the envelope first. Then write the letter and put in the envelope the enclosures noted. Have the letter signed; copy it, unless a carbon copy has already been made; verify the enclosures; fold the letter properly and place it in the envelope; seal, stamp, and mail. Unless enclosures are placed in the envelope immediately after the letter is written, they are likely to be overlooked. When there are many letters every day to one corre- spondent, it is best not to direct separate envelopes. Time and postage will be saved by having the mailing clerk or the office boy keep a miniature post office, putting all the letters for one correspondent in a pigeon hole. In this way, one envelope will often suffice for a half dozen letters. It is better to keep all letters to foreign countries in a sepa- rate place; if mixed with domestic mail, some are likely to be mailed with insufficient postage on them. TWO-HUNDRED- YEAR CALENDAR By means of the table given on pages 242 and 243 the day of the week corresponding to any date between 1752 and 1956 (new style), may be readily found. Before every leap year there is a blank space. To find the day of the week on which January 1 of any year fell, find that year in the table; 242 TWO-HUNDRED-YEAR CALENDAR 3 4 5 6 1 2 June Sept. .^ec. April Juiy Jan. Oct. May Aug. Feb. Mar. Nov. 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Fri. Sat. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 I6~ 10 17 11 18 12 ~I9~~ 13 ^0~ 14 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 TWO-HUNDRED-YEAR CALENDAR 243 FROM SEPTEMBER 14 (NEW STYLE), 1752, TO 1956 3 4 5 6 1 2 June Sept. Dec. April July Jan. Oct. May Aug. Feb. Mar. Nov. 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878- 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Fri. Sat. 1 2 3 4 fi 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ' 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 244 TWO-HUNDRED-YEAR CALENDAR glance down the column containing that year, and the day of the week at the foot of the column will be the day of the week required. Thus, to find on what day of the week Janu- ary 1, 1895, fell, we find under 1895 in the table, Tuesday. For leap years we look for day of week under the blank space before the year. Thus, January 1, 1896, fell on Wed- nesday, Wednesday being in the column containing the blank space before 1896. To find the day of the week for any other date, add (mentally) to the day of the month the firstinum- ber under the day of the week that is contained in the column containing the year of the century; to this sum, add the number above the month at the top of the table. Find the number thus obtained in the columns of figures tinder the days of the week; the day of the week at the head of the column containing this number will be the day required. Thus, to find on what day of the week Septem- ber 10, 1813, fell, we find 1813 in the table. The number under the day of the week in the column containing 1813 is 6, and the number above September at the top of the table is 4. Hence, 10+6 + 4 = 20. The day of the week above 20 is Friday. For dates in January and February of leap years, take one day less, or add the number beneath the day of the week under the blank space preceding the year. Thus, for Febru- ary 12, 1896, we have 12+4+2 = 18, and the day of the week above 18 is Wednesday. Thanksgiving Day is the last Thursday in November; on what day of the month did it fall in 1897 ? Since the earliest day on which it can fall is the 24th, we find on what day of the week November 24 falls, and then count ahead to Thurs- day. Referring to the table, 24 + 6+2 = 32; the day of the week above 32 is Wednesday, and since Thursday is one day later, it follows that Thanksgiving Day in 1897 fell on the 25th. In England the new-style calendar was adopted in Septem- ber, 1752, by making September 3 legally September 14, in order to allow for the error in the Julian calendar, which went into use 45 B. C. According to the Julian calendar, every fourth year was made a leap year, with the result that the TELEGRAMS, TELEPHONING, EXPRESS 245 Julian year was a trifle longer than the true year, as measured by the time it takes the earth to make a complete circuit of its- orbit. The new style, or Gregorian, calendar allows for this error by making every secular year (a secular year is one divisible by 100, as 300, 1400, 1900, etc.) a common year unless it is divisable by 400, in which case it is a leap year. Hence, the years 400, 800, 1200, 1600, and 2000 are leap years, while the other secular years preceding 2000 are com- mon years. In 1752 the seasons had been advanced 11 days, and to correct this, 11 days were dropped by changing Sep- tember 3 to September 14. The change was greatly opposed by the people, and for many years afterwards it was cus- tomary to use two dates; or when one date was used to annex the letters N. S. or O. S. to the date in order to signify whether the date was new style or old style. Thus, George Washing- ton was born on February 22, 1732 (N. S.), or February 11, 1732 (O. S.). To find what day of the week this was, pro- ceed as follows: 1752 1732 = 20 ; 20 * 4 = 5, the number of leap years between 1732 and 1752. Divide the sum of 20 and 5 by 7 and count the remainder backwards from 1752; thus (20+5)^-7 = 3+4 remainder, and counting backwards 4 columns from the right we stop at the column headed 1755. This operation indicates that if the table continued back- wards to 1732, the year 1732 would occur in the column headed 1755. Since 1732 was a leap year, we use the pre- ceding column, and 3+22+2=27; hence, February 22, 1732 (N. S.). was Friday. CABLES, TELEGRAMS, WIRELESS MESSAGES, TELEPHONING, EXPRESS Cable Messages. The name of the place given in the address and the name of the country are charged as one word, without regard to the number of letters they contain. Groups of figures are charged for at the rate of one word for each five or fraction thereof; 12345 could be sent as one word. 246 TELEGRAMS, TELEPHONING, EXPRESS In the body of a message the maximum length of a word is fixed at 15 letters; if more than 15 letters are used, the word is charged as two words. Signs of punctuation are not counted nor sent unless by special directions. The signature is charged for. Code words are usually capitalized. Telegraph Messages. Minimum rates are charged for from one to ten words, and for more than ten an additional rate per word. If figures are used in the body of a telegram each numeral, decimal point, or bar of division is charged for as one word. Words written out to represent the figures are less likely to cause errors, and they cost no more. In ordinal numbers, the affixes st, d, nd, and th are charged for as one word. Omit hyphens; if used, words so connected are charged for as two words. Avoid abbreviations. When there are several signatures, only the last one goes without extra charge. Extra names and titles in addresses are charged for. Night messages which are filed in the evening but not to be delivered before the following morning are taken at rates less than the regular day messages. It is customary to confirm important telegrams by mail, as also important telephone instructions or orders. As an error in the transmission of a telegram regarding an important money transaction might mean considerable loss, it is better to have such messages repeated. By a recent plan, leading telegraph companies accept a 50-word "tele- graph letter" forwarded at night at the usual daily rate for 10 words. Wireless Telegraph Messages. After sailing from New York or before arrival there, New York transatlantic steam- ships may be expected to be in communication with the dif- ferent wireless stations as follows: Sea Gate, 3 hours; Babylon, N. Y., 5 hours; Camperdown, N. S., 30 hours; and South Wellfleet, Mass., 60 hours. Address messages that may be sent from any telegraph office as, "John Doe, S. S. Carmania, via " (adding the point from which the telegram is to be transmitted). TELEGRAMS, TELEPHONING, EXPRESS 247 Wireless messages to coastwise steamers are transmitted by way of the numerous stations along the coast. Messages to steamers approaching or leaving ports of Great Britain are accepted only at "sender's risk." In case the wireless operators fail to reach a steamer and the sender does not order the message forwarded to further sending stations, the "wireless" tolls may be refunded, but telegraph charges will not be refunded. Points on Telephoning. Local calls on public telephones may continue up to 5 minutes on a single charge; long dis- tance calls, up to 3 minutes; extra charges are made for each additional minute on long distance. Appointment calls may be made by notifying the long- distance operator (or the "appointment operator" for local calls) of the time at which the connection is to be made. She will obtain the person wanted, and give the name and time set for the appointment, or will advise patrons of her inability to do so. No charge is made for arranging these calls, unless a messenger is required to summon the person required to the telephone. Expressage. Articles up to $50 in value are generally accepted at regular rates, and excess rates charged for any higher valuation. It may be a saving of time to know in a general way the sections of the country covered by each of the principal companies. The Eastern States are covered by Adams and the Amer- ican Express. The American has one of its principal offices in Boston, but does an extensive business in the Central States, with offices at St. Louis and Cincinnati. The United States Express goes more particularly to the Northwestern portion of the country. Wells-Fargo and the Pacific cover the Far West, the Pacific having its principal offices in San Francisco, New Orleans, and Galveston. The Southern Express is confined to the South, with principal offices in New Orleans and Baltimore. An extensive foreign business is done by the Wells-Fargo. The rates depend, of course, on the distance that the ship- ment is to go. 248 OCEAN STEAMSHIPS STEAMSHIPS OF THE PRINCIPAL OCEAN LINES By watching the ship news in the daily papers, it is pos- sible to send foreign mail to go by the fastest steamer. The mail should be marked "Per S. S. (name of steamer)." The names of the steamships of the principal ocean lines sailing from New York are given following. The day given in each case is the day on which a vessel of that line usually sails. CUNARD LINE HAMBURG-AMERICAN (Saturdays) (Saturdays) Lusitania Deutschland Mauretania Kaiserin Auguste Victoria Lucania Graf Waldersee Campania Amerika Carmania Blucher Caronia Pretoria WHITE STAR (Wednesdays and Thursdays} Teutonic Oceanic Celtic Baltic Cedric Adriatic AMERICAN LINE (Saturdays') St. Paul St. Louis Philadelphia New York FRENCH LINE (Thursdays) La Province La Touraine La Gascogne La Lorraine La Savoie La Bretagne NORTH GERMAN LLOYD (Tuesdays) Kaiser Wilhelm der Grosse Kaiser Wilhelm II Kronprinzessin Cecilie Kronprinz Wilhelm Double the regular postage rates for foreign mail are charged on all letters deposited in "Supplementary Mails," which are taken after the close of the regular mails on sail- ing day. POSTAL INFORMATION 249 By adding the words "Passenger on incoming steamer" to the envelope of a letter sent in care of any of the principal steamship companies previous to the day of a steamship's arrival, such letter will be taken aboard the vessel from the pilot boat and delivered hours before the arrival of ,the ship at the dock. DOMESTIC MAIL CLASSES OF MAIL MATTER AND RATES OF POSTAGE Domestic -mail rates cover all matter deposited for local delivery, or for transmission from one place to another within the United States, or to or from or between the possessions of the United States; mail sent from the United States to Canada, Mexico, Cuba, the Republic of Panama, the United States postal agency at Shanghai, China; and mail addressed to officers or crew of United States vessels of war. Porto Rico and Hawaii are included in the term "United States." The Philippine Archipelago, Guam, Tutuila (inclu- ding all adjacent islands of the Samoan group that are posses- sions of the United States) , and the Canal Zone are included in the term "possessions of the United States." The term "Canal Zone" includes all the territory purchased from Panama, embracing the "Canal Zone" proper and the islands in the Bay of Panama named Perico, Naos, Culebra, and Flamenco. Domestic mail is divided into first-class, second-class, third- class, and fourth-class matter. FIRST-CLASS MATTER First-class matter includes all matter wholly or partly written whether letters or other -documents, United States postal cards, post cards manufactured by private persons, all matter sealed or otherwise closed against inspection, and all matter, though printed, that has the nature of personal correspondence, except that certain writing or printing may be placed upon matter of the second, third, and fourth 250 POSTAL IX FORMATION classes without increasing the rate. The rate is 2 cents for each ounce or fraction (except postals, which sell for 1 cent each, and post cards, which may be mailed in domestic ter- ritory for 1 cent), and the limit of weight is 4 pounds. Typewriting, carbon, and letterpress copies are subject to the first-class rate. A printed communication having the character of personal correspondence is classified as a letter. SECOND-CLASS MATTER Second-class matter includes all newspapers and peri- odicals that bear the authorized statement: "Entered at the post office as second-clafss matter." The rate, when sent unsealed, is 1 cent for each 4 ounces or fraction; full payment is required. There is no limit of weight. This is the rate that applies when the matter is mailed by the gen- eral public. Publisher's Hate. The postal regulations regarding second-class matter, when mailed by publishers, being lengthy, are not treated here. In brief, it may be stated that publishers who have had their publications recognized and admitted as second-class matter are entitled to a rate of 1 cent a pound under the conditions that the publication is a bona fide one with a list of bona-fide subscribers that pay a reasonable price for the publication. The second-class rate is not allowed on a house publication nor on one given away free or as a premium; and a publisher cannot mail at the rate of 1 cent a pound more than a certain proportion of sample copies, nor continue sending the publication longer than the time prescribed by the Department without being subject to a denial of the second-class privilege. On the wrapper, in addition to the regular address, may be the name and address of the sender and the words "sample copy" or "marked copy," or both. On the matter itself, the sender may place all that is per- mitted on the wrapper; correct typographical errors in the text; designate by marks (not by words) a word or passage in the text to which it is desired to call attention. Any other writing will subject the package to the first-class rate. To be entitled to the special second-class rate, copies of POSTAL INFORMATION 251 newspapers or periodical publications must be complete. Partial or incomplete copies are third-class matter. THIRD-CLASS MATTER Third-class matter includes books, newspapers, and peri- odicals not admitted to the second class, circulars, mis- cellaneous printed matter on paper not having the nature of personal correspondence; proof sheets, corrected proof sheets, and accompanying manuscript copy, also matter in point print or raised characters used by the blind. The rate, when sent unsealed, is 1 cent for each 2 ounces or frac- tion; full payment is required. The limit of weight is 4 pounds, unless it is a single book. Printed Matter. Printed matter is the reproduction on paper by any process except handwriting and typewriting of words, letters, characters, or figures, not having the char- acter of personal correspondence. Matter produced by the photographic process (including blueprints) is treated as printed matter. Circulars. A circular is defined by law to be a printed letter which, according to internal evidence, is being sent in identical terms to several persons. A circular may bear a written, a typewritten, or a hand-stamped date; name and address of the person addressed and of the sender. On third-class matter itself the sender may place all that is permitted on the wrapper, and may make marks other than by written or printed words to call attention to any word or passage in the text, and may correct any typographical errors. There may also be written or printed upon the blank leaves of any book, or upon any photograph, or other matter of the third class, a simple manuscript dedication or inscrip- tion not in the nature of personal correspondence. Such words as "My dear friend," "Yours truly," "Sincerely yours," etc., written upon third-class matter, are permissible inscrip- tions. A serial number written or impressed upon third- class matter does not affect its classification. Written designation of contents, such as "book," "printed matter" "photo," is permissible upon the wrapper of mail matter of the third class. 252 POSTAL INFORMATION Public library books, otherwise mailable at the third-class rate, may bear any printed or written mark which may reasonably be construed as a necessary inscription for the purpose of a permanent library record. Additional imprinting, by hand stamp, upon third-class matter will not affect its classification as such except when the added matter is in itself personal or converts the original matter into a personal communication; but when such appears to be the fact, the presentation at one time at the post-office window, or other depository designated by the postmaster, of not less than 20 perfectly identical copies, unsealed, will be sufficient evidence of impersonal character to entitle such matter to the third-class rate. The words "please send out/' or "post up," or other similar directions or requests, not a part of the address, nor necessary to effect delivery, may not be written upon the wrapper of third-class matter or upon the matter itself with- out subjecting it to postage at the letter rate. Corrections in proof sheets include the alteration of the text and insertion of new matter, as well as the correction of typographical and other errors. Includes also marginal instructions to the printer necessary to the correction of the matter or its proper appearance in print. Part of an article may be entirely rewritten if that be necessary for correction. Corrections must be upon the margin of or attached to the proof sheets. Manuscript of one article cannot be enclosed with proof or corrected proof sheets of another except at the first-class rate. Enclosures. A single card bearing the written name and address of the sender, or an envelope bearing a written or a printed name and address of the sender may be enclosed with a circular, catalog, or other third-class matter without affecting the classification thereof. Where a name (except that of the addressee or sender) , date (other than that of the circular), figure, or anything else is written, typewritten, or hand stamped in the body of the circular for any other reason than to correct a genuine typographical error, the circular will be subject to postage at the first-class (letter) rate, whether sent sealed or unsealed. POSTAL INFORMATION 253 However, if such name, date, or other matter is hand stamped and is not of a personal nature, the character of the circular is not changed thereby. Reproductions or imitations of handwriting and type- writing obtained by means of the printing press, neostyle, hectograph, electric pen, or similar process will be treated as third-class matter, provided that they are mailed at the post-office window or other place designated by the post- master in a minimum number of 20 perfectly identical copies separately addressed. If mailed in a smaller quan- tity, they will be subject to first-class rate. FOURTH-CLASS MATTER Fourth-class matter includes all merchandise and all other matter not comprehended in the first, second, and third classes. The rate, when sent unsealed, is 1 cent for each ounce or fraction, except seeds, bulbs, scions, and plants intended for propagation (see following paragraph). Full prepayment is required, and the limit of weight is 4 pounds. Special Rate for Seeds, Bulbs, Roots, Etc. By special legislation, seeds, bulbs, roots, scions, and plants intended for propagation purposes are mailable at the rate of 1 cent for each 2 ounces or fraction, but are otherwise entitled to the privileges of fourth-class matter. Under this head are included samples of wheat and other grains in their natural condition. Samples of flour, rolled oats, pearled barley, dried peas and beans in which the germ is destroyed, cut flowers, dried plants, and botanical specimens not susceptible of propa- gation, and nuts and seeds (such as the coffee bean) used exclusively as food, are subject to the regular fourth -class rate of 1 cent an ounce or fraction. On the wrapper, envelope, tag, or label, in addition to the name and address of the addressee, there may be written or printed the name, occupation, and residence, or business address of the sender preceded by the word "from," as well as any marks, numbers, names, or letters for the purpose of description, and any printed matter that is not in the nature of personal correspondence. On the address side or face of. 254 POSTAL INFORMATION the package there must be left a space sufficient for a legible address, postmark, and the necessary postage stamps. On the matter itself, or upon the tag or label attached thereto, may be written or printed any matter authorized to be placed on the wrapper. Written designation of contents, such as "samples," "candy," "cigars," are permissible upon the wrapper of mail matter of the fourth, class. Enclosures. With a package of fourth-class matter, pre- paid at the proper rate for that class, the sender may enclose any mailable matter of the third class. A single card bear- ing the written name of the sender and such inscriptions as "Merry Christmas," "Happy New Year," "With best wishes," etc., may also be enclosed with fourth-class matter without affecting its classification. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ARTICLES IN DOMESTIC MAIL MATTER A complete alphabetical list of mailable matter could not be furnished within the limits of this Handbook. This list con- tains only the articles most frequently dispatched in the mails. Article Class Advertising cards combined with post cards Advertising signs printed on other material than paper Albums, autograph, without writing Albums, autograph, with writing Albums, photograph Almanacs Animals, stuffed Architectural designs, printed Architectural designs, containing writing Artificial flowers .. Assessment notices, wholly in print Assessment notices, partly in writing Baggage checks, metal Bees, Queen Bills, wholly or partly in writing Blank account books 3d 4th 4th 1st 4th 3d 4th 3d 1st 4th 3d 1st 4th 4th 1st 4th POSTAL INFORMATION Article Blank books, with written entries Blank cards Blind, Matter in point print or raised characters for use of the, unsealed Blueprints Books, printed Botanical specimens, not susceptible of being used in propagation Bulbs (for special rate of postage see Fourth-Class Matter) Calendars, printed on paper Calendars, printed on material other than paper. . . . Candies Carbon copies of typewritten matter Card games Cards, blank Cards, Christmas, Easter, etc., printed on paper. . . . Cards, Christmas, Easter, etc., printed on material other than paper Cards, Visiting, bearing written name Catalogs Certificates, blank Certificates, filled out in writing Check books, blank Checks, blank Checks, in writing, canceled or uncanceled Chestnuts (for special rate see Fourth-Class Matter) . Chromos, printed on paper Cigars Circulars, printed Clippings (see newspaper clippings) Cloth, samples of Coin Coin holders, card, blank Crayon pictures or drawings, framed or unframed . . Cuts, wood and metal ^ Cuttings of plants or trees (for special rate see Fourth-Class Matter) Daguerreotypes , Designs, wholly in print on paper , Diplomas, blank , Diplomas, filled out in writing Drawings (pen or pencil), without writing, framed or unframed Drawings or plans containing written words, letters, or figures indicating size, price, dimensions, etc. . . 256 POSTAL INFORMATION Article Electrotype plates Engravings, when framed Engravings and wood cuts, Impressions from, printed on paper Engravings and wood cuts on wood or metal base . . Envelopes, printed or un printed, mailed in bulk. . . . Flour, samples of Flowers, cut or artificial Fruit, dried Geological specimens Grain, samples of (for special rate see Fourth-Class Matter) Herbs, dried Honey, in comb Insects, dried Invitations, printed or engraved, containing no other writing than date and name and address of person addressed and sender Labels, written Letterpress copies of hand -written or typewritten matter Liquids Liquors, ardent, vinous, spirituous, or malt, unmail- able Lithographs Magazines or newspapers, mailed by the public (see Second-Class Matter), 1 cent for each 4 ounces or fraction Manuscript or typewritten copy, without proof sheets Manuscript copy, accompanied by proof sheets .... Maps, printed on cloth Maps, printed on paper, with the necessary mount- ings Medals or coins Merchandise, Samples of Metals Minerals Music books Newspaper clippings, with name and date of paper stamped or written in ' Newspapers or magazines, mailed by the public (see Second-Class Matter), 1 cent for each 4 ounces or fraction Nuts, in natural state (for special rate see Fourth- Class Matter) POSTAL INFORMATION 257 Article Class Paintings framed or unframed . . 4th 4th 4th 4th 3d 3d 4th 3d 3d 4th 3d 1st 3d 4th 3d 3d 1st 1st 4th 4th 4th 3d 1st 4th 4th 4th 1st 3d 4th 4th Paper blank Patterns printed or unprinted Photographic negatives (glass or films) Photographs mounted or unmounted Plans and architectural designs printed ... Plants for propagating purposes (for special rate see Fourth-Class Matter) Postage stamps, canceled or uncanceled Post cards, printed . . . Posters, printed on paper Price lists, printed, containing written figures chan- ging individual items Printed matter on other material than paper Printing Samples of Proof sheets, printed, corrected, with or without Receipts printed with written signatures Receipts partly printed with writing . Roots (for special rate see Fourth-Class Matter) .... Rulers wooden or metal . Seeds (for special rate see Fourth-Class Matter) Soap Tags blank . . Tintypes Typewritten matter, original letterpress and mani- Valentines printed on paper . . Valentines, printed on other material than paper. . . REGISTERED MAIL Registered mails reach every post office in the world. The system provides for special care and correct delivery. All valuable letters and parcels, as well as those without intrinsic value, the correct delivery of which is of impor- tance, and those for which the sender desires the addressee's receipt, should be registered. 258 POSTAL INFORMATION In case of its loss, the sender or owner of a registered article prepaid at the letter rate of postage, mailed at, and addressed to, a United States post office is indemnified for its value up to $25. Parcels prepaid at the letter rate should be sealed. In case of loss of a registered article mailed in or addressed to a foreign country embraced in the Universal Postal Union, except in case of force majeure (beyond control), the sender, or at his request the addressee, is entitled to indemnity for its value up to 50 francs, approximately $10. The registry fee is 10 cents for each separate letter or parcel, in addition to the postage, both to be fully prepaid with postage stamps attached to the letter or parcel. Two or more letters or parcels cannot be registered as a single piece unless enclosed in one envelope or wrapper. Any piece of mailable matter may be registered at any post office or station thereof, and by any rural carrier. In residential districts of cities, letters and packages of first- class matter that are not cumbersome on account of size, shape, or weight can be registered by letter carriers at the house door as safely as if brought to the post office. In order to have a letter or parcel registered, it must bear in serviceable stamps the necessary postage and registry fee (or money sufficient therefor must be handed to the carrier, if registration be by carrier), must be legibly and correctly addressed, bear upon the envelope or wrapper the name and address of the sender, and the envelope or wrapper must be of such strength as to safely carry the contents in the mails without breaking under ordinary conditions. It should be handed to the postmaster, clerk, or carrier, who will give a registration receipt to the sender. Letters or parcels intended to be sent in the registered mails should not be placed in the street letter boxes or in the ordinary mail drops at the post office. Registered mail is delivered only to the addressee or upon his written order, or to the person in whose care it is ad- dressed. The sender may, however, restrict delivery to the addressee in person by indorsing upon the envelope or wrap- per the words "Deliver to addressee only." The words "Per- POSTAL INFORMATION 259 sonal" or "Private" do not so restrict delivery. Persons applying for registered mail, if unknown, are required to establish their identity. Registered mail will be forwarded upon the written or telegraphic order of the addressee first-class matter imme- diately and without extra charge; other matter upon pre- payment of the postage chargeable by law for forwarding. No additional registry fee is chargeable for forwarding or returning registered matter that has not once been properly delivered. Undelivered registered mail is returned to the sender's address after 30 days, or such other period, not less than 3 nor more than 90 days, as may be specified in a return request on the envelope or wrapper. First-class matter is returned without extra charge for registry fee or postage, other matter upon prepayment of the return postage. Advantages of Registering Mail Matter. A receipt is given to the sender for every piece registered. A second receipt from the addressee or his authorized agent, acknowledging delivery, is returned to the sender without extra charge. This receipt is, under the law, prima facie evidence of delivery. If the article is addressed to a foreign country no receipt showing delivery is returned to the sender unless the words "Return Receipt Demanded" are written, stamped, or printed across the face of the letter or parcel. Registered matter is handled under special conditions and by bonded employes, and is the object of extraordinary care from the moment it is registered. A chain of records and receipts from the point of mailing to the point of delivery admits of the tracing of registered mail. City letter carriers deliver registered matter at the houses or places of business of addressees, and rural carriers do like- wise, unless the houses or places of business are more than one-half mile from a rural route. When the houses or places of business are more than one-half mile from a rural route, the rural carrier leaves a registry notice for the addressee in the rural mail box if delivery cannot be effected at the box or on the route. The addressee, or his duly authorized 260 POSTAL INFORMATION agent, may then receive the mail at the box on the carrier's next trip, or call at the post office for the same after its return by the carrier. In case of loss of registered mail for which indemnity is paid, application for indemnity should be made to the post- master, either at the office where the piece was mailed or at the office of its address. SPECIAL DELIVERY A special -deli very stamp, or 10 cents worth of ordinary stamps in addition to the lawful postage, secures the imme- diate delivery of any piece of mail matter at any United States post office within the letter-carrier limits of city delivery offices and within a mile limit of any other post office. When ordinary stamps are used to obtain immediate delivery of mail the words "Special Delivery" must be writ- ten or printed on the envelope or covering. Hours of delivery: From 7 A. M. to 11 p. M. at all city delivery offices, and from 7 A. M. to 7 P. M. at all other offices, or until after the arrival of the last mail at night, provided that be not later than 9 P. M. Special-delivery mail must be delivered on Sundays as well as on other days, if post office is open on Sundays. If special-delivery matter fails of delivery because there is no person at the place of address to receive it, the matter is returned to the post office and delivered in the ordinary mail. Special-delivery matter may be forwarded, but is not entitled to special delivery at the second office of address unless forwarded on a general forwarding request before attempt at delivery has been made at the post office of original address. A special -deli very stamp does not give a piece of mail matter any other security th'an that given to ordinary mail matter. Rural letter carriers are required to deliver special-delivery mail at the residences of patrons of their routes if they live within one-half mile of the routes. Special-delivery matter POSTAL INFORMATION 261 addressed to patrons of rural delivery who reside more than one-half mile from the routes will be placed in the box of the addressee in the same manner as ordinary mail. UNITED STATES POSTAL CARDS United States Government postal cards are entitled to all the privileges of letters except that of return to the sender when undeliverable. They may bear written, printed, or other additions as follows : The face of the card may be divided by a vertical line placed approximately one-third of the distance from the left end of the card ; the space to the left of the line to be used for a message, etc., but the space to the right for the address only. Addresses may be either written, printed, or affixed there- to, at the option of the sender. Very thin sheets of paper may be attached to the card on condition that they completely adhere thereto. Such sheets may bear both writing and printing. Advertisements, illustrations, or writing may appear on the back of the card and on the left third of the face. The addition to a postal card of matter other than as above authorized will subject the card, when sent in the mails, to postage according to the character of the message at the letter rate if wholly or partly in writing or the third-class rate if entirely in print. In either case the postage value of the stamp impressed upon the card will not be impaired. Postal cards bearing particles of glass, metal, mica, sand, tinsel, or other similar substances, are unmailable, except when enclosed in envelopes with proper postage attached, or wlien treated in such manner as will prevent the objec- tionable substances from being rubbed off or injuring persons handling the mails. Postmasters are authorized to redeem, in postage stamps or other stamped paper only, and from the original purchasers, unused, uncanceled, and unserviceable postal cards at 75 per cent, of their face value. Parts or pieces of postal cards are not redeemable. 262 POSTAL INFORMATION Each unused half of a "reply" postal card will be regarded as one single card. Used postal cards that conform to the conditions pre- scribed for post cards, when remailed, are subject to a new prepayment of 1 cent postage. POST CARDS (PRIVATE MAILING CARDS) Any cards issued by private persons bearing on the address side the words "United States," or "United States of Amer- ica," in similitude of the regular United States postal cards, are unmailable at any rate of postage. Post cards manufactured by private parties bearing either written or printed messages are transmissible in the domestic mails prepaid 1 cent and in the mails of the Postal Union prepaid 2 cents each, by stamps affixed, when they conform to the following conditions: 1. A "post card" must be an unfolded piece of cardboard not exceeding 9 by 14 centimeters (approximately 3i^ in. by 5 A in.) nor less than 7 X 10 centimeters (approximately 2| in. X 4 in.). 2. It must in form and in the quality and weight of paper be substantially like the government postal card. 3. It may be of any color not interfering with a legible address and postmark. 4. It may or may not, at the option of the sender, bear near the top of the face the words, "Post Card." 5. The face of the card may be divided by a vertical line; the left half to be used for a message, etc., but that to the right for the address only. 6. Very thin sheets of paper may be attached to the card, and then only on condition that they completely adhere thereto. Such sheets may bear both writing and printing. 7. Advertisements and illustrations may appear on the back of the card and on the left half of the face. Cards, without cover, conforming to the foregoing con- ditions are transmissible in the domestic mails (including the possessions of the United States) and to Cuba, Canada, Mexico, the Republic of Panama, and the United States POSTAL INFORMATION 263 postal agency at Shanghai, China, at the postage rate of 1 cent each. When post cards are prepared by printers and stationers for sale, it is desirable that they bear in the upper right-hand corner of the face an oblong diagram containing the words "Place postage stamp here," and at the bottom of the space to the right of the vertical dividing line, the words "This space for the address." Cards that do not conform to the conditions prescribed by these regulations are, when sent in the mails, chargeable with postage at the letter rate, if wholly or partly in writing, or at the third-class rate, if entirely in print. A post card that has been delivered to the addressee and by him sent to some other person may be remailed to the same addressee upon a new prepayment of 1 cent postage. Cards bearing particles of glass, metal, mica, sand, tinsel, or other similar substances, are unmailable except when enclosed in envelopes, or when treated in such manner as will prevent the objectionable substances from being rubbed off or injuring persons handling the mails. Cards mailed under cover of sealed envelopes (transparent or otherwise) are chargeable with postage at the first-class rate; if enclosed in unsealed envelopes, they are subject to postage according to the character of the message at the first-class rate if wholly or partly in writing, or the third- class rate if entirely in print; and the postage stamps should be affixed to the envelopes covering the same. Postage stamps affixed to matter enclosed in envelopes cannot be recognized in payment of postage thereon. Folded advertising cards and other matter entirely in print, arranged with a detachable part intended to be used as a post card in making a reply, are mailable as third-class matter. Pieces of leather, wood, bark, or other material except paper, purporting to be post cards and bearing no written additions unauthorized by the United States Postal Laws and Regulations, when sent in the mails unsealed, are charge- able with postage at the fourth-class rate. Such matter bearing written additions unauthorized by the section cited, when mailed, is subject to postage at the first-class rate. 264 POSTAL INFORMATION PREPAYMENT OF POSTAGE Postage on all domestic mail matter must be prepaid in full at the time of mailing by stamps affixed, except as follows: Letters of United States soldiers, sailors, and marines when marked "Soldier's letter," "Sailor's letter," or "Marine's letter," as the case may be, and signed thereunder by an officer with his name and official designation. A letter bearing only a special-delivery stamp. This pro- vision applies to special-delivery letters only. First-class matter, prepaid one full rate, 2 cents. In each of these cases the matter will be forwarded to destination and the unpaid postage collected on delivery at single rates only. Matter of the third and fourth classes mailed in quantities of not less than 2,000 identical pieces, as provided in the Act of April 28, 1904. By this Act, a label of prescribed form can be printed on the wrapper and the postage paid to the postmaster in money, thus saving the labor of stamping. UNMAILABLE MATTER Unmailable domestic matter that is, matter that is not admissible to the United States mails for delivery in the United States or in any of its possessions includes: All matter illegibly, incorrectly, or insufficiently addressed. All transient second-class matter and all matter of the third or fourth class not wholly prepaid ; and letters and other first-class matter not prepaid one full rate 2 cents. All matter weighing over 4 pounds, except second-class matter, single books, and documents printed and circulated by authority of Congress. All matter harmful in its nature, as poisons, explosive or inflammable articles, matches, live or dead (but not stuffed) animals and reptiles, fruits or vegetables liable to decom- position, guano, or any article exhaling a bad odor, vinous, spirituous or malt liquors, and liquids liable to explosion, POSTAL INFORMATION 265 spontaneous combustion, or ignition by shock or jar, such as kerosene oil, naphtha, benzine, etc. All obscene, lewd, or lascivious matter, and every article or thing intended, designed, or adapted for any indecent or immoral purpose, or for the prevention of conception or pro- curing abortion. Postal, post, or other cards mailed without wrappers and all matter bearing upon the outside cover or wrapper any delineations, epithets, terms, or language of an indecent, lewd, lascivious, obscene, libelous, scurrilous, defamatory, or threatening character, or calculated by the terms or man- ner or style of display, and obviously intended to reflect injuriously upon the character or conduct of another. All matter concerning any lottery, so-called gift concert, or other enterprise of chance, or concerning schemes devised for the purpose of obtaining money or property under false pretenses. FORWARDING MAIL MATTER Only first-class matter can be forwarded from one post office to another without a new prepayment of postage. This includes letters and other first-class matter prepaid one full rate (2 cents) , parcels fully prepaid at the first-class rate, postal cards, post cards (private mailing cards), and official matter. A new prepayment of postage on matter of the second, third, and fourth classes must be made by the addressee, or some one for him, every time it is forwarded, as follows: Second-class matter, 1 cent for each 4 ounces or fraction thereof. Third- and fourth-class matter, the same rates as were chargeable thereon when originally mailed. It is not permissible for a person forwarding mail matter of the first class to place thereon, or on a label pasted thereto, any printing or writing not necessary to have the matter properly forwarded. Such additions subject the matter to a new prepayment of postage. Exceptions. Mail matter of the second, third, and fourth classes addressed to a discontinued post office may, when the 266 POSTAL INFORMATION office to which such mail is ordered sent by the Department is not convenient for the addressees, be transmitted to such office as they may designate, without additional charge. Patrons of any office who, on account of the establish- ment of or change in rural free-delivery service, receive their mail from the rural carrier of another office, may have their mail matter of the second, third, and fourth classes sent to the latter office for delivery by the rural carrier without a new prepayment of postage, provided they first file with the postmaster at the former office a written request to have their mail so sent. This is not to be construed as forwarding within the meaning of the law. Mail matter of all classes addressed to persons in the ser- vice of the United States (civil, military, or naval) whose change of address is caused by official orders will be trans- mitted until it reaches the addressee without a new prepay- ment of postage. For forwarding of registered matter see Registered Mail. RETURN OF MAIL MATTER The only kind of domestic mail matter that is returnable to the sender without additional postage for such service, when undeliverable, is letters and other first-class matter prepaid one full rate (2 cents); official matter mailed under penalty envelope or frank, and double postal cards, but not single postal cards nor post cards (private mailing cards). First-class matter indorsed "After days, return to , ," if not delivered, will be returned at the expiration of the time indicated on the envelope or wrapper. If no time be set for return, the matter will be returned at the end of 30 days. The sender has the right to lengthen or shorten the time set by subsequent direction to the post- master, but the matter must remain in the post office for delivery at least 3 days. Unclaimed letters bearing the card of hotel, school, college, or other public institution, which has evidently been printed upon the envelopes to serve as a mere advertisement, will not be returned to the place designated unless there is also a request therefor. POSTAL INFORMATION 267 Second-, third-, and fourth-class matter is returnable to the sender only upon new prepayment of postage for second- class matter at the rate of 1 cent for each 4 ounces or frac- tion, and for third- and fourth-class matter the rate with which it was chargeable when originally mailed. When undelivered mail matter of the third and the fourth class is of obvious value, the sender, if known, shall be given the opportunity of prepaying the return postage or accept- ing delivery to himself, or upon his order, at the office where it is held upon the payment of 1 cent postage for each card notice given him. If the requisite postage (in either postage stamps or money) be received within 2 weeks (or if the mat- ter be from Alaska, within 90 days, or if it be from other remote places, within 4 weeks), the matter will be returned. Otherwise it will be sent to the Dead Letter Office. The sender of second-, third-, and fourth-class matter not of obvious value can cause a notice of non-delivery to be sent to him by placing thereon the following request : "If not delivered within days, postmaster will please notify , who will provide return postage." Whenever the senders of undeliverable second-, third-, or fourth-class matter bearing the above request habitually fail to redeem the pledge to provide return postage, postmasters will inform them that thereafter no notice to remit the same will be sent. For return of registered matter see Registered Mail. POSTAGE DUE Matter of the first class prepaid one full rate 2 cents will be dispatched with the amount of deficient postage rated thereon, to be collected on delivery. The weight of matter at the mailing office determines the amount of postage chargeable thereon, and therefore the amount of due postage rated at the mailing office on short- paid matter will be collected on delivery at the office of address. A decided down weight is required to subject mat- ter to an additional rate of postage. Mail matter (including that of the first class charged with the deficient postage at the mailing office) inadvertently 268 POSTAL INFORMATION reaching its destination without full prepayment of postage will be rated with the postage due thereon by the receiving postmaster. The deficient postage will be collected of the addressee on delivery. On all matter which, through inadvertence, has been trans- mitted in the mails and reaches its destination without any evidence of prepayment of postage, double-rate due postage will be required. Unpaid "drop letters," soldiers', sailors', and marines' letters, properly indorsed, are excepted from this rule, the single rate only being required. Mail matter (except special-delivery letters) reaching its destination bearing stamps other than ordinary postage stamps and in lieu thereof, will be treated as wholly unpaid, and double-rate due postage will be required thereon. When ship letters (excepting United States sailors' and marines' letters) are not fully prepaid with United States ordinary postage stamps at double the regular rate, due postage for the deficiency will be required of the addressee on delivery. Due postage must be paid in money. WRAPPING OF MAIL MATTER All mail matter should be so wrapped as to safely bear transmission without breaking, or injuring mail bags or the contents of mail bags or the persons of those handling them. Many articles, such as calendars, drawings, spectacles, watches, books, etc., are damaged in the mails for the reason that they are not securely and sufficiently wrapped to withstand the weight and handling to which they are necessarily subjected. It should be borne in mind that such articles are thrown into bags with other mail matter, and when addressed to small towns where the mail trains do not stop, the bags containing them are thrown from fast moving trains upon the ground. Drawings, photographs, etc. should be backed by pieces of stout pasteboard; otherwise they are certain to be damaged. The pasteboard should be slightly larger than the drawing or photograph. In wrapping cuts, card plates, etc., place POSTAL INFORMATION 269 a piece of blotting paper or soft pasteboard over the faces before wrapping. Always use substantial paper and tie the packages with strong cord. Second-, third-, and fourth-class matter must be so wrapped or enveloped that the contents may be examined easily by postal officials. When not so wrapped, or when bearing or containing writing not authorized by law, the matter will be treated as of the first class. Harmful articles of the fourth class not absolutely excluded from the mails may be transmitted when packed in accord- ance with the following postal regulations: When not liquid or liquefiable, they must be placed in a bag, box, or remov- able envelope, or wrapping made of paper, cloth, or parch- ment. Such bag, box, envelope, or wrapping must again be placed in a box or tube made of metal or some hard wood, with sliding clasp or screw lid. In cases of articles liable to break, the inside box, bag, envelope, or wrapping must be surrounded by sawdust, cotton, or other elastic substance. Admissible liquids and oils (not exceeding 4 ounces liquid measure), pastes, salves, or articles easily liquefiable must conform to the following conditions: When in glass bottles such bottles must be very strong and must be enclosed in a metal, wooden, or papier-mache block or tube; and there must be provided between the bottle and the block or tube a cushion of cotton felt, or other absorbent. The block or tube must be of sufficient strength to resist rough handling and support the weight of the mails piled in bags. If of wood, it must be at least & of an inch thick in its thinnest part; if of papier mache, it must be at least -fa of an inch thick for bottles holding from 2 to 4 ounces, and at least i of an inch thick for bottles holding 2 ounces or less. The block or tube must be rendered water-tight by an application of paraffin or other suitable substance, so that if the bottle be broken in transit the liquid will not escape or the tube become softened and allow the broken glass to be scattered in the mails. When enclosed in a tin cylinder, metal case, or tube, such cylinder, case, or tube should have a lid or cover so secured as to make the case or tube water- 270 POSTAL INFORMATION tight, and should be securely fastened in a wooden or papier- mach block (open only at one end) and not less in thickness and strength than above described. Pastes, salves, etc., not easily liquefiable (not exceeding 4 ounces, liquid measure) when enclosed in water-tight tin boxes with screw-top lids, may be placed in a box of thick corrugated pasteboard, and then well wrapped with strong paper and tied with twine. Where sharp-pointed instruments are offered for mailing, the points must be capped or incased so that they may not by any means be liable to cut through their enclosure, and where they have blades such blades must be bound with wire so that they shall remain firmly attached to each other and within their handles or sockets. Needles must be enclosed in metal or wooden cases so that they cannot by any means prick through or pass out of their enclosures. Seeds or other articles not prohibited, which are liable from their form or nature to loss or damage unless specially protected, must be put up in sealed envelopes made of material sufficiently transparent to show the contents without opening. Ink powders, pepper, snuff, or other powders not explosive, or any pulverized dry substances not poisonous, may be sent in the mails .when enclosed in the manner prescribed herein for liquids, or when enclosed in metal, wooden, or papier-mache cases in such secure manner as to prevent the escape of any particles of dust from the package by ordinary handling of the mails without breaking; the method of packing to be subject to the approval of the General Superintendent of the Railway-Mail Service. Queen bees and their attendant bees, the "Australian lady bird," other live insects when addressed to the Secretary of Agriculture at Washington, D. C., and to directors of agricultural experiment colleges, and dried insects and dried reptiles, may be sent in the mails when so put up as to render it practically impossible that the package shall be broken in transit, or that the persons handling such packages be injured, or that the mail bags or their contents be soiled. POSTAL INFORMATION 271 No specific mode of packing is prescribed for samples of flour, but they should be put up in such manner as to cer- tainly avoid risk of the package breaking or cracking or the flour being scattered in the mails, and if this be not done the samples will be excluded. Proprietary articles of merchandise not in themselves unmailable, such as fancy soaps, tobacco, pills, tablets, or other preparations such as are used by the medical and pharmaceutical professions, put up in fixed quantities by the manufacturer, for sale by himself and others, which may be sealed in such manner as to properly protect the articles but to allow examination of such package in its simplest mercantile form, will be accepted for mailing: Provided, that poisonous articles, or articles containing poison, and not unmailable, shall be accepted for mailing only when the package bears the label or superscription of the manufacturer of or dealer in the article mailed. FOREIGN MAIL CLASSIFICATION Articles for or from foreign countries (except Canada, Cuba, Mexico, and the Republic of Panama) are classified as "letters," "post cards," "printed matter," "commercial or business papers," and "samples of merchandise." This is known as the "Postal Union" classification of mail matter. There is no provision in the Postal Union mails for merchandise other than samples. (See "Parcels Post" section.) A package of merchandise sealed and prepaid in full at the letter rate is, however, transmitted in the Postal Union mails to destination as a "letter." The right of its entry into the foreign country is determined by the adminis- tration of the country of destination. Prohibited articles, if mailed sealed against inspection, will not be delivered, although they reach their destination. Articles addressed for delivery at places in North China are transmissible in the mails for the United States postal agency at Shanghai, but articles for places other than the city of Shanghai are subject to foreign-mail postage rates. 272 POSTAL INFORMATION CANADA, CUBA, MEXICO, AND PANAMA Articles of every kind or nature that are admitted to the domestic mails of the United States will be admitted under the same conditions to the mails for Canada, Cuba, Mexico, and the Republic of Panama, except that commercial papers and bona-fide trade samples (including samples of liquids and fatty substances) are transmissible in the regular mails at the postage rate and subject to the conditions applicable to those articles in Postal Union mails. Packages of printed matter other than second-class matter and single volumes of printed books the weight of which exceeds 4 pounds 6 ounces, are excluded from mails for Canada, Mexico, Cuba, and the Republic of Panama. Sealed packages, other than letters in their usual and ordinary form, are unmailable to Canada, Cuba, Mexico, and the Republic of Panama. The postage rate applicable to second-class matter for Canada, is 1 cent for each 4 ounces or fraction of 4 ounces; and to plants, seeds, etc., 1 cent an ounce or fraction of an ounce. PROHIBITED ARTICLES The transmission of the following articles is absolutely pro- hibited in the mails for foreign countries under any circum- stances; viz., publications that violate the copyright laws of the country of destination; packets (except single volumes of printed books, for Mexico, Canada, Cuba, the Republic of Panama, Shanghai, and Salvador, and second-class matter for Canada, Cuba, Mexico, the Republic of Panama, and Shanghai) that exceed 4 pounds 6 ounces in weight; poisons; explosive' or inflammable substances; live or dead (not dried) animals; insects (except bees) and reptiles; fruits and vege- tables which quickly decompose, and substances which exhale a bad odor; lottery tickets or circulars; all obscene or immoral articles, and all articles that may destroy or damage the mails or injure persons handling them. POSTAL INFORMATION 273 RATES OF POSTAGE The rates of postage applicable to all foreign countries, other than those already mentioned, are as follows: Cents Letters, for the first ounce or fraction of an ounce 5 And for each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce . . 3 Single postal cards (including souvenir cards), each 2 Double postal cards (including souvenir cards), each. ... 4 Printed matter of all kinds, for each 2 ounces or fraction of 2 ounces 1 Commercial papers, for the first 10 ounces or less 5 And for each additional 2 ounces or fraction of 2 ounces 1 Samples of merchandise, for the first 4 ounces or less .... 2 And for each additional 2 ounces or fraction of 2 ounces 1 Registration fee in addition to postage 8 On October 1, 1908, the rate for letters to the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland was established at 2 cents an ounce. A "reply coupon" may be purchased (price 6 cents) at post offices, which, upon presentation at a post office in either of the countries named below, will entitle the person presenting it to receive without charge a postage stamp of that country equivalent in value to a 5-cent United States postage stamp. By this arrangement a person in the United States can furnish his correspondent in either of said countries a postage stamp with which to prepay postage on a reply to his letter. The countries in which the reply coupon is valid are: Germany, the German Protectorates, and German post offices in Asia, Africa, and Australasia; Austria and the Austrian post offices in the Levant, Belgium, Bosnia-Herze- govina, (Brazil, postponed), Bulgaria, Chili, Korea, Costa Rica, Crete, Cuba, Denmark and the Danish Antilles, Egypt, France, the French post offices in China and Morocco, and the French Colonies (except Guadeloupe), Madagascar, Mayot, Mohele, and Establishments in India; Great Britain, and the British Colonies except Orange River, Antigua, Barbados, Bermuda, Cypress, Falkland Islands, British Guiana, Jamaica, Southern Nigeria, Sarawak, Trinidad and Zanzibar; Greece, Haiti, Republic cf Honduras, Hungary, Italy and the Italian 274 POSTAL INFORMATION Colonies, Japan and Japanese post offices in China and Manchuria; Luxemburg, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway, The Netherlands, The Netherlands Guiana, and The Netherlands Indies; Roumania, Siam, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Tunis. LETTERS The postal conventions do not define the term "letter," but it is held that a package upon which postage at the letter rate has been prepaid in full was intended by the sender to be sent as a letter; and when it does not contain prohibited articles is required to be considered and treated as a "letter." Consequently packages addressed to foreign countries, except Canada, Cuba, Mexico, and the Republic of Panama, that are fully prepaid at the rate of postage applicable to letters for the countries to which the packages are addressed, are allowed to be forwarded by mail to their destinations, even though they contain articles of miscellaneous merchandise which are not sent as bona-fide samples. Articles, whether sealed or unsealed, which appear to con- tain dutiable matter, on their arrival at the exchange post- office of the country of destination, will be inspected by customs officers of that country, who will levy the proper customs duties upon any article found to be dutiable under the laws of that country and not prohibited transmission in the mails. UNITED STATES POSTAL CARDS The United States international 2-cent single and 4-cent (reply) postal cards should be used for correspondence with foreign countries, except Cuba, Canada, Mexico, the Republic of Panama, and Shanghai, to which the domestic single and double 1-cent cards are mailable; but when these cards can- not be obtained, it is allowable to use the United States domestic 1-cent single or 2-cent (reply) postal cards with 1-cent United States adhesive postage stamps attached. By special arrangement with the Canadian Post-Office Department, Canadian postal cards mailed in the United POSTAL INFORMATION 275 States bearing United States postage stamps (domestic rate) and United States postal cards mailed in Canada bearing Canadian postage stamps, are transmissible in the mails and deliverable without further charge. Post Cards. Private mailing cards are transmissible to foreign countries at the rate of 2 cents each, provided they conform to the conditions prescribed for similar cards in our domestic mails. If entirely in print and bearing no personal message they may be sent at the rate of 1 cent each. They are not required, however, to bear the words "Post Card" at the top of the address side. To Canada, Mexico, Cuba, Republic of Panama, and Shanghai, they may be sent at a rate of 1 cent each. Postal cards and post cards must be composed of card- board or stiff paper, and must not be larger than 5| in. X 3 in., nor smaller than 4 in. X 2| in. They may bear a message on the left-hand half of the address side, and a picture on very thin paper may be pasted on them. "Reply" post cards (private mailing cards) are un- authorized, and therefore unmailable as such. PRINTED MATTER This classification includes newspapers and periodical works, books stitched and bound, pamphlets, sheets of music, visiting cards, address cards, proofs of printing with or with- out the manuscript relating thereto, papers with raised points for the use of the blind, engravings, photographs, and albums containing photographs, pictures, drawings, plans, maps, catalogs, prospectuses, announcements and notices of various kinds, whether printed, engraved, lithographed, or autographed and in general all impressions or reproductions obtained upon paper, parchment, or cardboard, by means of printing, engraving, lithographing, and autographing, or any other mechanical process easy to recognize, except the copying press and the typewriter. Facsimile copies of manuscript or typewriting obtained by a mechanical process (polygraphy, chromography, etc.) are assimilated to "prints"; but in order to pass at the reduced 276 POSTAL INFORMATION postage they must be mailed at the post-office window, and in the minimum number of 20 perfectly identical copies. Rate of postage 1 cent for each 2 ounces or fraction. Limit of weight, 4 pounds 6 ounces. Limit of size, 18 inches in any direction, except that "rolls" may measure 30 inches in length by 4 inches in diameter. COMMERCIAL PAPERS This classification includes all instruments or documents written or drawn wholly or partly by hand, which have not the character of an actual and personal correspondence, such as papers of legal procedure, deeds of all kinds drawn up by public functionaries, way bills or bills of lading, invoices, the various documents of insurance companies, copies of or extracts from deeds under private signature, written or stamped or unstamped paper, scores or sheets of manu- script music, manuscript of books or of articles for publi- cation in periodicals, forwarded separately, original and cor- rected tasks of pupils, excluding all comment on the work, etc. Rates of postage, for the first 10 ounces or less, 5 cents; and for each additional 2 ounces or fraction of 2 ounces, 1 cent. Limit of weight, 4 pounds 6 ounces. Limit of size, same as for prints. SAMPLES OF MERCHANDISE Packages of miscellaneous merchandise in the regular mails for foreign countries (except Canada, Mexico, Cuba, the Republic of Panama, and the city of Shanghai, China) are restricted to bona-fide trade samples or specimens having no salable or commercial value in excess of that actually necessary for their use as samples or specimens. Goods sent for sale, in execution of an order, or as gifts, however small the quantity may be, are not admissible at the sample rate and conditions. Pairs of articles, such as gloves, shoes, etc., but not such as suspenders or drawers, are not transmissible by mail to POSTAL INFORMATION 277 foreign countries as "samples of merchandise," but one article of a pair may be transmitted. Samples of merchandise must conform to the following conditions: (1) They must be placed in bags, boxes, or removable envelopes in such a manner as to admit of easy inspection; (2) they must not have any salable value nor bear any ' manuscript other than the name or profession of the sender, the address of the addressee, a manufacturer's or trade mark, numbers, prices, and indications relating to the weight or size of the quantity to be disposed of, and words which are necessary to precisely indicate the origin and nature of the merchandise; (3) packages containing samples must not exceed 350 grams (12 ounces) in weight, or the following dimensions: 30 centimeters (12 inches) in length, 20 centi- meters (8 inches) in breadth, and 10 centimeters (4 inches) in depth; except that when in the form of a roll a package of samples may measure not to exceed 30 centimeters (12 inches) in length and 15 centimeters (6 inches) in diameter. Samples of liquids, fatty substances, and powders, whether coloring or not (except such as are dangerous, inflammable, explosive, or exhale a bad odor), and also live bees, speci- mens of natural history, and articles of glass are admitted to the mails, provided they conform to the following con- ditions; viz., (1) Liquids, oils, and fatty substances which easily liquefy must be placed in thick glass bottles her- metically sealed; the bottles must be placed in a wooden box, which can be opened without withdrawing tacks, nails, or screws, containing sufficient spongy matter to absorb the contents if the bottles should break; and this wooden box must be enclosed in a case of metal or wood with a screw top, or of strong and thick leather, in order that it may be easily opened for examination of the contents. If perforated wooden blocks are used, measuring at least 2i millimeters (^s inch) in the thinnest part, sufficiently filled with absorb- ent material and furnished with a lid, it is not necessary that the blocks should be enclosed in a second case. (2) Fatty substances which do not easily liquefy, such as ointments, resin, etc.. must be enclosed in a box or bag of linen, parch- 278 POSTAL INFORMATION ment, etc., and then placed in an outside box of wood, metal or strong, thick leather. (3) Dry coloring powders must be enclosed in sacks of leather, gummed canvas, or strong oiled paper; and dry powders, not coloring, in boxes of metal, wood, or pasteboard. The sacks or boxes must be enclosed in a cloth or parchment bag. Samples of articles composed of glass or other fragile substances must be packed so as to preclude the possibility of injury to postal employes or the correspondence, in case the articles should break. Packages containing articles of merchandise may be sent to Canada, Mexico, Republic of Panama, Shanghai, and Cuba, at the postage rate, and subject to the conditions applicable to fourth-class matter in the domestic mails. Rate of postage, for the first 4 ounces or less, 2 cents; and for each additional 2 ounces, or fraction of 2 ounces, 1 cent. Limit of weight, 12 ounces. Limit of size, 12 in. X8in.X4in. See Parcels Post Section. PERMISSIBLE ADDITIONS AND ENCLOSURES Packets of printed matter, commercial papers, and sam- ples must not contain any letter or manuscript note having the character of an actual and personal correspondence, and must be made up in such manner as to admit of being easily examined. The following manuscript additions may be made to "prints": The name, business, and residence of the sender; to visiting cards, the title and address of the sender and congratulations, thanks, etc., not to exceed five words; the date of dispatch; the necessary correction on proofs or printing, and the "copy" may be enclosed with the proof; correction of errors in printing other than proof; the erasure and underscoring of certain words; the insertion or correction of figures in price lists, advertisements, trade circulars, and prospectuses; the insertion of the name of the traveler, the date and place of his intended visit, in notices concerning the trips of commercial travelers; the dates of sailing on notices relating to the sailing of vessels; the name POSTAL INFORMATION 279 of the person invited, the date, object, and place, on cards of invitation and notices of meetings; a dedication on books, journals, photographs, Christmas and New Year's cards; fashion plates, maps, etc., may be painted; to cuttings from journals, the title, date, number, and address of the journal from which they were cut may be added; an invoice may be attached to the article to which it relates. Manuscript additions other than those above indicated, and those which would deprive the print of its general char- acter and give to it that of individual correspondence, are prohibited upon "prints." It is permitted to enclose in the same package samples of merchandise, prints, and commercial papers, but subject to the following conditions: (1) That each class of articles taken singly shall not exceed the limits which are applicable to it as regards weight and size. (2) That the total weight of the package must not exceed 2 kilograms (4 pounds 6 ounces). (3) That the minimum charge shall be 5 cents when the package contains commercial papers, and 2 cents when it consists of printed matter and samples. MISCELLANEOUS CONDITIONS Prepayment of Postage. Ordinary letters for any foreign country (except Canada, Mexico, or the City of Shanghai, China) will be forwarded whether any postage is prepaid on them or not. All other matters must be prepaid at least partly. Unmailable Matter. All articles prohibited from domestic mails are also excluded from circulation in the mails for or from foreign countries. Postage Due. The letter "T" stamped upon the wrapper of an article received in the mails from a foreign country indicates that it was considered in that country as not fully prepaid and that additional postage is to be collected on delivery. An "O" at the side of the postage stamp indi- cates that the stamps were of no value for prepayment of postage in the country in which the article was mailed. Wholly unpaid letters, and insufficiently paid articles of all 280 POSTAL INFORMATION kinds are liable to a charge of double the amount of the deficient postage which amount is indicated by the stamp "Due cents" or "U. S. charge to collect cents" im- pressed thereon at the United States exchange post office which received the article from abroad, and is required to be collected by the postmaster who delivers the article, and who should affix thereto postage-due stamps of the value of the amount collected. In the case 'of unpaid letters or short-paid matter of any kind the deficient postage will be collected by the post- master by whom the article is delivered. Forwarding. Mail matter of all kinds received from any foreign country, including Canada, Mexico, Cuba, and the Republic of Panama, is required to be forwarded at the re- quest of the addressee, from one post office to another, and in the case of articles other than parcels-post packages to any foreign country without additional charge for postage. REGISTERED MATTER Letters and other articles (except parcels-post packages for Great Britain and Barbados, and The Netherlands) addressed to foreign countries, if admissible to the Postal Union mails, may be registered under the same conditions as those addressed to domestic destinations. The registry fee in every case is 10 cents, in addition to lawful postage, and both must be fully prepaid. Delivery. Registered articles addressed to or received from foreign countries are delivered according to the rules of the country of address. Return Receipt. If a registry return receipt from the addressee is desired, a demand therefor as "Return receipt demanded," must be written or stamped by the sender upon the face of the envelope or wrapper. PARCELS POST Admissible Matter. Any article admissible to the domestic mails of the United States may be sent, in unsealed packages, POSTAL INFORMATION 281 by parcels post to the following-named countries (but to these countries only) : . Australia Hongkong* Austria Italy Bahamas Jamaica Barbados Japan* Belgium Leeward Islands Bermuda Mexico Bolivia New Zealand British Guiana Newfoundland Chili Nicaragua Colombia Norway Costa Rica Peru Denmark Sweden Ecuador Salvador France The Danish West Indies Germany The Netherlands Great Britain Trinidad, including Tobago Guatemala Uruguay Honduras (British) Venezuela Honduras (Republic of) Windward Islands As this list is being constantly increased by the addition of other countries, several being added in some years, inquiry should be made at the local post office in case of doubt as to a country not mentioned in the list. ^Parcels-post packages addressed for delivery in the cities of Shanghai, Canton, Amoy, Swatow, Foochow, Hankow, Haihow, Ningpo, Liu Kung Tau, and Cheefoo (China), are mailable at the postage rate and subject to the con- ditions applicable to parcels-post packages addressed for delivery at Hongkong. *Parcels-post packages addressed for delivery at any post office in Formosa or Korea; or in the cities of Peking, Tientsin, Cheefoo, Shanghai, Nanking, Hankow, Shasi, Soochow, Hangchow, Foochow, and Amoy (China) , are mailable at the postage rate and subject to the conditions applicable to par- cels-post packages addressed for delivery in Japan. Sealed Receptacles. The presence in an unsealed parcel, of sealed receptacles containing mailable articles which can- 282 POSTAL INFORMATION not be safely transmitted in unsealed receptacles, shall not render the parcel unmailable, provided the contents of the sealed receptacles are plainly visible, or are unmistakably indicated by the method of packing or by a precise state- ment on the covers. But such sealed receptacles shall not be admitted to the parcels post unless enclosed in an outside cover open to inspection. Size and Weight of Packages. A package must not meas- ure more than 3 feet 6 inches in length, and 6 feet in length and girth combined, except that packages sent to Mexico, Colombia, and Costa Rica may not measure over 2 feet in length. The weight of a single package is limited to 11 pounds, except that parcels for Germany, Hongkong, Japan, Norway, Belgium, Great Britain, Australia, Sweden, Denmark, and The Netherlands, must not weigh more than 4 pounds 6 ounces nor exceed $50 in value; and a parcel for Peru or Ecuador must not exceed $50 in value. Postage Rates. Postage must be prepaid in full by stamps affixed at the rate of 12 cents a pound or fraction of a pound. Registry fee, 8 cents in addition to postage. Letters or other communications in writing must not be enclosed with such packages. Registration. The sender of a parcel addressed to any of the countries named in the foregoing list, except Barbados, Great Britain, and The Netherlands, may have the same registered by paying a registry fee of 10 cents, and will receive the return receipt without special charge therefor, when envelope or wrapper is marked "Return receipt requested." Place of Mailing. Matter intended for parcels post must not be posted in a letter box, but must be taken to the post office and presented to the postmaster, or person in charge, for inspection. Directions on Packages. In addition to name and full address of the person to whom sent, the package must bear the words "Parcels Post" in upper left-hand corner, with the name and address of the sender. Prohibited Matter. Any matter that is declared unmail- able in the domestic mails is also denied transmission as parcels-post mail. POSTAL INFORMATION 283 Customs Declaration. A customs declaration, furnished by the postmaster, must be properly filled out and firmly attached to the cover of the package in such a manner that it does not seal or close the package, so that it can be easily opened. Letters Prohibited. A letter or communication of the nature of personal correspondence must not accompany, be written on, or enclosed with any parcel. If such be found, the letter will be placed in the mails if separable, and if the communication be inseparably attached, the whole parcel will be rejected. If, however, any such should inadvertently be forwarded, the country of destination will collect upon the letter or letters double the letter rate of postage pre- scribed by the Universal Postal Convention. Customs Duties. The United States Post-Office Depart- ment will not undertake to state what articles are liable to customs duties in foreign countries, and consequently does not exclude articles of merchandise from the mails for foreign countries because they may be liable to customs duties in the countries to which they are addressed. Customs duties cannot be prepaid by the senders of dutiable articles; they will be collected of addressees if the articles are delivered. Dutiable articles forwarded to the United States from foreign countries are delivered to addressees at post offices of destination upon compliance with certain conditions and the payment of the duties levied. MISCELLANEOUS POSTAL INFORMATION Addressing. When addressing mail matter, the name, post office, and state must be given; the street address.when there is one; or the post-office box, if the number is known. If the addressee resides on a rural free-delivery route, the num-, ber of the route should be given. If the matter is intended for delivery through the general delivery at the post office, the words "General Delivery" should be added. When a 284 POSTAL INFORMATION writer of a letter gives his own address, he should specify "General Delivery" if he lives where there is carrier serv- ice but expects to call at the post office for the reply. In cities having carrier service, the post office should be notified to hold mail at the general delivery or to forward when the writer's office, home, or other place of address is closed. To secure return, the sender's name and address should always be written or printed in the upper left-hand corner of all mail matter. Postage stamps should be placed in the upper right-hand corner of the address side, care being taken to see that they are securely fixed. Do not place the stamps all over a package in irregular order or have them upside down; if the package is small but heavy, purchase stamps of a large denomi- nation. Folding Checks and Money Orders. Always fold checks and money orders with the letters smaller than the en- velope, so that when the envelope is opened they will not be torn. Enclosing of Stamps. It is annoy- ing to receive a letter enclosing stamps that are stuck together or to the letter. Avoid this by wrapping the stamps in oiled paper. It is better not to use stamps as a means of payment except where the amount to be remitted is only a few cents, and then 1-cent or 2-cent stamps should be used. Sealing Envelopes and Affixing Stamps. The accompany- ing illustration shows how a number of envelopes may be placed so that they may be moistened at one time and the sealing done rapidly. Run a damp sponge over the flaps of the entire lot while holding the envelopes down with the left hand. They may then be sealed quickly, removing each envelope from the row after the flap has been pressed down firmly. POSTAL INFORMATION 285 A rapid method of stamping is to hold a pile of the sealed envelopes under the left hand; tear the sheets of stamps into strips; do the stamping with the right hand, moistening each stamp separately on a damp sponge and tearing it loose from the strip as soon as it is affixed to the envelope. Complaints. All complaints should be addressed to the local postmaster, accompanied, whenever possible, with the envelope or wrapper about which the complaint is made. When manifestly improper to direct complaints to the local postmaster, address the Postmaster-General, at Washington, District of Columbia. Concealed Matter. For knowingly concealing or enclo- sing any matter of a higher class in that of a lower class and depositing it in the mails, the offender will be liable to a fine of $10. Lists of Names. Postmasters are forbidden to furnish lists of names of persons receiving mail at their post offices. Mail in Care of Another. When a letter arrives at a post office addressed to one person in care of another, in the absence of further instructions, the postmaster will deliver it to the first of the two persons named who may call for it. Postage on drop letters (letters addressed for delivery at the office where mailed) is 1 cent for each ounce or fraction, but there is no drop-letter rate where the mail must be delivered by carrier. There is no drop rate on mail matter other than letters. A request on a drop letter for its return to the writer at some other post office, if unclaimed, cannot be respected unless it has been prepaid with one full rate (2 cents) of postage. Letters mailed at a post office for delivery to patrons thereof by star -route carrier, and those deposited in boxes along a star route or rural free-delivery route, are subject to postage at the rate of 2 cents an ounce or fraction thereof. Parent or guardian may control the delivery of mail addressed to minors, except when they do not depend on parent or guardian for support. Revenue and Cut Stamps. Postage-due stamps, internal- revenue stamps, or embossed stamps cut from stamped envelopes, or stamps cut from postal cards will not be 286 POSTAL INFORMATION accepted in payment for postage. Revenue stamps are neither good for postage nor redeemable by the Post-Office Department. Permissible Additions. The words "Personal," "To be called for," and other directions as to delivery and requests for forwarding or return on prepayment of new postage, are permissible as a part of the address on second-, third-, and fourth-class matter. Philippine and Canal-Zone Stamps. United States post- age stamps are good for postage in Guam, Hawaii, Porto Rico, and Tutuila, but not in the Philippine Islands nor in Panama Canal Zone. Postage stamps of the Philippine Islands or Canal Zone are not good for postage or redeemable in the United States. Redemption of Unused Envelopes, Etc. Unused stamped envelopes and newspaper wrappers, when presented in a substantially whole condition, will be redeemed by post- masters at their face value, either in postage stamps, stamped envelopes, or postal cards, but stamped envelopes with printed return card will be redeemed only from original pur- chasers. Postmasters will redeem unused, uncanceled, and unserviceable postal cards at 75 per cent, of their face value. Redemption will be made only to original purchasers and value given only in stamps, stamped envelopes, or other stamped paper. Government Printed Envelopes. When Government stamped envelopes are purchased in lots of five hundred, or its multiple, of a single size, quality, and denomination, the Department will, on request, print the purchaser's return card on them without extra charge. Return cards will not be printed on newspaper wrappers. Perforating Postage Stamps for Identification Purposes. Representations having been made by individuals, firms, and commercial organizations of serious loss through the pilfering of postage stamps by those having access to the supply on hand, purchasers of stamps were authorized by an order dated May 4, 1908, to perforate or puncture their stamps with letters, numerals, or other marks or devices, not exceeding & of an inch in diameter, and the whole space POSTAL INFORMATION 287 occupied by the identifying device not to exceed J of an inch square, for the purpose of identification and protection from theft, but not for advertising. Have Packages Weighed. When in doubt about the weight of a package, do not guess at it; if you have no scales, take the package to the post office. Mail Packages Promptly. Never hold packages after let- ters are mailed stating that the packages have gone forward. If, after the letter is received, there is delay in the arrival of the package, it necessitates useless correspondence. Verifying Addresses. If the amount of mail permits, it is always well to glance over envelopes before mailing them, to be certain that they are addressed correctly and stamped. Discontinuing Periodical Subscriptions. Persons who receive regularly publications for whch they have not sub- scribed should refuse to take them from the post office. If, after such refusal, the publication continues to be sent, a notice of that fact should be sent to the Third Assistant Postmaster-General. POSTAL DISTANCES AND TIME BETWEEN NEW YORK AND FOREIGN CITIES By Postal Route to Miles Days Adelaide, via San Francisco 12,845 34 Alexandria, via London 6,150 13 Amsterdam, via London 3,985 9 Antwerp, via London 4,000 9 Athens, via London 5,655 12 Bahia, Brazil 5,870 21 Bangkok, Siam, via San Francisco 12,990 43 Batavia, Java, via London 12,800 34 Berlin, via London 4,385 9 Bombay, via London 9,765 24 Bremen, via London 4,235 Buenos Ayres 8,045 29 Calcutta, via London 11,120 26 Cape Town, via London 11,245 27 Constantinople, via London 5,810 11 Florence, via London 4,800 10 288 MODERN OFFICE METHODS By Postal Route to Miles Glasgow 3,375 Greytown, via New Orleans 2,810 Halifax, N. S 645 Hamburg, via London 4,340 Hamburg, direct 4,820 Havana 1,413 Hong Kong, via San Francisco 10,590 Honolulu, via San Francisco 5,645 Liverpool 3,540 London, via Queenstown 3,740 London, via Southampton 3,760 Madrid, via London 4,925 Melbourne, via San Francisco 12,265 Mexico City (railroad) 3,750 Panama 2,355 Paris 4,020 Rio de Janeiro 6,204 Rome, via London 5,030 Rotterdam, via London 3,935 St. Petersburg, via London 5,730 Shanghai, via San Francisco 9,920 Stockholm, via London 4,975 Sydney, via San Francisco 11,570 Valparaiso, via Panama 5,910 Vienna, via London 4,740 Yokohama, via San Francisco 7,348 MODERN OFFICE METHODS The modern business office is characterized by time-saving, space-saving, worry-saving, and money-saving equipment and methods that are as superior to old methods as type- writing is to handwriting. The stenographer, as the employ- er's confidential clerk or right-hand man, has much to do with the system of the office work, and should understand modern office methods in order to fill his position properly. In offices that are not well organized or equipped, the sten- ographer has an opportunity to show his ability in organi- MODERN OFFICE METHODS 289 zing the work. It is in this way that the stenographer can demonstrate his right to promotion, to the position of office manager perhaps. The catalogs of the various manufac- turers of business-office equipment are educational and sug- gest plans that can be applied to a greater or less extent to any business. In his zeal, however, to thoroughly organize the work, the stenographer should guard against one real danger the installing of files, records, etc., and the requiring of clerical work for which there is no real need. This tend- ency has been facetiously called '"systematis." Provide for no record, no file, or no clerical work that does not afford a result that warrants the cost and time required. In pre- paring a form for recording information, have the blanks to be filled as few and simple as possible, and when possible, pro- vide for the use of a check-mark rather than of a word memo- randum. In this way useless equipment and fruitless labor will be eliminated. METHODS OF COPYING One of the important features of office work to which atten- tion should be given is that of making copies of important papers. The office files should contain a copy of every impor- tant letter, bill, receipt, etc. In some offices it is the practice to make out itemized shipping orders for all express pack- ages, mail packages, etc., and to file copies of these orders, so that the records will show just what was sent, when the shipment was made, etc. The old method of using tissue- paper copybooks, though still in use in offices where there is little correspondence, has been abandoned for the most part in large offices. By its use it is difficult to get uniformly satisfactory results, and in the case of extended correspond- ence the copies of letters might be in half a dozen different books while the letters to which the copies were replies might be in half a dozen different box letter files, making it a task to assemble all the correspondence. Carbon Copying. A great many offices make carbon copies of letters, the copy in each case being filed with the letter to which it is an answer. This method makes it possible to keep all the correspondence to and from one 290 MODERN OFFICE METHODS person in its order and in one place, provided the filing is done properly. The carbon method saves time, and it has the additional advantage that several copies may be made at one writing. It also has some disadvantages, the chief of which is that slight corrections made on finished letters are sometimes not made on carbon copies and therefore FIG. 1 the copy may not be an exact duplicate of the letter as ii appeared when mailed. Another objection is that the carbon paper will sometimes smut the letters. With first-class material and good typewriting, however, the method has no serious drawbacks and is deservedly popular in thousands of offices. MODERN OFFICE METHODS 291 The carbon paper most commonly used is that known as "semicarbon " ; that is, only one side has a coated surface. Where twenty or twenty-five copies are to be made at one time, paper with both sides coated and known as "full carbon" is used, and copies are made on a sheet on each side of it. In such cases, only ten sheets of carbon paper are needed to make twenty copies. When semicarbon paper is used, the coated side is always placed next to the sheet on which the copy is to be made. Fig. 1 shows the position of the carbon sheet with reference to the sheet on which the copy is to be made. It is easy to make a mistake and get the sheets in the machine in the wrong way, in which case the copy will be made on the back of the sheet on which the writing is done. There should be a fixed way of arranging the sheets. A good plan for an operator to follow is to lay the printed letterhead face down with the top toward him; on this place the carbon sheet, coated side up; then lay on the copy sheet, and without changing the position, insert all in the machine. When arranging carbon work for the machine, it is better to let the carbon sheets extend almost to the extreme lower edges of the paper, so that a line written near the bottom of the page may be copied. It is not necessary that the carbon sheet shall be nearer than or $ inch of the top of the letter, for the printing of the letterhead occu- pies the top edge. It is well to go over copies to see that no line is omitted because of the carbon being too short or placed too high. With fairly thin paper, from four to ten carbon copies may be made. If a batch of sheets will not go in the machine properly, a slip of paper may be folded and placed over the ends, when they will go in the machine easily and evenly. In carbon work, it is necessary to strike the keys a little harder than when writing on a single sheet. If eight or ten copies are to be made, the stroke must be quite sharp, particularly on broad capitals such as M and W. The type of the machine should be clean. It may be necessary to explain to those that have never seen carbon sheets used, that the coated surface makes an 292 MODERN OFFICE METHODS impression on the sheet next to it when the type strikes the ribbon copy. It will be obvious from this that all errors made on the ribbon copy will appear on the carbon copy. They may be corrected with a little trouble by rolling the paper backward or forward a few inches, inserting a card between the carbon sheet and the paper behind it, and erasing the error, after which the correction can be written. Where there are several carbon copies to be corrected, the erasing should begin with the carbon copy next to the roller and the card placed between this and the carbon sheet when the erasure is made on the next copy. A smut will be made if erasures are made without placing something between the carbon sheet and the letter sheet. FIG. 2 After carbon copies have been removed from the machine, corrections can be made in the right color by placing a small piece of carbon paper over the ribbon. Duplicating and Triplicating. The usefulness of carbon copying is not confined to correspondence. An extra copy, or several copies, may be made of all bills, statements, receipts, etc. In accounting work, the greatest source of error is in making transfers or copies. As by the carbon method, the copy is sure to be an exact duplicate of the original, not only is much copying labor saved but this danger of error is removed to a great extent. The carbon copies of bills and statements are frequently punched and inserted in loose-leaf binders. Sometimes this record is made to serve as a day book. By the use of a book type MODERN OFFICE METHODS 293 writer an entry may be made in a book while one or more copies on sheets are being made. (See Fig. 2.) The book typewriter is also an excellent billing machine. It is a great time saver in recording offices, railroad offices, etc. In many offices a study is made of how time can be saved FIG. 3 by arranging "duplicate" or "triplicate" blank forms. These forms are folded or perforated at certain lines, so that sheets of carbon may be placed conveniently within the folds and the different parts of the blank afterwards torn apart easily after being typewritten. (See Figs. 3, 4, and 5.) 294 MODERN OFFICE METHODS The style of billing shown in Fig. 5 is now followed by a number of large stores. The bill is kept up to date contin- ually, and at the end of a month, all that need be done is FIG. 4 to tear off the duplicate, file that in a loose-leaf binder, and mail the original to the customer. Much time and book- keeping work is saved, and bills can be mailed sooner. MODERN OFFICE METHODS 295 FIG. 5 296 MODERN OFFICE METHODS FIG. 6 MODERN OFFICE METHODS 297 Roller-Machine Copying. The roller copying machine shown in Fig. 6 is one of the latest and best means for copying typewriting. The signed typewritten letters are passed through rollers, just as clothes are run through a wringer, and copies are made on a long roll of tissue paper that is dampened automatically. Several copies may be made by running the letter through the machine for each copy. The tissue paper winds on a frame and the copies are cut apart by the machine knife when the tissue paper is dry; the copies are then filed with the other correspondence in the same manner as carbon copies. The advantage of this method over carbon copying is that a copy is made of the signature as well as of the letter; that a copy is taken after all changes have been made; that it is not necessary to correct several copies, as is often the case in carbon copying ; that it saves a little more time and avoids the smutting com- mon in carbon copying. As no carbon paper is required, the cost, after the machine is installed, is somewhat less. The advantage in regard to convenient filing is about the same in both methods. Good results will not be secured from the roller-copying machine if the typewriting is done with a faint ribbon. FILING . The older methods of filing letters in a haphazard way in an alphabetical box -like file or loose in an alphabetical drawer file are still used and do well enough perhaps where there are very few letters to be filed. In large offices, how- ever, the method has been superseded largely by vertical files, the Shannon style of flat file, or by the side-opening flat file. VERTICAL FILING Fig. 1 shows a section of a cabinet for vertical filing with one drawer pulled out. The drawers of these vertical -filing cabinets contain lettered or numbered guides. The corre- spondence, when placed together in order as to date, is placed on edge between the various guides. As the guides project above the edges of the folders it is easy to find any corre- 298 MODERN OFFICE METHODS spondence wanted. Usually each different batch of corre- spondence is kept in a folder, Fig. 2, that separates it from other batches and makes removing very convenient. (See Fig. 1.) The folders shown in Fig. 2 are those cut with a projecting tab that serves as an excellent supplement to the guides. The name or number is written on this tab FIG, 1 and is in plain view at a glance over the drawer. The folders keep the correspondence from doubling up and working toward the bottom of the file. If the correspondence is not removed frequently, each batch may be fastened together tightly with clips and placed behind the proper guide. The folder method is the better, however, as it separates each batch of correspondence from adjacent batches. The com- MODERN OFFICE METHODS 299 pressor supplied with most vertical cabinets will keep the correspondence of a partly filled file from falling. Arranging and Indexing. Vertical files are usually arranged and indexed in one of four ways: (1) geographic- ally or by localities; (2) by subjects; (3) by correspondents' names; or (4) by numbers, or the numerical method., Index- ing by date is chiefly temporary, being used only to supple- ment one of the other methods. The Geographical Method. The geographical or locality method is a good one when it is desired to have all the corre- spondence from a given territory in one section of the file. For example, a manufacturer may find it convenient to FIG. 2 assemble all Maryland dealers in products of his class behind a general guide bearing the word "Maryland." Behind this state guide may be city guides bearing the names Annapolis, Baltimore, Hagerstown, Havre de Grace, etc., while the folders behind these subguides will bear the names of the dealers. The city guides and folders need not, of course, be put in except as correspondence from new cities and new dealers are added. If the files are very extensive, a set of alphabetical guides can be placed behind each city guide and thus make reference to the folders more convenient. The label on the outside of the drawer should show the states or cities included in the drawer. 300 MODERN OFFICE METHODS The Subject Method. The subject method of filing is not, as a rule, well adapted to the filing of general correspond- ence, but is particularly well adapted to the needs of pur- chasing agents, buyers for department stores, stock keepers, etc. The general guides are marked, Hosiery, Garters, etc., as the case may be, and behind these guides are subguides FIG. 3 alphabetically arranged, bearing the names of the various dealers or manufacturers. Behind the subguides are folders containing correspondence, price lists, circulars, etc. If necessary, a separate folder may be used for each different class of material, or if each class is voluminous, a separate cabinet may be arranged for supplies, price lists, and cata- MODERN OFFICE METHODS 301 logs. The label on the outside of the cabinet drawer should show the nature of the matter filed within the drawer, Notions, Dry Goods, Supplies, etc. (See Fig. 3.) Where a single subject requires much space, an entire drawer or an entire cabinet of drawers may be given up to it, and plenty of subguides used for the various divisions of the general subject. Thus, a drawer might be devoted to machinery, with subguides for dynamos, boilers, dredges, etc. The FIG. 4 subject method is well adapted to the filing of advertisements, illustrations, samples of letterheads, envelopes, cards, folders, corrections for new editions of catalogs, etc. Sam- ples of printed matter, advertisements, illustrations, etc. may be pasted on large sheets of uniform size to advantage. (See Fig. 3.) By Correspondents' Names. The method of filing by cor- respondents' names is the most common of all systems. The simplest file of this class, and one that does well where there is not a great deal of correspondence, is such a one as 302 MODERN OFFICE METHODS is shown in Fig. 4, in which 26 guides, A to Z, are distributed in the drawers of a two-drawer or a three-drawer cabinet. If, however, the correspondence is large enough to fill a num- ber of cabinets it is better to use a more finely divided set Seneca Mfg. Co., No. 18 Seneca, N. Y. B. J. Brown, Pres. Chas. L. Lowe, Vice. Pres. Andrew M. Smith, Sec. FIG. 5 of guides, one guide covering A a to Am, the next An to A z, and so on. Ready-made sets of guides of almost any size desired can be had. If the heaviest correspondence is with a few firms, a special section of the cabinet can be set apart, and if desired, a set Brown, B. J. , No. 18 Pres. Seneca Mfg. Co. Seneca, N. Y. FIG. 6 of subguides may be used to separate this heavy correspond- ence according to subjects. But, of course, by a system of this kind it will be necessary for the office to write on only one subject in one letter. MODERN OFFICE METHODS 303 The Numerical Method. In the early days of vertical filing, there was an overuse of what is known as the numerical method. By the numerical method, instead of a folder or guide bearing the correspondent's name, it bore a number, and the number of a correspondent could be found only by referring to a separate card file in which names were indexed alphabetically. The method has some advantages for cer- tain offices, for it provides a certain place for all the corre- spondence from a given source, whether the letter is written by Mr. Brown, the president of the firm, or by Mr. Smith, the secretary, whereas by the alphabetical system there is an inclination to put all Browns under B and all Smiths under S. The card index of a numerical system frequently has cross -indexes, like those shown in Figs. 5, 6, and 7. Smith. Andrew M. , No. 18 Sec. Seneca Mfg. Co. Seneca, N. Y. FIG. 7 A card would also appear in the file bearing the vice-presi- dent's name and the number 18, if he carried on any of the correspondence of his company. By such a system all cor- respondence from the Seneca Manufacturing Company would be marked 18 plainly across the face, and all letters to that company would have the number 18 written on them by the stenographer in some inconspicuous place. The numerical system has, however, been abandoned in favor of the alpha- betical arrangement of folders bearing names, except by a few concerns that find numerical arrangements particularly well adapted to their needs. Busy attorneys, for example, find it convenient, as a means of avoiding the double indexing of 304 MODERN OFFICE METHODS FIG. 8 MODERN OFFICE METHODS 305 the names of parties to various suits, etc., which would be necessitated by an alphabetical arrangement. Sometimes, too, in a subject file, there are so many miscellaneous sub- jects to be treated and so little to go behind each guide that it is preferable to have a series of numbered folders with a well-arranged index as a key. The card index, as has been shown, provides an excellent means of cross-indexing. FIG. 1 A modern cabinet for vertical filing of cards and papers of various sizes is shown in Fig. 8. FILE FOR FOLLOW-UP CORRESPONDENCE In striving to make sales, collections, etc. a correspondent should not file correspondence permanently, as he would then have to depend on his memory as to when second, third, or 306 MODERN OFFICE METHODS still other letters should be written. Consequently, a special follow-up file is a necessary part of such a correspondent's equipment. A convenient file of this class is shown in Fig. 1. It is, of course, intended for only pending matters, and consists of two parts, one an alphabetical file in which are placed the various pending batches of correspondence; the second part consists of a set of numbered guides, 1 to 31, and a set of monthly guides, January to December. After making a quotation or asking for a remittance, the batch of correspondence is filed in the alphabetical section, while an extra copy of the letter, preferably on paper of a different color from the usual file copy, is placed behind the guide that represents the day on which it is intended to write again, if no answer is received from the one addressed. For example, the correspondent writes on the 10th and plans to write again on the 20th if no reply has been received at that time. The correspondence, is filed in regular form in the alphabetical index, while the extra copy, sometimes called the "tickler" copy, is filed in front of guide 20. On the 20th, the corre- spondent, of course, gives attention to all memoranda behind guide 20. If, however, in the meantime a reply has been received, the entire correspondence is readily found in the alphabetical section; in such a case, the tickler copy, no longer being of use as a reminder, may be destroyed. If no reply is received, the correspondent may give attention on the 20th and file the tickler copies behind another future date. The monthly guides provide a means of filing tickler copies or other memoranda to be attended to in future months. For example, a prospective customer may write in January that he will probably wish to buy in March; hence it is essential that his correspondence shall be brought to the correspondent's attention in March. If the fol- low-up is very extensive, the alphabetical part may be kept in a special cabinet or even in the regular files and removed by the correspondence clerk on the day that the tickler copy comes up for attention. A deep drawer of a desk will, if provided with a set of 31 numbered guides, and a set of monthly guides, make a fairly satisfactory tickler file. Such a one as Fig. 1, however, may be kept in sight. MODERN OFFICE METHODS SHANNON FILES 307 The Shannon style of flat filing has many good points in its favor. The file, which is show in Fig. 1, has a pair of arches* at the back on which the letters are inserted much as keys are put on a ring, so that if the correspondence is put on in proper order, the order cannot be disarranged. In filing by this method, all letters and answers are punched with a simple punching device, the arches are opened by FIG. 1 turning them, as shown in Fig. 2, and each file becomes practically a bound letter book. To find any letter in the file, it is not necessary to open the arches or even to find a table on which to place the file. The file may rest on the left arm, and when the finger has run down to the proper letter on the side index, the papers may be divided at that point and the top portion thrown over the arches as in Fig. 1. 308 MODERN OFFICE METHODS The advantages of the Shannon system are that papers are not likely to become disarranged, it being easier to find FIG. 2 the letters just as they are bound in the file than to remove them. Therefore, not only is a letter less likely to be lost FIG. 3 but it is also less likely to get out of its proper position with reference to preceding and subsequent letters. Again, when MODERN OFFICE METHODS 309 it is advisable to remove a letter, the file remains open at that point, and the letter is more than likely to be returned to its proper position. The binding device has a compressing attachment, and each file has a transfer blank on top (see Fig. 3), so that when the file is filled, correspondence and index may be transferred just as it stands to a filing case bearing a number or a date that corre- sponds to the one entered on the transfer sheet. The transfer sheet remains in the file drawer as a record of the various transfers. Fig. 4 shows a transfer case. This case is also equipped with arches, so that the correspondence may be filed just as it was in the drawer. After transferring, the proper notation should be made in the blanks on the front of the case, showing the kind of corre- spondence in the case, its date, etc. This transferring is necessary in all filing systems, for otherwise the cabinets would be- come packed with old correspondence to which . reference would rarely be made. The various methods of arranging and indexing described for vertical filing apply as well to the Shannon system, the only difference being that the guides are of a different style. SIDE-OPENING FLAT FILE The side-opening file illustrated on page 310 is another popular file and one that has points in its favor. The com- pressor keeps the correspondence packed tightly, so that it does not double up; no folder is required, the correspondence being merely fastened together in the proper order as to date. When the drawer becomes full, the correspondence and index may be transferred to a transfer case. 310 MODERN OFFICE METHODS The methods of arranging and indexing described for ver- tical filing may be applied also to this style of file. CARD SYSTEMS There is no office device adapted to a greater variety of uses than the card system, and none which does more toward reducing the labor of detail work in an office. By the card system, the matter to be indexed or recorded is written on cards, properly ruled and printed for the purpose. These cards are then placed on edge in a drawer or cabinet, and are divided into groups or sets by other cards having appro- priately labeled tops extending above, to facilitate reference. FIG. 1 The adaptability of the card index is such that its uses are practically limitless. It can be classified and arranged to keep any desired record in the most systematic and. con- venient manner possible. As soon as any matter on file in a card index becomes valueless, the card containing it may be removed without interfering with the arrangement of the remaining cards, thus keeping the list accurate, up to date, and filled only with valuable records. For convenience of reference the card index is unsurpassed. The various classifications that may be obtained by the use of guide cards of different colors may be made so systematic that reference to any division of the records may be made almost at a glance. MODERN OFFICE METHODS 311 Cards for filing systems can be obtained in a number of sizes, the usual sizes being 3 in. X 5 in., 4 in. X 6 in., and 6 in. X 8 in. / I Cut \ 1 Cut FIG. 1 GUIDE CARDS Guide cards ere of the same size as other cards, but have a slight extension on the top edge on which is printed the 812 MODERN OFFICE METHODS FIG. 2 FIG. 3 MODERN OFFICE METHODS 313 FIG. 4 314 MODERN OFFICE METHODS headings that are required for subdividing the card list for convenience of reference. Guide cards are made of excep- tionally tough, heavy stock to withstand the frequent han- dling, and come in sets with extensions cut in fifths, fourths, thirds, halves, or full center cut, as shown in Fig. 1. Figs. 2, 3, 4, and 5 show four standard sets of guide cards. Only part of the full set is shown in Fig. 5. When properly placed in drawers or trays, the extensions alternate so as not to interfere with one another in any way, and reference to the cards filed under any particular heading can be had almost at a glance. TAB CARDS Record cards with small, rounded projections- are termed tab cards. (See Fig. 1.) These tabs may be written or FIG. 1 printed on, or they may, by their location, indicate a certain classification of the index. The guide cards are the primary MODERN OFFICE METHODS 315 index and the tab cards the auxiliary or secondary index, and further divide the file and make reference to a particular division or card easier and quicker. FILING AND RECORDING Cards are usually filed in such drawers as the smallest ones shown in Fig. 8, under Vertical Filing, though the large sizes of cards, such as those now used for ledger accounts, stock records, etc., require larger drawers. In some offices, the preference is for the card without holes for a rod; in other offices, all cards are ordered perforated, and a round or flat rod used to keep them in place. In Fig. 1 is shown a flat-rod arrangement; by this method, it is not necessary to remove the rod wholly or partly but only to turn it so that it will slip through the narrow slot in the card. FIG. 1 To describe all the ordinary business systems that may be carried out by the use of cards would require too much space. A few examples will be given. The manufacturers of card outfits issue catalogs that describe stock forms well adapted to the use of many different kinds of business. Mailing List. The card system is especially desirable for a mailing list. One girl can address 70 envelopes or postals 316 MODERN OFFICE METHODS FIG. 2 FIG. 3 MODERN OFFICE METHODS 317 from a card list, to 40 from an ordinary book list. A card list is easily kept fresh and free from old, transferred, or dead matter, which is impossible with bound books. The list may be distributed among several clerks, and thus facilitate the rapid completion of the work. If the cards are filed by locality, any section may be easily addressed or any territory covered, independent of other territory. A FIG. 4 record of all letters, circulars, etc. is kept on the card, thus avoiding a duplication. (See specimen form in Fig. 2.) Follow-Up File. In Fig. 3 is shown a form for a follow-up system. The various entries, such as kind of goods pro- spective wanted, date of sending catalog, form letters, special letters, etc., are recorded from time to time, so that the card is a concise record of the negotiations. The metal 318 MODERN OFFICE METHODS clip seen on the upper edge may be moved to the date on which the card is to be again given attention; being visible even when cards are piled closely, it serves as a reminder to the correspondent. Subscription List. The constant changes and additions in a subscription list make it necessary to adopt a system that does not require rewriting at frequent intervals. The card index fills every requirement. (See Fig. 4.) The name, address, etc. are entered on printed cards with tabs to show r k$h*A \o^% fcxvvw ^A 5o .0,0 vv ^)vaA/ /6Avwy^L 5 /WW* \ui3AAj > \ VOO ^ ^W (WO^ NW ^ e ^" V\x> "v\ T.o"- A^UX ,1. 7l. T'l.i """'^ 3VUvOiXw "77JV Ov | ir FIG. 5 the date when the subscription expires. As the card clearly shows whether the subscription fee has been paid or not, no other account with the subscriber is necessary, though a ledger account may be kept with subscriptions, as a whole, if desired. The cards can be indexed alphabetically as a whole, or, what is better, may be arranged by states and towns and then indexed alphabetically. By the use of such an index a name can be found almost instantly, and as the tabs show which subscriptions are about to expire, such cards MODERN OFFICE METHODS 319 can be picked out and renewals solicited without disturbing the other records. Note that the printed dates on the card save writing. List of Property. For listing city real estate, the cards are filed by district, street, and number; farm properties by range, township, and section. Cards of contrasting color distinguish different classes. The position of the projecting^ tab denotes valuation. One writing of the data thus fur- nishes a complete record, indexed by location, kind of property, and value. (See Fig. 5.) LOOSE-LEAF RECORD BOOKS Adapted to almost or quite as wide a range of usefulness as the card system, is the loose-leaf record book, which may be purchased in all sizes from very small meriioranda books to large ledgers, and for which a great variety of stock forms FIG. 1 can be procured. Loose-leaf binders are of various styles, but are all similar. Fig. 1 is a typical example. Some of these binders require sheets with slots such as are shown in Fig. 1; others have sheets for only round holes, making it impossible for a sheet to be taken out unless the binder is unlocked or the leaf is torn out. Some of the advantages of loose-leaf record books are: the binders will hold securely 320 MODERN OFFICE METHODS any number of sheets from one up to the full capacity of the book, hence the book may be built up as there may be need; pages may be removed and inserted easily, thus making it possible to remove to a transfer file pages that are full or that are no longer needed in the book that is used daily; the indexes make it easy to refer to any page, and as the book is flat it affords a good writing foundation and an entry may be made without going to a desk; as it is unneces- FIG. 2 sary to take a leaf out of its proper place in order to make a notation, there is little likelihood of leaves being misplaced ; the records may be arranged alphabetically, topically, geo- graphically, or numerically, all at the same time and in the same book; cs an index can be arranged at the bottom or top edge of the book as well as at the side, and metal markers can be used as reminders of dates on which certain sheets require further attention, an index arrangement to suit any business MODERN OFFICE METHODS 321' * l. * k ! I 4 t" I I I Is STI 1 I o o o o 322 MODERN OFFICE METHODS can be adopted. Fig. 2 is an example of a popular style of small loose-leaf book holding a sheet 5 in. X 8 in. Note the triple form of index at the top edge, also the metal markers at the side opposite dates on which various sheets are to be given attention. Fig. 3 is a specimen of the stock forms that may be purchased for these loose-leaf books. This form is one for keeping account of the advertising done in one publication, the cost, kind of advertisement inserted, key number of copy, etc. Details as to number of inquiries received, cost of sales, etc. are posted from time to time. In cases where nothing but dates need be stamped on these records, labor may be saved by the use of a small rubber stamp. The principal feature of the loose-leaf record book is its elasticity; that is, the book containing live records, whether it is large or small, can be kept to its proper size, only one leaf being put in for a single name at a time, whereas in bound books, the clerk or accountant must guess at the probable amount of space that will be required for the record in a certain case ; and coincident with this feature is that by which pages may be removed quickly and filed in convenient well-indexed transfer binders. The loose-leaf system is now used extensively for all kinds of record systems, from mere temporary office memoranda to ledger accounts. OFFICE METHODS AND DEVICES Tickler Systems. There are still other methods of keeping tickler systems besides that described under Vertical Filing, but the object in all cases is to provide for the correspond- ence coming automatically to the attention at the proper time and thus relieving the mind of nagging detail. In some offices where printed letters or form -paragraph letters are sent to each inquirer at fixed intervals, routine plans are followed. One such plan is to use thirty of the old-style box letter files, arranging them in numerical order on shelves and after answering a letter to file it ten days ahead in the file that bears a number corresponding to the date on which the second letter is to be sent. The letter is MODERN OFFICE METHODS 323 merely put in the proper alphabetical division of the file. As there may be no copy of the printed letter or the .form paragraph to attach to the inquiry, the letter will be stamped "A, Sept. 15, 1908," meaning that a letter of Form A was sent on that date. Of course, if a special letter is written at any time a copy of such special letter will be attached. As some months have only thirty days, only thirty files are used; in months that have thirty-one days, the letter that would fall on the 31st is put in the File No. 1. Each day, the file corresponding to the day of the month is taken down and given attention. This method makes it necessary for each inquiry to be recorded in a book or card index on the day received; otherwise it would be practically lost in the file, and the clerk would be unable to get the corre- spondence when a reply came from the inquirer. For example, suppose that the inquiry came on the 6th of the month. The first letter would be sent that day and the letter, card, or coupon whatever it may be would be placed in File No. 16; on the 16th it would be taken out, letter of Form B sent and the.inquiry placed in File No. 26; if there were a third letter in the follow-up system, the letter would go to File No. 6; and so on. The assumption here is that all letters will be sent ten days apart, the usual time between letters of a follow-up system. Now, if a further communication is received from the prospective purchaser on the 17th of the month, a glance at the index will show that the inquiry was received on the 6th and therefore must be either in File 16 or File 26. As the 16th has just passed, it will, of course, be found in File 26. In offices where the plan is to send a form letter on a certain date of every month, a common practice is to address a second envelope at the time the inquiry is received and the first letter is sent. Before letter No. 2 is sent, however, the envelopes are checked with the card file, and where replies have been received the envelopes are thrown out. In some offices, a small card file (Fig. 1), arranged on much the same plan as the folder file, is used as a daily reminder. A brief memorandum is put on each card, covering the matters that require attention. These desk card files are also 324 MODERN OFFICE METHODS FIG. 1 A HANDY DESK TICKLER, OR FILE, WITH A SET OF 1 TO 31 GUIDES, A SET OF MONTHLY GUIDES AND A SET OF ALPHA- BETICAL GUIDES, DESIGNED TO PREVENT THE OVERLOOKING OF PENDING MATTERS. MODERN OFFICE METHODS 325 called "ticklers," but they are files for memoranda rather than for correspondence. Care of Files. In every well-regulated large office there should be a file clerk, to whom all should go when papers or records are wanted. If every one in the office is per- mitted to take out correspondence and records at will, the best system will soon be disorganized. The file clerk, when sending correspondence out of the room, should always insert in the files a folder or sheet that shows who has the correspondence and when it was taken out. All company correspondence should be kept in this general filing room FIG. 2 under the control of the file clerk. In offices where each person keeps his own separate file of correspondence, not only is labor, space, and filing cases wasted, but the firm is at a serious disadvantage in not having all correspondence where is readily accessible. Some offices in which filing space must be economized as much as possible follow the plan of using only one sheet of cheap paper for the carbon copy of a two-page letter. Of course, good practice does not permit the writing of a typewritten business letter on both sides of the sheet, but there is no real reason against using both sides of the sheet 326 MODERN OFFICE METHODS on which the carbon copy is made, thus saving a sheet of paper each time and saving half the filing space. Checking of Records. It is a saving of time and labor to adopt symbols for checking whenever possible. In an advertising office, for example, a certain kind of mark may be used to indicate that an advertisement failed to appear as ordered; another symbol may be used to indicate FIG. 3 that the advertisement appeared, but out of the position ordered; and so on. Of course, in following such a plan, there should be a key to the symbols in the front of the file, so that they may be readily understood by others beside the file clerk. Office Devices. In Fig. 2 is shown a flat desk file used by many business men for the keeping of pending mat- MODERN OFFICE METHODS 327 ters, such as important correspondence, memoranda of engagements, reports, statements, etc., before them. Another form of temporary file for price lists, bulletins, etc. resembles a Shannon file (see Fig. 3 under Shannon Files), being a flat board with a convenient punching device at the lower edge and two arches at the top, so that papers may be punched and inserted quickly. A style of document file much used in law offices is shown in Fig. 3. The numbering of checks, the check-register, orders, job tickets, and, in fact, every class of paper requiring numbering is best done by the use of an automatic number- ing machine such as is illustrated in Fig. 4. This machine is small, light, and not expensive. It is so simple in action that the setting of a dial adjusts the machine to print consecutively: another turn of the dial and the printing is done in duplicate; a third turn and the same number is printed over and over. The machine saves much time and gives greater legibility than the pen-numberingmethod. The time-stamping machine re- cords the hour and minute at which a letter or other document is received. FIG. 4 It is generally used in offices and factories where time is of great importance and where it is necessary to hold each one strictly to account for delay. RECORD OF STOCK SUPPLIES A file or a scrap book should be kept in every office for the purpose of preserving a complete set of samples of all printed matter ordered. It is well to have a duplicate of each piece, so tnat there will be a spare copy to use in 328 MODERN OFFICE METHODS ordering. On each piece there should be entered a memo- randum of the date of order, quantity, cost, etc. In offices where much printed matter is used, it is well to print on each lot, in small type and in an inconspicuous place, a form number and a memorandum of the date and quantity, thus, 24-10m-3-8-08, which signifies that the number of the form is 24, and that 10,000 were ordered on March 8, 1908. FIG. 1 As it requires time to get out a supply of printed matter, either a card stock record should be kept that will show at all times when and where the stock has been used and how much is on hand, or, if the office uses so little stock supplies that this is impracticable, a system may be adopted of inserting a red sheet on top of about a month's supply (the exact time will depend on the time required for reprint- ing) of the printed matter, counting from the bottom of the pile. When the red sheet is reached, it will serve as a MODERN OFFICE METHODS 329 O O O O 330 MODERN OFFICE METHODS warning that more stock should be ordered immediately. Figs. 1 and 2 are suggested forms for a simple record of stock supplies. The system is adaptable to all kinds of stock supplies, and as Figs. 1 and 2 show, may be kept either by means of a card case or a loose-leaf book. INTERDEPARTMENTAL TELEPHONE* SYSTEM To establish a complete office telephone system, so that every employe of responsibility may be reached quickly, means some initial cost and the employment of an office central operator, but a great deal of valuable time will be saved. In offices of medium size, the young man or young woman who receives callers can also attend to the exchange and thus make it unnecessary to employ another person. This method is the best one of providing against useless interviews; the visitor states his errand, is asked to be seated, and the operator ascertains whether or not the one the visitor has called for cares to have a talk. CENTRALIZATION OF STENOGRAPHIC WORK It will be found economical and satisfactory generally in large offices to have all stenographers in a separate stenographic department and to have them report to the various persons needing their services at the time when the service is required. This is readily accomplished by an interdepartmental telephone system and by having a capable chief of the stenographic department. By this plan, a stenographer will not be obliged to waste several hours because the one for whom she usually works is not ready to dictate, but may report elsewhere. This plan also removes the clatter of the typewriting machines from the various offices. It permits a uniform style of correspondence; it enables the firm to keep a more accurate record of the output of the various stenographers. BUSINESS PHONOGRAPH SYSTEM Some large concerns find that the business phonograph system expedites the handling of correspondence. By the use of the phonograph, the dictator can dictate whenever he likes and without any delay; the stenographer saves the MODERN OFFICE METHODS 331 time usually spent in taking dictation; and the likelihood of mistakes through erroneous transcription of shorthand notes is removed. A little practice enables one to make good records or to transcribe easily from records. The chief drawback to the system is that changes and editing of dictation cannot be so conveniently attended to as by the ordinary method, but the promoters of the business phono- graph method are providing ingenious methods that will undoubtedly bring about an extensive use of the system. MAIL-DISTRIBUTING DEPARTMENT In large offices it will be found an advantage to have one department for the opening, distributing, and sending out of mail. In such departments, as each letter is opened, it is marked or stamped with the date of receipt and then the name of the person to whom it should go, or with several names in case the attention of several persons is required. Letters containing money are marked with the amount enclosed and are sent first to the cashier. A good method is to have a series of wire desk baskets for the mail dis- tributor, into which the various letters are placed. These baskets should bear the names of the different departments, and the mail should be collected at frequent intervals by a boy or a girl employed for that purpose. The messenger, as he distributes the mail also collects outgoing unsealed and unstamped mail from wire baskets on the desks of the various departments. By such a method, much of the time of high-salaried people will be saved. When one department receives a letter with several names on it, that letter should be given early attention and passed on to the next name on the memorandum. It is occasionally advisable, in such cases, for each correspondent to attach a copy of his reply so that the others may see what has been written on some point and be guided accordingly. This central mailing department often saves postage, for in case several correspondents write a letter to one firm the mail clerk will put all of them in one envelope. 332 PUBLIC STENOGRAPHIC OFFICE CONDUCTING A PUBLIC STENOGRAPHIC OFFICE Many stenographers find it profitable to conduct a public typewriting office. It is often possible to secure desk room in some office in exchange for work. In this way a start toward a public-office business may be made without much expense. A person opening a public copying office should be a sten- ographer, for the typewriter operator who is not a short- hand writer will lose opportunities for profitable work. A public stenographer must be prepared to do all kinds of typewriting work neatly and rapidly. He may be called on to copy anything from a poem to a will and to under- take tasks requiring from a few minutes to several days. A fund of general knowledge and a thorough command of the English language are necessary to the greatest success in this work. Equipment. The outfit for a public stenographer should comprise a typewriter, envelopes, letter and legal-cap sizes of paper in light and medium weights, carbon paper, manu- script covers, a good dictionary, an encyclopedia of quota- tions, and a mimeograph, multigraph, or some other good duplicator. Scale of Charges. The stenographer's charges depend to a large extent on (1) the ability of the stenographer, and (2) the field in which the work is done. It is obvious that the time of a business-office amanuensis is not worth as much as that of a skilled court or sermon reporter, also that the prices one may obtain in Chicago or New York would be excessive in a city of 10,000 population. Therefore, the following figures should not be considered as inflexible. A good general rule is to charge what the work is worth, or if it is impossible to get that, to charge about what the cus- tomer will be willing to pay. The verbatim reporter should receive a per diem attend- ance fee of from $5 to $10. This will cover the work of taking dictation. For transcribing, he should receive from PUBLIC STENOGRAPHIC OFFICE 333 15 to 25 cents a page (double-spaced matter) for the first copy and about half as much for each carbon copy; if five or six carbon copies are ordered, the rate may be decreased considerably. The public-office stenographer should charge for dictation at from 50 cents to $1 an hour, according to ability. Dicta- tion direct to the typewriter may be calculated at the same rate. It is advisable to charge on the basis of time con- sumed rather than by the number of words when the dictator wastes time. Five cents a hundred words and from 2 to 2J cents a hun- dred for carbon copies will be fair for straight typewriting work of ordinary character. If the copy is puzzling or the matter abounds with tabulated statistics or other tech- nicalities, the rate should be one and one-half or twice as much. A fair charge for dictation and typewriting combined would be from 10 to 20 cents a hundred words, according to the class of the work. Manuscript for Publication. The public stenographer is likely to be asked at times to copy rough manuscript that is later to be published. Manuscript of this kind is something like that shown in Fig. 1, under Civil Service, but there are other marks and indications used by authors and editors that the stenographer should be familiar with. A dot with circle around it is merely a period, the circle being used to distinguish periods from hastily made commas. Stet written in the margin means "let it stand" and refers to matter that has inadvertently been crossed out and under which the author usually puts a row of dots to show how much is to be restored. Tr. or trans, means that a transposition in the order of certain words or sentences, as indicated by lines or by figures 1 , 2, 3, etc., is to be made. No J or Run in means "Do not start a paragraph here." Authors and editors use the double hyphen ( = ) freely, but the stenographer in type- writing the matter may use the single hyphen in its place. One straight line under words is a request for Italic type; two straight lines, a request for small capitals; three straight lines a request for large or regular capitals; a waved line, a 334 PUBLIC STENOGRAPHIC OFFICE request for black-faced or heavy type. In addition, such marginal memoranda as ital. caps, small caps (s. c.), black face (b. f.) are sometimes added. Restore these lines and marginal memoranda in matter that is copied. A diagonal line struck through a capital means that a small letter is preferred there. The dele mark, which looks something like a hurriedly made small d, means "take this out." Copy for printers should be written on letter-size paper, 8i in. X 11 in. Margins should be wide to allow for notes. Notes to printer should be enclosed with rings so as not to be regarded as copy to be set up. The sheets should not be bound, and should be numbered at the top. In a manu- script of an essay or story, the title, pen name (if any is used), full name and address of author, and approximate number of words in the manuscript should appear on the first sheet near the top. Never roll such manuscript, but fold it for the so-called official envelope. Do not write additions on the back of the original sheets, but put the added matter on slips of paper, paste on the margin, indicate by a line where the added matter is to be inserted, then fold the slips face down on the original sheet. Miscellaneous. It is customary to estimate the number of words instead of counting them. A close estimate may be made by counting the words in a number of lines to get the average number of words to a line, then finding the average number of full lines to a page. Ordinarily, the legal- cap sheet will hold about 300 words when the typewriting is double spaced. If proper margins are left, typewriter letter sheets will average about 200 words. If typewriting is charged on the basis of the page rather than that of the hundred words, single-spaced matter should be figured at double rates, triple-spaced matter at one-third reduction. For addressing envelopes from straight legible lists, the rate should be from $2.50 to $3 a thousand, the lower rate applying only to very large quantities. If names must be picked out here and there, the rate should be from $3.50 to $4 a thousand. Specimen Forms. The specimen forms of typewriting shown in Figs. 1 to 11, inclusive, on the following pages, will PUBLIC STENOGRAPHIC OFFICE 335 be suggestive to the beginner in public-office work for the arrangement of matter on pages. The appearance of the side headings shown underscored in black on some of the forms will be improved by having the underscoring in red. There is nothing particularly difficult about any of these forms if due regard is given to balancing, centering, indenting, and spacing of the matter. A neat effect may be secured in headings by spacing between the letters; thus, Take Notice. This expedient and SOLID CAPS are aids to the operator in giving finish to his work. To center a line, such as a heading, count the number of letters in the words (and the spaces between the words if there are several words) and subtract the sum from the length of the scale. One-half of the remainder will indicate the proper point of the scale for striking the first letter of the heading. If this centered heading is to be lengthened by putting spaces between the letters (see preceding para- graph), double the original number of letters and spaces before subtracting from the length of the scale. When the words of a heading are lengthened by putting spaces between the letters, three spaces should be left between words. Letter-size paper is generally preferred for minutes, reports, speeches, sermons, etc., although legal-cap paper is sometimes used. When typewritten matter consists of only a few pages to be bound together, sufficient margin should be left at the top of each sheet for this purpose. If the number of pages is large, a wide margin should be made on the left side of the sheet for side binding. Sheets bound at the top should be numbered at the bottom. TYPEWRITING FORMS Statement of Condition of the FIRST NATIOHAL of Harristurg, Pennsylv March 28, 1904 o Loans and Discounts ................................ $895,227.60 Bonds and Securities .............................. 617,709.81 Due from Banks .................................... 147,841.63 Cash -and Reserve .................................. 194,181.49 $1,854,960.53 Liabilities Capital Stock ..................................... $100,000.00 Surplus and Profits ............................... 416,524.90 Circulation ....................................... 92,850.00 Deposits ............ . ............................ .1,245,585.63 $1,854,960.53 Officers Lane S. Hart, President James Brady, Cashier DIR Lane S. Hart James L. Chamberlin Donald C. Haldeman William J. Calder David Fleming Marlln . Olmsted Spencer C. Gilbert D. L. Jauss John Y. Boyd FIG. 1 TYPEWRITING FORMS 337 Committee meeting of STEPHEN UERRITT BURIAL ASSOCIATION, held on the 3d day of October, 1902, pursuant to notice, in the offices of the Association, corner of Nineteenth Street and Eighth Avenue, New York, H. Y. Mr. Owens, Hiss Fiska, Mr. Evans, Dr. Brockway, Mr. Turner, Mr. Merritt. There being a quorum present of the member* of the Commit- tee on Investigation appointed at the last meeting, the Coranit- tee proceeded to organize. Moved by Dr. Brockway, and duly seconded, that Mr. Stephen Iterritt, who presided at the general meeting of yesterday, be the Chairman of the present meeting. The notion as unanimously carried. Moved by Dr. Brockway, and duly seconded, that Mr. Ralph The motion was unanimously carried. DR. BROCKWAY: I move, aa one of the members of this Com- mittee, that we recommend the incorporation of the Stephen Mer- ritt Burial Association the name to be settled later con- tingent, however, upon the assurance at any time after this meeting from Mr. and Mrs. Owen, parents of Zben J. Owen, that they are ready to transfer the property named in the minutes of FIG. 2 338 TYPEWRITING FORMS OYSTERS AND CLAMS All styles td order. (See Regular Bill of Fare.) RELISHES Olives... 10 Celery... 15 Radishes. . .10 Cucumbers. . .10 Pin Money Pickles... 10 Sliced Tomatoes. . .10 SOUPS Comsomrae with Rice 15 Cup... 10 Cream of Celery... 15 Cup... 10 Baked Shad, Portugaise 25 Broiled Tresh Mackerel 25 Broiled Shad Roe... 25, with Bacon 30 Spring Lamb Hash, Poached Egg 25 Pork Chops , Breaded , Tomato Sauce 25 Liver and Bacon 20 Spring Lamb, Mint Sauce 25 Stuffed Chicken 25 Prime Ribs of Beef 25 Stewed Tomatoes 10 Boiled Potatoes Mashed Potatoes 10 New Spinach, Plain. Green Peas 10 Asparagus on Toast. FRUIT AND DESSERT Strawberries and Cream 10 Strawberry Shortcake 10 Ta'pioca Pudding 10 Baked Apples 10 Tea, Coffee, Chocolate, or Buttermilk ASK FOR THE BREAD YOU LIKE BEST Thursday, May 12, 1904. FIG. 3 TYPEWRITING FORMS 339 SPECIFICATIONS For FIVE-TON DRY PLATE ICE-MAKING PLANT And REFRIGERATION FOR ICE STORAGE For THE MEXICAN CENTRAL RAILWAY COMPANY, LIMITED Aguas Calientes Mexico By THE WESTINGHOUSE AND WILLIAMS COMPANY New York and Chicago -. ooo FIG. 4 340 TYPEWRITING FORMS AMMONIA CONDENSER; The ammonia condenser IB composed of eight sections, each with eight pipes approximately nineteen feet, six inches long. Pipes are made of 1 V< inch full weight, extra heavy pipe, and are set into special cast headers so arranged as to make a stuffing box joint in trfe pipe. The condenser is of the most economical type in water consumption and is furnished with a full set of water distrib- cast iron supports upon which the sections rest. f OIL TRAP: One oil Intercepting trap is on the discharge gas line of th iron cylinder, with welded heads, and will be tested tight to a pres- sure of 500 pounds before being shipped. AMMONIA RECEIVER; The liquid ammonia receiver is arranged to receive liquid ammonia from the condenser. The receiver is fitted with cast iron wall brackets, floor stands, controlling valves, purge valves, gauge glasses, and automatic safety gauge cocks. Receiver Is made of extra heavy wrought iron cylinder, with welded heads, and will be tested to a pressure of 500 pounds before shipment. AMMONIA GAUGES: There will be one set of ammonia gauges, consisting of the dials, signifying the purpose for which each gauge is to b used. These gauges will be of neat design. - 2 - FIG. 5 TYPEWRITING FORMS 341 After drilling, the straps are to be removed, all burrs cleaned off, and the plates to be assembled, metal to metal, with parallel turned bolts fitting the holes be- fore riveting. Each course to be built independently to template. The various courses and their heads are to be assembled by a hydraulic forcing press. All rivets are to be driven with hydraulic pressure and held until cool. All drum heads to be fitted with manholes. The heads shall be hydraulic forged at a single heat, with manhole ring and stiffening plate in position; there shall be flat raised seats for stand pipe and feed connections. The edges of head and manhole face shall be turned off true. The manhole plate and guards are to be of forged steel. The plate, eleven Inches by fifteen Inches, shall be faced and turned to a true oval to fit the head. : The steam flanges, five Inches by eleven inches, arc to be recessed to make a male and female joint, fitted with stud bolts with taper threads. The drum cross boxes shall be hydraulic forged from a single sheet without seams or* rivet*. 18 - FIG. 6 342 TYPEWRITING FORMS ARTICLES OP INCORPORATION THE BALTIMORE BUILDING AND LOAN ASSOCIATION KNOT AIL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the undersigned, their asso- hereby adopt the following Articles of Incorporation, to wit: I The name and title of this corporation shall be THE BALTIMORE BUILD- ING AND LOAN ASSOCIATION. Its principal office shall be located in the City 'of Baltimore, State of Maryland. The corporation shall continue for a period of FIFTY YEARS, unless it shall before the termination of that time be dissolved by a vote of two-thirds of its stockholders. II This corporation shall possess and exercise all the powers and priv- ileges conferred upon corporations by the forty-second Section of the Code of Maryland and all amendatory acts and laws. Ill its members to save money and to build homes. It shall be empowered to accumulate funds by. the sale of stock or by money paid by members on the instalment plan, as may be provided by the by-laws hereafter. It shall have the power to lend such funds, with their accrued earnings to its members, upon mortgage or other real estate securities; or in lieu of other security may accept the pledge of stock held by the borrowing mem- ber. It shall be empowered to own, purchase, sell, or mortgage such real FIG. 7 TYPEWRITING FORMS 343 CONTENTS Words 8 Sentences 16 Paragraphs 24 The Composition as a Whole 39 The Influence of Punctuation 45 The Opening Sentence 68 The Closing Sentence 88 Dramatic Endings 110 Dialogue 140 The Narrative Story 166 Descriptions 180 The Holding of Interest 192 The Central Idea 212 The Setting of a Story 226 Plot Construction 240 How to Observe 280 The Test of Ability 298 XVIII Conclusion 318 FIG. 8 344 TYPEWRITING FORMS KKOV AIL MEV r THESE PRSSafTS. that we, Andrew Baker, s J. Jenkins, af Kansas City, Missouri, as principal, and 3i ot the same city and state, as surety, are held and firmly hound unto Jeremiah P. Hamilton, of Springfield, Missouri, in the sum of ONE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($1000) to be paid to the said Jeremiah P. Hamilton, his executors, administrators, and assigns; to which payment well and truly to be cade, we do bind ourselves, Jointly and severally, our heirs, cxecu- , and administrators, firmly by these presents. Sealed our seals, and dated this the 20th day of September, A. D. 1904. Ml. THE COHPITIOg OT THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the said Andrew Baker shall duly perfprm and observe all the itipulations and agreements contained in a certain contract in writing, dated the 18th day of September, A. D. 1904, made between the said Andrew Baker, of the one part, and the said Jeremiah P. Hamilton, of the other part, for the erec- reremlah '. Hamilton, in the county of Jefferson and state of Mis- souri, a by reference to said contract will more fully and at large appear, which on the part of the said Andrew Baker is to b performed and to be observed, and so that no for- bearance on the part of the said Jeremiah P. Hamilton to Bald principal, or alteration of said recited contract, shall In any way release the said surety, hie heirs, executors, and .r.lst raters from liability hereunder; then, this obliga- tion to be void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and virtue. IH WITKESS TOBREO?. we have hereunto set our hands and seals this the 20th day of September, A. D. 1904. Signed, sealed, and de- ) livered in the presence ) FIG. 9 _(SKAZ) _(8EAL) TYPEWRITING FORMS 345 STATE OP PE!WSYI,VASIA- : : COUNTY OF LACKAWAHNA :: SB IT REMEMBERED, that on this 12th day. Of April, A. D. .904, before me, Lewis G. Thurlov, a Notary Public for the county and state aforesaid, personally cane Charles R. Rob- ertson, and acknowledged the foregoing instrument to be his act and deed, and desired that the same might be recorded aa XH WITNESS TOERBOy, I have hereunto eet my hand and of- ficial seal, this 12th day of April, A. D. 1904. KNOW ALL KEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that I, Maurice MieVim- mon, of Scranton, Pa., acknowledge myself to be indebted to Frederick G. Bennett, of Philadelphia, Pa., in the sum of SEVEKTY-EIGHT DOLLARS AND SEVENTY-FIVE CENTS (|78.75), with interest from this date; and for the security of said sum I do hereby mortgage and sell and assign to the said Frederick G. Bennett all my personal property of every description sit- uate, lying, and being in the Linden Hotel, on Linden Street Scranton, Pa. And I hereby authorize and empower the said Frederick G. Bennett to take possession of said property am effects, he to sell the same! and appropriate the proceeds the payment of aid debt and Interest. Witness my band and seal,- this the 18th day of April, A. 0. 1904. ::SBAL:i FlG. 10 346 TYPEWRITING FORMS Stock Quotation 's ooo opsimrc Amalgamated Copper ; 49 3/8 American Car and Foundry 18 1/4 American Locomotive 19 3/4 American Sugar 127 1/2 Atchison, common 73 5/8 Atchison, preferred * ... 931/2 Baltimore and Ohio 79 5/8 Brooklyn Rapid Transit 46 3/8 Canad ian Pacific .117 1/4 Chicago and Great Western 16 3/4 Chicago, Milwaukee and St. Paul 144 1/2 Delaware and Hudson . 159 1/2 Erie, common -. 26 7/8 Erie, first preferred 65 Erie, second preferred 41 1/2 Illinois Central 130 5/8 Manhattan Elevated 142 7/8 Metropolitan Street Railway 113 3/4 Mexican Central 6 1/4 Missouri, Kansas and Texas, preferred 38 3/4 Missouri Pacific ..-. 93 1/8 New York, Ontario and Western 21 5/8 Pennsylvania Railroad 117 1/2 People ' s Gas 97 3/8 Reading 45 1/4 Rock Island 23 5/8 FIG. 11 DUPLICATING WORK 347 DUPLICATING WORK The public stenographer is often called on to write notices, programs, circular letters, price lists, etc., of which perhaps several hundred copies may be required. For such work, carbon copying is not practicable; some other method of reproduction must be adopted. One of the oldest and best methods of duplicating typewriting is by the Edison mimeo- graph, which is shown in Fig. 1. The process is simple and FIG. 1 comparatively inexpensive. A stencil is made from a sheet of specially prepared waxed paper. The waxed paper is backed by a silk sheet and an oiled board, and the face is covered with a sheet of tissue paper to prevent the types from filling up with wax when the keys are struck. The tissue paper, waxed paper and silk sheets, and the oiled board are placed in the typewriter as in carbon work; the ribbon is then removed from the machine or shifted to one side. The stencil is made just as a letter is written, but more care must be exercised and the keys, especially M and W, must be struck a little 348 DUPLICATING WORK more sharply. If the character of the work is anything out of the ordinary, it is better to rough out a copy with a pencil or on the typewriter before making the stencil. If a mistake is made, it may be corrected by first brushing a quick-drying varnish over the spot; this fills up the letters. The carriage may then be drawn back and the word or words FIG. 2 written correctly. When varnish is not available, a little wax may be scraped from the side of the sheet and pasted over the wrong letters with the finger nail. It is best to read a stencil carefully and to make all corrections before it is taken from the machine. Stencils should be handled very carefully. Creases and cracks should be avoided, but they may be patched with varnish. DUPLICATING WORK 349 After a stencil is finished, it is fastened in the printing frame under a protecting cloth or sheet of fibrous paper. Ink is then spread on the slate and after being well distrib uted is applied to the covered stencil by the roller. The ink penetrates all impressions made by the type and perfect prints are made with a single stroke of the roller. The sheets on which the copying is done are placed under the printing frame one at a time. Fig. 2 shows the method of operation when the stencil is in the printing frame. Fig. 3 shows a rotary machine for mimeograph printing. By this machine, copies can be made more rapidly than by the hand process, and the supply of ink can be regulated much better. FIG. 3 Paper for mimeograph work should be soft and with an uncalendered finish^ the ink does not dry well on paper with a hard finish. It is often desirable to insert dates, names, and addresses on letters copied by the mimeograph process or printed direct from type. In order to get satisfactory results in this kind of work it is necessary that the color of the typewriter ribbon be exactly the same as the mimeograph or printer's ink. It is well for a stenographer to keep a file of perfect copies of mimeograph work, for the purpose of having specimens to show to prospective customers and also as a guide foi f uiure work. 360 DUPLICATING WORK Another process of taking copies of typewriting is by means of an absorbent copying surface. There is consider- able difference in duplicators of this class, but, the general principle is the same. An original copy is written with the typewriter on paper with a hard finish so that the ink will remain on the surface. The writing is done with a heavily inked special copying ribbon furnished with the duplicator. The original copy is placed face down on the absorbent copying surface of the duplicator and pressed until the ink is transferred from the paper. It is then removed, after which sheets of paper may be smoothed down on the surface FIG. 4 and good copies taken. The process is simple. The work may be done in colors, if desired, by using different colored ribbons in preparing the original copy, or by doing part of the work with the pen and special copying ink. after the typewriting has been completed. A duplicator of this class is illustrated in Fig. 4. The framed copying surface of a popular copier is shown in Fig. 5. The principal difference in this class of duplicators is in the copying surface. On several duplicators, this surface somewhat resembles a slate, and the ink may be washed off DUPLICATING WORK 351 after the work has been completed. On other duplicators, the copying surface is more like a smooth layer of trans- parent glue mounted in a frame. This kind of surface can- FIG. 5 not be used again until the ink from one job has sunk into the material or faded out, which may require a day or more. Several frames are usually supplied, so that one may be used while the ink is fading out of the other. The charges for duplicating work should be determined by the expense for rent, etc. and the time required for the FIG. 6 work. It would not pay to prepare a stencil or an original sheet for less than 75 cents or $1. From $1 to $2 would be a fair charge for a hundred copies of a one-page document. 352 LAW FORMS For a larger number, the charge should be proportionate to the time, material, and wear on the outfit. Various machines have been recently put on the market, by the use of which typewriter type is set either on a roller or in a flat form and used to produce letters in close imitation of typewriting. The Multigraph is a well-known machine of this class; by its use circular letters, forms, etc. can be produced rapidly and at low cost. A view of the Multi- graph is shown in Fig. 6. LAW FORMS AFFIDAVIT GENERAL FORM State of County of Be it known that on the day of the date hereof, before me, the subscriber, (title of officer), personally appeared A. B., who being duly sworn according to law, did depose and say that (Signature of affiant) Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of f A. D. 19 . [L. S.] (Official title) ASSIGNMENTS ORDINARY FORM In consideration of dollars to me paid by C. D., of the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, I do hereby sell, assign, transfer, and set over to the said C. D., his heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns (insert full description of the property assigned), together with all the right, title, and interest to said property; and I hereby authorize the said C. D., in my name, or in his own, but at his own cost, to take all legal measures proper or neces- sary for securing and enjoying the property hereby assigned. Witness my hand and seal this day of , A. D. 19 , at A. B. [L. S.J LAW FORMS 353 ASSIGNMENT OF CLAIM In consideration of dollars, and other good considera- tions, to me paid by C. D., of , the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, I do hereby sell, assign, transfer, set over, and deliver to the said C. D., his executors, admin- istrators, and assigns, all claims, demands, and causes of action of every kind which I now have, or may hereafter have against E. P., or any other person or persons, arising from or because of (state fully the nature of the claim), and from any and all things incidental thereto or connected therewith. And I authorize said C. D., in my name, or in his own, but at his own cost, to demand, collect, sue for, receive, and receipt for said claim or any part thereof, to his own use. Witness my hand and seal this day of , A. D. 19 , at A. B. [L. S.] ASSIGNMENT OP A DEBT In consideration of dollars, to me paid by C. D., of the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, I do hereby sell, assign, transfer, and set over to said C. D., his executors, administrators, and assigns, a certain debt now due and owing to me by E. P., of , amounting to the sum of dollars, for (describe fully the nature and origin of the debt), together with all interest due thereon. And I hereby authorize said C. D., for his own use, and at his own cost, to demand, collect, sue for, receive, and receipt for said debt or any part thereof. Witness my hand and seal, this day of , A. D. 19 , at A. B. [L. S.] A. B.] vs. \ C. D.J ASSIGNMENT OF JUDGMENT SHORT FORM In the Court of of County. No Term, 19 Debt $ Int._ For value received, I do hereby assign, transfer, and set over unto E. P., his heirs and assigns, all my right, title, and 354 LAW FORMS interest in and to the above-stated judgment, (and guarantee the payment thereof, or, without recourse). Witness my hand and seal the day of , A. D. 19 A. B. [L. S.] ASSIGNMENT OF WAGES For value received, I do hereby sell, assign, transfer, and set over to C. D., of , any and all sums of money due, or coming due, to me from E. F., of , as wages for my services as (describe the services) between the day of , 19 , and the day of , 19 And I hereby authorize said C. D., or his assigns, to demand, collect, receive, and receipt for the same or any part thereof, and if said sum, or any part thereof, should be paid to me, or should come into my hands, I will receive the same solely as the agent of said C. D., and will transmit the same forthwith to him. Witness my hand this day of , A. D. 19 at A. B. GENERAL ASSIGNMENT FOR CREDITORS This indenture, made the day of , A. D. 19 between A. B., of , of the first part, and C. D., of , of the other part: Whereas, the said A. B. is indebted unto divers different persons in different sums of money, and is desirous of appropriating his property to the payment of his debts: Now this indenture wit- nesseth, that the said A. B., for and in consideration of the said debts, and also in consideration of the sum of one dollar, to him in hand paid by the said C. D., the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, hath granted, assigned, bargained and sold, aliened, released and confirmed, and by these presents doth grant, assign, bargain and sell, alien, release, and confirm unto the said C. D., his heirs and assigns, (describe property conveyed). To have and to hold the same and every part and parcel thereof unto the said C. D., his heirs and assigns forever; in trust, nevertheless, and to the only uses, intents, and purposes following, that LA W FORMS 355 is to say, after paying and discharging the expenses incident to this trust; then (specify how proceeds are to be applied in payment of debts). Lastly, should any surplus remain after the payment of the several debts aforesaid, to return the said surplus to the said A. B., his heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, and the said A. B. hereby nominates and appoints the said C. D., his true and lawful attorney irre- vocable, to ask, demand, sue for, levy, recover and receive, all sum and sums of money to him due and owing, and on receipt thereof, in whole or in part, to give acquittances, or other sufficient discharges in the law; to make com- promises, or other arrangements that he may deem beneficial to this trust, ratifying and confirming hereby, and holding firm and effectual, all and whatsoever he shall lawfully do therein. In witness whereof, the said party of the first part has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above written. Sealed and delivered "| A. B. [L. S.] in the presence of I SIMPLE BOND WITHOUT CONDITION Know all men by these presents, that I, A. B., of _, the obligor, am held and firmly bound unto C. D., of , the obligee, in the sum of lawful money of the United States, to be paid to the said C. D., or his cer- tain attorney, executors, administrators, or assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made, I do bind myself, my heirs, executors, and administrators, irrmly by these presents. In testimony whereof I have set my hand and seal to this instrument on the day of , A. D. 19 Executed and delivered] A. B. [L. S.] in the presence of 356 LAW FORMS CERTIFICATE OF STOCK West Park Land Company Number Shares 253 100 This certifies that A. B. is the owner of one hundred shares of the capital stock of West Park Land Company, a corpora- tion duly organized under the laws of the state of Said stock is fully paid and non-assessable and is transfer- able only on the books of the company in person or by attor- ney, on return of this certificate properly signed. In witness whereof, the said company has caused these presents to be subscribed by its president and secretary, and its corporate seal to be affixed at , this day of , A. D. 19 C. D., President [Corporate seal] E. F., Secretary CHATTEL MORTGAGE SHORT FORM In consideration of the sum of dollars, this day paid to me by C. D., which said sum of dollars I agree to repay to C. D. on the day of , A. D. 19 , with interest thereon, I hereby sell, assign, transfer, and set over to C. D., the following described property (describe the prop- erty so that it can be identified). And I authorize C. D. to take possession of said property now or at any future time. If I pay or cause to be paid the moneys hereby agreed to be paid, when due, then this mortgage to be void; otherwise, to remain in full force and effect. Dated A. D. 19 Witnesses ] A. B. [L. S.] COMMERCIAL PAPER PROMISSORY NOTE Buffalo, N. Y M October 1, 1909. $2,000. One year after date I promise to pay to C. D., or order, Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000), value received. A. B. LAW FORMS 357 PROMISSORY NOTE PAYABLE AT A PARTICULAR PLACE Philadelphia, Pa., October 1, 1909. $100. Three months after date I promise to pay to the order of C. D., One Hundred Dollars, at the Fourth Street National Bank, without defalcation, for value received. A. B. JOINT-AND-SEVERAL NOTE New York, N. Y., October 1, 1909 $100. We, jointly and severally, promise to pay to the order of E. F., on the 1st day of March next, One Hundred Dollars* value received, and charge the same to account of To E. F. & Co. 1 A. B. No J C. D. JUDGMENT NOTE SHORT FORM Scranton, Pa., February 16, 1909. $100. Three months after date, we pfomise to pay E. F., or order, One Hundred Dollars, without defalcation, for value received. And we do hereby authorize any attorney or any court of record in , or elsewhere, to confess judgment therefor and release errors, and we hereby also waive all stay of execution from and after the maturity of the above note. Witness our hands and seals the day and date above written. A. B. [L. S.] C. D. [L. S.] JUDGMENT NOTE WITH WAIVER Scranton, Pa., February 16, 1909. $100. One year after date, for value received, I promise to pay C. D., or bearer, One Hundred Dollars, with interest, and without defalcation or stay of execution. And I do hereby confess judgment for the above sum, with interest and costs of suit, release of all errors, and waiver of rights to inqui- sition and appeal, and to the benefit of all laws exempting real or personal property from levy and sale. A. B. [L. S.] 358 LAW FORMS BILLS OF EXCHANGE No. 1 Philadelphia, Pa., October 1, 1909. Exchange for $1,000. Thirty days after sight of this first of exchange (second and third of same tenor and date unpaid) pay to the order of C. D., One Thousand Dollars, for value received, and charge the same to account of To E. F. & Co.,1 London J No. 2 Philadelphia, Pa., October 1, 1909. Exchange for $1,000. Thirty days after sight of this second of excha'nge (first and third of same tenor and date unpaid) pay to the order of C. D., One Thousand Dollars, for value received, and charge the same to account of ToE. F. & Co.,1 London '/ No. 3 Philadelphia, Pa., October 1, 1909. Exchange for $1,000. Thirty days after sight of this third of exchange (first and second of same tenor and date unpaid) pay to the order of C. D , One Thousand Dollars, for value received, and charge the same to account of To E. F. & Co., London o.,1 / CONTRACT AND AGREEMENT GENERAL FORM OF A CONTRACT This agreement, made and concluded this day of , A. D. 19 , between A. B., of , of the first part, and C. D., of , of the second part, witnesseth, that the said party of the first part (insert the agreements of the party of the first part). And that the said party of the second part (insert the agreements on the part of the party of the second part). LAW FORMS 359 In witness whereof, the said parties to these presents have hereunto set their hands and seals the day and year above written. A. B. [L. S.] Executed in presence] C. D. [L. S.] of EMPLOYMENT CONTRACT Memorandum of agreement, made this day of A. D. 19 , by and between A. B., of party of the first part, and C. D., of_ party of the second part, witnesseth, in consideration of the mutual agreements, hereinafter set forth, and for other good and valuable consideration, the said parties agree to and with each other as follows, viz.: The party of the first part agrees to hire and employ, and hereby does hire and employ, the party of the second part as a to perform such duties as the party of the first part may from time to time prescribe and direct, for the specified and definite time of years from the date hereof, at the yearly salary of dollars payable in equal monthly payments of dollars each, on the last day of each calendar month of said employment. The party of the second part agrees to accept and under- take, and hereby does accept and undertake, the said hiring and employment, at the yearly salary, and upon the time, terms, and conditions above specified, and agrees to give his best efforts and energy to the performance of such duties as the party of the first part may from time to time prescribe and direct, and to faithfully serve the party of the first part to the best of his ability at all times and in all respects within the scope of his said employ- ment. In witness whereof, etc. 360 LAW FORMS LANDLORD'S NOTICE TO LEAVE AT END OF THE TERM To (Name and address of the tenant). SIR: Being in the possession of a certain messuage or tenement, with the appurtenances, situate (describe premises briefly), which said premises were demised to you by me for a certain term, to wit, from the day of , , A. D. 19 , until the day of , A. D. 19 , and which said term will terminate and expire on the day and year last aforesaid, I hereby give you notice that it is my desire to have again and repossess the said messuage or tenement, with the appurtenances, and I therefore do hereby require you to leave the same upon the expiration of the said hereinbefore mentioned term. Witness my hand this day of , A. D. 19 (Signature) TENANT'S NOTICE TO LEAVE To A. B. I hereby give you notice, that it is my desire to deliver up possession of certain premises, with the appurtenances, situate , which I now hold as tenant under a certain lease dated , at the expiration of the current term, to wit, on the day of , A. D. 19 Dated . C. D. LEASE SHORT FORM THIS AGREEMENT witnesseth, that A. B., of , doth hereby let unto C. D., of , for the term of , from the day of , A. D. 19 , at the rent of dollars, payable , the following described premises, to wit: ; and the said C. D. doth hereby for himself, his heirs, executors, and administrators, covenant and promise to pay to the said A. B., his heirs, executors, adminis- trators, or assigns, the said rent, in the proportions aforesaid ; and the said C. D., his heirs, executors, and administrators, shall and will not, at any time during the said term, let or demise, or in any manner dispose of the hereby demised premises, or any part thereof, for all or any part of the term LAW FORMS 361 granted, to any person or persons whatever, nor occupy or use the same in any other manner than as a without the consent and approbation, in writing, of the said A. B., his heirs, executors, administrators, or assigns, first had for that purpose; and shall and will at the expiration of the said term, yield up and surrender the possession of the said prem- ises, with the appurtenances, unto the said A. B., his heirs, executors, administrators, or assigns, in the same good order and condition as the same now are, reasonable wear and tear thereof, and accidents happening by fire or other casualties excepted. It is hereby further agreed, that if the above-named C. D. shall continue on the above-described premises after the termination of the above contract, then this contract shall continue in full force for another , and so on from to until legal notice shall be given for a removal. In witness whereof, the said A. B. and C. D. have here- unto set their hands and seals, the day of , A. D. 19 . Sealed and delivered in 1 A. B. [L. S.] the presence of C. D. [L. S.] PARTNERSHIP AGREEMENT ARTICLE OF AGREEMENT, made the day of_ A. D. 19 , between A. B., of , and C. D. of , witnesseth as follows: The said parties above named have agreed, and by these presents do agree, to become copartners under and by the name or firm of A. B. & Co., in the business (describe business); the said copartner- ship to commence on the day of , A. D. 19 , and to continue And to that end and purpose the said parties contribute to the capital of the firm as follows: (Insert contributions of both parties to firm property), to TDC used and employed in common between them, for the support and management of the said business to their mutual benefit and advantage. And it is agreed by and between the parties to these presents, that at all times during 362 LAW FORMS the continuance of their copartnership, they and each of them will give their attendance, and do their share of their best endeavors, and to the utmost of their skill and power exert themselves, for their joint interest, profit, benefit, and advantage, and truly employ, buy, sell, and merchan- dise with their joint stock, and the increase thereof, in the business aforesaid. And also, that they shall and will at all times during the said copartnership, bear, pay, and dis- charge equally between them, all rents and other expenses that may be required, for the support and management of the said business; and that all gains, profit, and increase that shall come, grow, or arise from or by means of their business, shall be divided between them as follows: (Insert manner of division of profits) ; and all loss that shall happen to their said joint business by ill commodities, bad debts, or other- wise, shall be borne and paid between them as follows: (Insert manner of sharing losses.) (Here may be inserted agreements as to the management of the business, method of accounting, continuance or dissolution of partnership, arbitration of disputes, or any other proper clauses or convenants desired.) In witness whereof, the parties hereto have hereunto interchangeably set their hands and seal the day and year first above written. A. B. [L. S.] Signed, sealed and delivered ] C. D. IL. S.] in the presence of I POWER OF ATTORNEY POWER OF ATTORNEY AS TO COMMERCIAL PAPER Know all men by these presents, that I, A. B., do make, constitute, and appoint C. D. my true and lawful attorney, for me and in my name: 1. To draw checks against my account in the X bank. 2. To indorse notes, checks, drafts, or bills of exchange, which may require my indorsement for deposit as cash or for collection in the said bank. 3. To accept all drafts or bills of exchange which may be LAW FORMS 363 drawn upon me, and to do all lawful acts requisite for effecting these premises; hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said attorney shall do therein by virtue of these presents. In witness whereof, etc. POWER OF ATTORNEY TO SELL LANDS Know all men by these presents, that I, the undersigned (name of selling party), of , county of , and state of , have this day made, constituted, and appointed, and do by these presents make constitute, and appoint (name of attorney), of , in the county of , and state of , my true and lawful attorney for me and in my name to sell and dispose of, absolutely, in fee simple, the following described lot, tract, or parcel of land: (describe land or premises granted), for such price or sum of money, and to such person or persons as he shall think fit and convenient (or, to such persons, and at such price as may be desired) ; and also for me and in my name, and as my act and deed, to sign, execute, acknowledge, and deliver such deed or deeds, and conveyance or convey- ances, for the absolute sale and disposal thereof, or any part thereof, with such clause or clauses, covenant or cove- nants, and agreement or agreements, to be therein con- tained, as my said attorney shall think fit and expedient; hereby ratifying and confirming all such deeds, conveyances, bargains, and sales that shall at any time hereafter be made by said attorney touching or concerning the premises. In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and seal on this day of , A. D. 19 [L. S.] (Signature) PROTEST OF A PROMISSORY NOTE FOR NON-PAYMENT (Insert copy of note, with name of indorser.) State of 1 County of J Be it known, that on the day of the date hereof, at the request of , the holder of the original promis- sory note of which a true copy is above written, I, 364 LAW FORMS notary public for the county of , in the state of , residing in the city of , in said state, during the usual hours of business for such purposes, presented the same at the place of business (or, residence, or other place, naming it), of , the maker, to the said (or, to a clerk in charge of said place of busi- ness, or, as the case may be), and demanded payment thereof, to which he answered (insert reply, or, the sub- stance thereof), or words to that effect. Whereupon I, the said notary, at the request aforesaid, have protested and do hereby solemnly protest against the maker of said note, the indorser, and all others concerned therein, for exchange and reexchange, and all costs, charges, damages, and interest, accrued or to accrue, by reason or in consequence of the non-payment of said note; of all which I notified , the indorser thereof, on the day of the date hereof, by depositing a notice thereof in the post office in the city of , in said state, addressed to said , at the town of , in said state (or, at , the post- office nearest to his place of residence and at which he usually receives his mail). Thus done and protested at the city of , in the county of , and state of , this day of , A. D. 19 . In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my notarial seal the date and year above written. [Seal] Notary Public. PROXY Know all men by these presents, that I, A. B., of_ do hereby appoint C. D., of , to be my substitute and proxy for me and in my name and behalf to vote at election for of the E. F. Company, and at meeting of the stockholders of said E. F. Company as fully as I might or could were I personally present. In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and seal this day of , A. D. 19 . A. B. [L. S.] LAW FORMS 365 BILL OF SALE WITH WARRANTY Know all men by these presents, that I, A. B., of , for and in consideration of the sum of dollars, to me in hand paid by C. D., of , at or before the sealing and delivery of these presents, the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, have granted, sold, and delivered, and by these presents do grant, bargain, sell, and deliver unto the said C. D., all and singular the goods and chattels mentioned in the Schedule hereunto annexed, and marked with the letter "A"; to have and to hold the said goods and chattels unto the said C. D., his heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, to and for his and their own proper use, benefit and behoof, forever. And I, the said A. B., for myself, my heirs, executors, and administrators, the said C. D., his executors, administrators and assigns, from and against all persons whomsoever, shall and will warrant and forever defend by these presents. In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and seal the day of , A. D. 19 A. B. [L. S.] Sealed and delivered in the") presence of us SHORT FORM OF WILL Will of A. B., of , in the county of , and state of : 1. I give, devise, and bequeath all my property, real, personal and mixed, to my wife, C. D., absolutely and forever. 2. I hereby revoke all former wills made by me. 3. I appoint said C. D., to be the executrix of this will, and request that she be not required to give any bond or security as such executrix. A. B. [L. S.] Dated , A. D. 19 Witnesses: residing at residing at residing at 366 COURT REPORTING GENERAL FORM OF WILL Be it remembered, that I, A. B., of being of sound and disposing mind, memory, and understand- ing and considering the uncertainty of life, do therefore make, publish, and declare this to be my last will and testa- ment, in manner and form following, that is to say: Item one: (insert separately various items of devise or bequest, saying, as to dispositions of real estate, "I give, and devise," and as to dispositions of personal property, "I give and bequeath.") And as to all the rest, residue, and remainder of my estate, real, personal, or mixed, of whatever nature or kind, or wheresoever situate at the time of my decease, I do hereby give, devise, and bequeath, unto . And lastly, I do make, constitute, and appoint C. D. and E. F. to be the executors of this, my last will and testament, hereby revok- ing all former wills and testaments by me at any time hereto- fore made, and declaring this to be my last will and testament. In witness whereof, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed my seal the day of , A. D. 19 . A. B. [L. S.] Signed, sealed, published and declared by the testator above named, as and for his last will and testament, in the presence of us, who have hereunto, at his request, subscribed our names in his presence, and in the presence of each other as witnesses hereto. Address Address Address COURT REPORTING Character of Work. The work of a court reporter is that of keeping a proper record of the proceedings of court in civil and criminal cases, particularly that part of the proceed- ings that consists of the testimony, the charge of the court to the jury, etc. Court reporters usually do much other work of a character similar to court work, such, for example, as the taking of depositions, the reporting of inquests COURT REPORTING 367 hearings before boards, proceedings of commissions, etc. They are also often called on to report sermons, speeches, conventions, and banquet proceedings, etc. The various states of the United States differ greatly in their judicial systems. A court may be known in one state as a circuit court, while in another state a court of much the same jurisdiction will be known by an entirely different name. How Appointments Are Made. In some states, the pro- ceedings of practically all of the courts are reported by official court reporters, who are appointed under a state or a municipal civil-service system, competitive examinations being held. In other states, appointments are made without open competitive examinations, and, unfortunately, political influence often plays a part. Still in other states there are important court systems with no provision for official stenographers; in these courts, the stenographer, if engaged, is engaged by one of the parties in the case, or by both. Compensation. In those states that provide by law for official stenographers, there is usually a fixed salary and extra compensation for transcribing. While the salary is not always as high as the nature of the work would warrant, the opportunity for extra fees is usually such as to make the work very profitable. In the city of Chicago the official rate for court reporting and work of similar character is $10 a day for attendance, 50 cents a page for the first copy of the transcript, and 15 cents a page for each carbon copy. The term page refers to a page of double-spaced typewriting. Such high rates as these are not, however, paid in all the various states. How to Prepare for Court Reporting. To fill the position of a court reporter requires much skill as a shorthand writer and also a good knowledge of the court procedure in the state in which the reporting is to be done. The language of witnesses is usually of the conversational style and is much more rapid than the language of a speaker addressing an audience. Consequently, though a large part of the language to be reported consists of common words and phrases, high speed is required. When the lawyer pro- 368 COURT REPORTING vokes the witness or confuses him, questions and answers may come very rapidly; the stenographer is expected to get every important word that passes, including the objec- tions made by opposing counsel. Furthermore, the testi- mony may involve technical matters. In such cases, the witness, who may be a doctor or some technical expert, will use many technical terms. Unless the stenographer has some knowledge of the terms or is an unusually accurate writer he will fail to get a good report. The court stenog- rapher need not be a lawyer, but he should have a working knowledge of law and law terms; otherwise, much of the language will be meaningless to him and he is likely to make serious mistakes in transcribing. In legal phraseology words often have a different meaning than when used in the ordinary way. Thus, in the expres- sion "the plaintiff was concluded" by some particular act or omission to act, the word "concluded," in its ordinary sense, would convey no meaning, while in legal phraseology it is a statement that the plaintiff, by the particular act or omission to act, has placed himself in such a position that he cannot afterwards repudiate its natural consequence. One who is ambitious to gain the essential knowledge of law may do so by serving for some time in a lawyer's office and taking advantage of all opportunities to attend trials. This course is advised by some of the best court reporters. Others, however, believe that the beginner can prepare himself more quickly by studying a few selected works on law and practicing constantly on testimony dic- tation. If the latter course is pursued, the books selected for study should include the code of the state, a work on the law in general, a work* on contracts, one on criminal law, one on torts, and one that will give a knowledge of the trial practice of the state. Ewell's "Medical Jurisprudence" or some similar work will be a great aid in preparing to report inquests, the testimony of doctors, etc. Some court reporters advise a reasonable amount of study of a good work on anatomy. Of course, the court stenographer cannot study all technical subjects and be familiar with every technical term used by witnesses, but his aim should be to prepare COURT REPORTING 369 himself as broadly as possible. Usually he knows before- hand the character of a case to be tried, and if he has reason to believe that electrical experts will be called, he should prepare himself on electrical terms. Staff Work. In very important cases, conventions, etc., the reporting is done by a staff rather than by one man. In such cases, each man reports for a short take and is then relieved in order that he may dictate what he has reported. Methods of Transcribing. The high-priced reporter can scarcely afford to transcribe his own notes. There are several methods by which he may have the transcribing done : (1) To dictate the matter to an accurate amanuensis who will then transcribe; (2) to dictate to phonograph records and have the matter typewritten by speedy operators; (3) to dictate direct to the typewriter. As a good reporter can read his notes about twice as fast as a typewriter operator can write, the skilled men dictate to two operators at the same time, reading from different parts of the notebook. By the time one operator has completed a sentence, the dictator has dictated a sentence to the second operator and is ready to give another sentence from the first section of matter. Much skill in rapid note reading is required in order to carry out this double dictating method. The phonograph method is a popular one, and is used in report- ing the proceedings of the Congress of the United States. One objection to dictating to an amanuensis is that the amanuensis often has little or no knowledge of a technical subject re ported and has difficulty in reading the notes taken, while the only source of error by the phonograph method is through mishearing. The phonograph records can be shaved again and again, thus making the method both speedy and economical. By the use of a staff of reporters and one of the rapid systems of transcribing, it is possible to keep close up to the proceedings and to be able to turn in a complete report within a very short time after each day's adjourn- ment. In exceptional cases, the report is turned in complete within a few minutes of the adjournment. Where the matter is reported in short takes, in order that there may be no errors in assorting and binding the many sheets of the transcript, 370 COURT REPORTING each sheet is headed with the letter adopted by the reporter as well as its own number. Thus, if the reporter used the letter A, the sheets of his first take would all bear the letter A, while the sheets of his second take would be lettered AA, those of his third take, AAA, and so on. Methods of Taking Notes. Familiarity with the practice of the court in which he is reporting will enable the reporter to know what proceedings he should record in his notes and what he need not record. Different reporters follow slightly different methods in taking notes. The style of note taking shown in Fig. 1 is a favorite style and is economical of space. The left half of the sheet is filled before the right half is used. All questions are started in the narrow column to the left on each side, and if more than one line is required for the question, the reporter continues to begin new lines at the left side of the narrow column. If there is any space on a line when the question is completed, the answer is begun there, but answers are always kept entirely within the wide column. As the questions commence in the narrow column, this method results in all answers, except very short ones, being indented. As court reporters are frequently asked to refer to previous testimony, notes should be written with a view to ready reference. If there were no separation between questions, it would be a difficult matter to refer to any given question. Objections may be distinguished by indenting them a little more than answers. The notes shown in Fig. 1 are those of the Osgoodby system. Those who do not follow the method of note taking shown in Fig. 1 use a notebook with only a single column, but keep all answers to the right of a printed or imaginary marginal line, as shown in Fig. 2 a page of Benn Pitman notes. Words in Longhand. As a general rule, the practice of writing words in longhand in shorthand notes is a poor one. Shorthand is fully adequate. Insert vowels if the word is unusual or technical. Often, however, in testimony report- ing, an occasional word in longhand is an oasis in a desert of shorthand notes and serves an excellent purpose in finding the evidence on some special point. For example, if the CVs . ^ a (P lu i.. +yir. fa . r , il -fh* c /A A v* -=4- 1 A -f V, v>^U [ / 371 FIG. 1 372 COURT REPORTING -_._ lj. -t= x^ 1. ^\r..^..6., _>_^r..:_i. v .^.Ln^.L -.iJr, FIG. 2 COURT REPORTING 373 word "check" were written out at the place where the testimony began to deal largely with some point about a December 18, 1904. COURT MET AT 10 A. M. , PURSUANT TO ADJOURNMENT. The direct examination of Frederick Jones was resumed by Mr. Hathaway. FIG. 3 check, the longhand word would likely be an aid in referring to that testimony. Editing Transcript. In business-letter work and even in the reporting of addresses, the high-grade stenographer is permitted, and even encouraged, to correct grammatical errors, ambiguities, etc., but the court reporter should be exceedingly careful about making changes. The mistake that a witness makes may afterwards be used by an attorney as evidence that the memory or the intelligence of the witness is poor. Of course, no good would come of perpetuating a gross grammatical error in the written record, nor need the reporter trouble himself about some immaterial repetition that was lost. Arrangement of Transcript. Court reporters usually use paper about 8 in. X 10 in. for transcribing testimony. The end of a day's proceedings, if the evidence is not all in, Edward Franklin 5 10 12 George Meadows William H. Blackwell 13 22 18 25 20 28 21 34 1 FIG. 4 may be noted in the following way: "Court here adjourned to meet at 10 A M. of the following day" (or such other time 374 COURT REPORTING as may be specified). When the proceedings are resumed, a brief memorandum of the fact should be made somewhat in the style shown in Fig. 3. STATE 0? VIRGIKA: Tens, 1903. LKR0Y w. SANDERS', Plaintiff, ) Versus : In Chancery. HENRY C. FAIRCHIED, Defendant. ) This cause came on to be heard at a term of this court held In and for the County of Richmond, at the courthouse in the city of Warsaw, the 28th day of Hoyember, 0.903, be- fore his Honor, T. R. B. Wright, and a jury. APPEARANCES: Ilr. Thomas Lansdale for the Plaintiff. Mr. Henry DeShlelds for the Defendant. C. Eugene Hallett, a juror, haTlng been duly sworn as testified as follows: Mr. Lansdale: Q. JCr. Hallett, are you related in any way to the defendant In this case? A. I am not. Q. Hare you expressed or formed any opinions about the case? FIG. 5 Miscellaneous Points. The reporter should be close enough to hear well and has a right to insist on distinct speaking. If the witness stops to indicate measurements and demon- COURT REPORTING 375 strates by referring to the length of some such object as the court-room table, the reporter should stop the testimony long enough to record such memoranda as "(pointing to O CROSS-EXAMIHATIOH Mr. Williams: ft. Mr. Borland, have you ever had any dealings with Harry Travers that were aot satisfactory? A. So, sir; I never have. Q. Did you ever know him to do a dishonest act? A. I never did in my life. ft. From what you have known of Mr. Travers by work- ing side by side with him for six years, do you believe he intended to keep that money of the National Storage Com- pany for his personal use? Objected to by the attorney for the Commonwealth on the ground that the defense is seeking to draw out an opinion from the witness that is not competent evi- fendant's Intention is improper and inadmissible. Objection sustained; exception taken by the de- fense. By Mr. Williams: ft. Well, I will ask you another question; Did Mr. lars of the company's money in his possession? A. Yea, he did, and I asked him how he happened to tve It. ft. Was this before he was arrested? FIG. 6 court-room table)," otherwise a reference in the notes such as "it was as long as that" would be meaningless. 376 THE CIVIL SERVICE The original notes of evidence are of course important and should be kept on file until there is no possibility of their being of further use. The difficulties that may arise through the use by a reporter of peculiar signs of his own invention are well demonstrated by the retrial made necessary in at least one case because of the death of the reporter while the trial was in progress. There are reporters who are able to tran- scribe each others' notes with facility, and in a number of instances this has saved much trouble and expense. A form similar to the one shown in Fig. 4 should be used as an index to the testimony of the various witnesses or to the different parts of the document. Figs. 5 and 6 show two other good forms in use by court reporters. THE CIVIL SERVICE The position of stenographer in the United States Civil Service is in some respects an attractive one. A number of those now holding very responsible government positions began their careers as stenographers. Employes in the executive departments are granted 1 month's vacation with full pay every year; and, if required, one additional month will be allowed with fall pay in case of illness. The Civil Service Commission. The head offices of the Civil Service Commission are in Washington. The examina- tions are held in all parts of the United States under the supervision of examiners sent out from Washington or of special local boards. Places and Dates of Examinations. The entire country is divided by the Civil Service Commission into twelve districts. Each district comprises all post-office, custom-house, and internal-revenue positions within its limits that are filled by competitive examinations, and other positions as well. The aim of the Commission in selecting places and dates for the examinations is to give residents of every part of the country an opportunity once or twice a year to present themselves for examination at some point convenient to their homes, thus saving the time and expense of a long journey. THE CIVIL SERVICE 377 Examinations are now held in every state and territory except Alaska, in from two to seven different points. The usual times of holding the examinations are during the spring and fall, but special examinations are often held. Local post offices can usually furnish information as to the time, place, and other particulars of many of the examina- tions. If the local post office cannot supply the information, a request for information should be sent to the Civil Service Commission, Washington, D. C., mentioning the position for which the competitor desires to prepare. Ineligible Persons. No person is eligible to an examina- tion : (a) Who is not a citizen of or does not owe allegiance to the United States. (6) Who is on the date of examination below the mini- mum or more than 1 year over the maximum age limitation prescribed for the examination for which he applies. The minimum age for stenographers for United States service is 18. In the Philippine service the minimum age is 18 and the maximum age is 40. In the Isthmian Canal Service the minimum is 20 and the maximum is 45. (c) Who is physically disqualified for the service which he seeks. (d) Who is addicted to the habitual use of intoxicating beverages to excess. 0) Who has within approximately 1 year passed in an examination for the same position or for any position cov- ered by the same examination for which it is desired to again apply. (/) Who is enlisted in the United States Army or Navy and has not secured permission for his examination from the Secretary of War or the Secretary of the Navy, respectively. (g) Who has been dismissed from the public service for delinquency or misconduct within 1 year preceding thedate of his application. (h) Who has failed after probation to recetve absolute appointment to the position for which he again applies within 1 year from the date of the expiration of his pro- bationary servjce. 378 THE CIVIL SERVICE (i) Who has made a false statement in his application or has been guilty of fraud or deceit in any manner connected with his application or examination or has been guilty of crime or infamous or notoriously disgraceful conduct. (/) Soldiers or sailors discharged for desertion. How Appointments Are Made. Whenever a vacancy occurs anywhere in the service, the names of the three highest on the eligible list for that position and of the sex required, are submitted to the appointing officer, who selects the one he deems best suited for the position and returns the names of the other two to the register to await the next appoint- ment. From this it will be seen that no political influence, ties of friendship, or religion can aid any applicant. The rules and regulations are such that the Commission has no power to certify a name out of its order. During the last 10 years the eligible list of male stenog- raphers has not at any time been crowded. Salaries. The salaries of government stenographers range at appointment from $480 to $1,500 a year. Male stenog- raphers are usually appointed at from $840 to $900, but a number of appointments are made at higher salaries. Male stenographers willing to go to the Philippines or to the Isthmus of Panama receive appointments at not less than $1,200 a year and may receive as much as $1,500 a year at appointment. Women do not command as high salaries as men, nor is the chance for appointment so good. Ordinarily, women are not appointed at higher salaries than $50 or $60 a month, but some appointments are made at higher com- pensation. State and Municipal Civil Service. The economy and efficiency brought about by the competitive system of ap- pointments have led to the application of merit principles in filling state and municipal positions. In a number of states and cities there are now civil-service systems that follow closely the general plan of the Federal system here described. General Plan of Examinations. The weight or importance of all the subjects and requirements in the examination is THE CIVIL SERVICE 379 represented by 100. Stenography, being the principal sub- ject in the examination for stenographers, is given the greatest weight. As the government employs typewriter operators that are not stenographers, separate typewriting and stenographic examinations are held. Those who are both stenographers and typewriter operators, take both examinations (taking, however, such subjects as letter writing, spelling, etc. only once) ; the general average of the two examinations is then computed. Deductions of from 1 to 50 points are made for each error. The competitor's rating is computed separately on each sub- ject, and then a general average is made. To be eligible for appointment, it is necessary to attain a general average of 70 per cent, with the single exception that applicants entitled to "preference," because of honorable discharge from the military or naval service of the United States by reason of disability resulting from wounds or sickness incurred in the line of duty, need attain only 65 per cent. The examination for service in the Philippines and on the Isthmus of Panama is the same as that for service in the United States. By filing a separate application for all three branches, the competitor may pass for all at one examina- tion. Method of Preparing for Examination. Do not rely on books of questions and answers in preparing for a civil- service examination. The questions asked at one examina- tion are not at all likely to be asked again. Any person or concern that claims to be able to supply the exact questions and tests to be used in future examinations is undoubtedly unreliable. The only safe method of preparing is to train thoroughly on all the subjects included in the examination so as to earn a high rating on each. The tests in the civil- service examination for stenographers are by no means easy, and the competitor should not confine himself to special practice in shorthand and typewriting, important as the'se subjects are, but should review grammar, letter writing, and spelling and improve in penmanship. Specially pre- pared drills in spelling should be practiced, and the stenog- rapher should have careful criticism of the grammar, com- 380 THE CIVIL SERVICE position, and punctuation of letters composed on assigned subjects. Subjects Included in Examination. The examination for the position of stenographer necessitates thorough prepara- tion in the following subjects: Spelling, arithmetic, gram- mar, letter writing, penmanship, copying from rough draft, copying from plain copy, copying and spacing (typewriting), stenography. 10 law passed/filT many years (by congress) has been more in the In- tfu-y^^^ i' terest of the tellers of this country than this t It is the best < tempted I ^WSJ^u.; A : i I The first route established in ttej district was^a llti] than two years ago,(?rom my home town of Gadsden^ The carri has great pride in building it up. At the aniversary of it's establishes had a 'little entertai FIG. 1 The first four subjects of this examination are of a gen- eral character. The subject for the letter-writing test is assigned by the examiner. The remaining subjects are of a technical character, involving the writing of tabular matter and exercises in copying, spacing, and dictation. Both accuracy and speed are given consideration in rating the typewriting and stenographic tests in the government examination. THE CIVIL SERVICE 38 1 Ample time is allowed for the required work if one has- made thorough preparation and applies himself diligently during the examination hours. All of the work must be done in the examination room, and no books, memoranda, or other assistance is allowed. Too much stress cannot be put on the fact that accuracy and neatness are important points. The reports of the The rural-delivery system is yet in its infancy, and I desire to say that no law passed by Congress in many years has been more in the interest of the masses of the toilers of this country than this. It is the best educator for the people in the rural districts that posed to beginning thus early to meddle with a system that is doing so much good. I have only a few routes in my district, yet wherever they are es- tablished the effect is soon apparent. The first route established in my district was from my home town of Gadaden, a little less than two years ago. The carrier, Mr. Button, is an intelligent farmer, who is as proud of his routs as an engineer becomes of his engine, and has great pride in building it up. Bent at his son's house and invited several friends to be present, and I Was one of his honored guests. In the meantime I had secured two other routes from the same place, and the tarriers were both there at the old man's reception, both of them men of reputation and intelli- his route. FIG. 2 Civil Service Commission show that a large percentage of competitors either fail wholly on the examination or are unable to attain a satisfactory percentage through haste and carelessness, both in reading the examples and direc- tions and in writing them. It should be remembered that the examination of the papers is made by persons who have had no opportunity to observe the person that made them nor of knowing that he is capable of doing neat, rapid work. 382 THE CIVIL SERVICE The ratings are made entirely on the appearance of the examination papers ; if they are slovenly and inaccurate they will be rated accordingly, no matter how proficient the com- petitor may be. The time to cultivate accuracy, neatness, and speed is before the examination, for unless some gross injustice is done no application for a reexamination will be considered. Of course, a person that fails to pass in an examination may, upon filing a new application in due time, enter another examination. As all competitors are required to furnish their own type- writers, it is best to use in practice the machine that will be United States Navy Pay Table ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: Rank At Sea :::::::::: On Shore Duty On Leave 6r waiting orders Admiral $13,500 $13,500 2 975 000 2|550 |500 2,125 Lieuten nts (Junior Grade) Ensigns ,500 1,275 Chief Boatswain, Chief Gunners, Sailmakers Naval Cadets .. 1,400 500 1,400 500 **$5o5 Kates 900 VOO 500 Medical and Pay Directors, and FIG. 3 taken to the examination, or one of a similar make. Any kind of a typewriter may be used. Applicants must pro- vide themselves with pens, penholders, pencils, erasers, and ink, but no paper or blotters. As the civil-service examiners are not confined to any par- ticular form of tests and are likely to vary the exercises from time to time, it is well to practice a variety of exercises and be prepared for anything that may come. Copying From Rough Draft. This test is the copying of an exercise containing interlineations and corrections and a few THE CIVIL SERVICE 383 errors. The competitor is not expected to edit the language, but is required to correct all errors and to make what is known as a "clean" copy. Fig. 1 is an example of a rough- draft exercise. Fig. 2 shows a clean copy of the matter. Copying From Plain Copy. The test for copying from plain copy is not a difficult one. The only requirement is that the competitor make an exact copy, word for word, and letter for letter, of an exercise furnished. Copying and Spacing. In the test of copying and spacing the competitor is required to make an exact copy of some such exercise as that shown in Fig. 3. Tabulating Statistics. Another form of exercise sometimes given by civil-service examiners is the arranging of statistics into appropriate tables. The statistics are given to com petitors in solid form that is, as reading matter, and each competitor must use his own judgment as to the arrangement of the table, except that the examiners usually specify the number of columns that the table must show. If the following statistics are compared with Fig. 4 a good idea will be had of the test. The following statistics show the causes of death in the census year 1900, with proportion from each cause per 100,000: Pneumonia, number of deaths 105,971, proportion 10,688; consumption, number 111,059, proportion 10,198; heart disease, number 69,315, proportion 6,671; diar- rheal diseases, number 46,907, proportion 4,514; un- known causes, number 40,539, proportion 3,901; dis- eases of the kidneys, number 36,724, proportion 3,534; typhoid fever, number 38,379, proportion 3,405; cancer, number 29,475, proportion 2,837; old age, number 29,222, proportion 2,812; apoplexy, number 26,901, pro- portion 2,589. In the test just described the competitor is allowed to make a pencil diagram before beginning to typewrite. It is very important to provide for columns wide enough to hold the longest lines that are to go in them. Writing From Dictation. Probably the most trying test of civil-service examination is the writing of dictation direct on the typewriter. It is not given invariably, but the stenographer should be prepared. Usually the competitoi has not been accustomed to taking dictation direct on the 384 THE CIVIL SERVICE machine. If some regular practice is had, this part cf the examination will prove easy and a high rating secured. The matter dictated is not difficult. One of the examiners will dictate to each competitor separately a passage or simple letter of 150 or 200 words, which must be written direct on the machine. The dictation will be given in groups of four or five words at a time, and as speed is an important element in this exercise, the examiner will read as rapidly as the com- petitor may desire and indicate. The examiner will call out CAUSES OP DEATH IN THE CENSUS- YEAR 190O with proportion from each cause per 100,000 Causes of Death 1900 Number Propor- tion 105,^71 111,059 69,315 46,9O7 40,539 36,724 38,379 29,475 29,222 : 26,901 J 10,688 10,198 6,671 4,514 3,901 3,534 3*405 2,837 2,812 2,589 Heart Disease Diseases of the kidneys ... FIG. 4 all punctuation marks and paragraphs. The written sheet must be surrendered immediately after the competitor has finished writing, no time being allowed for correction. The following matter will give an idea of how such exercises are read: Date a letter Washington D C January the second nineteen hundred and four Name Honorable Claude A Swanson address Richmond Virginia period Sir colon paragraph answering your inquiry of December thirtieth comma I beg leave to inform you that the post-office THE CIVIL SERVICE 385 department prefers comma when possible comma to have the names of all new post offices consist of a single word semicolon and it is best to have the word a short one period paragraph the persons interested should make up a list of the preferred names comma consulting the post-office directory in order that they may be sure there are not already offices of the names they select period for instance comma if the suggested name quote Barnes quote should be adopted for the new Virginia post office comma it might seriously conflict in the mail service with Barnes comma Pennsylvania comma when the names of the two states were abbreviated on en- \relopes period it is therefore preferred to adopt short names- as dissimilar as possible to those of existing post offices comma in order that chances for error in the mail service may be reduced to a minimum period Respect- fully yours The Shorthand Tests. The matter used for the dictation exercises is changed from time to time, so that the stenog- rapher can be best prepared by practicing on a variety of material. Sometimes a letter similar to the one in the preceding paragraph is dictated and in addition a number of paragraphs selected from an address or a report. Usually the matter is more difficult than simple business letters. Therefore, the stenographer will do well to practice some matter such as is shown in Fig. 5. Dictation is given at 80 words a minute, 100 words a minute, 120 words a minute, and 140 words a minute in the stenographic tests. A com- petitor may take several or all of the tests and then decide which he will transcribe. One writing 80 words a minute and transcribing it accurately can pass this part of the examination, but as higher ratings are given those who qualify on the more rapid tests, it is desirable to be able to write 120 words a minute or 140 words a minute, if possible. The transcript of the notes may be made either with the typewriter or in longhand. Not more than 1 hour will be allowed for making the transcripts. Competitors who take the 80-word dictation and also transcribe one of the dictations at a higher rate will, in determining the ratings on the stenographic test, be given the mark on the exercise in which they have attained the higher percentage on speed and accuracy combined, and the other exercise will not be considered. Both speed and accuracy are given equal 386 SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY weights in the rating, the ratings for speed for the different rates of dictation being, as follows: 80 words per minute, 70 per cent, in speed; 100 words per minute, 80 per cent, in speed; 120 words per minute, 90 per cent, in speed; MR. StJLZER. The letter-carriers are obliged to carry and distribute the mail so many times a day on their respective routes, according to sched- ule; and if" there are not enough nen to do it in eight hours, then the letter-carrier must -work on and on until the mail is delivered, according eighteen hours out of the twenty-four. UR, TAUEWRT. I ask the gentleman if they do not get extra pay for this extra time they work, so that they get pay for all the work they do over eight hours these herd-worked people who never resign and hardly ever die. MR. SULZER. I know toy friend from Soi cal government. MR. TA1SERT. I want to do what is right. MR. SULZER. We know the gentleman does not want Vo spend a dollar of th him, however, as I believe I have convinced many meribers of this House, faithfully, who are compelled to toil diligently day in and day out, who are honest and industrious at all times and who, In my Judgment, are the poorest paid, take it all in all, in the employ of the Government they against this amendment. CONGRESS IOHAL RECORD FIG. 5 140 words per minute, 100 per cent, in speed. The rating for accuracy -is determined by the correctness of the tran- script. If a competitor fails to attain a rating of at least 70 per cent, on stenography the other subjects will not be rated. METHODS OF SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY CHECKS AND DRAFTS Personal Check. A personal check is merely a written order by a depositor, directing the bank or banker to pay to the payee named in the check a certain amount. While SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY 387 this is a safe and convenient way of sending money and one that is followed generally, business concerns hesitate to accept checks from persons or firms of whose responsibility they know nothing, for after goods are shipped the check may be found to be worthless. Therefore, many concerns advertise that personal checks from unknown persons will not be accepted. A fee of 10 cents is sometimes charged for the collection of checks. Certified Check. A certified check is one that a bank has certified as being good for the amount named, and after such certification the bank will hold the amount named until the check is returned for payment. The certified check is always an acceptable method of remitting. Bank Draft. A bank draft is regarded more favorably than the personal check, for the reason that the bank receives the money from the purchaser of the draft and then becomes responsible for the payment of the draft. The bank drawing a draft instructs another bank in or near the city in which the payee lives to pay the amount named. Banks do not ordinarily charge their customers for executing drafts. MONEY ORDERS EXPRESS MONEY ORDERS Express companies sell money orders that are payable at all their various branch offices or that may be deposited in banks and collected as checks are collected. A receipt is furnished that insures the purchaser of the order against loss. No written application is required. These orders will be received as cash by business concerns generally. They are payable not merely in the city or town in which the payee lives but at any express office. They may be indorsed any number of times. They do not become invalid because of age. In case of loss, a duplicate can be secured quickly. The express office at which the order is presented does not wait for an advice, but pays immediately on identification. Fig. 1 is a reproduction of an express money order. 388 SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY Rates. The following are the usual rates for express money orders: Not over $2.50, 3 cents; not over $5, 5 cents; not over $10, 8 cents; not over $20, 10 cents; not over $30, FIG. 1 12 cents; not over $40, 15 cents; not over $50, 18 centsr,i not over $60, 20 cents; not over $75, 25 cents; not over $100, 30 cents. POSTAL MONEY ORDERS Postal money orders may be obtained at or paid at 35,000 money-order offices in the United States, and may be drawn on post offices in forty-eight foreign countries. This system provides an absolutely safe and convenient means of transmitting money. On payment of the sum to be sent, and a small fee, to the postmaster of a money-order office, a money order can be drawn for any desired amount not exceeding $100, payable at any money-order office designated by the applicant. When a larger sum than $100 is to be sent, additional orders may be obtained. For example, to send a sum of $275.60 it would be necessary to get three money orders for the following amounts: $100, $100, and $75.60. International money orders payable in almost any part of the world reached by mail may be obtained at all of the larger post offices and at many of the smaller ones. A growing use of the money-order system is found in domestic money orders payable at the office of issue to the purchaser. This method of depositing for safe keeping small savings appears to be increasing in favor with the general public. SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY 389 Fig. 1 shows the manner of filling out an application for a postal money order. If an office does a large business, money-order applications may be had from the post-office Dollars Cents Jtimp of litulr* Cffk.. (Form No. MO! ^Fee cents o m Space above this line Is for the Postmaster's record.to be filled by him. 2 Application for Domestic Money Order. i department with the name and address of the firm in the blank spaces. This will make mistakes on the part of the remitters less likely. 390 SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY Identification The person who presents an order for payment must be prepared to prove his identity. In case of payment to the wrong person, the department will see that the amount is made good to the owner, provided that the wrong payment was not brought about through fault on the part of the remitter, payee, or indorsee. A money order may be paid on a written order or power of attorney from the payee, as well as on his own indorsement. More than one indorsement on a money order is prohibited by law. The stamp impressions placed on the back of orders by banks are not regarded as indorsements. Invalid Orders. An order that has not been paid or repaid within 1 year from the last day of the month of its issue is invalid and not payable. The owner, however, may obtain payment of the amount thereof by making application through the postmaster at any money-order office, or to the Post-Office Department at Washington, District of Columbia, for a warrant for the amount of the order. Lost Orders. In all cases of lost orders, the remitter, payee, or indorsee may make application for a duplicate through either* the office at which the original order was issued or the office on which it was drawn. No charge is made for issuing a duplicate. MONEY-ORDER RATES DOMESTIC ORDERS Cents Sums not exceeding $2.50 3 Sums not exceeding $5 5 Sums over $5 and not exceeding $10 8 Sums over $10 and not exceeding $20 .' 10 Sums over $20 and not exceeding $30 12 Sums over $30 and not exceeding $40 15 Sums over $40 and not exceeding $50 18 Sums over $50 and not exceeding $60 20 Sums over $60 and not exceeding $75 25 Sums over $75 and not exceeding $100 30 FOREIGN ORDERS Fees for foreign money orders when payable in Apia, Austria, Belgium, Bolivia, Chile, Costa Rica, Denmark, SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY 391 Egypt, Germany, Hongkong, Hungary, Japan, Luxemburg, Mexico, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Orange River Colony, Peru, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, and Transvaal: Cents For sums not exceeding $10 8 Over $10 to $20 10 Over $20 to $30 15 Over $30 to $40 20 Over $40 to $50 25 Over $50 to $60 30 Over $60 to $70 35 Over $70 to $80 40 Over $80 to $90 45 Over $90 to $100 50 Fees when payable in Cape Colony, France, Great Britain, Greece, Republic of Honduras, Italy, New South Wales, Queensland, Russia, Salvador, South Australia, Tasmania, and Victoria: Cents For sums not exceeding $10 10 Over $10 to $20 .' 20 Over $20 to $30 30 Over $30 to $40 40 Over $40 to $50 50 Over $50 to $60 60 Over $60 to $70 70 Over $70 to $80 80 Over $80 to $90 90 Over $90 to $100 $1 It should be understood that these tables are subject to change, it being the aim of the Post-Office Department to make reductions whenever conditions warrant such action. LETTER OF CREDIT A letter of credit is a letter issued by a banker, author- izing a specified person, firm, or association, known as the accredited party, to value (draw) on one or more bankers for an amount or for amounts not exceeding in all a stated sum, 392 SENDING AND CARRYING MONEY and guaranteeing the acceptance and payment of those drafts if drawn in compliance with the terms specified in the letter. The object for which credits are opened and letters of credit are issued by bankers is to facilitate the financing of commerce and travel, by providing merchants, travelers, and others with the means by which to obtain funds. The charge does not ordinarily exceed 1 per cent, of the amount named in the letter of credit. TRAVELERS' CHECKS In making a tour through the United States or traveling in any of the principal foreign countries, a convenient and safe method of carrying money will be found in the travelers' checks, an example of which is shown in Fig. 1. The travelers' checks of the American Express Company are issued in denominations of $10, $20, $50, $100, and $200. FIG. 1 They show on the face the foreign money value, and are practically certified checks of the express company payable without discount or commission by 15,000 correspondents throughout the world. There are banks in nearly all cities of good size that sell these checks. The cost is one-half of 1 per cent, of the amount of the check or checks purchased, minimum charge, 50 cents. To provide the necessary security and a simple means of identification, the person who is to use the check places his signature in the upper left corner at the time of purchase, leaving other spaces blank. When in need of money or when wishing to pay a HINTS ON BANKING 393 bill with one of these checks, the check should be completely filled out by inserting the name of the city or town, the date and to whom payable ; and the signature is again affixed in the lower left corner, in the presence of the person accept- ing the check. As the two signatures must agree, no other identification is necessary. As these checks will be received by the principal hotels, steamship, and sleeping-car companies, and by many rail- road companies, merchants, and others, the system saves many trips to the banks. The face value of lost or destroyed checks will be refunded by the express company, provided immediate notice is given of the loss with details as to num- bers, amount, etc. and an affidavit and a bond of indemnity is executed. Unused checks will be redeemed at face value. HINTS ON BANKING Opening an Account. The first step to be taken in open- ing an account is to secure an introduction to the manager of the bank. The teller that takes the first deposit will give the depositor a pass book, the credit entries on which will always be made by a responsible officer of the bank; these entries will be receipts for the various sums deposited. The blank deposit tickets furnished by the bank should, how- ever, always be filled out by the depositor and proved by the teller. The deposit ticket serves as a double check on the transaction, and if at any future time a question should arise as to the total amount deposited, or as to any separate item, the ticket can be produced. The pass book should be left at the bank monthly to be balanced, and will be returned on application, a day or two later, showing the balance and accompanied by the canceled checks, for which the depositor may be asked to sign a receipt. It is the depositor's duty to examine carefully the account and checks and report at once any possible errors. At the time of the opening of an account the depositor's signature will be taken in a book or on a card kept for that purpose, and all subsequent signatures and indorsements should be written in precisely the same way. 394 HINTS ON BANKING Drawing of Checks. Checks may be made payable either to the order of a certain person or to bearer. In the former case the payee must be known to be the proper person and must indorse the check before the money will be paid; in the latter case, any one holding the check is entitled to present it, and no questions will be asked. While a bank cannot be held responsible for the payment of a bearer check to the wrong person, if suspicious circumstances warrant such action the paying teller may refuse to cash a check until an investigation is made. In case a check is lost or stolen, or obtained by fraud, telegraph or telephone the bank immediately to "stop pay- ment," and then confirm this order at once in writing. In writing a check the maker should take every care to protect himself against the dishonest intentions of any future holder of his paper. Never write a check with a lead pencil, but always use pen and ink. Commence to write the amount as far to the left as possible, so that nothing can be inserted before it, fill up the remainder of the space intended for the amount with a heavy line, so that nothing can be added after the amount. Write figures plainly and see that the amount in figures corresponds with the written amount. When there is a difference, the amount spelled out will ordinarily be regarded as the correct one. In making out a check in payment of a bill, it is a good idea to include a memorandum such as "In full payment of bill for April, 1909." Though such a check is not always a binding legal receipt, it usually serves all purposes of a receipt after it has been collected. Indorsements. Indorsements in blank is simply the sig- nature of the payee on the back of a check or other paper. In depositing, all checks should be indorsed by the depositor, whether payable to his order or not. Indorsements to a specified person should read: Pay to the order of John Smith (Signature of indorser) The instrument is then payable only when indorsed by *'John Smith" or whoever is named in the indorsement. HINTS ON BANKING 395 The legal signature of a person who cannot write is made by a mark in the following manner: His John (X) Jones Mark Witness: A, B. Smith, 39 Broadway. The signer must make his mark in the presence of a dis- interested person, who must witness the signature in the manner shown above. Merely touching the pen is suf- ficient for the "mark" signature to be legal. The indorsement on a note or draft is an agreement to become liable for the payment of it in case the maker fails to meet it at the proper time. In indorsing a check that is made payable to you, write your name as it appears in the check even if it is written wrong. For example, if the check is made out to J. Brown, indorse it that way and then write John M. Browne under the other indorsement if the latter signature is your usual one. If a check is made out to John M. Browne, Secretary and Treasurer, it should be indorsed as " John M. Browne, Secretary and Treasurer." Indorsements are frequently started at the wrong end of a check. The proper place for the first indorsement is the end that is the reverse of the left hand, or stub, end of the face. Presenting of Checks. Always present checks for payment as soon as possible. Much annoyance, and sometimes heavy loss, is avoided by following this rule. Drawers of checks usually prefer to have them paid with as little delay as possible, so they do not have to keep track of outstanding checks. Furthermore, if the holder of a check neglects to present it for payment at once, and the bank fails before he has done so, he cannot have recourse to the maker of the check if more than reasonable time in which to present it has elapsed since the check was given. A man once lent his local school board the sum of $500, giving his check for the money. The check was not pre- sented at once, and the bank on which it was drawn failed. 396 HINTS ON BANKING The drawer of the check, claiming that he had actually lent the cash, brought an action against the school board to recover the amount of the loan, and won his case, although the defendants had never had a dollar of the money. Exchange. The term "Exchange" means simply a check or draft drawn by a bank in one city on its correspondent bank in another city payable on demand to the order of the person named on the face. A draft is bought by any person wishing to make a remittance to another at a distance, and the sender pays the face of the draft to the issuing bank, in addition to a small charge for the accommodation. Drafts should be made payable to the purchaser and indorsed over to the parties for whom the money is intended. This custom of banking exchange forms a safe, cheap, and most convenient method of transmitting money by mail, as the money can be collected only on proper identification and indorsement, and if a draft is lost or destroyed the issuing bank will give a duplicate or refund the money after waiting a reasonable time. Certificate of Deposit. A certificate of deposit is a paper given by the bank in return for money left on special deposit. Such deposits are not entered in the pass book and are not subject to check, but can be withdrawn by returning the certificate. A certificate of deposit is both a receipt for the money deposited and the bank's promise to pay it to the proper person on return of the certificate properly indorsed. If it is desired to withdraw a part of the sum deposited, the first certificate is canceled by the bank and another is issued for the balance left on deposit. Certified Checks. A certified check is charged to the drawer's account at the time it is certified, so as to preclude all possibilities of having no funds to meet it when presented for payment. It is strictly against the United States law for a national bank to certify a check for more than the amount of the balance to the credit of the drawer. A state bank, however, can do this, at its own risk, unless prohibited from doing so by the state in which the bank is located. Certified checks circulate as cash, but no one is compelled to receive them in payment, as they are not legal tender. HINTS ON BANKING 397 Remember that if you get your check certified and wish to get another for a different amount, you should not destroy the first; if you do, the bank will probably require a bond of indemnity before it will issue a duplicate. Collection of Negotiable Paper. The collection department is an important branch of a bank's business and a great convenience to its customers. Notes, drafts, and all negoti- able paper will be received for collection, and it is the bank's duty to notify its customers promptly of the payment or refusal of all collections. Notes intended for collection should be left at the bank several days before maturity and the banks always notify the payer a few days before the note falls due. Notes falling due on a legal holiday, or on a Saturday or Sunday are payable on the week day following; and when two legal holidays, or a Sunday and a holiday come to- gether, they are payable on the next succeeding day. When a collection is forwarded to several banks in turn before it reaches its destination, each bank is responsible to the owner for prompt action in forwarding the collection, and the bank that actually makes the collection can be held liable for the payment of the sum collected, less charges. It is perfectly proper for a bank to make a small charge for collecting checks or drafts drawn on banks in remote places. Protest. A protest is a legal document drawn up by a notary public giving notice of non-payment of a note, draft, or bill of exchange. This document is attached to the dishonored paper and each indorser is officially notified that payment has been refused. The holder must give notice to all whom he wishes to hold liable, but notice to any one indorser binds him, and he in turn must notify any previous indorsers whom he wishes to hold liable. Notice of protest should always be given in person whenever possible, as notice by mail would have to be proven to have been received in due time. Drawing on Debtors. A very common method of collect- ing accounts is by means of drafts. These can be drawn either payable "at sight" or at a specified time, in which case they are called "time drafts." 398 HINTS ON BANKING When a time draft is presented by the collecting bank, it is customary for the drawee to acknowledge the obligation by writing across the face of the paper the word "Accepted," followed by the date and his signature. This is a formal acceptance of the debt and is a promise to pay when due. It is customary, but not obligatory, to present time paper for acceptance, as the drawee is not a party to the bill until it has been formally accepted by him. Overdrawing. The fact of your having kept a credit balance with your banker for a considerable length of time does not, as some persons appear to believe, entitle you to overdraw your account. The law on this point is very clear and states that a cashier or teller has no right to pay money on a check when the funds to the credit of the drawer are insufficient. It further states that the drawer of the check is a party to the wrongful act, and that the bank can recover the amount. In handling a great number of active accounts every day, it is almost impossible to prevent overdrawing in a few cases, but it is one of the strictest and most important laws of banking to allow no overdrafts. Bank Loans. Banks are always ready to lend money on proper security and in reasonable sums, and naturally will give precedence to the application of a regular customer of the bank. The national and state laws governing banking regulate to a certain extent what kind of security a bank may take, so that some institutions are compelled to decline what others would readily accept. The depositor is at liberty to offer his banker any paper he may want discounted, provided it is in his opinion first- class security, but he should remember that the banker is under no obligation to accept the security, or even to give his reasons for declining to do so. Identification. In order to be protected against the dishonest practices of unknown persons, banks are compelled to require that all strangers shall be introduced by some responsible acquaintance of the bank who can vouch for the character and integrity of the other. In cases where out-of- town checks or checks on other local banks are presented HINTS ON BANKING 399 for payment, the bank usually requires the identifier, as well as the payee, to indorse the paper, so that in case the check should prove worthless, the bank will be protected by two persons instead of one. Identification often causes annoyance to persons unac- quainted in the locality of the bank, but it is not only a protection to the bank but to all honorable persons who are in the habit of giving their checks in lieu of cash. Forgery. A bank is required to know the handwriting of its customer, and if it pays a check on a forged signature it is liable for the amount. The above rule is not extended beyond the signature, and the fact that the amount and name of payee are written in a different handwriting from the signature is not a matter of suspicion. A fraudulent alteration in the body of a check after signature* constitutes a forgery as much as the simulation of the signature itself, and by such alteration the check becomes void, even in the hands of an innocent holder, and payment by the bank is the loss of the bank, unless it can be shown that the negligence of the drawer laid the foundation for fraud. Cautions. Don't draw a check unless you have the money in bank or in your possession to deposit. Don't test the courage and generosity of your bank by presenting, or allowing to be presented, your check for a larger sum than your balance. Don't draw a check and send it to a person out of the city expecting to make it good before it can possibly get back; sometimes telegraphic advice is asked about such checks. Don't exchange checks with anybody; this is called "kiting," and is soon discovered by your bank. It does your friend no good and discredits you. Don't give your check to a stranger. This is an open door to fraud, and if the bank loses through you it will not feel kindly toward you. When you send your checks out of the city to pay bills, write the name and residence of your payee, thus : ' ' Pay to John Jones and Co . , B oston . ' ' This will put you r local bank on its guard if the check is presented at the counter. Published originally by^Traders National Bank, of Scranton, Pa. 400 ARITHMETIC Don't commit the folly of supposing that because you trust the bank with money, the bank ought to trust you by paying your overdrafts. Don't suppose you can behave badly in one bank and stand well with the others. Remember, there is a Clearing House. INTEREST SIMPLE INTEREST Interest is money paid for the use of money belonging to another. The principal is the sum for which interest is paid. The rate per cent, is the per cent, of the principal that is paid, for its use for a given time, usually a year. The amount is the sum of the principal and interest. The legal rate is the rate established by law. Usury is a rate that exceeds the legal rate. The penalty for usury is in some states, the forfeiture of all interest; in others, the forfeiture of both principal and interest. In a number of states, no legal notice is taken of usury. In computing interest, a year is usually regarded as con- sisting of 12 mo. of 30 da. each. Rule. To find the interest on any sum, at 6% , for 20 mo., or 600 da., move the decimal point 1 place to the left. For 60 da., or 2 mo., move it 2 places. For 6 da., move it 3 places. The interest, then, on $175.36 for 20 mo. is $17.536; for 60 da., $1.7536; and for 6 da., $.17536. Having found the interest for 6 or 60 da., it is easy, by operations that will suggest themselves, to find the interest for any other number of days. EXAMPLE 1. Find the interest of $8,368 for 99 da. at 6%. SOLUTION. $ 8 3.6 8 = int. for 6 da. 4 1.8 4 = int. for 3 da. = \ of 60 da. 8.3 6 8 = int. for 6 da. = & of 60 da. 4.1 8 4 = int. for 3 da. = of 6 da. $ 1 3 8.0 7 2 = int. for 9 9 da. ARITHMETIC 401 Rule. To find the interest at any other per cent, than 6, first find it at 6%; then, divide it by 6 for 1%; by 3, for 2%; subtract if for 4%; * for 5%; add * for 7%; * for 8%; * for 9%. EXAMPLE 2. What is the interest at 9% of $1,264.76 for 49 da. ? SOLUTION. $ 1 2.6 4 7 6 = int. for 6 da. at 6% 6.3 2 3 8 = int. for 3 da. = of 60 da. 3.1 6 1 9 = int. for 1 5 da. = * of 30 da. .6324 = int. for 3 da. = ^ of 30 da. .2108 = int. for 1 da. = $ of 3 da. 1 0.3 2 8 9 = int. for 4 9 da. at 6% 5.1 6 4 4 = int. for 4 9 da. at 3% $ 1 5.4 9 3 3 = int. for 4 9 da. at 9% Another rule is: Multiply the principal by the time reduced to days; move the decimal point 2 places to the left and divide this product by the quotient obtained by dividing 360 by the per cent, of interest. EXACT INTEREST "When the interest is to be computed for one or more entire years at a specified rate per year, the fact that 12 mo. of 30 da. each are usually regarded as a year does not affect the result it is only when months and days, or days alone, become an element of the given time, that the interest is greater than it should be. The average length of a month in an ordinary year is 30rV da. , and in a leap year is 30 da. A day is not ^fa of a year, but 3^? of a common year, and yfa of a leap year. Hence, 360 da. = $f?, or f, of a common year, and f|g, or f?, of a leap year. By the ordinary method of finding interest, the result is either ^ or gt greater than it should be. Thus, the interest of $7,300 for 60 da. at 6%, as found by the usual method, is $73. In equity it is $7,300 X .06 X T&? S = $72. That is, each $73 interest should be $72, the exact method saving the borrower $1. 402 ARITHMETIC . The table on page 403 will be of great assistance in determin- ing the actual number of days between two dates. The table gives the number of days between the same dates of any two months. Thus, to find the number of days between Mar. 12 and Sept. 12 of any year, we find opposite Mar. in the left- hand column and in the column headed Sept. the number 184, the required number of days. Had it been required to find the number of days between Mar. 12 and Sept. 25, we should have found the number of days between Mar. 12 and Sept. 12, or 184 da.; then, subtracting 12 from 25, the differ- ence, 13, must be added to 184, obtaining 197 da., the number of days between Mar. 12 and Sept. 25. Had it been required to find the number of days between Sept. 25 and Mar. 12, we should find opposite Sept. and in the column headed Mar., 181 ; then, subtracting 12 from 25, we subtract the difference from 181, because 181 da. is the number of days between Sept. 25 and Mar. 25, instead of Mar. 12, which occurs 13 da. earlier. Hence, there are 181 13 = 168 da. between Sept. 25 and Mar. 12. Had Mar. 12 occurred in a leap year, there would have been 1 da. more, or 169 da. between the two dates, on account of Feb. 29. The table will also be useful in cases where a certain number of days is to be added to a given date. Thus, to find the date of 90 da. after Feb. 18, we see, on referring to the table, that 89 da. after Feb. 18 is May 18; hence, 90 da. after Feb. 18 is May 19, or, if it is a leap year, May 18, Again, 127 da. after Feb. 19 is June 26; because, referring to the table, 120 da. after Feb. 19 is June 19, and 127 120 + 19 = 26. If it is desired to subtract a certain number of days from a given date, the process is simply reversed. To find, for example, the date 120 da. previous to Sept. 21, we look down the column headed Sept. and find opposite May the number 123; hence, from May 21 to Sept. 21 is 123 da., and, therefore, from May 24 to Sept. 21 is 120 da. ARITHMETIC 403 i ,Q 0> fa * & < p*> rt S 1 > 3 H- 4 tx & 4* 1 cj & Jan. ' 365 31 59 90 120 151 181 212 243 273 304 334 Feb. 334 365 28 59 89 120 150 181 212 242 273 303 Mar. 306 337 365 31 61 92 122 153 184 214 245 275 Apr. 275 306 334 365 30 61 91 122 153 183 214 244 May 245 276 304 334 363 31 61 92 123 153 184 214 June 214 245 273 304 334 365 30 61 92 122 153 183 July 184 215 243 274 304 335 365 31 62 92 123 153 Aug. 153 184 212 243 273 304 334 365 31 61 92 122 Sept. 122 153 181 212 242 273 303 334 365 30 61 91 Oct. 92 123 151 182 212 243 273 304 335 365 31 91 Nov. 61 92 120 151 181 212 242 273 304 334 365 30 Dec. 31 62 90 121 151 182 212 243 274 304 335 365 COMPOUND INTEREST If the interest of a principal is added to the principal at regular intervals, to form by each addition a new prin- cipal for the next interval, the resulting interest is called compound interest. Thus, if $100 be placed at compound interest at 6%, with the understanding that the interest is to be compounded annually, the principal will be $100 for the first year, $106 for the second year, $112.36 for the third year, etc. Most savings banks allow compound interest, although in most states its payment cannot be legally enforced even though it be specified in a contract. Unless otherwise stated, interest is understood to be com- pounded annually. If it be compounded semiannually, one-half the annual rate is taken as the rate; if quarterly, one-fourth the annual rate is taken; etc. 404 ARITHMETIC S <3 I CO DCOt^CO O5OOOO500 D o "* co c ^50^=3 2 :<:* 25 295555?? SI^t^^HOO O" t O O5 O5 l^ CO >-O O5 ^ OO r* 00 O 00 Cen -^iCCq OOOI>>O5 hi-HT^oO COOOO5OCO COt^OOOSO 1-1 C ARITHMETIC 405 DTtodoi C OO^-iOGO -^Ot^COO !>OOiOOL ^ OOCOt^iO i-iCOCOCOiM iOiOt>-T^OO OiO5OT. _ CJ Oi-HCOOO T^i-dOO'* r>- - cooq^oc- iOO<>t>o6 ^ ooooo iHt^oioo(N i>QQriopop. "DO'-HT^O i-HOOCOF-CO A DOC 1 1 i O5 o o ^ - O'-KNCOTJH iOt>OOO5t-H COiOt^On-H Ttl^ - 00 406 ARITHMETIC When the time is given in years, months, and days, the interest is compounded for the greatest number of entire periods included in the time, and the simple interest of the last principal is found for the remaining time. EXAMPLE. Find the compound interest of $800 for 1 yr. 9 mo. 20 da. at 6%, interest compounded semiannually. SOLUTION. $ 8 = prin. 1st 6 mo. 24 = int. 1st 6 mo. = $800 X .03 824 = prin. 2d 6 mo. 2 4.7 2 = int. 2d 6 mo. = $824 X .03 8 4 8.7 2 = prin. 3d 6 mo. 2 5.4 6 = int. 3d 6 mo. = $848.72 X .03 8 7 4.1 8 = prin. for 3 mo. 20 da. 1 6.0 3 = int. for 3 mo. 20 da. = $874.18 X .06 X 8 9 0.2 1 = amt. for 1 yr. 9 mo. 20 da. 800 = original prin. $ 9 0.2 1 = comp. int. for 1 yr. 9 mo. 20 da. EXPLANATION In 1 yr. 9 mo. 20 da. there are three com- plete periods of 6 mo. each, and 3 mo. 20 da. besides. Since the annual rate is 6%, for 6 mo. the rate per cent, is 3%. Finding the interest at 3%, and adding the principal for these three periods, gives $874.18. The amount of this sum for the remaining 3 mo. 20 da. is $890.21, from which we sub- tract the original principal. The remainder, $90.21 is the required compound interest. Compound interest is calculated in actual business by means of a table. The table shows the amount of $1 at all the different rates, and for all the different times that are likely to occur. Having the amount of $1 at any given rate and for any number of periods, we multiply it by the number of dollars in any given principal. The result will be the amount of that sum for the given time. If the original prin- cipal be subtracted from this amount, the remainder is the compound interest required. ARITHMETIC 407 TIME IN WHICH MONEY AT INTEREST DOUBLES Simple Interest Compound Interest Rate Per Cent. Years Days Years Days 2 50 35 1 2* 40 28 26 3 33J 23 164 8i 28 208 20 54 25 17 246 4* 22 81 ' 15 273 5 20 14 75 6 16f 11 327 7 14 104 10 89 8 12* 9 2 9 11 40 8 16 10 10 7 100 BANK DISCOUNT Bank discount is the charge made by a bank for paying a note or other obligation before it is due. This charge is the interest on the amount of the obligation from the time it is discounted until its maturity. This interest is subtracted from the face of the obligation, and its holder receives for it the remainder, which is called the proceeds. Hence, bank discount is inequitable, since interest is charged not only on the sum actually paid for the obligation, but also on the discount. In states where days of grace are allowed, bank discount is calculated for 3 da. more than the time specified in the note. Thus, if a 60 -da. note for $1,000 is discounted at a bank, the interest of $1,000 is found for 63 da., and is sub- tracted from $1 ,000. If the rate of discount is 6% , the holder will receive as proceeds $1,000 -$10 50 =$989.50. It is evident that the owner of the note should receive for it the true present worth of $1,000 payable in 63 da., or $989.61. The bank gives him only $989.50, or 11 ct. less than he should get. 408 ARITHMETIC The maturity of a note is on the last day of grace. The time of maturity is generally indorsed on the note, thus Mar. 7/10, which means that it matures nominally on Mar. 7, and legally on Mar. 10. The term of discount is the time from the discounting of the note to its maturity. In the case of an interest-bearing note, the sum discounted is the amount of the note at maturity. Banks usually require that a discounted note shall be pay- able at the bank that discounted it, and they rarely discount notes having more than 90 da. to run. Rule. I. If the note bears interest, find its amount at the time of maturity. II. Find the interest on the face of the note, or, if it is an interest-bearing note, on the amount of the note at maturity at the given rate of discount for 3 da. more than the time it has to run until its nominal maturity and the result will be the bank discount. III. Subtract the bank discount from the face of the note, or from its amount at maturity, and the remainder will be the proceeds. EXAMPLE. Find (a) the discount, and (6) the proceeds, of the following note: $484rS&. Newark, N. J., Oct. 4, 1903. Sixty days after date, for value received, I promise to pay William Hall, or order, Four Hundred Eighty-four and ^ Dollars, at the Ninth National Bank. Henry Parshall. Discounted Oct. 20, 1903, at 6%. SOLUTION. (a) Maturity. Dec. 3/6, 1903. Term of dis- count, 47 da. Discount, $3.80. (6) Proceeds, $484.60 - $3.80 = $480.80. EXPLANATION. Sixty days after Oct. 4 is Dec. 3, and 3 da. of grace make the date of legal maturity Dec. 6. From the time of discount, Oct. 20, to Dec. 6 is 47 da., for which the interest at 6% is $3.80. Subtracting the discount, $3.80, from the face of the note, $484.60, gives $480.80, the proceeds. EXAMPLE. The proceeds of a note discounted at a bank for 45 da. at 6% were $1 ,488. What was the face of the note ? ARITHMETIC 409 SOLUTION. Proceeds of $1 for 45 + 3 da. =$.992. Face of the note = $1, 488 -H $.992 = $1,500. Rule. Divide the proceeds by the proceeds of $1 for 8 da. more than the given time. PARTIAL PAYMENTS A debt or obligation may be discharged at one payment; or, from time to time, payments in part may be made, and, finally, at a time of settlement, the remainder of the debt may be paid. Now, it is obvious that interest should be allowed on such payments as are made, since interest is charged on the obligation itself. But, if a payment should be less than the interest on the debt since a previous payment had been made, to subtract such payment from the debt with accrued interest would result in increasing the principal. This would be a species of compound interest, that, in many states, is illegal. When a partial payment of a note is made, the date of pay- ment and its amount are written on the back of the note, and this record of it is called an indorsement. The following rule for partial payments has been formu- lated by the Supreme Court of the United States, and has been adopted by most of the states: United States Rule. I. Find the amount of the principal to the time when the payment, or the sum of the payments, is greater than the interest then due. From the amount, subtract the payment or the sum of the payments, and treat the remainder as a new principal. II. Proceed in this manner to the date of settlement, and the last amount will be the sum still due. EXAMPLE. $1,200. New York, Sept. 16, 1902. On demand I promise to pay John Crawford, or order, Twelve Hundred Dollars, with interest at 6%, value received. Edward G. Carson. Indorsements: Jan. 1, 1903, $120; May 7, 1903, $300; Dec. 22, 1903, $16; Sept. 19, 1904, $400. What was due Jan. 1, 1905? 410 ARITHMETIC SOLUTION. Principal $ 1 2 0.0 Interest from Sept. 16, 1902, to Jan. 1, 1903 (3 mo. 15 da.) 2 1.0 Amount 1 2 2 1.0 First payment 12 0.0 New principal 1 1 1.0 Interest from Jan. 1, 1903, to May 7, 1903 (4 mo. 6 da.) _ 23.12 Amount 1 1 2 4.1 2 Second payment 3 0.0 New principal 8 2 4.1 2 Interest from May 7, 1903, to Sept. 19, 1904 (1 yr. 4 mo. 12 da.) 6 7.5 8 891.70 Sum of third and fourth payments 4 1 6.0 New principal 47 5.7 Interest from Sept. 19, 1904, to Jan. 1, 1905 (3 mo. 12 da.) 8.0 9 Amount due at time of settlement $ 48 3.7 9 In this example, 360 da. are considered as 1 yr. The third payment of $16 is less than the interest due at the time it was made; hence, according to the rule, it is added to the next payment of $400 and the interest is computed to the time of the fourth payment. When the time from the date of a note or other obligation is less than a year, settlement is usually made by a method called the merchants' rule. The Merchants' Rule. I. By the method of exact interest, find the amount of each of the several payments from the time each is made to the date of settlement. II. Subtract the sum of these amounts from the amount of the obligation from its date to the time of settlement. The remainder will be the amount still due. EXAMPLE. Face of note, $2,000; rate, 6%; date of note, Dec. 31, 1902; time of settlement Nov. 15, 1903. Indorse- ments: Mar. 10, 1903, $200; June 1, 1903, $300; Aug. 20, 1903, USEFUL TABLES 411 $400; Oct. 1, 1903, $500. What was due at time of settle- ment? SOLUTION. Principal $ 2 0.0 Interest of $2,000 for 319 da 1 4.8 8 Amount 2 1 4.8 8 Amount of $200 for 250 da 2 8.2 2 Amount of $300 for 167 da 3 8.2 4 Amount of $400 for 87 da 4 5.7 2 Amount of $500 for 45 da 503.70 Sum of payments, with interest 1 4 2 5.8 8 Amount due at time of settlement $ 67 9.0 MEASURES OF EXTENSION Measures of extension are used in measuring lengths (dis- tances), surfaces (areas), and solids (volumes), and are divided, accordingly, into linear measure, square measure, and cubic measure. Linear measure has one dimension (length), square measure has two dimensions (length and breadth), and cubic measure has three dimensions (length, breadth, and thickness). LINEAR MEASURE 12 inches (in.) = 1 foot ft. 3 feet =1 yard yd. 5^ yards =1 rod rd. 320 rods =1 mile mi. in. ft. yd. rd. mi. 12= 1 36= 3 = 1 198= 16i= 5i= 1 63,360 = 5,280 = 1,760 = 320 = 1 SQUARE MEASURE 144 square inches (sq. in.) ... =1 square foot sq. ft. 9 square feet =1 square yard sq. yd. 30-j square yards =1 square rod sq. rd. 160 square rods =1 acre A. 640 acres =1 square mile sq. mi. 412 USEFUL TABLES sq. in. sq. ft. sq. yd. sq. rd. A. sq.mi. 144= 1 1,296= 9 = 1 39,204= 272^= 30^= 1 6,272,640= 43,560 = 4,840 = 160= 1 4,014,489,600 = 27,878,400 =3,097,600 =102,400 = 640 = 1 SURVEYORS' SQUARE MEASURE 625 square links (sq. li.) =1 square rod . . . sq. rd. 16 square rods =1 square chain, sq. ch. 10 square chains =1 acre A. 640 acres =1 square mile. . sq. mi. 36 square miles (6 miles square) . . = 1 township .... Tp. A square measuring 208.71 ft. on each side contains 1 A. The following are the comparative sizes, in square yards, of acres in different countries: sq. yd. England and America 4,840 Scotland 6,150 Ireland 7,840 Hamburg 11,545 sq. yd. Amsterdam 9,722 Dantzic 6,650 France 11,960 Prussia 3,053 CUBIC MEASURE 1,728 cubic inches (cu. in.) . . . . = 1 cubic foot cu. ft. 27 cubic feet =1 cubic yard cu. yd. 128 cubic feet =1 cord of wood. cu. in. cu. ft. cu. yd. 1,728 = 1 46,656 = 27 = 1 MEASURES OF WEIGHT AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHT 16 ounces (oz.) =1 pound Ib. 100 pounds =1 hundredweight cwt. 20 hundredweight! _, 2,000 pounds / " USEFUL TABLES 413 oz. Ib. cwt. T. 16= 1 1,600= 100= 1 32,000 = 2,000 = 20 = 1 LONG-TON TABLE 16 ounces (oz.) ............ =1 pound ............ Ib. 28 pounds ................ =1 quarter ........... qr. 4 quarters .............. =1 hundredweight ..... cwt. 20 hundredweight 1 2,240 pounds ....... / ....... ~ T. J oz. 16 = 448 = 1,792 = Ib. 1 28 = 112 = qr. 1 4 cwt. = 1 35,840 = 2,240=80 =20 = 1 TROY WEIGHT 24 grains (gr.) ............... =1 pennyweight ....... pwt. 20 pennyweights .............. =1 ounce ............ . oz. 12 ounces ................... =1 pound ............ Ib. gr. pwt. oz. Ib. 24 = 1 480= 20= 1 5,760 = 240 = 12 = 1 APOTHECARIES' WEIGHT 20 grains (gr.) ............... =1 scruple ........ sc. or 9 3 scruples .................. =1 dram .......... dr. or 5 8 drams. . ................. =1 ounce .......... oz. or 5 12 ounces ................... =1 pound .......... Ib. or Ib. gr. ^ 5 S Ib 20= 1 60= 3= 1 480= 24= 8= 1 5,760 = 288 = 96 = 12 = 1 414 USEFUL TABLES MEASURES OF CAPACITY LIQUID MEASURE 4 gills (gi.) =1 pint pt. 2 pints =1 quart qt. 4 quarts =1 gallon gal. 3li gallons =1 barrel bbl. 2 barrels 1 > =1 hogshead hhd. 63 gallons/ gi. pt. qt. gal. bbl. hhd. 4 = 1 8= 2= 1 32= 8= 4= 1 1 ,008 = 252 = 126 = 3l = 1 2,016 = 504 = 252 = 63 =2 =1 APOTHECARIES* FLUID MEASURE 60 minims, or drops (1TL) . . . = 1 fluid dram 3 8 fluid drams =1 fluid ounce 3 16 fluid ounces =1 pint O. 8 pints =1 gallon Cong. DRY MEASURE 2 pints (pt.) =1 quart qt. 8 quarts =1 peck pk. 4 pecks =1 bushel bu. pt. qt. pk. bu. 2= 1 16= 8 = 1 64 = 32 = 4 = 1 MISCELLANEOUS TABLES METRIC EQUIVALENTS OF POUNDS, FEET, ETC. The government publishes the equivalents in pounds, etc. of the metric system, but the American shipper wants to know what the pounds, inches, feet, and gallons, to which he is accustomed, are in the metric system. The following is USEFUL TABLES 415 a convenient table showing the metric values of our measures. Some countries demand that the metric system should be used in the consular papers, and in most countries, especially in Latin America, the consignees ask for the weights, etc. in the metric system. This table will be found valuable for reference by invoice clerks and shipping clerks in the export departments of manufacturing establishments. Po^^nds 1 Kilos 4536 Pounds 60 Kilos .... 27 2160 2 9072 70 31 7520 3 1 3608 80 36 2880 4 1 8144 90 40 8240 5 . . . 2 2680 100. 45 3600 6 2.7216 200 .... 90 7200 7 3 1752 300. 136 0800 8 3.6288 400 .... 181 4400 9 40824 500. 226 8000 10 4 5360 600 272 1600 20 9 0720 700 317 5200 30 .... . . . 13 6080 800 362 8800 40 18.1440 900 .... 408.2400 50. . , .22.6800 1,000.. . , 453.6000 1,000 kilos = 1 metric ton (tonelada metrico). 1 inch. . . Centimeters 2.54 1 foot 30 48 1 yard . . . ...'..... 91 44 2 feet 61 00 3 feet 91 44 4 feet 122 00 5 feet. .. 152 00 6 feet.., 182.88 Centimeters 7 feet =213.00 8 feet =243.84 9 feet = 274.32 10 feet =304.80 11 feet =335.28 12 feet =365.76 13 feet .=396.24 14 feet... ._ 426.72 TABLE OF DISTANCES 1 mile 1 furlong .=5,280 ft.; 1,760 yd.; 320 rd.; 8 fur. . =40 rd. 416 USEFUL TABLES TABLE OF DISTANCES (Continued) 1 league = 3 mi. knot,* or nautical mile = 6,080 ft., or ij mi. nautical league .... = 3 naut. mi. fathom = 6 ft. meter = 3 ft. 3f in., nearly hand = 4 in. palm = 3 in. span = 9 in. cable's length = 240 yd. MEASURES OF VOLUME cubic foot = 1,728 cu. in. ale gallon _ 282 cu. in. standard, or wine, gallon = 231 cu. in. dry gallon = 268.8 cu. in. bushel. = 2, 150.4 cu. in. British bushel = 2,218.19 cu. in. cord of wood _ 128 cu. ft. 1 perch =24.75 cu. ft. 1 ton of round timber =40 cu. ft. 1 ton of hewn timber =50 cu. ft. A box 12-j-f in. long, wide, and deep contains 1 bu. A box 19f in. long, wide, and deep contains 1 bbl. A box 8^ in. long, wide, and deep contains 1 pk. A box 67*6 in. long, wide, and deep contains -j pk. A box 4yg in. long, wide, and deep contains 1 qt. Cylinders having the following dimensions, in inches, con- tain the measures stated, very closely; the diameters are given first: Gill =l|in.X3 in. Pint = 3^ in.XS in. Quart = 3j in. X 6 in. Gallon _ 7 in. X 6 in. 8 gallons . . . = 14 in. X 12 in. 10 gallons . . = 14 in. X 15 in. *A knot is really a measure of speed and not of distance; when used in this sense, it is equivalent to 1 naut. mi. in 1 hr. Thus, a vessel traveling 20 naut. mi. per hr. has a speed of 20 knots. USEFUL TABLES AVOIRDUPOIS POUNDS IN A BUSHEL 417 Commodities Lb. Commodities Lb. Barley 48 Malt 34 Beans 60 Oats 3? Buckwheat 48 Potatoes 60 Clover seed 60 Rye 56 Corn (shelled) 56 Timothy seed 45 Corn (in the ear) 70 Wheat 60 The following units are also in commercial use: 1 quintal of fish = 100 Ib. 1 barrel of flour = 196 Ib. 1 barrel of pork or beef =200 Ib. 1 gallon of petroleum = 6 Ib. 1 keg of nails =100 Ib. PAPER The following table is used in the paper trade: 24 sheets =1 quire qr. 20 quires = 1 ream rm . 2 reams = 1 bundle bdl. 5 bundles = 1 bale B. sheets qr. rm. bdl. B. 24= 1 480= 20= 1 960= 40= 2 = 1 4,800 = 200 = 10=5 = 1 It is now becoming customary to consider 500 sheets as a ream, and to discard the higher denominations. 418 USEFUL TABLES DIFFERENCE OF SUN TIME BETWEEN NEW YORK CITY AND OTHER PARTS OF THE WORLD When it is noon at New York it is, at Buffalo 11:40 A. M. Cincinnati 11:18 A. M. Chicago 11:07 A. M. St. Louis 10:55 A. M. San Francisco . . 8:45 A. M. New Orleans 10:56 A. M. Washington 11:48 A. M. Charleston 11 :36 A. M. Havana 11:25 A. M. Boston 12:12 p. M. Quebec 12:12 p. M. London 4:55 P. M. Paris 5:05 P. M. Rome 5:45 p. M. Constantinople . . 6:41 p. M. Vienna 6:00 P. M. St. Petersburg. . . 6:57 P. M. Peking 12:40 A. M. ENGLISH MONEY 4 farthings (far.) =1 penny d. 12 pence =1 shilling s. 20 shillings =1 pound, or sovereign far. d. s. 4= 1 48= 12= 1 960 = 240 = 20 = 1 The unit of English money is the pound sterling, the value of which in United States money is $4.8665. The fineness of English silver is .925; of the gold coins, .916f . What is called sterling silver when applied to solid-silver articles has the same fineness. Hence the name sterling silver. The other coins of Great Britain are the florin ( = 2 shillings), the crown ( = 5 shillings), the half crown ( = 2-J shillings), and the guinea (=21 shillings). The largest silver coin is the crown, and the smallest, the threepence (i shilling). The shilling is worth 25 ct. (24.3 + ct.) in United States money. The guinea is no longer coined. The abbre- viation is written before the number, while s. and d. follow. Thus, 25 4s. 6d. = 25 pounds 4 shillings 6 pence. Rule. To reduce pounds, shillings, and pence to dollars and cents, reduce the pounds to shillings, add the shillings, if USEFUL TABLES 419 any, and multiply the sum by 24-g-; if any pence are given, increase this product by twice as many cents as there are pence. EXAMPLE. Reduce 4 7s. lid. to dollars and cents. SOLUTION. (4X20 + 7) X. 24^ + 2 X 11 =$21. 39. Rule. To reduce pounds to dollars, and vice versa, exchange being at $4.8665: Multiply the number of pounds by 78, and divide the quotient by 15; the result will be the equivalent in dollars and cents. Or, multiplying the dollars by 15 and dividing the product by 73 will give its equivalent in pounds and decimals of a pound. EXAMPLE 1. Reduce 6 to dollars and cents. SOLUTION. 6 X 73-7-15 = $29. 20. EXAMPLE 2. Reduce $17 to pounds. SOLUTION. 17X15 -^73 = 3.493. The monetary units of leading foreign nations and their equivalents in United States money are as follows. These rates are proclaimed each year by the Secretary of the Treasury. Country Monetary Unit Value in U. S. Gold Canada Dollar = 100 cents $1 00 Great Britain Pound =20 shillings . 4 86f France ~j Belgium ... > .... Switzerland J Italy . Franc =100 centimes Lira = 100 centesimi .... .193 193 Spain Peseta = 100 centimes .... .193 German Empire. . . Denmark ~j Norway / Mark = 100 pfennigs Crown = 100 ore ... .238 268 Sweden J Russia Japan Ruble = 100 copecks Yen =100 sen .515 498 420 USEFUL TABLES 62 CnO *" C 03 "X ill! I i 9 12 g - r Monetary Unit 1 s B 8 PnOfePQ^ Q OQ D^ PH E^ Standard 4) W 11. . 222 >2 2 22 > 2 > O O O*-j O O O O ~^ O zz* OOOwO O OO 03 O 03 '^x ' . r . / ^|5 : : : : d A *d CO 9 ' JJ d o O 3 >. 11 8 I : li 111 1 = !; | pqpqpqpq o O O USEFUL TABLES 421 ls s I I C<1 00 "3 ^ O 00 -^ O r-l O co co co t>c fall i -i II .0 g2 2g II II '.3 422 USEFUL TABLES s y U Mon I CO w p I I O~ O O O^-^ OOO MEMORANDA. MEMORANDA MEMORANDA MEMORANDA MEMORANDA MEMORANDA Promotion Advancement in Salary and 3 Business Success Secured Through the Commercial, Stenographic, Bookkeeping and Business Forms, Banking and Banking Law, Commercial Law, Advertising, Window Trimming and Show-Card Writing COURSES OF INSTRUCTION OF THE International Correspondence Schools International Textbook Company, Proprietors SCRANTON, PA., U. S. A. SEE FOLLOWING PAGES A PECULIAR EXPERIENCE My experience is peculiar. At the time I enrolled, I was 27 years of age and had followed the plumbing business successfully for 9 years. Ill health, however, forced me to give up working at my trade and seek employment in a new field. Being able to do light work, and having a natural inclina- tion toward accounting, I applied to a number of business firms and was invariably met with the same questions: "What experience have you had?" and "What references have you?" I stayed right with my Course, though, and successfully passed a clerical examination given by the Southern Pacific Company. When I presented myself to the man in charge of the accounting office, he asked the usual questions; and when I told him I was studying with the I. C. S., he was kind enough to appoint me at a salary of $50 a month. My progress since then has been in every way satisfactory. The past year has been the best of my life. I have been able to care for a little set of books in addition to doing my reg- ular work and have averaged a little better than $100 a month. CHARLES B. HOOD, 65 Valley St., Oakland, Cal. SALARY INCREASED TO $1,400 A YEAR When I enrolled with you, I was a stenographer and type- writer. I am now assistant secretary, haying been appointed by the board of directors, and my earnings have advanced to $1,400 a year. I want to express my sincere thanks for what the Schools have done for me. E. G. LORENZ, Wisconsin Ave. and Ellicott St., Washington, D. C. COURSE PROVED VERY BENEFICIAL My Course in bookkeeping with you has proved very bene- ficial to me. I am at present holding a position paying me $100 a month. I could not fill the position acceptably were it not for the knowledge gained from my Course. L. C. HARRIS, Care Armour Steel and Foundry Co., Matthews, Ind. THANKS THE I. C. S. FOR GIVING HIM THE STUDY HABIT Since taking up my Course with you, I have been forced by circumstances to make considerable more use of it than I had expected to. The knowledge gained from my Course has been of great assistance to me. I am now bookkeeper and general office man for the Wabash Oil Company, with a salary of $90 a month and expenses. Your Course has helped me not only to increase my knowledge, but to a far greater extent through giving me habits of application and perseverance. STANLEY F. HINCELOT, Care Wabash Oil Company, Coalinga, Cal. NEWSBOY TO BOOKKEEPER When I enrolled with you, I was a newsboy. Thanks to my studies, I am now a bookkeeper employed by the Mingo Coal and Coke Company. My income when I enrolled was $15 a month; it has increased 233 J per cent. The Bound Volumes alone are worth much more than the price of a Course. They are invaluable to a man wanting to advance to a better position. I owe my position and salary to the International Corre- spondence Schools. Were it not for my Complete Commer- cial Course, I could not fill the position I now hold. J. M. PRATT, Hartranft, Tenn. OFFICE BOY TO SALESMAN EARNINGS INCREASED 200 PER CENT. I enrolled for the Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course while employed as an office boy. Through faithful study I won promotion until I became assistant to the eastern sales manager of the concern I work for. I am now a salesman for the Diamond Manufacturing Company, with an increase of 200 per cent, in salary and good prospects. Your books are the simplest and most concise volumes I have ever seen. I would not part with them for ten times what the Course cost me. Nearly every day some member of my family goes to the Bound Volumes for infor- mation. The I. C. S. is responsible for my progress. When I left school I knew but little more than the A B C's. FRANK C. BALBO, Black Diamond, Cal. TEACHER TO PRINCIPAL When I began to study with you, I was teaching a country school and earning $35 a month. I am now principal of the East Side School, of Weir, Kans., at double the salary I used to receive. Your instruction in grammar is the best I have ever seen. My work in grammar alone was worth the whole price of my Course. W. J. WILKINSON, Weir, Kans. OFFICE BOY TO SALES AGENT I was an office boy when it occurred to me to take a Course with you. I am now sales agent for the Fidelity Realty and Investment Company, with earnings many times greater than when I enrolled. The Bound Volumes of my Course have been a great help to me in all my work. McK. J. SULLIVAN, 1819 Keene St., Houston, Tex. EARNINGS GREATLY INCREASED I am very glad I took your Course. I have been working for the county secretary of this place for a year and have just had an offer of a better position, which I think I shall accept. My earnings are much greater than when I enrolled, and I expect to do better still. Miss INA McFADDEN, Dorchester, New Brunswick, Canada BILL CLERK TO BOOKKEEPER When I took up my Commercial Course with you, I was a bill clerk. My studies have qualified me to act as book- keeper for one of the largest machine manufacturing concerns of the West. My salary has been more than doubled. I could not have advanced to my present position without the knowledge gained from my Course. R. E. WRINKLER, Charlemont Hotel, St. Louis, Mo. SCHOOL TEACHER PRAISES I. C. S. COMMERCIAL COURSES When I enrolled, I was employed as a secret service agent in Philadelphia at a salary of $75 a month. At present I am general agent for the Big Dipper Mining and Milling Com- pany, of Peterboro, Canada. I sometimes earn as much as $200 in a month. Your Commercial Course has been of an especial advantage to me in giving me a knowledge of modern business forms. I am a high school graduate and have taught public school two terms. Your method of instruction is tjtie best I have ever come in contact with or heard of, being easy for any one to understand, and practical every way. S. W. BROWN, R. F. D. 6," Chambersburg, Pa. SALARY DOUBLED Since enrolling for my Commercial Course with you, my salary has increased 100 per cent. I am now employed as clerk in the general office of the Pennsylvania Railroad Company. WILLIAM G. BROWN, 2109 Arch St., Philadelphia, Pa. COMMERCIAL COURSE HAS BENEFITED HIM EVERY WAY My Commercial Course has been beneficial to me in every way. I wrote English well enough at the time I enrolled; but being a Frenchman, and having left school very young (at the age of 13), all I knew was gathered here and there without any regular method or teacher. I was eager to secure a systematic course in arithmetic and I wanted to know, tool how bookkeeping was carried on in the United States. On all these points I have been satisfied, because my studies with you forced me to collect and concentrate my knowledge in order to get ahead. I went through what I consider a serious examination and won a great deal of con- fidence in myself. Many good positions have been offered to me, among them: (1) Commissary of the Haitian Government dele- gated to control the railway of the " Plaine duCul-de-Sac"; (2) bookkeeper to a produce exportation and banking firm; also bookkeeper for a sugar refining company the Agricul- tural Industrial Exploitation Company; (3) teacher of agricultural and industrial accounting and bookkeeping in the school of applied sciences; (4) secretary and interpreter to the National Railway Company of Haiti, which company is a branch of the United Haiti Corporation, whose head- quartet's are in the Land Title Building, in Philadelphia, Pa. Although I have not yet completed my Course, I have reason to be thankful to you. C. M. DUPUY, Port-au-Prince, Haiti TEAMSTER TO MANAGER At the time I enrolled with you, I was working as a yard man and teamster for the Hawkeye Lumber Company, at Mount Ayr, Iowa. Later I was sent to Oakville, Iowa, as manager for the same company. After 2 years and 8 months I came to Humes ton,, where I am now working as manager for the company. I have been helped to a marked degree by my Course. In fact, I do not think I should be able to hold my present position were it not for the knowledge gained from my Course. Please feel free to refer to me any one wanting intormation about the Schools. JAMES E. FRANE, Care Hawkeye Lumber Company, Humeston, Iowa FARM HAND TO CHIEF CLERK When I enrolled with you, I was working on a farm and knew nothing about commercial practices. I am now chief clerk for the Canadian Pacific Railway Company, at Berlin, Ont. Inasmuch as I have a lot of bookkeeping to do in connection with my work, your Course has been a very great help to me. AMOS RUDY, 95 St. Joseph St., Berlin, Ontario, Canada HELPER IN A WOOLEN MILL TO BOOKKEEPER At the time I enrolled, I was employed as helper in a woolen mill. Now I am bookkeeper for the Albany Branch of the Fairbanks Scale Company, dealers in scales, gas engines, mill supplies, etc. My salary is double what it was when I enrolled. In addition to brightening my prospects and increasing my earnings, your Course gave me the study habit which is invaluable to any young man. ERNEST ROE, 329 Hamilton St., Albany, N. Y. HIS COMMERCIAL COURSE WON HIM A FINE POSITION I knew nothing whatever of typewriting, stenography, or bookkeeping, before enrolling with you. Six months after enrolling, I went to Winnipeg, Man., and quickly secured a position with a prominent law firm in that city. After a year I resigned to accept a more remunerative position in -the Winnipeg office of the Canadian Pacific Railroad, with which company I have been connected ever since. My earnings are far greater than when I enrolled. JOHN S. McNALLY, Glammis, Ontario, Canada . NEWSBOY TO COURT REPORTER At the time of enrolling, I was a newsboy. I am now a court reporter here, and have a good salary. I recently reported three very important cases. People appear to be incredulous when I tell them that I learned shorthand from the I. C. S. ; but I am always proud to convince them that you taught me practically everything I know. FRANK D. ELLIS, Booneville, Miss. FARM HAND TO STENOGRAPHER AND BOOKKEEPER I had a fairly good common school education at the time of enrolling for Stenography with you. After enrolling, I studied whenever a little spare time offered such as nights and wet days when it was not possible to work on the farm. After seven months I have gone through enough of my Course to understand it thoroughly. I then applied for and received a position with the Bradley Supply Company as stenographer and bookkeeper. I am still holding the posi- tion and have never had any trouble with my work. The young man who wants to get a good business education can not do better than to enroll with you. S. H. SMYERS, Care Bradley Supply Company, Bradley, Ohio INCOME INCREASED 380 PER CENT. At the time I enrolled, I was employed as cashier for the Hub Clothing Store. Now I am stenographer and billing clerk for the Blish Milling Company. My income has been increased 380 per cent. I can say from actual experience that the method of correspondence instruction employed by the I. C. S. is perfect in every detail. Miss MACIE D. JOHNSON, Seymour, Ind. 6 $14 A WEEK TO $2,000 A YEAR As you will remember, I took your Bookkeeping Course. When I had finished the mathematical part, I stood for a Civil Service examination, made a good grade, and was appointed to a regular position. This, I think, is unusual. I go on duty at 3:30 P. M. and work until 1:30 A. M. All the rest of the day is my own. Having so much spare time, I decided to go into the advertising business. I did so, and am doing well. To make a long story short, I have bettered myself every way. My earnings have jumped from $14 a week to $2,000 a year. W. D. GIVAN, Care Independent Advertising Company, Nashville.Tenn. SALARY MULTIPLIED BY 5 When I enrolled for your Stenographic Course, I was a beginner in typewriting and was earning $25 a month. For the last two years I have been Secretary for the Vice-Presi- dent of the Sheffield Company, and President of the National Bank, as well as President of the Sheffield C. I. Pipe & Foundry Company. My regular salary is 5 times greater than when I enrolled and I make a lot of extra money besides. Before enrolling with you, I had attended a State Normal School College in Florence, Ala., for several years. I think the I. C. S. offers the very best method of obtaining a knowl- edge of shorthand. I most strongly indorse the Schools and shall always speak a good word when the opportunity offers. B. F. WEAKLEY, Box 215, Sheffield, Ala. WINS PROMOTION My Course with the I. C. S. has done everything for me. I had no business education at all at the time I enrolled; but by devoting my after-work hours to study I have attained a good knowledge of my work and have been promoted to a position paying three times what I used to get. I cannot say too much in favor of your Commercial Course. Miss LIMA CUMMINGS, 735 Eleventh St., Owensboro, Ky. TELEGRAPH OPERATOR BECOMES STENOGRAPHER My Business Course with you has proved of substantial value to me. When I enrolled, I was employed as night telegraph operator in a railroad station. My present posi- tion is that of head stenographer in the wholesale office of the C. F. Hovey Co., of Boston. C. W. DARLING, Prospect St., Stoughton, Mass. SALARY INCREASED 85 PER CENT. When I enrolled for a Commercial Course with you, I was working as a bookkeeper in a clothing store. Now I am employed by the P. & R. Railroad Company as stenographer at the Reading Terminal in this city. My salary has been increased 85 per cent. I think your method excellent. LEON R. FRIDIRICI, 770 S. Broad St., Philadelphia, Pa. COURSE PROVES VERY BENEFICIAL I am pleased to state that my Stenographic Course with you has proved most beneficial. When I started with the I. C. S., I had just finished my school work and knew nothing whatever of shorthand or typewriting. At present I am in the employ of one of Camden's prominent lawyers and am able to fill my position to his entire satisfaction. If I had not taken your Course, it would not be possible for me to hold my present position. MILDRED A. COOPER, Blackwood, N. J. FACTORY HAND BECOMES STENOGRAPHER I shall never regret the time spent in going through your Complete Stenographic Course. The I. C. S. method of instruction is unsurpassed, being thorough in every particular. Before enrolling, I was a factory hand getting small pay. I now hold a position as stenographer with a much greater salary. THEODORE H. HOUSEL, Lambertville, N. J. COURSE DOUBLES HIS SALARY At the time I enrolled, I was working for the Denver Multigraphing Company, at a small salary. I studied nights at a business college, but as the teachers gave me but little attention I decided to enroll for your Course in Stenography. I learned rapidly by your method and was soon able to take ordinary dictation. As the consequence of this, my employer practically doubled my salary. I attribute the increase entirely to the instruction received from you. EMIL SCHULTZ, 3622 West 5th Ave., Denver, Colo. CLERK BECOMES BOOKKEEPER AND HAS SALARY DOUBLED When I took out my Course with you, I was an assistant clerk in the coal office for the Logan Valley Store Company, of Beaverdale, Pa. I have been promoted and am now bookkeeper with twice the salary I received before enrolling. Your system of teaching is excellent. RICHARD GREEN, Care Logan Valley Store Co., Beaverdale, Pa. 8 FARMER BOY TO MANAGER Six years have passed since I, a farmer boy, enrolled with the I. C. S. At present I have an excellent position with A. Booth & Company, of Chicago, as traveling salesman and manager of the Grand' Rapids branch of the company. Were it not for the training received from you, I could not fill my position acceptably. CHARLES F. HEILMAN, Grand Rapids, Mich. RAPID ADVANCEMENT IN POSITION AND SALARY When I enrolled, I held a position as receiving clerk in the bottling department of the Minneapolis Brewing Company. I am now a cashier for the same firm and am drawing $40 a month more than when I enrolled. GEORGE KOEMPTGEN, Care Minneapolis Brewing Co., Minneapolis, Minn. PASSED CIVIL SERVICE EXAMINATION I take great pleasure in stating that my Commercial Course with you has greatly benefited me. When I enrolled, I was a bookkeeper; since then I have taken the Civil Service examination and won appointment as a railway mail clerk with the Nashville & St. Louis R. P. O. My salary is $30 a month greater than when I enrolled and I am to have an increase next year. ARTHUR H. JAMES, 105 E. Penna. St., Evansville, Ind. INSTALLS A SYSTEM AND HAS HIS SALARY DOUBLED Since enrolling with you my salary has been nearly doubled, and I am to receive another increase soon. During the last year, I installed an accounting system with special columnar books for a real estate concern and have also audited a coal and teaming company's books for them. This was outside my regular work. I cannot too strongly praise the system followed by the I. C. S. W. H. TIMMERING, 4802 Portland Ave., Louisville, Ky. CIVIL SERVICE EMPLOYE PRAISES HIS COURSE At present I am in the Civil Service, post-office department. My Course with you has been of great benefit to me, and I heartily recommend the I. C. S. to those unable to attend a college. H. M. SHEPARD, Mitchell, S. Dak. ENGINEER GOES INTO BUSINESS FOR HIMSELF When I enrolled, I was an engineer. Soon afterwards I quit engineering and went into the grocery business for myself. Although I have not yet completed my Course, I have learned to keep a set of books, and do not regret having enrolled. I have no trouble whatever understanding the lessons. J. D. SAUER, Carterville, Md. ASSISTANT BOOKKEEPER BECOMES HEAD BOOK- KEEPER It gives me pleasure to inform you that I have derived great benefit as a result of my study of your Bookkeeping and Business Forms Course. When I enrolled, I was cashier and assistant bookkeeper for Michael Ambach & Sons, of this city. I was recently appointed head bookkeeper, which position I am able to fill acceptably, thanks to my studies with you. S. W. RICHMOND, 1317 W. North Ave., Baltimore, Md. WEAVER BECOMES BOOKKEEPER When I enrolled with you, I was a broad silk weaver. I am now bookkeeper and cashier for the Schwarzschild & Sulzberger Company, with my salary more than doubled. Your Bound Volumes have been valuable to me. I would not care to part with them. HAROLD LEAH, 1031 East 19th St., Paterson, N. J. CLERK TO PRINCIPAL OF SCHOOL When I enrolled with you for a Business Course I did not even know how to study. I was at that time a clerk in a general store, getting only a small salary. I studied faith- fully in spare time and advanced to a position as head book- keeper for Ford & Company, publishers, of Toronto. At present I am owner and principal of Murrant's Business School. My earnings have increased more than 300 per cent, since I enrolled with you. R. A. MURRANT, 124 Amelia St., Toronto, Ontario, Canada TEACHER TO ASSISTANT CASHIER When I enrolled with you for Bookkeeping I was teaching school and had to study my Course in odds and ends of time. The knowledge gained from my Course was very valuable to me in a mercantile business, which I entered some time after enrolling; it is still more valuable in my present posi- tion that of assistant cashier of the People's State Bank of this place. F. B. KNOFF, Madison Lake, Minn. THANKS THE I. C. S. FOR HIS SUCCESS The advantages gained from my Business Course with you have been many. Since taking the Course, I have been given full charge of the books of the N. A. Daniels' Dry Goods and Clothing Stores, as well as of the company's real estate, mortgage, and bond business. I am also able to handle success- fully the books of the city treasury of Eaton Rapids, having been elected in 1906. My success has been so great that at the death of N. A. Daniels, I was appointed administrator 10 of the $100,000 estate. I have charge of the store, hotel, nine dwelling houses, and a good deal of personal property. My progress has been owing largely to the knowledge gained from my Course with you. C. D. KNAPP, Eaton Rapids, Mich. SALARY INCREASED $20 A MONTH My studies with you have helped me in every way. When I enrolled, I was clerking in a store here. I am now a book- keeper and have increased my earnings $20 a month. G. S. JOHNSON, Ivydale, W. Va. LABORER TO FOREMAN When I enrolled for a Business Course, I was a common laborer in a saw mill. Having acquired the study habit, I was able to advance to a position as foreman and to add $35 a month to my salary. The knowledge of arithmetic gained from my Course was worth far more than the Course cost me. OLAF P. JENSON, Fernie, British Columbia, Canada OFFICE BOY TO BOOKKEEPER I cannot say too much in favor of your excellent Course. The instruction is so arranged as to be easily understood, and cannot fail to give to the student a thorough and prac- tical knowledge of the subject he is studying. Before enrolling with you, I was strongly advised by different persons not to take a course by mail. Happening to meet a couple of your enthusiastic students, however, I was so fortunate as to enroll. As a result I have been able to advance from a position as office boy to a position as book- keeper and have, of course, won a substantial increase in salary. ALLEN L. BRICKENDEN, 191 Logan Ave., Toronto, Ontario, Canada LABORER TO MANAGER When I enrolled for my Course with you, I was employed as a common laborer. Thanks to my studies, I have advanced to a position as manager and have increased my earnings more than 100 per cent. Naturally I do not regret having taken a Course with the I. C. S. S. F. IVEY, Benson, N. C. LABORER BECOMES TIMEKEEPER At the time I enrolled, I was a day laborer for the Anaconda Copper Mining Company. Owing to the knowledge gained from my Course I have become timekeeper for the same concern and have increased my earnings $50 a month. I am very thankful to the I. C. S. for the benefits derived from my Course. J. H. HOLMES, Care Anaconda Copper Mining Company, Rocker, Mont. 11 How Home Study Increases Earnings and Opportunities for Advancement Whether you wish to secure promotion and greater earn- ings in your present work or wish to change to a more con- genial occupation, the International Correspondence Schools offer a practical solution of the problem. In the modern business and industrial world, other things being equal, the man who is preferred is the man who knows. Employers are too busy to turn offices and shops into schoolrooms. And while a man can learn a great deal through slow and laborious experience, if he depends on experience alone he is likely to be outstripped by those who avail themselves of well-arranged, well-illustrated, easily understood Courses that give the student the benefit of the knowledge and experience of experts. It is possible that Chance may drag a man out of a rut into a place of greater responsibility and greater pay, and that Luck may keep him there. But success is a hundred times more likely and more secure if a definite, systematic method of acquiring money-earning knowledge is followed. Then a man will be ready to take advantage of all his oppor- tunities will be able to create opportunities if they do not come fast enough. Origin and Growth of the International Correspondence Schools Thomas J. Foster, President of the International Corre- spondence Schools, introduced, in 1891, the I. C. S. method of teaching the trades and professions by mail with special home-study textbooks and a system of direction and correc- tion of students' work. Nineteen years of successful teach- ing show that this system supplies the great educational need of the world; it carries practical, money-earning knowledge to the thousands that cannot leave home nor give up work to seek it. The work of the I. C. S. is threefold: Teaching employed persons the science of their trades or professions; preparing misplaced and dissatisfied people for congenial or better- paying work; giving young, unemployed persons the training necessary to enable them to start at good salaries in chosen vocations. Nearly one hundred and fifty railroad companies inclu- ding some of the largest in the world have made arrange- ments with the Schools to instruct their employes. This is 12 one of the greatest distinctions ever conferred on any edu- cational institution; and the continuance of these arrange- ments is conclusive evidence of the practical results produced. Distinctive Features of the I. C. S. System 1. Courses of instruction for particular occupations, in which are taught only the facts, processes, and principles necessary to qualify the student for responsible positions. 2. Textbooks prepared for each Course; principles applied in examples of practical value; frequent revisions to keep pace with the latest developments and most modern methods. 3. Through examination and correction of the written work of students, and full, clear, and exact written explana- tions of all difficulties met by students. Responsibility and Permanency The Schools are owned by the International Textbook Company. This Company is incorporated, has a paid-up capital of $6,000,000. References: the commercial agencies; all bankers, city officials, clergymen, and other prominent persons of Scran ton; and I. C. S. students in all parts of the world. Three buildings have been erected in Scranton solely to carry on the I. C. S. system of teaching by mail. Two of these buildings are on Wyoming Avenue and are occupied by the business, advertising, and accounting departments; the third building, a mammoth structure on Ash Street, contains the textbook, instruction, illustrating, and publish- ing departments. The total floor space of these three build- ings is about seven acres; the cost of construction was $690,000. The Company at present employs 3,000 persons in its various departments. The amount af mail matter handled each day averages 30,000 pieces. The daily output of the printing department is 3i tons. The annual postage bill is $125,000. More than $1,500,000 has been spent in the preparation of special home-study textbooks, and $250,000 is expended annually in improving them. More than 360 Experts, Instructors, and Assistants are occupied in writing and revising the I. C. S. Textbooks and in examining and correcting the work of students. The publications of the Schools are protected by 6,500 United States and foreign copyrights. No other correspondence school has the experience, the system, nor the capital to provide such training as is afforded by the International Correspondence Schools. 13 The Correspondence Method Is instruction by mail practicable? Fifteen years ago this question was familiar one, for the correspondence method was then young. At that time it was also a proper question: it is not now. The International Textbook Company has published a book giving the names and addresses of 107,000 students that have completed the Courses of the International Correspondence Schools or sub- stantial portions of their Courses. If a new edition of this book were printed now the total would be still greater. More than 225,000 other students have completed mathe- matical and physical subjects and drawing. An I. C. S. booklet gives brief outlines of the advancement of 3,000 successful students. These thousands of successful students are not exceptional persons. They have come from all walks of life, hampered by almost every kind of difficulty. What they have done through home study, others can do.' Teaching is merely imparting information and developing thought. If instruction by mail is not practicable if the personal plan is the only good plan then the printing of newspapers is wrong; instead of writing letters we should talk to people; resident schools are at fault in using books, for all this is but teaching by the printed or the written word. Is it the sight of a teacher in a class room his flesh-and- blood presence that advances the student? Is it not rather the knowledge he imparts? In correspondence instruction, teachers write things instead of saying them. Instead of listening to oral lectures, the correspondence student has illustrated printed lectures, which he can read until he understands. It is claimed that the presence of a teacher is an inspiration, but thousands of great men acquired their education without the presence of a teacher; and if we have not enough desire for special knowledge to inspire us to study, we scarcely can hope to achieve great things, even with the constant urging of a present teacher. In schools, hours are taken up largely with recitations; the student in any case must do most of his studying at home. The plan of getting a perfect understanding of a con- templated work before undertaking to engage in it is the right way. What would we think of a person that wanted to go into court and argue cases before getting a good jnastery of the law? How would a young man be received if he went to a bank and wanted to keep the books before getting a thorough knowledge of bookkeeping ? Preparation always must come first, and the I. C. S. Courses, being written especially for the home student, afford the best means in existence by which he may prepare himself thoroughly and easily, without loss of time and at reasonable expense for the place he longs to fill. 14 Advantages of the I. C. S. System 1. You Study at Home. You do not have to leave home to secure an education; the education comes to you. 2. No Time Lost From Work. You can keep right on with your work and study during spare hours. Our Courses make spare time profitable. 3. You Study When it is Convenient. Our Schools never close. You can begin to study when you please, and take your own time. 4. We Teach Wherever the Mails Reach. You can move from place to place while studying. We have students in every country. 5. No Books to Buy. You have no textbooks to buy. We furnish all Instruction Papers, Return Envelopes, and Information Blanks. 6. Specially Prepared Instruction Papers. Our Papers have been written especially for correspondence instruction by men expert in both theory and practice. 7. Education and Experience Combined. The I. C. S. system is an ideal one for thousands because it enables one to combine education and experience by immediately using in daily work the knowledge gained through studies. 8. Complete in Every Respect. While our Courses begin at the beginning, they are complete treatises in their respec- tive lines. They are thus adapted to the needs both of men with limited educations and of those possessing knowledge of elementary subjects. 9. Cost is Slight. The prices charged are much smaller than the fees of other high-grade educational institutions. You can pay in monthly instalments. We prepay all postage on mail sent by us to students in the United States, Canada, and Mexico. Those in other countries are required to pay a percentage of such postage. All students are required to send matter to the Schools postage prepaid. 10. Instruction Private. Your instruction is conducted privately. No one but us need know that you are a student. 11. Only Spare Time Required. Your studies need not interfere with business or social engagements. This is impos- sible with night schools or other systems of class instruction. 12. Written Explanations. Our written explanations are always with you and can be reviewed oral ones cannot. 13. You Are a Class by Yourself. You get all the instruc- tion and do all the reciting, because the Instructor attends to you alone. 14. Backward Students Assisted. We take great pains with backward students; our best friends are those that required the most assistance. 15 Our Students Earn While They Learn While I wanted to take a Course of instruction, I had a family to support and feared I could not stand the cost, so I waited almost three years. At the end of that time I was in the same position and I realized that to increase my earn- ing capacity I would have to do something. So I enrolled for your Mechanical Drawing Course, completing it in about 10 months. Before I was half way through my Course I began making money through my drawings. I found that, instead of going out evenings and spending money, I could stay home and make money. Under separate cover, I send you a blueprint of the first job I undertook a large bake oven; I got $35 for the drawing, and $25 a week for over- seeing the completion of the work. Since then I have sold four of these prints and have several other persons interested in similar ovens. I am not in my own office but I gave up my old work about a year ago and expect to have my office built by the last of this month. I would not, for many thousands of dollars, be put back in the position where I first was when I heard of the International Correspondence Schools. FRANK R. GALBRAITH, Coalport, Pa. Find What the I. C. S. Can Do For Yon. If you do not find a mailing card enclosed with this Hand- book cut out coupon below and mark as directed. International Correspondence Schools, Scranton, Pa. Please explain, without further obligation on my part, how I can qual- ify for larger salary and advancement to the position before which I have marked X. Bookkeeper Stenographer Advertising Man Show-Card Writer Window Trimmer Commercial Law Illustrator Civil Service Chemist Textile-Mill Superintendent Electrician Electrical Engineer Mechanical Draftsman Telephone Engineer Electric Lighting Supt. Mechanical Engineer Surveyor Stationary Engineer Civil Engineer Building Contractor Architectural Draftsman Architect Structural Engineer Banking Mining Engineer Name_ Address.. 15 THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. n rv -fl C\ If^tOE" MAR 1 3 1935 4DEC58AB PEC'D I .0 NG\I U 'i; |1 W f W v '' YA 02528